CELEX: 52013PC0622
Language: en
Date: 2013-09-10
Title: Proposal for a DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Directive 2006/87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council

|
			
		
		
		52013PC0622
		
			Proposal for a DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Directive 2006/87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council /* COM/2013/0622 final - 2013/0302 (COD) */
			
				
		
		
			
			   	EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM
1.           CONTEXT OF THE PROPOSAL
Council Directive 82/714/EEC of 4 October 1982
laying down the technical requirements for inland waterway vessels[1] introduced harmonised conditions for issuing
technical certificates for inland waterway vessels in all Member States, albeit
excluding operations on the Rhine. Essentially, the technical requirements set
out in the annexes to Directive 82/714/EEC incorporated the provisions laid
down in the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation, in the version approved by the
Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine (CCNR) in 1982.
The conditions and technical requirements for
issuing inland navigation certificates under Article 22 of the Revised
Convention for Rhine Navigation have been revised regularly since then for most
current types of vessels and are recognised as reflecting current technological
developments. For competition and safety reasons it was desirable, specifically
in the interests of promoting harmonisation at European level, to set a framework
for such technical requirements for the whole of the EU's inland waterway
network. Therefore, Directive 2006/87/EC[2],
which has replaced Directive 82/714 EEC, ensures that Union inland navigation
certificates attesting that all types of crafts are fully compliant with the
aforementioned revised technical requirements are valid on all EU inland
waterways, including on the Rhine and that Rhine certificates are valid on all
EU inland waterways.
According to Article 3 of Directive 2006/87/EC
it is mandatory when navigating on the Rhine (zone R) it is obligatory to carry
either: 
–              
a certificate issued under Article 22 of the
Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation or 
–              
a Community inland navigation certificate issued
or renewed after 30 December 2008 and attesting to the full compliance of the
craft with the technical requirements referred to in Annex II of Directive
2006/87/EC for which equivalency with the technical requirements laid down in
application of the abovementioned Convention has been established according to
the applicable rules and procedures, without prejudice to the transitional
provisions of the section in Annex II on "Transitional and final
provisions".
However, the equivalence of the two
certificates is difficult to maintain. They are linked to two different legal
frameworks, each of which operates on a separate set of standards in accordance
with its own specific rules and procedures.
In the interest of safety and in order to achieve
a level playing field, progress towards a single, uniform set of technical
standards is needed. This would provide more legal certainty and ensure that technical
adaptations to technical progress can be introduced within a reasonable time so
as to ensure that high safety standards on all EU inland waterways are maintained
and that innovation in the sector is not hampered. 
As the two legal regimes mentioned above operate
according to their own rules and procedures, progress towards a single, uniform
set of technical standards can only be achieved gradually. As a first step, it
is important to separate the rules that refer to decision-making from those of
a more general – non EU specific – procedural or technical nature. In the
current version of the Directive, these provisions are not neatly separated,
making it difficult to devise a single technical standard applicable to both
legal regimes.
As a second step, it will be important to
establish appropriate structures that enable the EU and CCNR to develop and
maintain uniform common technical standards. Therefore, a dedicated structure
needs to be created with the necessary expertise to develop technical standards
within a context combining EU and CCNR Member States and associating other
interested international organisations. To this effect, an administrative
arrangement has been signed by the Commission services and the Secretariat
General of the CCNR on 22 May 2013 which expresses the intention of both sides to
establish a dedicated committee for this purpose under the auspices of the
CCNR. This committee will be open to experts representing EU and CCNR member
states and will also allow an adequate participation of other stakeholders. 
This committee should develop technical standards.
Once this dedicated Committee has been set up it would start its work in
developing technical standards. The present proposal allows the Commission to
take into account the technical standards developed by this dedicated Committee,
by making a reference to its standards when adapting the technical requirements
included in the directive to technical progress or to the work of international
organisations.
If, in accordance with the administrative
arrangement of 22 May 2013, the CCNR would proceed in a similar way to adapt
the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation, allowing this Regulation to refer also
to the standards of this new sui generis Committee, the administrative
procedures for the maintenance of technical standards for inland navigation
vessels would become more streamlined and full uniformity of standards would be
achieved between the legal regimes of the EU and the Rhine. 
Furthermore, there are amendments related to
the fact that Directive 2006/87/EC is being reviewed for the first time after
the entry into force of the Treaty of Lisbon; the new rules on delegated and
implementing powers needed to be introduced. 
2.           RESULTS OF CONSULTATIONS WITH THE
INTERESTED PARTIES 
On 1 March 2013, the Commission convened a
meeting with the Directors in charge of inland navigation in the Member States'
administrations and in the EEA and the Secretary Generals of the River
Commissions. Participants in the meeting generally welcomed the overall
approach to revising governance in order to streamline updates of the technical
standards for inland navigation. 
3.           LEGAL ELEMENTS OF THE PROPOSAL
In the context of Directive 2006/87/EC, the
technical requirements for inland waterway vessels are laid down in annex II.
The proposed Directive re-organises the content of the annexes so as to ensure
that these only cover aspects of a technical or a procedural nature. Aspects
referring to the decision-making mechanism are integrated into the main text of
the Directive. This concerns mainly the following provisions:
–              
Equivalences and derogations (Article 18), Adaptation
of the Annexes (Article 22), 
–              
Carrying out of technical inspections (Article
9). 
The approach taken in this proposal is to delegate
powers to the Commission in respect of adapting the annexes of this directive in
light of scientific and technical progress or of developments in this area
arising from the work of other international organisations, in particular that
of the CCNR. 
In particular, the Commission should be
empowered to adopt delegated acts for adapting the annexes, including for modifying
the models of documents set out in the annexes to this Directive and adopting or
modifying administrative instructions. 
Furthermore, to ensure uniform conditions for
the implementation of this Directive, implementing powers should be conferred
on the Commission, to authorise certain derogations to the technical
requirements for specific craft, to approve classification societies and to
approve certain additional technical requirements for certain zones that are
not linked to the navigable inland waterways of another Member State. Those powers should be exercised in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 182/2011 of the
European Parliament and of the Council of 16 February 2011 laying down the
rules and general principles concerning mechanisms for control by Member States
of the Commission's exercise of implementing powers.
4.           BUDGETARY IMPLICATION 
The Directive has no financial impact. Certain
activities linked to the Directive will be financed through other basic acts.
 
2013/0302 (COD)
Proposal for a
DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT
AND OF THE COUNCIL
laying down technical requirements for
inland waterway vessels and repealing Directive 2006/87/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE
COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the
Functioning of the European Union, and in particular Article 91(1) thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the
European Commission,
After transmission of the draft
legislative act to the national Parliaments,
Having regard to the opinion of the
European Economic and Social Committee[3],
Having regard to the opinion of the
Committee of the Regions[4],
Acting in accordance with the ordinary
legislative procedure[5],
Whereas:
(1)       Directive 2006/87/EC of
the European Parliament and of the Council[6]
establishes harmonised conditions for issuing technical certificates for inland
waterway vessels throughout the Union's inland waterway network.
(2)       The technical requirements
for vessels navigating on the Rhine river are established by the Central
Commission for Navigation on the Rhine (CCNR).
(3)       The technical requirements
set out in the annexes to Directive 2006/87/EC for the most part incorporate
the provisions laid down in the Rhine Vessels Inspection Regulations, in the
version approved in 2004 by the CCNR. The conditions and technical requirements
for issuing inland navigation certificates under Article 22 of the Revised
Convention on the Navigation on the Rhine are updated regularly and are
recognised as reflecting current technological developments.
(4)       Maintaining two different
set of rules, those for certificates issued pursuant to Article 22 of the
Revised Convention on the Navigation on the Rhine and for the Union inland
navigation certificate, does not ensure legal certainty and safety.
(5)       In order to achieve
harmonisation at Union level and to prevent distortions of competition and
varying levels of safety the same technical requirements for the whole of the Union's inland waterway network should be applied and updated regularly. 
(6)       Since the CCNR has built
up significant expertise in updating technical requirements for inland
navigation vessels, this expertise should be fully used for the inland
waterways in the Union. 
(9)       Union inland navigation
certificates attesting that craft are fully compliant with the technical
requirements should be valid on all Union inland waterways.
(10)     The conditions for the
issuing of supplementary Union inland navigation certificates by Member States
for operations on Zone 1 and 2 waterways (estuaries)and for operations on Zone
4 waterways should be harmonised more closely.
(11)     In the interests of safety,
standards should be harmonised at a high level and in such a way that there is
no reduction in safety standards on the Union inland waterways. However, Member
States should be allowed, after consulting the Commission, to establish
specific provisions concerning additional or reduced technical requirements for
certain zones provided that such measures are limited to the specific subjects set
out in Annexes III and IV.
(12)     Member States should have
the possibility to derogate from the provisions of this Directive in certain
cases related to navigable waterways not linked to the inland waterways of
other Member States or to certain craft that operate exclusively on a national
waterway.
(13)     Member States, after
authorisation by the Commission, should also be allowed to derogate from the
provisions of this Directive for specific crafts to accommodate alternative
approaches, promote innovation or to prevent unreasonable costs. 
(15)     The Union inland navigation
certificate should be issued to a craft that passes a technical inspection
carried out prior to the craft being put into service. This technical
inspection should be used to check whether the craft complies with the
technical requirements set out in this Directive. The competent authorities of
the Member States should be entitled to carry out additional inspections at any
time to verify that the craft's physical state matches the Union inland
navigation certificates.
(16)     It is appropriate, within
certain time limits and depending on the category of craft concerned, to
determine the period of validity of Union inland navigation certificates in
each specific case.
(17)     Detailed provisions concerning
the replacement, renewal, extension of validity and issuance of new Union
inland navigation certificates need to be established, within certain limits, in
order to maintain a high degree of safety in inland navigation.
(18)     The measures set out in
Directive 2009/100/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council[7] need to remain in force for
vessels not covered by this Directive.
(19)     A transitional regime should
be applied in the case of craft in service not yet carrying a Union inland
navigation certificate when they undergo a first technical inspection under the
revised technical requirements established by this Directive.
(20)     Binding administrative
instructions should be issued in order to provide detailed rules on the
application of the technical requirements in a harmonised manner.
(21)     Changes in technical
requirements need to be taken into account for reasons of safety of inland
navigation and equivalence of certificates. In order to do so, the power to
adopt acts in accordance with Article 290 of the Treaty on the Functioning of
the European Union should be delegated to the Commission to adapt the annexes
to this Directive in line with scientific and technical progress or with
developments in this area arising from the work of other international
organisations, in particular the CCNR. It is particularly important that the
Commission carries out appropriate consultations during its preparatory work,
including at expert level. The Commission, when preparing and drawing-up
delegated acts, should ensure simultaneous, timely and appropriate submission
of the relevant documents to the European Parliament and to the Council.
 (22)    In order to accommodate
alternative approaches, to promote innovation, to prevent unreasonable costs, to
provide for an efficient process for issuing certificates or to take account of
regional circumstances, implementing powers should be conferred on the
Commission as regards the authorisation of certain derogations to the technical
requirements for specific craft, to approve classification societies and to
approve additional or reduced technical requirements for vessels operating in certain
zones which are not linked to the navigable inland waterways  of another Member
State. These powers should be exercised in accordance with Regulation (EU) No
182/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council[8].
(26)     Directive 2006/87/EC should
therefore be repealed,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
Article 1
Classification of
waterways
For the purposes of this Directive, the
inland waterways of the Union shall be classified as follows:
(a)     Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4:
(i) Zones 1 and 2: the waterways listed
in Chapter 1 of Annex I;
(ii) Zone 3: the waterways listed in
Chapter 2 of Annex I;
(iii) Zone 4: the waterways listed in
Chapter 3 of Annex I.
(b)     Zone R: those of the waterways
referred to in point (a) for which certificates are to be issued in accordance
with Article 22 of the Revised Convention on the Navigation on the Rhine as
that Article is worded when this Directive enters into force.
Article 2
Definitions and scope of
application
1.           For the purposes of this
Directive, the following definitions shall apply: 
(a)         
‘craft’: means a vessel or item of floating
equipment;
(b)         
‘vessel’: means an inland waterway vessel or
sea-going ship;
(c)         
‘tug’: means a vessel specially built to perform
towing operations;
(d)         
‘pusher’: means a vessel specially built to
propel a pushed convoy;
(e)         
‘passenger vessel’: means a day trip or cabin
vessel constructed and equipped to carry more than 12 passengers;
(f)           
‘floating equipment’: means a floating
installation carrying working gear such as cranes, dredging equipment, pile
drivers or elevators;
(g)         
‘recreational craft’: means a vessel other than
a passenger vessel, intended for sport or pleasure;
(h)         
‘water displacement" : means the immersed
volume of the vessel, in m³;
(i)           
‘length (L)’: means the maximum length of the
hull in m, excluding rudder and bowsprit;
(j)           
‘breadth (B)’: means the maximum breadth of the
hull in m, measured to the outer edge of the shell plating (excluding paddle
wheels, rub rails, and similar);
(k)         
‘draught (T)’: means the vertical distance in m
between the lowest point of the hull without taking into account the keel or
other fixed attachments and the maximum draught line;
(l)           
'Classification society': means a classification
society that has been approved in accordance with the criteria and procedures referred
to in Article 9;
(m)       
‘Union inland navigation certificate’: means a
certificate issued to an inland waterway vessel by the competent authority,
signifying compliance with the technical requirements of this Directive.
2.           This Directive shall apply
to the following craft:
(a)     vessels having a length (L) of 20
metres or more;
(b)     vessels for which the product of
length (L), breadth (B) and draught (T) is a volume of 100 m3 or more.
3.           This Directive shall also
apply to the following craft:
(a)     tugs and pushers intended for towing
or pushing craft referred to in paragraph 1 or floating equipment or for moving
such craft or floating equipment alongside;
(b)     vessels intended for passenger
transport which carry more than 12 passengers in addition to the crew;
(c)     floating equipment.
4.           This Directive shall not
apply to the following craft:
(a) ferries;
(b) naval vessels;
(c) sea-going vessels, including sea-going
tugs and pusher craft, which:
         (i) operate or are based on tidal
waters;
         (ii) operate temporarily on inland
waterways, provided that they carry:
–              
a certificate proving conformity with the 1974
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), or equivalent,
a certificate proving conformity with the 1966 International Convention on Load
Lines, or equivalent, and an international oil pollution prevention (IOPP)
certificate proving conformity with the 1973 International Convention for the
Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL); or
–              
in the case of passenger vessels not covered by
all of the Conventions referred to in the first indent, a certificate on safety
rules and standards for passenger ships issued in conformity with Directive
2009/45/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 6 May 2009 on
safety rules and standards for passenger ships (Recast)[9] ; or
–              
in the case of recreational craft not covered by
all of the Conventions referred to in the first indent, a certificate of the
country of which it carries the flag.
Article 3
Obligation to carry a
certificate
1.           Craft operating on the
Union inland waterways referred to in Article 1 shall carry:
(a)     when operating on a Zone R waterway:
–              
either a certificate issued pursuant to Article
22 of the Revised Convention on the Navigation on the Rhine; or
–              
a Union inland navigation certificate attesting
full compliance of the craft, without prejudice to the transitional provisions
of Annex II, with technical requirements as referred to in Annex II for which
equivalency with the technical requirements laid down in application of the Revised
Convention on the Navigation on the Rhine has been established according to the
applicable rules and procedures;
(b)     when operating on other waterways, a
Union inland navigation certificate, including, where applicable, the
specifications referred to in Article 5.
2.           The Union inland
navigation certificate shall be drawn up following the model set out in Part I
of Annex V and shall be issued in accordance with this Directive. The Commission
shall be empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 to amend
that model if this becomes necessary in order to take account of scientific and
technical progress, to streamline administrative requirements or to take
account of developments in this area arising from the work of other
international organisations, in particular that of the CCNR.
Article 4
Supplementary Union inland
navigation certificates
1.           All craft carrying a valid
certificate issued pursuant to Article 22 of the Revised Convention on the Navigation
on the Rhine may, subject to the provisions of Article 5(5) of this Directive,
navigate on Union waterways carrying that certificate only.
2.           However, all craft
carrying the certificate referred to in paragraph 1 shall also be provided with
a supplementary Union inland navigation certificate:
(a)     when operating on Zone 3 and 4
waterways, if they wish to take advantage of the reduction in technical
requirements on those waterways;
(b)     when operating on Zone 1 and 2
waterways, or, in respect of passenger vessels, when operating on Zone 3
waterways that are not linked to the navigable inland waterways of another
Member State, if the Member State concerned has adopted additional technical
requirements for those waterways, in accordance with Article 5(1), (2) and (3).
3.           The supplementary Union inland
navigation certificate shall be drawn up following the model set out in Part II
of Annex V and shall be issued by the competent authorities on production of
the certificate referred to in paragraph 1 and under the conditions laid down
by the authorities competent for the waterways concerned. The Commission shall
be empowered to adopt delegated acts to amend that model if this becomes
necessary in order to take account of scientific and technical progress, to
streamline administrative requirements or to take account of developments in
this area arising from the work of other international organisations, in
particular that of the CCNR. 
Article 5
Additional or reduced
technical requirements for certain zones
1.           Member States may, after
consulting the Commission, and where applicable subject to the requirements of
the Revised Convention on the Navigation on the Rhine, adopt technical
requirements additional to those in Annex II for craft operating on Zone 1 and
2 waterways within their  territory.
2.           In respect of passenger
vessels operating on Zone 3 waterways within its territory that are not linked
to the navigable inland waterways of another Member State, each Member State
may maintain technical requirements additional to those in Annex II. Member States
may adopt such new additional technical requirements following the procedure
referred to in paragraph 3. The additional requirements may cover only the
elements listed in Annex III. 
3.           The Member State shall notify the Commission of the proposed additional requirements at least six months
before their envisaged date of entry into force and shall inform the other
Member States.
The Commission shall approve the additional
technical requirements by way of implementing acts adopted in accordance with
the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25 (2). 
4.           Compliance with the
additional requirements shall be specified in the Union inland navigation
certificate referred to in Article 3 or, where Article 4(2) applies, in the
supplementary Union inland navigation certificate. Such proof of compliance
shall be recognised on Union waterways of the corresponding zone.
5.           Where application of the
transitional provisions set out in chapter 24a of Annex II would result in a
reduction in existing national safety standards, a Member State may disapply
those transitional provisions in respect of inland waterway passenger vessels
operating on its inland waterways that are not linked to the navigable inland waterways
of another Member State. In such circumstances, the Member State may require that such vessels operating on its non-linked inland waterways comply fully
with the technical requirements set out in Annex II starting from 30 December
2008.
A Member State using the possibility referred
to in the first subparagraph shall inform the Commission and the other Member States of its decision and provide the Commission with details of the relevant
national standards applying to passenger vessels operating on its inland
waterways. 
Compliance with the requirements of a Member State for operating on its non-linked inland waterways shall be specified in the
Union inland navigation certificate referred to in Article 3 or, where Article
4(2) applies, in the supplementary Union inland navigation certificate.
6.           Craft operating only on
Zone 4 waterways shall qualify for the reduced requirements set out in Annex II
on all waterways in that zone. Compliance with those reduced requirements shall
be specified in the Union inland navigation certificate referred to in Article
3.
7.           Members State may, after consulting the Commission, allow a partial application of the technical
requirements or set technical requirements which are less stringent than those of
Annex II for craft operating exclusively on Zone 3 and 4 waterways within its
territory. 
The less stringent or partial application of
technical requirements may cover only the elements listed in Annex IV. Where
the technical characteristics of a craft correspond to the less stringent or
partial application of technical requirements, this shall be specified in the
Union inland navigation certificate or, where Article 4(2) applies, in the
supplementary Union inland navigation certificate.
The Member States shall notify the Commission
of the less stringent or partial application of the technical requirements of
Annex II at least six months before they come into force and shall inform the
other Member States.
Article 6
Derogations
1.           Member States may
authorise derogations from all or part of this Directive for:
(a)     vessels, tugs, pushers and floating
equipment operating on navigable waterways not linked by inland waterway to the
waterways of other Member States;
(b)     craft having a dead weight not
exceeding 350 tonnes or craft not intended for the carriage of goods and having
a water displacement of less than 100 m3, which were laid down before 1 January
1950 and operate exclusively on a national waterway.
2.           Member States may
authorise, in respect of navigation on their national waterways, derogations
from one or more provisions of this Directive for limited journeys of local
interest or in harbour areas. The derogations and the journeys or area for
which they are valid shall be specified in the craft's certificate.
3.           The Member States shall
notify the Commission the derogations authorised in accordance with paragraphs
1 and 2 and shall inform the other Member States.
4.           Any Member State which, as
a result of derogations authorised in accordance with paragraphs 1 and 2, has
no craft subject to the provisions of this Directive operating on its waterways
shall not be required to comply with Articles 8, 9 and 11.
Article 7
Issuance of Union inland
navigation certificates
1.           The Union inland
navigation certificate shall be issued to craft laid down as from [date of
transposition of this Directive] following a technical inspection carried out
prior to the craft being put into service and intended to check whether the
craft complies with the technical requirements of Annex II.
2.           The Union inland
navigation certificate shall be issued to craft excluded from the scope of
Directive 82/714/EEC, but covered by this Directive in accordance with Article
2(2) and (3), following a technical inspection which shall be carried out upon
expiry of the craft's current certificate, but in any case no later than 30
December 2018, to check whether the craft complies with the technical
requirements of Annex II. 
Any failure to meet the technical requirements of
Annex II shall be specified in the Union inland navigation certificate.
Provided that the competent authorities consider that these shortcomings do not
constitute a manifest danger, the craft referred to in the first subparagraph of
this Article may continue to operate until such time as those components or
areas of the craft which have been certified as not meeting those requirements
are replaced or altered, whereafter those components or areas shall meet the
technical requirements of Annex II.
3.           Manifest danger within the
meaning of this Article shall be presumed in particular when requirements
concerning the structural soundness of the shipbuilding, the navigation or
manoeuvrability or special features of the craft in accordance with the
technical requirements referred to Annex II are affected. Derogations as
allowed for in the technical requirements of Annex II shall not be identified
as shortcomings which constitute a manifest danger.
The replacement of existing parts with
identical parts or parts of an equivalent technology and design during routine
repairs and maintenance shall not be considered as a replacement within the
meaning of this Article.
4.           Compliance of a craft with
the additional requirements referred to in Article 5(1), (2) and (3) shall,
where appropriate, be checked during the technical inspections provided for in
paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article, or during a technical inspection carried
out at the request of the craft's owner.
Article 8
Competent authorities
1.           Union inland navigation
certificates may be issued by the competent authorities of the Member States.
2.           Each Member State shall draw up a list indicating the competent authorities for issuing the Union inland
navigation certificates and shall notify the Commission and the other Member States thereof. 
3.           Competent authorities
shall keep a register of all Union inland navigation certificates they issue in
accordance with the model set out in Annex VI. The Commission shall be
empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 to amend that
model in order to take account of scientific and technical progress, to
streamline administrative requirements or to take account of developments in
this area arising from the work of other international organisations, in
particular that of the CCNR. 
Article 9
Carrying out of technical
inspections
1.           The technical inspection
referred to in Article 7 shall be carried out by the competent authorities. Those
authorities may refrain from subjecting the craft in whole or in part to
technical inspection where it is evident from a valid attestation, issued by a
recognised classification society, that the craft satisfies in whole or in part
the technical requirements of Annex II. 
2.           The Commission shall adopt
implementing acts in order to approve a classification society which meets the
criteria listed in Annex VII, or to withdraw approval, in accordance with the
procedure provided in paragraph 3 and 4. Those implementing acts shall be
adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25 (2).

3.           An application for approval
shall be submitted to the Commission by the Member State in which the
classification society has its headquarters or a subsidiary authorised to issue
attestations that craft satisfies the requirements of Annex II in accordance with
this Directive. This application shall be accompanied with all information and
documentation needed to check that the criteria for approval are met. 
              Any Member State can demand that
a hearing takes place or that further information or documentation has to be
provided. 
4.           Any Member State can submit to the Commission a request to withdraw the approval if it considers that a classification
society no longer meets the criteria provided in Annex VII. The request for withdrawal
shall be accompanied with documentary evidence. 
5.           Until their approval under
this Directive, classification societies which are recognised and approved and
authorised by a Member State in accordance with Council Directive 94/57/EC of
22 November 1994[10]
shall be considered approved only in respect of vessels which operate
exclusively on waterways of that Member State.
6.           The Commission shall
publish and keep updated a list of the classification societies approved in
accordance with the present Article.
7.           Each Member State shall draw up a list indicating its competent authorities for carrying out technical
inspections and shall notify the Commission and the other Member States thereof. 
8.           Each Member State shall comply with the specific requirements as regards inspection bodies and the request
for an inspection provided in Annex II. 
Article 10
Validity of Union inland
navigation certificates
1.           The validity period of
Union inland navigation certificates issued to newly built vessels in
accordance with the provisions of this Directive shall be determined by the
competent authority up to a maximum of:
(a)     five years in the case of passenger
vessels;
(b)     10 years in the case of all other
craft.
The period of validity shall be entered on the
Union inland navigation certificate.
2.           In the case of vessels
already in operation before the technical inspection, the competent authority
shall set the period of validity of the Union inland navigation certificate
case by case, in the light of the results of the inspection. However, the
validity may not exceed the periods specified in paragraph 1.
3.           Each Member State may, in the cases specified in Annex II, issue provisional Union inland navigation
certificates. Provisional Union inland navigation certificates shall be drawn
up following the model set out in Part III of Annex V. The Commission shall be
empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 to amend that
model in order to take account of scientific and technical progress, to
streamline administrative requirements or to take account of developments in
this area arising from the work of other international organisations, in
particular that of the CCNR.
Article 11
Replacement of Union
inland navigation certificates
Each Member State shall lay down the
conditions under which a valid Union inland navigation certificate which has
been lost or damaged may be replaced.
Article 12
Renewal of Union inland
navigation certificates
1.           The Union inland
navigation certificate shall be renewed on expiry of its period of validity in
accordance with the conditions laid down in Article 7.
2.           For the renewal of Union inland
navigation certificates, the transitional provisions provided in chapters 24
and 24a of Annex II shall apply to the craft and under the conditions specified
therein.
Article 13
Extension of validity of
Union inland navigation certificates
The validity of a Union inland navigation
certificate may be exceptionally extended without a technical inspection in
accordance with Annex II by the authority which issued or renewed it. The extension
shall be indicated on the certificate.
Article 14
Issuance of new Union
inland navigation certificates
In the event of major alterations or
repairs which affect the structural soundness of the ship, the navigation or
manoeuvrability or special features of the craft in accordance with Annex II,
that craft shall again undergo, prior to any further voyage, the technical
inspection provided for in Article 7. Following this inspection, a new Union
inland navigation certificate stating the technical characteristics of the craft
shall be issued or the existing certificate shall be amended accordingly. If the
certificate is issued in a Member State other than that which issued or renewed
the initial certificate, the competent authority which issued or renewed the
certificate shall be informed accordingly within one month.
Article 15
Refusal to issue or renew,
and withdrawal of, Union inland navigation certificates
1.           Any decision refusing to
issue or renew a Union inland navigation certificate shall be motivated. The owner
of the craft shall be notified and shall be informed about the appeal procedure
and its time limits in the Member State concerned.
2.           Any valid Union inland
navigation certificate may be withdrawn by the competent authority which issued
or renewed it if the craft ceases to comply with the technical requirements
specified in its certificate.
Article 16
Additional inspections
1.           The competent authorities
of a Member State may check at any time whether a craft is carrying a
certificate valid under the terms of this Directive and satisfies the
requirements set out in such certificate or constitutes a manifest danger for
the persons on board, the environment or the safety of the navigation. The
competent authorities shall take the necessary measures in accordance with paragraphs
2 to 5.
2.           If the authorities find
upon such inspection that the certificate is not being carried or that the
certificate carried on the craft is invalid, or that the craft does not satisfy
the requirements set out in the certificate, but that such invalidity or
failure to satisfy the requirements does not constitute a manifest danger, the
owner of the craft or his representative shall take all necessary measures to
remedy the situation. The authority which issued the certificate or which last
renewed it shall be informed within seven days.
3.           If, upon making the
inspection, the authorities find that the craft constitutes a manifest danger for
the persons on board, the environment or the safety of the navigation, they may
prevent the craft from proceeding with its voyage until the necessary steps
have been taken to remedy the situation.
They may also prescribe measures which will
enable the craft to proceed safely, where appropriate on termination of its
transport operations, to a place where it will be either inspected or repaired.
The authority which issued or last renewed the certificate shall be informed
within seven days.
4.           A Member State which has prevented a craft from proceeding with its voyage, or has notified the owner of
its intention to do so if the defects found are not corrected, shall inform the
authority in the Member State which issued or last renewed the certificate,
within seven days, of the decision which it has taken or intends to take.
5.           Any decision to interrupt
the passage of a craft taken in the implementation of this Directive shall
state in detail the reasons on which it is based. It shall be notified without
delay to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the
appeal procedures available to him under the laws in force in the Member States
and of their time limits.
Article 17
Unique European Vessel
Identification Number
The competent authority having issued a
Union inland navigation certificate shall include in the Union inland
navigation certificate the Unique European Vessel Identification Number in
accordance with Chapter 2 of Annex II.
Article 18
Equivalences and
derogations
1.           Member States may require
the Commission to adopt implementing acts allowing derogations or recognising
the equivalence of technical specifications for a specific craft regarding:
a) the use, or presence, on board of a craft
of other materials, installations or items of equipment, or the adoption of
other design aspects or other arrangements than those included in Annex II;
b) the issuance of a Union inland navigation
certificate for trial purposes for a limited period incorporating new technical
specifications that derogate from the requirements of Part II of Annex II provided
those specifications offer equivalent safety;
c) the application, by the inspection bodies, of
derogations, on a passenger vessel, regarding the areas provided for use by
persons with reduced mobility, where the application of the specific
requirements laid down in chapter 15 of Annex II is considered difficult in
practice or incurs unreasonable costs;
d) the use of other extinguishing agents than
those referred to in chapter 10 of Annex II;
e) the use of permanently installed
firefighting systems for protecting objects;
f) the application of chapter 24 of Annex II
to a craft converted to a length of more than 110 m;
g) derogations from the requirements laid down
in chapter 24 and chapter 24a of Annex II following the expiry of the
transitional provisions, where those requirements are technically difficult to
apply or where their application might require disproportionate costs;
h) the recognition of standards concerning
systems spraying smaller quantities of water other than those referred to in
chapter 10 of Annex II.
Those implementing acts shall be adopted in
accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25 (2).
2.           The equivalences and
derogations referred to in points (a) to (g) of paragraph 1 shall be entered in
the Union inland navigation certificate by the competent authorities of the
Member States. The Commission and the other Member States shall be informed.
3.           Pending the adoption of the
implementing acts referred to in paragraph 1 point (a), the competent
authorities may issue a provisional Union inland navigation certificate in accordance
with Article 10(2). 
In that case, the competent authorities shall
within one month of the issuance of the provisional Union inland navigation
certificate report to the Commission and the other Member States the name and
the European Vessel Identification Number of the craft, the nature of the
derogation and the State in which the craft is registered or has its home port.
4.           The Commission shall
publish a register of radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators
approved in accordance with Annex II. 
Article 19
Recognition of
navigability certificates of craft from third countries
The Union shall enter into any negotiations
with third countries in order to ensure the mutual recognition of navigability
certificates between the Union and third countries. 
Pending the conclusion of such agreements,
the competent authorities of a Member State may recognise the navigability
certificates of craft from third countries for navigation on the waterways of
that Member State.
The issuance of Union inland navigation
certificates to craft from third countries shall be carried out in accordance
with Article 7(1).
Article 20
Continued applicability of
Directive 2009/100/EC
For those craft falling outside the scope
of Article 2(2) and (3) of this Directive, but falling within the scope of
Article 1(a) of Directive 2009/100/EC, the provisions of that Directive shall
apply.
Article 21
Transitional provisions
concerning the use of documents
Documents falling within the scope of this
Directive and issued by the competent authorities of the Member States under
Directive 2006/87/EC before the entry into force of this Directive remain valid
until they expire.
Article 22
Adaptation of the Annexes 
1.           The Commission shall be
empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 concerning the
adaptations of Annexes I, II, III, IV and VII to scientific and technical
progress or to developments in this area arising from the work of other
international organisations, in particular that of the CCNR to ensure that the
two certificates referred to in Article 3(1)(a) are issued on the basis of
technical requirements which guarantee an equivalent level of safety, or to
take account of the cases referred to in Article 5. 
The Commission shall be empowered to adopt
delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 concerning binding administrative
instructions as regards the detailed application of the technical requirements
provided in Annex II, in order to ensure a harmonised interpretation of those
requirements or take into account best practices developed at Union level or
derived from the work of international organisations, in particular that of the
CCNR. 
When adopting such delegated acts the
Commission shall ensure that the technical requirements that have to be fulfilled
for the issuance of the Union inland navigation certificate recognised for
navigation on the Rhine comply with a level of safety equivalent to that
required for the issuing of the certificate referred to in Article 22 of the
Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation.
2.           The Commission shall be
empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 in order to
update the references in this Directive to certain provisions of Annex II in
order to take into account the amendments brought to this Annex. 
Article 23
Temporary requirements
The Commission shall be empowered to adopt
delegated acts in accordance with Article 24 in order to provide for temporary technical
requirements for crafts to allow tests in order to incentivise innovation and
technical progress. Such requirements shall be valid for a maximum period of
three years. 
Article 24
Delegation
1.           The power to adopt
delegated acts is conferred on the Commission subject to the conditions laid
down in this Article.
2.           The delegation of power
referred to in Articles 3, 4, 8, 10, 22 and 23 is conferred on the Commission
for an indeterminate period of time from [date of entry into force of the
Directive].
3.           The European Parliament or
the Council may revoke the delegation of power referred to in Articles 3, 4, 8,
10, 22 and 23 at any time. A revocation decision of revocation shall put an end
to the delegation of the power specified in that decision. It shall take effect
the day following the publication of the decision in the Official Journal of
the European Union or at a later date specified in the decision. It shall not
affect the validity of any delegated acts already in force. 
4.           As soon as it adopts a
delegated act, the Commission shall simultaneously notify the European
Parliament and the Council. 
5.           A delegated act adopted under
Articles 3, 4, 8, 10, 22 and 23 shall enter into force only if neither the
European Parliament nor the Council objects within 2 months of the Commission
notifying them of the act. The European Parliament or the Council may extend
this period by 2 months.
Article 25
Committee procedure
1.           The Commission shall be
assisted by the Committee established by Article 7 of Council Directive
91/672/EEC (hereinafter referred to as ‘the Committee’). The Committee is a
committee within the meaning of Regulation (EU) No 182/2011.
2.           Where reference is made to
this paragraph, Article 4 of Regulation (EU) No 182/2011 shall apply. If the Committee's
opinion is to be obtained by written procedure, its chair may decide to terminate
the procedure without result within the time-limit for delivery of the opinion.
Article 26
Penalties
Member States shall lay down the rules on penalties
applicable to infringements of the national provisions adopted pursuant to this
Directive and shall take the measures necessary to ensure that they are
implemented. The penalties provided for shall be effective, proportionate and
dissuasive.
Article 27
Transposition
1.           Member States with inland
waterways referred to in Article 1 shall bring the laws, regulations and
administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive into force,
with effect from 1 January 2015. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.
When Member States adopt such
provisions, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or be accompanied
by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. Member
States shall determine how such reference is to be made.
2.            Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the
national law provisions that they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 28
Repeal
Directive 2006/87/EC is repealed with
effect from 1 January 2015.
References to the repealed Directive
shall be construed as references to this Directive.
Article 29
Entry into force
This Directive shall enter into force on
the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal
of the European Union. 
Article 30
Addressees
This Directive is addressed to the Member
States that have inland waterways referred to in Article 1.
Done at Brussels,
For the European Parliament                       For
the Council
The President                                                 The
President
LIST OF ANNEXES
Annex I List of Union inland waterways divided
geographically into Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4
Annex II Minimum technical requirements applicable to craft
on inland waterways of Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4
Annex III Subjects for possible additional technical
requirements applicable to craft on inland waterways of Zones 1 and 2
Annex IV Subjects for possible reductions of the
technical requirements applicable to craft on inland waterways of Zones 3 and 4
Annex V Model for Union inland navigation certificate
Annex VI Model for register of Union inland navigation
certificates
Annex VII Classification societies
[1]               OJ L 301,
28.10.1982, p. 1–66.
[2]               2006/87/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2006
laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing
Council Directive 82/714/EEC, OJ L 389, 30.12.2006, p. 1–260
[3]               OJ C , , p. .
[4]               OJ C , , p. .
[5]               …..
[6]               Directive 2006/87/EC of the European Parliament and
of the Council of 12 December 2006 laying down technical
requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing
Council Directive 82/714/EEC (OJ L 389, 30.12.2006, p. 1).
[7]               Directive 2009/100/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council 16
September 2009 on reciprocal recognition of navigability licences for inland
waterway vessels (OJ L 259, 2.10.2009, p. 8). 
[8]               Regulation (EU) No 182/2011 of
the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 February 2011 laying down the
rules and general principles concerning mechanisms for control by Member States
of the Commission's exercise of implementing powers (OJ
L 55, 28.2.2011, p. 13).
[9]               OJ L 163,
25.6.2009, p. 1.
[10]             Council Directive 94/57/EC of
22 November 1994 on common rules and standards for ship inspection
and survey organisations and for the relevant activities of maritime
administrations (OJ L 319, 12.12.1994. p. 20).
ANNEX
to the proposal for a
DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN
PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
laying down technical requirements
for inland waterway vessels and repealing Directive 2006/87/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council 
LIST OF ANNEXES
Annex I List of EU inland waterways divided
geographically into Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4
Annex II Minimum technical requirements
applicable to craft on inland waterways of Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4
ANNEX I
LIST OF EU INLAND WATERWAYS DIVIDED
GEOGRAPHICALLY INTO ZONES 1, 2, 3 AND 4
CHAPTER 1
Zone 1
Federal Republic of Germany
 Ems || from a line linking the former Greetsiel lighthouse and the western pier of the port entrance at Eemshaven seawards as far as latitude 53° 30' N and longitude 6° 45' E, i.e. slightly seawards of the lightering area for dry-cargo carriers in the Alte Ems[1] 
Republic of Poland
The part of Pomorska Bay southward from the
line linking NordPerd on Rugen Island and the lighthouse Niechorze.
The part of Gdańska Bay southward from
the line linking the lighthouse Hel and the entrance buoy to the port of
Baltijsk.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland
 SCOTLAND ||   
 Blue Mull Sound || Between Gutcher and Belmont 
 Yell Sound || Between Tofts Voe and Ulsta 
 Sullom Voe || Within a line from the north-east point of Gluss Island to the northern point of Calback Ness 
 Dales Voe || In winter: within a line from the north point of Kebister Ness to the Coast of Breiwick at longitude 1° 10,8' W 
 Dales Voe || In summer: as for Lerwick 
 Lerwick || In winter: within the area bounded to the northward by a line from Scottle Holm to Scarfi Taing on Bressay and to the southward by a line from Twageos Point Lighthouse to Whalpa Taing on Bressay 
 Lerwick || In summer: within the area bounded to the northward by a line from Brim Ness to the north east corner of Inner Score and to the southward by a line from the south end of Ness of Sound to Kirkabisterness 
 Kirkwall || Between Kirkwall and Rousay not east of a line between Point of Graand (Egilsay) and Galt Ness (Shapinsay) or between Head of Work (Mainland) through Helliar Holm light to the shore of Shapinsay; not north west of the south east tip of Eynhallow Island, not to seaward and a line between the shore on Rousay at 59°10,5' N 002° 57,1' W and the shore on Egilsay at 59° 10' N 002° 56,4' W 
 Stromness || To Scapa but not outside Scapa Flow 
 Scapa Flow || Within an area bounded by lines drawn from Point of Cletts on the island of Hoy to Thomson's Hill triangulation point on the island of Fara and thence to Gibraltar Pier on the island of Flotta; from St Vincent Pier on the island of Flotta to the westernmost point of Calf of Flotta; from the easternmost point of the Calf of Flotta to Needle Point on the island of South Ronaldsay and from the Ness on Mainland to Point of Oxan lighthouse on the island of Graemsay and thence to Bu Point on the island of Hoy; and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Balnakiel Bay || Between Eilean Dubh and A'Chleit 
 Cromarty Firth || Within a line from North Sutor to Nairn Breakwater and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Inverness || Within a line from North Sutor to Nairn Breakwater and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Tay — Dundee || Within a line from Broughty Castle to Tayport and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Firth of Forth and River Forth || Within a line from Kirkcaldy to River Portobello and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Solway Firth || Within a line from Southerness Point to Silloth 
 Loch Ryan || Within a line from Finnart's Point to Milleur Point and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 The Clyde || Outer limit: a line from Skipness to a position one mile south of Garroch Head thence to Farland Head Inner limit in winter: a line from Cloch Lighthouse to Dunoon Pier Inner limit in summer: a line from Bogany Point, Isle of Bute to Skelmorlie Castle and a line from Ardlamont Point to the southern extremity of Ettrick Bay inside the Kyles of Bute Note: The above inner summer limit is extended between 5 June and 5 September (both dates inclusive) by a line from a point two miles off the Ayrshire coast at Skelmorlie Castle to Tomont End, Cumbrae, and a line from Portachur Point, Cumbrae to Inner Brigurd Point, Ayrshire   
 Oban || Within an area bounded on the north by a line from Dunollie Point Light to Ard na Chruidh and to the south by a line from Rudha Seanach to Ard na Cuile 
 Kyle of Lochalsh || Through Loch Alsh to the head of Loch Duich 
 Loch Gairloch || In winter: none In summer: South of a line running east from Rubha na Moine to Eilan Horrisdale and thence to Rubha nan Eanntag 
 NORTHERN IRELAND ||   
 Belfast Lough || In winter: none In summer: within a line from Carrickfergus to Bangor and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Loch Neagh || At a greater distance than 2 miles from the shore 
 EAST COAST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Humber || In winter: within a line from New Holland to Paull In summer: within a line from Cleethorpes Pier to Patrington Church and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 WALES AND WEST COAST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Severn || In winter: within a line from Blacknore Point to Caldicot Pill, Porstkewett In summer: within a line from Barry Dock Pier to Steepholm and thence to Brean Down and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Wye || In winter: within a line from Blacknore Point to Caldicot Pill, Portskewett In summer: within a line from Barry Dock Pier to Steepholm and thence to Brean Down and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Newport || In winter: none In summer: within a line from Barry Dock Pier to Steepholm and thence to Brean Down and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Cardiff || In winter: none In summer: within a line from Barry Dock Pier to Steepholm and thence to Brean Down and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Barry || In winter: None In summer: within a line from Barry Dock Pier to Steepholm and thence to Brean Down and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Swansea || Within a line joining the seaward ends of the breakwaters 
 Menai Straits || Within the Menai Straits from a line joining Llanddwyn Island Light to Dinas Dinlleu and lines joining the south end of Puffin Island to Trwyn DuPoint and Llanfairfechan Railway Station, and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Dee || In winter: within a line from Hilbre Point to Point of Air In summer: within a line from Formby Point to Point of Air and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Mersey || In winter: None In summer: within a line from Formby Point to Point of Air and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Preston and Southport || Within a line from Southport to Blackpool inside the banks and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Fleetwood || In winter: None In summer: within a line from Rossal Point to Humphrey Head and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Lune || In winter: None In summer: within a line from Rossal Point to Humphrey Head and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Heysham || In winter: None In summer: within a line from Rossal Point to Humphrey Head 
 Morecambe || In winter: None In the summer: from within a line from Rossal Point to Humphrey Head 
 Workington || Within a line from Southerness Point to Silloth and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 SOUTH OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Colne, Colchester || In winter: within a line from Colne Point to Whitstable In summer: within a line from Clacton Pier to Reculvers 
 River Blackwater || In winter: within a line from Colne Point to Whitstable In summer: within a line from Clacton Pier to Reculvers and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Crouch and River Roach || In winter: within a line from Colne Point to Whitstable In summer: within a line from Clacton Pier to Reculvers and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Thames and its tributaries || In winter: within a line from Colne Point to Whitstable In summer: within a line from Clacton Pier to Reculvers and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Medway and the Swale || In winter: within a line from Colne Point to Whitstable In summer: within a line from Clacton Pier to Reculvers and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Chichester || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Langstone Harbour || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Portsmouth || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Bembridge, Isle of Wight || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Cowes, Isle of Wight || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Southampton || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Beaulieu River || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Keyhaven Lake || Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Weymouth || Within Portland Harbour and between the River Wey and Portland Harbour 
 Plymouth || Within a line from Cawsand to Breakwater to Staddon and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Falmouth || In winter: within a line from St Anthony Head to Rosemullion In summer: within a line from St Anthony Head to Nare Point and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Camel || Within a line from Stepper Point to Trebetherick Point and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 Bridgewater || Within the bar and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
 River Avon (Avon) || In winter: within a line from Blacknore Point to Caldicot Pill, Portskewett In summer: within a line from Barry Pier to Steepholm and thence to Brean Down and seaward of Zone 2 waters 
Zone 2
Czech Republic
Dam Lake Lipno
Federal Republic of Germany
 Ems || From a line across the Ems near the entrance to the port of Papenburg between the former Diemen pumping station and the opening of the dyke at Halte as far as a line linking the former Greetsiel lighthouse and the western pier of the port entrance at Eemshaven 
 Jade || Inside a line linking the former Schillig cross light and Langwarden church tower 
 Weser || From the north-western edge of the railway bridge in Bremen as far as a line linking Langwarden and Cappel church towers, including the Westergate, Rekumer Loch, Rechter Nebenarm and Schweiburg side branches 
 Elbe with Bütztflether Süderelbe (from km 0,69 till the mouth in the Elbe), Ruthenstrom (from km 3,75 till the mouth in the Elbe), Wischhafener Süderelbe (from km 8,03 till the mouth in the Elbe) || From the lower limit of the port of Hamburg as far as a line linking the Döse beacon and the western edge of the Friedrichskoog dyke (Dieksand), including the Nebenelbe and the Este, Lühe, Schwinge, Oste, Pinnau, Krückau and Stör tributaries (in each case from the mouth to the barrage) 
 Meldorfer Bucht || Inside a line linking the western edge of the Friedrichskoog dyke (Dieksand) and the western pier head at Büsum 
 Eider || From the mouth of the Gieselau Canal (km 22,64) to the line between the middle of the fortress (Tränke) and the churchtower of Vollerwiek 
 Gieslau Canal || From the mouth in the Eider till the the mouth in the Nord-Ostsee Canal 
 Flensburger Förde || Inside a line linking Kegnäs lighthouse and Birknack and North from the German-Danish border in the Flensburger Förde 
 Schlei || Inside a line between the Schleimünde pier heads 
 Eckernförder Bucht || Inside a line linking Boknis-Eck and the north-eastern point of the mainland near Dänisch Nienhof 
 Kieler Förde || Inside a line linking the Bülk lighthouse and the Laboe naval memorial 
 Nord-Ostsee-Kanal including Audorfer See and Schirnauer See || From a line linking the pier heads at Brunsbüttel as far as a line linking the entry lights at Kiel-Holtenau, including Obereidersee and Enge, Audorfer See, Borgstedter See and Enge, Schirnauer See, Flemhuder See and the Achterwehrer Canal 
 Trave || from the north-western edge of the railway lift bridge in Lübeck with the Pötenitzer Wiek, and the Dassower See as far as a line linking the southern inner and northern outer pier heads at Travemünde 
 Leda || From the entrance of the outer harbour of Leer sea lock to the mouth in the Eems 
 Hunte || from the port of Oldenburg and from 140 m downstream of the Amalienbrücke in Oldenburg to the mouth in the Weser 
 Lesum || From the confluence of the Hamme and Wümme (km 0,00) to the mouth in the Weser 
 Este || From the tail water of Buxtehude lock (km 0,25) to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Lühe || From the tail water of the Au-Mühle in Horneburg (km 0,00) to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Schwinge || From the north edge of the Salztor lock in Stade to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Oste || From 210 m above the middleline of the traffic bridge over the Oste barrage (km 69,360) to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Pinnau || From the south-western edge of the railway bridge in Pinneberg to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Krückau || From the south-western edge of the bridge leading to/from the Wedenkamp in Elmshorn to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Stör || From Rensing tide gauge to the mouth in the Elbe 
 Freiburger Hafenpriel || From the eastern edge of the sluice in Freiburg an der Elbe as far as the mouth in the Elbe 
 Wismarbucht, Kirchsee, Breitling, Salzhaff and Wismar port area || Seawards as far as a line between Hoher Wieschendorf Huk and Timmendorf light and a line linking Gollwitz light on the island of Poel and the southern point of the Wustrow peninsula 
 Warnow, including the Breitling and side branches || Downstream of the Mühlendamm from the northern edge of the Geinitzbrücke in Rostock towards the sea as far as a line linking the northern points of the western and eastern piers in Warnemünde 
 Waters enclosed by the mainland and the Darß and Zingst pensinsulas and the islands of Hiddensee and Rügen (including Stralsund port area) || Extending seawards between –                         the Zingst peninsula and the island of Bock: as far as latitude 54° 26' 42' N –                         the islands of Bock and Hiddensee: as far as a line linking the northern point of the island of Bock and the southern point of the island of Hiddensee –                         the island of Hiddensee and the island of Rügen (Bug): as far as a line linking the south-eastern point of Neubessin and Buger Haken 
 Kleine Jasmunder Bodden ||   
 Greifswalder Bodden || Bodden seawards as far as a line from the eastern point of Thiessower Haken (Südperd) to the eastern point of the island of Ruden and continuing to the northern point of the island of Usedom (54° 10' 37' N, 13° 47' 51' E) 
 Ryck || East from the Steinbecker bridge in Greifswald to the linking line over the heads of the jetties 
 Waters enclosed by the mainland and the island of Usedom (the Peenestrom, including Wolgast port area and Achterwasser, and the Oder Haff) || Eastwards as far as the border with the Republic of Poland in the Stettiner Haff 
 Uecker || From the south-west edge of the traffic bridge in the Uekermünde to the linking line over he heads of the jetties 
Note In the
case of vessels whose home port is in another State, account is to be taken of
Article 32 of the Ems-Dollart Treaty of 8 April 1960 (BGBl. 1963 II, p. 602).
French Republic
the Gironde from kilometre point (KP 48,50)
to the downstream part of the point of the Ile de Patiras, to the transversal
limit of the sea defined by the line joining the Pointe de Grave to the Pointe
de Suzac;
the Loire from Cordemais (KP 25) to the
transversal limit of the sea defined by the line joining the Pointe de Mindin
to the Pointe de Penhoët;
the Seine from the start of the Tancarville
Canal to the transversal limit of the sea defined by the line from Cape Hode,
on the right bank, to the point, on the left bank, where the planned dyke meets
the coast below Berville;
the Vilaine from the Arzal Dam to the
transversal limit of the sea defined by the line joining the Pointe du Scal to
the Pointe du Moustoir; 
Lake Geneva.
Republic of Hungary
Lake Balaton
Kingdom of the Netherlands
Dollard
Eems
Waddenzee: including the links with the
North Sea
IJsselmeer: including the Markermeer and
IJmeer but excluding the Gouwzee
Nieuwe Waterweg and the Scheur
Calland Kanaal west from the Benelux
harbour
Hollands Diep
Breeddiep, Beerkanaal and its connected
harbours
Haringvliet and Vuile Gat: including the
waterways between Goeree-Overflakkee on the one hand and Voorne-Putten and
Hoeksche Waard on the other
Hellegat
Volkerak
Krammer
Grevelingenmeer and Brouwerschavensche Gat:
including all the waterways between Schouwen-Duiveland and Goeree-Overflakkee
Keten, Mastgat, Zijpe, Krabbenkreek,
Eastern Scheldt and Roompot: including the waterways between Walcheren,
Noord-Beveland and Zuid-Beveland on the one hand and Schouwen-Duiveland and
Tholen on the other hand, excluding the Scheldt-Rhine Canal
Scheldt and Western Scheldt and its mouth
on the sea: including the waterways between Zeeland Flanders, on the one hand,
and Walcheren and Zuid-Beveland, on the other, excluding the Scheldt-Rhine
Canal
Republic of Poland
Lagoon of Szczecin
Lagoon of Kamień
Lagoon of Wisła
Bay of Puck
Włocławski Reservoir
Lake Śniardwy
Lake Niegocin
Lake Mamry
United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland
 SCOTLAND ||   
 Scapa Flow || Within an area bounded by lines drawn from Wharth on the island of Flotta to the Martello Tower on South Walls, and from Point Cletts on the island of Hoy to Thomson's Hill triangulation point on the island of Fara and thence to Gibraltar Pier on the island of Flotta 
 Kyle of Durness || South of Eilean Dubh 
 Cromarty Firth || Within a line between North Sutor and South Sutor 
 Inverness || Within a line from Fort George to Chanonry Point 
 Findhorn Bay || Within the spit 
 Aberdeen || Within a line from South Jetty to Abercromby Jetty 
 Montrose Basin || To the west of a line running north-south across the harbour entrance at Scurdie Ness Lighthouse 
 River Tay — Dundee || Within a line from the tidal basin (fish dock), Dundee to Craig Head, East Newport 
 Firth of Forth and River Forth || Within the Firth of Forth but not east of the Forth railway bridge 
 Dumfries || Within a line from Airds Point to Scar Point 
 Loch Ryan || Within a line from Cairn Point to Kircolm Point 
 Ayr Harbour || Inside the Bar 
 The Clyde || Above Zone 1 waters 
 Kyles of Bute || Between Colintraive and Rhubodach 
 Campbeltown Harbour || Within a line from Macringan's Point to Ottercharach Point 
 Loch Etive || Within Loch Etive above the Falls of Lora 
 Loch Leven || Above the bridge at Ballachulish 
 Loch Linnhe || North of Corran Point light 
 Loch Eil || The whole loch 
 Caledonian Canal || Lochs Lochy, Oich and Ness 
 Kyle of Lochalsh || Within Kyle Akin not westward of Eilean Ban Light or eastward of Eileanan Dubha 
 Loch Carron || Between Stromemore and Strome Ferry 
 Loch Broom, Ullapool || Within a line from Ullapool Point Light to Aultnaharrie 
 Kylesku || Across Loch Cairnbawn in the area between the easternmost point of Garbh Eilean and the westernmost point of Eilean na Rainich 
 Stornoway Harbour || Within a line from Arnish Point to Sandwick Bay Lighthouse, north-west side 
 The Sound of Scalpay || Not east of Berry Cove (Scalpay) and not west of Croc a Loin (Harris) 
 North Harbour, Scalpay and Tarbert Harbour || Within one mile from the shore of the Island of Harris 
 Loch Awe || The whole loch 
 Loch Katrine || The whole loch 
 Loch Lomond || The whole loch 
 Loch Tay || The whole loch 
 Loch Loyal || The whole loch 
 Loch Hope || The whole loch 
 Loch Shin || The whole loch 
 Loch Assynt || The whole loch 
 Loch Glascarnoch || The whole loch 
 Loch Fannich || The whole loch 
 Loch Maree || The whole loch 
 Loch Gairloch || The whole loch 
 Loch Monar || The whole loch 
 Loch Mullardach || The whole loch 
 Loch Cluanie || The whole loch 
 Loch Loyne || The whole loch 
 Loch Garry || The whole loch 
 Loch Quoich || The whole loch 
 Loch Arkaig || The whole loch 
 Loch Morar || The whole loch 
 Loch Shiel || The whole loch 
 Loch Earn || The whole loch 
 Loch Rannoch || The whole loch 
 Loch Tummel || The whole loch 
 Loch Ericht || The whole loch 
 Loch Fionn || The whole loch 
 Loch Glass || The whole loch 
 Loch Rimsdale/nan Clar || The whole loch 
 NORTHERN IRELAND ||   
 Strangford Lough || Within a line from Cloghy Point to Dogtail Point 
 Belfast Lough || Within a line from Holywood to Macedon Point 
 Larne || Within a line from Larne Pier to the ferry pier on Island Magee 
 River Bann || From the seaward ends of the breakwaters to Toome Bridge 
 Lough Erne || Upper and Lower Lough Erne 
 Lough Neagh || Within two miles of the shore 
 EAST COAST OF ENGLAND ||   
 Berwick || Within the breakwaters 
 Warkworth || Within the breakwaters 
 Blyth || Within the Outer Pier Heads 
 River Tyne || Dunston Staithes to Tyne Pier Heads 
 River Wear || Fatfield to Sunderland Pier Heads 
 Seaham || Within the breakwaters 
 Hartlepool || Within a line from Middleton Jetty to Old Pier Head Within a line joining North Pier Head to South Pier Head 
 River Tees || Within a line extending due west from Government Jetty to Tees Barrage 
 Whitby || Within Whitby Pier Heads 
 River Humber || Within a line from North Ferriby to South Ferriby 
 Grimsby Dock || Within a line from the West Pier of the Tidal Basin to the East Pier of the Fish Docks, North Quay 
 Boston || Inside the New Cut 
 Dutch River || The whole canal 
 River Hull || Beverley Beck to River Humber 
 Kielder Water || The whole lake 
 River Ouse || Below Naburn Lock 
 River Trent || Below Cromwell Lock 
 River Wharfe || From the junction with River Ouse to Tadcaster Bridge 
 Scarborough || Within Scarborough Pier Heads 
 WALES AND WEST COAST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Severn || North of a line running due west from Sharpness Point (51° 43,4' N) to Llanthony and Maisemore Weirs and seaward of Zone 3 waters 
 River Wye || At Chepstow, north of latitude (51° 38,0' N) to Monmouth 
 Newport || North of the overhead power cables crossing at Fifoots Points 
 Cardiff || Within a line from South Jetty to Penarth Head and the enclosed waters to the west of Cardiff Bay Barrage 
 Barry || Within a line joining the seaward ends of the breakwaters 
 Port Talbot || Within a line joining the seaward ends of the breakwaters on the River Afran outside enclosed docks 
 Neath || Within a line running due North from the seaward end of Baglan Bay Tanker Jetty (51° 37,2' N, 3° 50,5' W) 
 Llanelli and Burry Port || Within an area bounded by a line drawn from Burry Port Western Pier to Whiteford Point 
 Milford Haven || Within a line from South Hook Point to Thorn Point 
 Fishguard || Within a line joining the seaward ends of the north and east breakwaters 
 Cardigan || Within the Narrows at Pen-Yr-Ergyd 
 Aberystwyth || Within the seaward ends of the breakwaters 
 Aberdyfi || Within a line from Aberdyfi Railway Station to Twyni Bach Beacon 
 Barmouth || Within a line from Barmouth Railway Station to Penrhyn Point 
 Portmadoc || Within a line from Harlech Point to Graig Ddu 
 Holyhead || Within an area bounded by the main breakwater and a line drawn from the head of the breakwater to Brynglas Point, Towyn Bay 
 Menai Straits || Within the Menai Straits between a line joining Aber Menai Point to Belan Point and a line joining Beaumaris Pier to Pen-y-Coed Point 
 Conway || Within a line from Mussel Hill to Tremlyd Point 
 Llandudno || Within the breakwater 
 Rhyl || Within the breakwater 
 River Dee || Above Connah's Quay to Barrelwell Hill water extraction point 
 River Mersey || Within a line between the Rock Lighthouse and the North West Seaforth Dockbut excluding other docks 
 Preston and Southport || Within a line from Lytham to Southport and within Preston Docks 
 Fleetwood || Within a line from Low Light to Knott 
 River Lune || Within a line from Sunderland Point to Chapel Hill up to and including Glasson Dock 
 Barrow || Within a line joining Haws Point, Isle of Walney to Roa Island Slipway 
 Whitehaven || Within the breakwater 
 Workington || Within the breakwater 
 Maryport || Within the breakwater 
 Carlisle || Within a line joining Point Carlisle to Torduff 
 Coniston Water || The whole lake 
 Derwentwater || The whole lake 
 Ullswater || The whole lake 
 Windermere || The whole lake 
 SOUTH OF ENGLAND ||   
 Blakeney and Morston Harbour and approaches || To the east of a line running south from Blakeney Point to the entrance of the Stiffkey River 
 River Orwell and River Stour || River Orwell within a line from Blackmanshead breakwater to Landguard Point and seaward of Zone 3 waters 
 River Blackwater || All waterways within a line from the south-western extremity of Mersea Island to Sales Point 
 River Crouch and River Roach || River Crouch within a line from Holliwell Point to Foulness Point, including the River Roach 
 River Thames and its tributaries || River Thames above a line drawn north/south through the eastern extremity of Denton Wharf Pier, Gravesend to Teddington Lock 
 River Medway and the Swale || River Medway from a line drawn from Garrison Point to the Grain Tower, to Allington Lock; and the Swale from Whitstable to the Medway 
 River Stour (Kent) || River Stour above the mouth to the landing at Flagstaff Reach 
 Dover Harbour || Within lines drawn across the east and west entrances to the Harbour 
 River Rother || River Rother above the Tidal Signal Station at Camber to Scots Float Sluice and to the entrance lock on the River Brede 
 River Adur and Southwick Canal || Within a line drawn across Shoreham Harbour entrance to Southwick Canal Lock and to the west end of Tarmac Wharf 
 River Arun || River Arun above Littlehampton Pier to Littlehampton Marina 
 River Ouse (Sussex) Newhaven || River Ouse from a line drawn across Newhaven Harbour entrance piers to the north end of North Quay 
 Brighton || Brighton Marina outer harbour within a line from the southern end of West Quay to the north end of South Quay 
 Chichester || Within a line drawn between Eastoke point and the church spire, West Wittering and seaward of Zone 3 waters 
 Langstone Harbour || Within a line drawn between Eastney Point and Gunner Point 
 Portsmouth || Within a line drawn across the harbour entrance from Port Blockhouse to the Round Tower 
 Bembridge, Isle of Wight || Within Brading Harbour 
 Cowes, Isle of Wight || The River Medina within a line from the Breakwater Light on the east bank to the House Light on the west bank 
 Southampton || Within a line from Calshot Castle to Hook Beacon 
 Beaulieu River || Within Beaulieu River not eastward of a north/south line through Inchmery House 
 Keyhaven Lake || Within a line drawn due north from Hurst Point Low Light to Keyhaven Marshes 
 Christchurch || The Run 
 Poole || Within the line of the Chain Ferry between Sandbanks and South Haven Point 
 Exeter || Within an east-west line from Warren Point to the Inshore Lifeboat Station opposite Checkstone Ledge 
 Teignmouth || Within the harbour 
 River Dart || Within a line from Kettle Point to Battery Point 
 River Salcombe || Within a line from Splat Point to Limebury Point 
 Plymouth || Within a line from Mount Batten Pier to Raveness Point through Drake's Islands; the River Yealm within a line from Warren Point to Misery Point 
 Fowey || Inside the Harbour 
 Falmouth || Within a line from St. Anthony Head to Pendennis Point 
 River Camel || Within a line from Gun Point to Brea Hill 
 Rivers Taw and Torridge || Within a line bearing 200° from the lighthouse on Crow Point to the shore at Skern Point 
 Bridgewater || South of a line running due East from Stert Point (51° 13,0 'N) 
 River Avon (Avon) || Within a line from Avonmouth Pier to Wharf Point, to Netham Dam 
CHAPTER 2
Zone 3
Kingdom of Belgium
Maritime Scheldt (downstream of Antwerp
open anchorage)
Republic of Bulgaria
Danube: from rkm 845,650 to rkm 374,100
Czech Republic
Labe: from the lock Ústí nad
Labem-Střekov to the lock Lovosice
Dam Lakes: Baška, Brněnská
(Kníničky), Horka (Stráž pod Ralskem), Hracholusky, Jesenice, Nechranice,
Olešná, Orlík, Pastviny, Plumov, Rozkoš, Seč, Skalka, Slapy,
Těrlicko, Žermanice
Lake Máchovo
Water Area Velké Žernoseky
Ponds: Oleksovice, Svět, Velké
Dářko
Mining Gravel Lakes: Dolní Benešov,
Ostrožná Nová Ves a Tovačov
Federal Republic of Germany
 Danube || From Kelheim (km 2414,72) to the German-Austrian border at Jochenstein 
 Rhine with Lampertheimer Altrhein (from km 4,75 to the Rijn), Altrhein Stockstadt-Erfelden (from km 9,80 to the Rijn) || From the German-Swiss border to the German-Netherlands border 
 Elbe (Norderelbe) including Süderelbe en Köhlbrand || From the mouth of the Elbe-Seiten canal to the lower limit of the port of Hamburg 
 Müritz ||   
French Republic
the Adour from the Bec du Gave to the sea;
the Aulne from the lock at Châteaulin to
the transversal limit of the sea defined by the Passage de Rosnoën;
the Blavet from Pontivy to the Pont du
Bonhomme; 
the Calais Canal;
the Charente from the bridge at
Tonnay-Charente to the transverse limit of the sea defined by the line passing
through the centre of the downstream light on the left bank and through the
centre of the Fort de la Pointe;
the Dordogne from the confluence with the
Lidoire to the Bec d'Ambès;
the Garonne from the bridge at Castet en
Dorthe to the Bec d'Ambès;
the Gironde from the Bec d'Ambès to the
transversal line at KP 48,50 and passing through the downstream point of the
Ile de Patiras;
the Hérault from the port of Bessan to the
sea, as far as the upper limit of the tidal foreshore;
the Isle from the confluence with the
Dronne to the confluence with the Dordogne;
the Loire from the confluence with the
Maine to Cordemais (KP 25);
the Marne from the bridge at Bonneuil (KP
169bis900) and the lock at St Maur to the confluence with the Seine;
the Rhine
the Nive from the Haïtze dam at Ustaritz to
the confluence with the Adour; 
the Oise from Janville lock to the
confluence with the Seine; 
the Orb from Sérignan to the sea, as far as
the upper limit of the tidal foreshore;
the Rhône from the frontier with
Switzerland to the sea, with the exception of the Petit Rhône;
the Saône from the Pont de Bourgogne bridge
at Chalon‑sur‑Saône to the confluence with the Rhône;
the Seine from the lock at Nogent‑sur‑Seine
to the start of the Tancarville Canal;
the Sèvre Niortaise from the lock at Marans
at the transverse limit of the sea opposite the guardhouse to the mouth;
the Somme from the downstream side of the Pont
de la Portelette bridge at Abbeville to the viaduct of the Noyelles to
Saint-Valéry-sur-Somme railway;
the Vilaine from Redon (KP 89,345) to the
Arzal Dam;
Lake Amance;
Lake Annecy;
Lake Biscarosse;
Lake Bourget;
Lake Carcans;
Lake Cazaux;
Lake Der-Chantecoq;
Lake Guerlédan;
Lake Hourtin;
Lake Lacanau;
Lake Orient;
Lake Pareloup;
Lake Parentis;
Lake Sanguinet;
Lake Serre-Ponçon;
Lake Temple.
Republic of Hungary
Danube: from rkm 1812 to rkm 1433
Danube Moson: from rkm 14 to rkm 0
Danube Szentendre: from rkm 32 to rkm 0
Danube Ráckeve: from rkm 58 to rkm 0
River Tisza: from rkm 685 to rkm 160
River Dráva: from rkm 198 to rkm 70
River Bodrog: from rkm 51 to rkm 0
River Kettős-Körös: from rkm 23 to rkm
0
River Hármas-Körös: from rkm 91 to rkm 0
Channel Sió: from rkm 23 to rkm 0
Lake Velence
Lake Fertő
Kingdom of the Netherlands
Rhine
Sneekermeer, Koevordermeer, Heegermeer,
Fluessen, Slotermeer, Tjeukemeer, Beulakkerwijde, Belterwijde, Ramsdiep,
Ketelmeer, Zwartemeer, Veluwemeer, Eemmeer, Alkmaardermeer, Gouwzee, Buiten IJ
afgesloten IJ Noordzeekanaal, port of IJmuiden, Rotterdam port area, Nieuwe
Maas, Noord, Oude Maas, Beneden Merwede, Nieuwe Merwede, Dordsche Kil, Boven
Merwede, Waal, Bijlandsch Canal, Boven Rijn, Pannersdensch Canal, Geldersche
IJssel, Neder Rijn, Lek, Amsterdam-Rhine-Canal, Veerse Meer,
Schelde-Rhine-Canal as far as the mouth in the Volkerak, Amer, Bergsche Maas,
the Meuse below Venlo, Gooimeer, Europort, Calandkanaal (east from the Benelux
harbour), Hartelkanaal
Republic of Austria
Danube: from the border with Germany to the
border with Slovakia
Inn: from the mouth to the Passau-Ingling
Power Station
Traun: from the mouth to km 1,80
Enns: from the mouth to km 2,70
March: to km 6,00
Republic of Poland
— River Biebrza from the estuary of the Augustowski
Channel to the estuary of the river Narwia
— River Brda from the link with the
Bydgoski Channel in Bydgoszcz to the estuary of the river Wisła
— River Bug from the estuary of the river
Muchawiec to the estuary of the river Narwia
— Lake Dąbie to the frontier with
internal sea waters
— The Augustowski Channel from the link
with the river Biebrza to the State border, together with the lakes located
along the route of this Channel
— The Bartnicki Channel from Lake Ruda Woda
to Lake Bartężek, together with Lake Bartężek
— The Bydgoski Channel
— The Elbląski Channel from Lake
Druzno to Lake Jeziorak and Lake Szeląg Wielki, together with these lakes
and the lakes on the route of the Channel, and a byway in the direction of
Zalewo from Lake Jeziorak to Lake Ewingi, inclusive
— The Gliwicki Channel together with the
Channel Kędzierzyński
— The Jagielloński Channel from the
link with the river Elbląg to the river Nogat
— The Łączański Channel
— The Ślesiński Channel with the
lakes located along the route of this Channel and Lake Gopło
— The Żerański Channel
— River Martwa Wisła from the river
Wisła in Przegalina to the frontier with internal sea waters
— River Narew from the estuary of the river
Biebrza to the estuary of the river Wisła, together with Lake
Zegrzyński
— River Nogat from the river Wisła to
the estuary of the Lagoon of Wisła
— River Noteć (upper) from Lake
Gopło to the link with the Górnonotecki Channel and the Górnonotecki
Channel and River Noteć (lower) from the link of the Bydgoski Channel to
the estuary to River Warta
— River Nysa Łużycka from Gubin
to the estuary to River Odra
— River Odra from the town of Racibórz to
the link with River Eastern Odra which turns into River Regalica from the
Klucz-Ustowo Piercing, together with that river and its side-branches to Lake
Dąbie as well as a byway of River Odra from the Opatowice lock to the lock
in Wrocław city
— River Western Odra from a weir in
Widuchowa (704,1 km of River Odra) to a border with internal sea waters,
together with side-branches as well as the Klucz-Ustowo Piercing linking River
Eastern Odra with River Western Odra
— River Parnica and the Parnicki Piercing
from River Western Odra to a border with internal sea waters
— River Pisa from Lake Roś to the
estuary of River Narew
— River Szkarpawa from River Wisła to
the estuary of the Lagoon of Wisła
— River Warta from the Ślesińskie
Lake to the estuary of River Odra
— System of Wielkie Jeziora Mazurskie
encompassing the lakes linked by the rivers and channels constituting a main
route from Lake Roś (inclusive) in Pisz to the Węgorzewski Channel
(including that channel) in Węgorzewo, together with Lakes Seksty,
Mikołajskie, Tałty, Tałtowisko, Kotek, Szymon, Szymoneckie,
Jagodne, Boczne, Tajty, Kisajno, Dargin, Łabap, Kirsajty and
Święcajty, together with the Giżycki Channel and the
Niegociński Channel and the Piękna Góra Channel, and a byway of Lake
Ryńskie (inclusive) in Ryn to Lake Nidzkie (up to 3 km, constituting a
border with the ‘Lake Nidzkie’ nature reserve), together with lakes
Bełdany, Guzianka Mała and Guzianka Wielka
— River Wisła from the estuary of
River Przemsza to the link with the Łączański Channel as well as
from the estuary of that Channel in Skawina to the estuary of River Wisła
to the Bay of Gdańsk, excluding the Włocławski Reservoir
Romania
Danube: from the Serbian–Romanian border
(km 1075) to the Black Sea on the Sulina Channel-branch
Danube–Black Sea Canal (64,410 km length):
from the junction with the Danube river, at km 299,300 of the Danube at
Cernavodă (respectively km 64,410 of the Canal), to the Port of Constanta
South–Agigea (km ‘0’ of the Canal)
Poarta Albă–Midia Năvodari Canal
(34,600 km length): from the junction with the Danube–Black Sea Canal at km
29,410 at Poarta Albă (respectively km 27,500 of the Canal) to the Port of
Midia (km ‘0’ of the Canal)
Slovak Republic
Danube: from Devín (rkm 1880,26) to the
Slovak-Hungarian border
United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland
 SCOTLAND ||   
 Leith (Edinburgh) || Within the breakwaters 
 Glasgow || Strathclyde Loch 
 Crinan Canal || Crinan to Ardrishaig 
 Caledonian Canal || The canal sections 
 NORTHERN IRELAND ||   
 River Lagan || Lagan Weir to Stranmillis 
 EAST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Wear (non-tidal) || Old Railway Bridge, Durham to Prebends Bridge, Durham 
 River Tees || Upriver from Tees Barrage 
 Grimsby Dock || Inside of the locks 
 Immingham Dock || Inside of the locks 
 Hull Docks || Inside of the locks 
 Boston Dock || Inside the lock gates 
 Aire and Calder Navigation || Goole Docks to Leeds; junction with Leeds and Liverpool Canal; Bank Dole Junction to Selby (River Ouse Lock); Castleford Junction to Wakefield (Falling Lock) 
 River Ancholme || Ferriby Sluice to Brigg 
 Calder and Hebble Canal || Wakefield (Falling Lock) to Broadcut Top Lock 
 River Foss || From (Blue Bridge) junction with River Ouse to Monk Bridge 
 Fossdyke Canal || Junction with River Trent to Brayford Pool 
 Goole Dock || Inside the lock gates 
 Hornsea Mere || The whole canal 
 River Hull || From Struncheon Hill Lock to Beverley Beck 
 Market Weighton Canal || River Humber Lock to Sod Houses Lock 
 New Junction Canal || The whole canal 
 River Ouse || From Naburn Lock to Nun Monkton 
 Sheffield and South Yorkshire Canal || Keadby Lock to Tinsley Lock 
 River Trent || Cromwell Lock to Shardlow 
 River Witham || Boston Sluice to Brayford Poole (Lincoln) 
 WALES AND WEST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Severn || Above Llanthony and Maisemore Weirs 
 River Wye || Above Monmouth 
 Cardiff || Roath Park Lake 
 Port Talbot || Within the enclosed docks 
 Swansea || Within the enclosed docks 
 River Dee || Above Barrelwell Hill water extraction point 
 River Mersey || The docks (excluding Seaforth Dock) 
 River Lune || Above Glasson Dock 
 River Avon (Midland) || Tewkesbury Lock to Evesham 
 Gloucester || Gloucester City Docks Gloucester/Sharpness Canal 
 Hollingworth Lake || The whole lake 
 Manchester Ship Canal || The whole canal and Salford Docks including River Irwell 
 Pickmere Lake || The whole lake 
 River Tawe || Between Sea Barrage/Marina and the Morfa Athletics Stadium 
 Rudyard Lake || The whole lake 
 River Weaver || Below Northwich 
 SOUTH OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Nene || Wisbech Cut and River Nene to Dog-in-a-Doublet Lock 
 River Great Ouse || Kings Lynn Cut and River Great Ouse below West Lynn Road Bridge 
 Yarmouth || River Yare Estuary from a line drawn across the ends of the north and south entrance piers, including Breydon Water 
 Lowestoft || Lowestoft Harbour below Mutford Lock to a line drawn across the outer harbour entrance piers 
 Rivers Alde and Ore || Above the entrance to the River Ore to Westrow Point 
 River Deben || Above the entrance of the River Deben to Felixstowe Ferry 
 River Orwell and River Stour || From a line drawn from Fagbury Point to Shotley Point on the River Orwell to Ipswich Dock; and from a line drawn north/south through Erwarton Ness on the River Stour to Manningtree 
 Chelmer & Blackwater Canal || Eastward of Beeleigh Lock 
 River Thames and its tributaries || River Thames above Teddington Lock to Oxford 
 River Adur and Southwick Canal || River Adur above the west end of Tarmac Wharf, and within Southwick Canal 
 River Arun || River Arun above Littlehampton Marina 
 River Ouse (Sussex), Newhaven || River Ouse above the north end of North Quay 
 Bewl Water || The whole lake 
 Grafham Water || The whole lake 
 Rutland Water || The whole lake 
 Thorpe Park Lake || The whole lake 
 Chichester || East of a line joining Cobnor Point and Chalkdock Point 
 Christchurch || Within Christchurch Harbour excluding the Run 
 Exeter Canal || The whole canal 
 River Avon (Avon) || Bristol City Docks Netham Dam to Pulteney Weir 
CHAPTER 3
Zone 4
Kingdom of Belgium
The entire Belgian network except the
waterways in Zone 3
Czech Republic
All other waterways not listed in Zones 1,
2 and 3
Federal Republic of Germany
All inland waterways other than those in
Zones 1, 2 and 3
French Republic
All other inland waterways.
Italian Republic
All navigable national waterways.
Republic of Lithuania
The entire Lithuanian network
Grand Duchy of Luxembourg
Moselle
Republic of Hungary
All other waterways not listed in Zones 2
and 3
Kingdom of the Netherlands
All other rivers, canals and inland seas
not listed in Zones 1, 2 and 3
Republic of Austria
Thaya: up to Bernhardsthal
March: above km 6,00
Republic of Poland
All other waterways not listed in Zones 1,
2 and 3
Romania
All other waterways not listed in Zone 3
Slovak Republic
All other waterways not listed in Zone 3
United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland
 SCOTLAND ||   
 Ratho and Linlithgow Union Canal || The whole canal 
 Glasgow || Forth and Clyde Canal Monkland Canal, Faskine and Drumpellier sections Hogganfield Loch 
 EAST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Ancholme || Brigg to Harram Hill Lock 
 Calder and Hebble Canal || Broadcut Top Lock to Sowerby Bridge 
 Chesterfield Canal || West Stockwith to Worksop 
 Cromford Canal || The whole canal 
 River Derwent || From junction with River Ouse to Stamford Bridge 
 Driffield Navigation || From Struncheon Hill Lock to Great Driffield 
 Erewash Canal || Trent Lock to Langley Mill Lock 
 Huddersfield Canal || Junction with Calder and Hebble at Coopers Bridge to Huddersfield Narrow Canal at Huddersfield Between Ashton-Under-Lyne and Huddersfield 
 Leeds and Liverpool Canal || From Leeds River Lock to Skipton Wharf 
 Light Water Valley Lake || The whole lake 
 The Mere, Scarborough || The whole lake 
 River Ouse || Above Nun Monkton Pool 
 Pocklington Canal || From the junction with River Derwent to Melbourne Basin 
 Sheffield and South Yorkshire Canal || Tinsley Lock to Sheffield 
 River Soar || Trent Junction to Loughborough 
 Trent and Mersey Canal || Shardlow to Dellow Lane Lock 
 River Ure and Ripon Canal || From Junction with River Ouse to Ripon Canal (Ripon Basin) 
 Ashton Canal || The whole canal 
 WALES AND WEST OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Avon (Midland) || Above Evesham 
 Birmingham Canal Navigation || The whole canal 
 Birmingham and Fazeley Canal || The whole canal 
 Coventry Canal || The whole canal 
 Grand Union Canal (from Napton Junction to Birmingham and Fazeley) || The whole section of the canal 
 Kennet and Avon Canal (Bath to Newbury) || The whole section of the canal 
 Lancaster Canal || The whole canal 
 Leeds and Liverpool Canal || The whole canal 
 Llangollen Canal || The whole canal 
 Caldon Canal || The whole canal 
 Peak Forest Canal || The whole canal 
 Macclesfield Canal || The whole canal 
 Monmouthshire and Brecon Canal || The whole canal 
 Montgomery Canal || The whole canal 
 Rochdale Canal || The whole canal 
 Swansea Canal || The whole canal 
 Neath & Tennant Canal || The whole canal 
 Shropshire Union Canal || The whole canal 
 Staffordshire and Worcester Canal || The whole canal 
 Stratford-upon-Avon Canal || The whole canal 
 River Trent || The whole river 
 Trent and Mersey Canal || The whole canal 
 River Weaver || Above Northwich 
 Worcester and Birmingham Canal || The whole canal 
 SOUTH OF ENGLAND ||   
 River Nene || Above Dog-in-a-Doublet Lock 
 River Great Ouse || Kings Lynn above West Lynn Road Bridge; River Great Ouse and all connected Fenland Waterways including the River Cam and Middle Level Navigation 
 The Norfolk and Suffolk Broads || All navigable tidal and non-tidal rivers, broads, canals and waterways within the Norfolk and Suffolk Broads including Oulton Broad, and Rivers Waveney, Yare, Bure, Ant and Thurne except as specified for Yarmouth and Lowestoft 
 River Blyth || River Blyth, entrance to Blythburgh 
 Rivers Alde and Ore || On the River Alde above Westrow Point 
 River Deben || River Deben above Felixstowe Ferry 
 River Orwell and River Stour || All waterways on the River Stour above Manningtree 
 Chelmer & Blackwater Canal || Westward of Beeleigh Lock 
 River Thames and its tributaries || River Stort and River Lee above Bow Creek; Grand Union Canal above Brentford Lock and Regents Canal above Limehouse Basin and all canals connected therewith; River Wey above Thames Lock; Kennet and Avon Canal; River Thames above Oxford; Oxford Canal 
 River Medway and the Swale || River Medway above Allington Lock 
 River Stour (Kent) || River Stour above the landing at Flagstaff Reach 
 Dover Harbour || The whole harbour 
 River Rother || River Rother and the Royal Military Canal above Scots Float Sluice and River Brede above the entrance lock 
 Brighton || Brighton Marina inner harbour above the lock 
 Wickstead Park Lake || The whole lake 
 Kennet and Avon Canal || The whole canal 
 Grand Union Canal || The whole canal 
 River Avon (Avon) || Above Pulteney Weir 
 Bridgewater Canal || The whole canal 
ANNEX II
MINIMUM TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO CRAFT ON INLAND WATERWAYS OF ZONES 1, 2, 3 AND 4
CONTENTS PART
I
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
Article 1.01 — Definitions 
CHAPTER 2
PROCEDURE
Article 2.01 — Inspection bodies
Article 2.02 — Request for an inspection
Article 2.03 — Presentation of the craft for
inspection
Article 2.04 — (Left void)
Article 2.05 — Provisional Union inland
navigation certificate
Article 2.06 — (Left void)
Article 2.07 — Particulars in and amendments to
the Union inland navigation certificate
Article 2.08 — (Left void)
Article 2.09 — Periodical inspection
Article 2.10 — Voluntary inspection
Article 2.11 — (Left void)
Article 2.12 — (Left void)
Article 2.13 — (Left void)
Article 2.14 — (Left void)
Article 2.15 — Expenses
Article 2.16 — Information
Article 2.17 — Register of Union inland
navigation certificates
Article 2.18 — Unique European Vessel
Identification Number
Article 2.19 — (Left void)
Article 2.20 — Notifications
PART II
CHAPTER 3
SHIPBUILDING REQUIREMENTS
Article 3.01 — Basic requirements
Article 3.02 — Strength and stability
Article 3.03 — Hull
Article 3.04 — Engine and boiler rooms, bunkers
CHAPTER 4
SAFETY CLEARANCE, FREEBOARD AND DRAUGHT MARKS
Article 4.01 — Safety clearance
Article 4.02 — Freeboard
Article 4.03 — Minimum freeboard
Article 4.04 — Draught marks
Article 4.05 — Maximum loaded draught of
vessels whose holds are not always closed so as to be spray-proof and
weathertight
Article 4.06 — Draught scales
CHAPTER 5
MANOEUVRABILITY
Article 5.01 — General
Article 5.02 — Navigation tests
Article 5.03 — Test area
Article 5.04 — Degree of loading of vessels and
convoys during navigation tests
Article 5.05 — Use of on-board facilities for
navigation test
Article 5.06 — Prescribed (forward) speed
Article 5.07 — Stopping capacity
Article 5.08 — Capacity for going astern
Article 5.09 — Capacity for taking evasive
action
Article 5.10 — Turning capacity
CHAPTER 6
STEERING SYSTEM
Article 6.01 — General requirements
Article 6.02 — Steering apparatus drive unit
Article 6.03 — Hydraulic steering apparatus
drive unit
Article 6.04 — Power source
Article 6.05 — Manual drive
Article 6.06 — Rudder-propeller, water-jet,
cycloidal-propeller and bow-thruster systems
Article 6.07 — Indicators and monitoring
devices
Article 6.08 — Rate-of-turn regulators
Article 6.09 — Acceptance and periodical
inspections
CHAPTER 7
WHEELHOUSE
Article 7.01 — General
Article 7.02 — Unobstructed view
Article 7.03 — General requirements concerning
control, indicating and monitoring equipment
Article 7.04 — Specific requirements concerning
control, indicating and monitoring equipment of main engines and steering
system
Article 7.05 — Navigation lights, light signals
and sound signals
Article 7.06 — Radar installations and
rate-of-turn indicators
Article 7.07 — Radio telephony systems for
vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person
Article 7.08 — Internal communication
facilities on board
Article 7.09 — Alarm system
Article 7.10 — Heating and ventilation
Article 7.11 — Stern-anchor operating equipment
Article 7.12 — Retractable wheelhouses
Article 7.13 — Entry in the Union inland
navigation certificate for vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar
navigation by one person
CHAPTER 8
ENGINE DESIGN
Article 8.01 — General
Article 8.02 — Safety equipment
Article 8.03 — Power plant
Article 8.04 — Engine exhaust system
Article 8.05 — Fuel tanks, pipes and
accessories
Article 8.06 — Storage of lubricating oil,
pipes and accessories
Article 8.07 — Storage of oils used in power
transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes
and accessories
Article 8.08 — Bilge pumping and drainage
systems
Article 8.09 — Oily water and used oil stores
Article 8.10 — Noise emitted by vessels
CHAPTER 8a
EMISSIONS OF GASEOUS AND PARTICULATE POLLUTANTS
FROM DIESEL ENGINES
Article 8a.01 — Definitions
Article 8a.02 — General provisions
Article 8a.03 — Recognised type-approvals
Article 8a.04 — Installation test and
intermediate and special test
Article 8a.05 — Technical services
CHAPTER 9
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Article 9.01 — General
Article 9.02 — Electricity supply systems
Article 9.03 — Protection against physical
contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water
Article 9.04 — Protection from explosion
Article 9.05 — Earthing
Article 9.06 — Maximum permissible voltages
Article 9.07 — Distribution systems
Article 9.08 — Connection to shore or other
external networks
Article 9.09 — Power supply to other craft
Article 9.10 — Generators and motors
Article 9.11 — Accumulators
Article 9.12 — Switchgear installations
Article 9.13 — Emergency circuit breakers
Article 9.14 — Installation fittings
Article 9.15 — Cables
Article 9.16 — Lighting installations
Article 9.17 — Navigation lights
Article 9.18 — (Left void)
Article 9.19 — Alarm and safety systems for
mechanical equipment
Article 9.20 — Electronic equipment
Article 9.21 — Electromagnetic compatibility
CHAPTER 10
EQUIPMENT
Article 10.01 — Anchor equipment
Article 10.02 — Other equipment
Article 10.03 — Portable fire extinguishers
Article 10.03a — Permanently installed
firefighting systems for protecting accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and
passenger spaces
Article 10.03b — Permanently installed
firefighting systems for protecting engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms
Article 10.03c — (left void)
Article 10.04 — Ship's boats
Article 10.05 — Lifebuoys and lifejackets
CHAPTER 11
SAFETY
AT WORK STATIONS
Article 11.01 — General
Article 11.02 — Protection against falling
Article 11.03 — Dimensions of working spaces
Article 11.04 — Side
decks
Article 11.05 — Access
to working spaces
Article 11.06 — Exits
and emergency exits
Article 11.07 —
Ladders, steps and similar devices
Article 11.08 —
Interior spaces
Article 11.09 —
Protection against noise and vibration
Article 11.10 — Hatch
covers
Article 11.11 —
Winches
Article 11.12 — Cranes
Article 11.13 —
Storing flammable liquids
CHAPTER 12
ACCOMMODATION
Article 12.01 —
General
Article 12.02 —
Special design requirements for accommodation
Article 12.03 —
Sanitary installations
Article 12.04 —
Galleys
Article 12.05 —
Potable water
Article 12.06 —
Heating and ventilation
Article 12.07 — Other
accommodation installations
CHAPTER 13
FUEL-FIRED HEATING,
COOKING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
Article 13.01 —
General
Article 13.02 — Use of
liquid fuels, oil-fired equipment
Article 13.03 —
Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil burner heating appliances
Article 13.04 —
Vaporising oil burner stoves
Article 13.05 —
Atomising oil burner heating appliances
Article 13.06 —
Forced-air heating appliances
Article 13.07 — Solid
fuel heating
CHAPTER 14
LIQUEFIED GAS
INSTALLATIONS FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES
Article 14.01 — General
Article 14.02 —
Installations
Article 14.03 —
Receptacles
Article 14.04 —
Location and arrangement of supply units
Article 14.05 — Spare
and empty receptacles
Article 14.06 —
Pressure regulators
Article 14.07 —
Pressure
Article 14.08 — Piping
and flexible tubes
Article 14.09 —
Distribution system
Article 14.10 —
Gas-consuming appliances and their installation
Article 14.11 —
Ventilation and evacuation of combustion gases
Article 14.12 —
Operating and safety requirements
Article 14.13 —
Acceptance test
Article 14.14 — Test
conditions
Article 14.15 —
Attestation
CHAPTER 14a
On‑board sewage treatment
plants for passenger vessels
Article 14a.01 – Definitions
Article 14a.02 – General
provisions
Article 14a.03 - Application for
type approval
Article 14a.04 - Type
approval procedure
Article 14a.05 -
Amendment of type approvals
Article 14a.06 -
Conformity
Article 14a.07 –
Acceptance of equivalent approvals
Article 14a.08 -
Checking of serial numbers
Article 14a.09 -
Conformity of production
Article 14a.10 -
Non-conformity with the type‑approved on-board sewage treatment       plant
type
Article 14a.11 -
Random sample measurement / Special test
Article 14a.12 -
Competent authorities and technical services
CHAPTER 15
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO PASSENGER VESSELS
Article 15.01 —
General provisions
Article 15.02 —
Vessels' hulls
Article 15.03 —
Stability
Article 15.04 — Safety
clearance and freeboard
Article 15.05 —
Maximum permitted number of passengers
Article 15.06 —
Passenger rooms and areas
Article 15.07 —
Propulsion system
Article 15.08 — Safety
devices and equipment
Article 15.09 —
Life-saving equipment
Article 15.10 —
Electrical Equipment
Article 15.11 — Fire
protection
Article 15.12 —
Fire-fighting
Article 15.13 — Safety
organisation
Article 15.14 — Waste
water collection and disposal facilities
Article 15.15 —
Derogations for certain passenger vessels
CHAPTER 15a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR PASSENGER SAILING VESSELS
Article 15a.01 —
Application of Part II
Article 15a.02 —
Exceptions for certain passenger sailing vessels
Article 15a.03 —
Stability requirements for vessels under sail
Article 15a.04 —
Shipbuilding and mechanical requirements
Article 15a.05 —
Rigging in general
Article 15a.06 — Masts
and spars in general
Article 15a.07 —
Special provisions for masts
Article 15a.08 —
Special provisions for topmasts
Article 15a.09 —
Special provisions for bowsprits
Article 15a.10 —
Special provisions for jib-booms
Article 15a.11 —
Special provisions for main booms
Article 15a.12 —
Special provisions for gaffs
Article 15a.13 —
General provisions for standing and running rigging
Article 15a.14 —
Special provisions for standing rigging
Article 15a.15 —
Special provisions for running rigging
Article 15a.16 —
Fittings and parts of the rigging
Article 15a.17 — Sails
Article 15a.18 —
Equipment
Article 15a.19 —
Testing
CHAPTER 16
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO CRAFT INTENDED TO FORM PART OF A PUSHED OR TOWED CONVOY OR OF A
SIDE-BY-SIDE FORMATION
Article 16.01 — Craft
suitable for pushing
Article 16.02 — Craft
suitable for being pushed
Article 16.03 — Craft
suitable for propelling side-by-side formations
Article 16.04 — Craft
suitable for being propelled in convoys
Article 16.05 — Craft
suitable for towing
Article 16.06 —
Navigation tests on convoys
Article 16.07 —
Entries on the Union inland navigation certificate
CHAPTER 17
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO FLOATING EQUIPMENT
Article 17.01 —
General
Article 17.02 —
Derogations
Article 17.03 —
Additional requirements
Article 17.04 —
Residual safety clearance
Article 17.05 — Residual
freeboard
Article 17.06 —
Heeling test
Article 17.07 —
Confirmation of stability
Article 17.08 —
Confirmation of stability in the case of reduced residual freeboard
Article 17.09 —
Draught marks and draught scales
Article 17.10 —
Floating equipment without confirmation of stability
CHAPTER 18
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO WORKSITE CRAFT
Article 18.01 —
Operating conditions
Article 18.02 —
Application of Part II
Article 18.03 —
Derogations
Article 18.04 — Safety
clearance and freeboard
Article 18.05 — Ship's
boats
CHAPTER 19
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO HISTORIC VESSELS (Left void)
CHAPTER 19a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO CANAL BARGES (Left void)
CHAPTER 19b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO VESSELS NAVIGATING ON ZONE 4 WATERWAYS
Article 19b.01 —
Application of Chapter 4
CHAPTER 20
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO SEA-GOING VESSELS (Left void)
CHAPTER 21
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO RECREATIONAL CRAFT
Article 21.01 —
General
Article 21.02 —
Application of Part II
Article 21.03 — (Left
void)
CHAPTER 22
STABILITY OF VESSELS
CARRYING CONTAINERS
Article 22.01 —
General
Article 22.02 — Limit
conditions and method of calculation for confirmation of stability for the
transport of non-secured containers
Article 22.03 — Limit
conditions and method of calculation for confirmation of stability for the
transport of secured containers
Article 22.04 —
Procedure for assessing stability on board
CHAPTER 22a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO CRAFT LONGER THAN 110 M
Article 22a.01 — Application
of Part I
Article 22a.02 —
Application of Part II
Article 22a.03 —
Strength
Article 22a.04 —
Buoyancy and stability
Article 22a.05 —
Additional requirements
Article 22a.06 — (left
void)
CHAPTER 22b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE TO HIGH-SPEED VESSELS
Article 22b.01 —
General
Article 22b.02 —
Application of Part I
Article 22b.03 —
Application of Part II
Article 22b.04 — Seats
and safety belts
Article 22b.05 —
Freeboard
Article 22b.06 —
Buoyancy, stability and subdivision
Article 22b.07 —
Wheelhouse
Article 22b.08 —
Additional equipment
Article 22b.09 —
Closed areas
Article 22b.10 — Exits
and escape routes
Article 22b.11 — Fire
protection and fire-fighting
Article 22b.12 —
Transitional provisions
PART III
CHAPTER 23
EQUIPMENT OF VESSELS
WITH REGARD TO MANNING
Article 23.01 — (Left
void)
Article 23.02 — (Left
void)
Article 23.03 — (Left
void)
Article 23.04 — (Left
void)
Article 23.05 — (Left
void)
Article 23.06 — (Left
void)
Article 23.07 — (Left
void)
Article 23.08 — (Left
void)
Article 23.09 —
Vessels' equipment
Article 23.10 — (Left
void)
Article 23.11 — (Left
void)
Article 23.12 — (Left
void)
Article 23.13 — (Left
void)
Article 23.14 — (Left
void)
Article 23.15 — (Left
void)
PART IV
CHAPTER 24
TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL
PROVISIONS
Article 24.01 —
Applicability of transitional provisions to craft which are already in service
Article 24.02 —
Derogations for craft which are already in service
Article 24.03 —
Derogations for craft which were laid down on or before 1 April 1976
Article 24.04 — Other
derogations
Article 24.05 — (Left
void)
Article 24.06 —
Derogations for craft not covered by Article 24.01
Article 24.07 — (Left
void)
Article 24.08 — Transitional
provision applicable to Article 2.18
CHAPTER 24a
TRANSITIONAL
PROVISIONS FOR CRAFT NOT NAVIGATING ON ZONE R WATERWAYS
Article 24a.01 —
Application of transitional provisions to craft already in service and validity
of previous Union inland navigation certificates
Article 24a.02 —
Derogations for craft already in service
Article 24a.03 — Derogations
for craft which were laid down before 1 January 1985
Article 24a.04 — (Left
void)
Article 24a.05 — Transitional
provision applicable to Article 2.18
APPENDIX I — SAFETY SIGNS
APPENDIX II — ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTIONS
APPENDIX III — MODEL OF THE UNIQUE EUROPEAN
VESSEL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
APPENDIX IV — Data for the Identification of a Vessel
APPENDIX V — ENGINE PARAMETER PROTOCOL
APPENDIX VI - ON-BOARD SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS
- SUPPLEMENTARY PROVISIONS AND CERTIFICATE MODELS
APPENDIX VII - ON-BOARD SEWAGE
TREATMENT PLANTS - TEST PROCEDURE
APPENDIX VIII — Requirements applicable to signal lights,
radar installations and rate-of-turn indicators
PART I
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
Article 1.01
Definitions
For the purposes of this Annex, the
following definitions shall apply 
Types of craft
1.      ‘craft’: a vessel or item of floating
equipment;
2.      ‘vessel’: an inland waterway vessel or
sea-going ship;
3.      ‘inland waterway vessel’: a vessel
intended solely or mainly for navigation on inland waterways;
4.      ‘sea-going ship’: a vessel certificated
for sea-going service;
5.      ‘motor vessel’: a motor cargo vessel or a
motor tanker;
6.      ‘motor tanker’: a vessel intended for
the carriage of goods in fixed tanks and built to navigate independently under
its own motive power;
7.      ‘motor cargo vessel’: a vessel, other
than a motor tanker, intended for the carriage of goods and built to navigate
independently under its own motive power;
8.      ‘canal barge’: an inland waterway
vessel not exceeding 38,5 m in length and 5,05 m in breadth and usually
operating on the Rhine-Rhône Canal;
9.      ‘tug’: a vessel specially built to
perform towing operations;
10.    ‘pusher’: a vessel specially built to
propel a pushed convoy;
11.    ‘barge’: a dumb barge or tank barge;
12.    ‘tank barge’: a vessel intended for the
carriage of goods in fixed tanks and built to be towed, either having no motive
power of its own or having only sufficient motive power to perform restricted
manoeuvres;
13.    ‘dumb barge’: a vessel, other than a
tank barge, intended for the carriage of goods and built to be towed, either
having no motive power of its own or having only sufficient motive power to
perform restricted manoeuvres;
14.    ‘lighter’: a tank lighter, cargo
lighter or ship-borne lighter;
15.    ‘tank lighter’: a vessel intended for
the carriage of goods in fixed tanks, built or specially modified to be pushed,
either having no motive power of its own or having only sufficient motive power
to perform restricted manoeuvres when not part of a pushed convoy;
16.    ‘cargo lighter’: a vessel, other than a
tank lighter, intended for the carriage of goods and built or specially
modified to be pushed, either having no motive power of its own or having only
sufficient motive power to perform restricted manoeuvres when not part of a
pushed convoy;
17.    ‘ship-borne lighter’: a lighter built
to be carried aboard sea-going ships and to navigate on inland waterways;
18.    ‘passenger vessel’: a day trip or cabin
vessel constructed and equipped to carry more than 12 passengers;
19.    ‘passenger sailing vessel’: a passenger
vessel built and fitted out also with a view to propulsion under sail;
20.    ‘day-trip vessel’: a passenger vessel
without overnight passenger cabins;
21.    ‘cabin vessel’: a passenger vessel with
overnight passenger cabins;
22.    ‘high-speed vessel’: a motorised craft
capable of reaching speeds over 40 km/h in relation to water;
23.    ‘floating equipment’: a floating
installation carrying working gear such as cranes, dredging equipment, pile
drivers or elevators;
24.    ‘worksite craft’: a vessel,
appropriately built and equipped for use at worksites, such as a reclamation
barge, hopper or pontoon barge, pontoon or stone-dumping vessel;
25.    ‘recreational craft’: a vessel other
than a passenger vessel, intended for sport or pleasure;
26.    ‘ship's boat’: a boat for use in transport,
rescue, salvage and work duties;
27.    ‘floating establishment’: any floating
installation not normally intended to be moved, such as a swimming bath, dock,
jetty or boathouse;
28.    ‘floating objec’: a raft or other
structure, object or assembly capable of navigation, not being a vessel or
floating equipment or establishment;
Assemblies of craft
29.    ‘convoy’: a rigid or towed convoy of
craft;
30.    ‘formation’: the manner in which a
convoy is assembled;
31.    ‘rigid convoy’: a pushed convoy or
side-by-side formation;
32.    ‘pushed convoy’: a rigid assembly of
craft of which at least one is positioned in front of the craft providing the
power for propelling the convoy, known as the ‘pusher(s)’; a convoy composed of
a pusher and a pushed craft coupled so as to permit guided articulation is also
considered as rigid;
33.    ‘side-by-side formation’: an assembly
of craft coupled rigidly side by side, none of which is positioned in front of
the craft propelling the assembly;
34.    ‘towed convoy’: an assembly of one or more
craft, floating establishments or floating objects towed by one or more
self-propelled craft forming part of the convoy;
Particular areas on board
35.    ‘main engine room’: space where the
propulsion engines are installed;
36.    ‘engine room’: space where combustion
engines are installed;
37.    ‘boiler room’: a space housing a
fuel-operated installation designed to produce steam or heat a thermal fluid;
38.    ‘enclosed superstructure’: a
watertight, rigid, continuous structure with rigid walls joined to the deck in
a permanent and watertight manner;
39.    ‘wheelhouse’: the area which houses all
the control and monitoring instruments necessary for manoeuvring the vessel;
40.    ‘accommodation’: a space intended for
the use of persons normally living on board, including galleys, storage space
for provisions, toilets and washing facilities, laundry facilities, ante-rooms
and passageways, but not the wheelhouse;
41.    ‘passenger area’: areas on board
intended for passengers and enclosed areas such as lounges, offices, shops,
hairdressing salons, drying rooms, laundries, saunas, toilets, washrooms,
passageways, connecting passages and stairs not encapsulated by walls;
42.    ‘control centre’: a wheelhouse, an area
which contains an emergency electrical power plant or parts thereof or an area
with a centre permanently occupied by on-board personnel or crew members, such
as for fire alarm equipment, remote controls of doors or fire dampers;
43.    ‘stairwell’: the well of an internal
staircase or of a lift;
44.    ‘lounge’: a room of an accommodation or
a passenger area. On board passenger vessels, galleys are not regarded as
lounges;
45.    ‘galley’: a room with a stove or a
similar cooking appliance;
46.    ‘store room’: a room for the storage of
flammable liquids or a room with an area of over 4 m2 for storing supplies;
47.    ‘hold’: part of the vessel, bounded
fore and aft by bulkheads, opened or closed by means of hatch covers, intended
for the carriage of goods, whether packaged or in bulk, or for housing tanks
not forming part of the hull;
48.    ‘fixed tank’: a tank joined to the
vessel, the walls of the tank consisting either of the hull itself or of a
casing separate from the hull;
49.    ‘working station’: an area where
members of the crew carry out their duties, including gangway, derrick and
ship's boat;
50.    ‘passageway’: an area intended for the
normal movement of persons and goods;
51.    ‘safe area’: the area which is
externally bounded by a vertical surface running at a distance of 1/5 BWL
parallel to the course of the hull in the line of maximum draught;
52.‘muster areas’: areas of the vessel which
are specially protected and in which persons muster in the event of danger;
53.    ‘evacuation areas’: part of muster
areas of the vessel from which evacuation of persons can be carried out;
Marine engineering terms
54.    ‘plane of maximum draught’: the water
plane corresponding to the maximum draught at which the craft is authorised to
navigate;
55.    ‘safety clearance’: the distance
between the plane of maximum draught and the parallel plane passing through the
lowest point above which the craft is no longer deemed to be watertight;
56.    ‘residual safety clearance’: the
vertical clearance available, in the event of the vessel heeling over, between
the water level and the lowest point of the immersed side, beyond which the
vessel is no longer regarded as watertight;
57.    ‘freeboard (f)’: the distance between
the plane of maximum draught and a parallel plane passing through the lowest
point of the gunwale or, in the absence of a gunwale, the lowest point of the
upper edge of the ship's side;
58.    ‘residual freeboard’: the vertical
clearance available, in the event of the vessel heeling over, between the water
level and the upper surface of the deck at the lowest point of the immersed
side or, if there is no deck, the lowest point of the upper surface of the
fixed ship's side;
59.    ‘margin line’: an imaginary line drawn
on the side plating not less than 10 cm below the bulkhead deck and not less
than 10 cm below the lowest non-watertight point of the side plating. If there
is no bulkhead deck, a line drawn not less than 10 cm below the lowest line up
to which the outer plating is watertight shall be used;
60.    ‘water displacement (Ñ)" : the
immersed volume of the vessel, in m³;
61.    ‘displacement (Δ)’: the total weight
of the vessel, inclusive of cargo, in t;
62.    ‘block coefficient (CB)’: the ratio
between the water displacement and the product of length LWL, breadth BWL and
draught T;
63.    ‘lateral plane above water (AV)’:
lateral plane of the vessel above the waterline in m2;
64.    ‘bulkhead deck’: the deck to which the
required watertight bulkheads are taken and from which the freeboard is
measured;
65.    ‘bulkhead’: a wall of a given height,
usually vertical, partitioning the vessel and bounded by the bottom of the vessel,
the plating or other bulkheads;
66.    ‘transverse bulkhead’: a bulkhead
extending from one side of the vessel to the other;
67.    ‘wall’: a dividing surface, usually
vertical;
68.    ‘partition wall’: a non-watertight
wall;
69.    ‘length (L)’: the maximum length of the
hull in m, excluding rudder and bowsprit;
70.    ‘length overall (LOA)’: the maximum
length of the craft in m, including all fixed installations such as parts of
the steering system or power plant, mechanical or similar devices;
71.    ‘length of waterline (LWL)’: the length
of the hull in m, measured at the maximum draught;
72.    ‘breadth (B)’: the maximum breadth of
the hull in m, measured to the outer edge of the shell plating (excluding
paddle wheels, rub rails, and similar);
73.    ‘breadth overall (BOA)’: the maximum
breadth of the craft in m, including all fixed equipment such as paddle wheels,
rub rails, mechanical devices and the like;
74.    ‘breadth of waterline (BWL)’: breadth
of the hull in m, measured from the outside of the side plating at the maximum
draught line;
75.    ‘height (H)’: the shortest vertical
distance in m between the lowest point of the hull or the keel and the lowest
point of the deck on the side of the vessel;
76.    ‘draught (T)’: the vertical distance in
m between the lowest point of the hull without taking into account the keel or
other fixed attachments and the maximum draught line;
76a.   ‘draught overall (TOA)’: the vertical
distance in m between the lowest point of the hull including the keel or other
fixed attachments and the maximum draught line; 
77.    ‘forward perpendicular’: the vertical
line at the forward point of the intersection of the hull with the maximum
draught line;
78.    ‘clear width of side deck’: the
distance between the vertical line passing through the most prominent part of
the hatch coaming on the side deck side and the vertical line passing through
the inside edge of the slip guard (guard-rail, foot rail) on the outer side of
the side deck;
Steering system
79.    ‘steering system’: all the equipment
necessary for steering the vessel, such as to ensure the manoeuvrability laid
down in Chapter 5;
80.    ‘rudder’: the rudder or rudders, with
shaft, including the rudder quadrant and the components connecting with the
steering apparatus;
81.    ‘steering apparatus’: the part of the steering
system which produces the movement of the rudder;
82.    ‘drive unit’: the steering-apparatus
drive, between the power source and the steering apparatus;
83.    ‘power source’: the power supply to the
steering drive unit and the steering apparatus produced by an on-board network,
batteries or an internal combustion engine;
84.    ‘steering control’: the component parts
of and circuitry for the operation of a power-driven steering control;
85.    ‘steering apparatus drive unit’: the
control for the steering apparatus, its drive unit and its power source;
86.    ‘manual drive’: a system whereby manual
operation of the hand wheel moves the rudder by means of a mechanical
transmission, without any additional power source;
87.    ‘manually-operated hydraulic drive’: a
manual control actuating a hydraulic transmission;
88.    ‘rate-of-turn regulator’: equipment
which automatically produces and maintains a given rate of turn of the vessel
in accordance with preselected values;
89.    ‘wheelhouse designed for radar
navigation by one person’: a wheelhouse arranged in such a way that, during
radar navigation, the vessel can be manoeuvred by one person;
Properties of structural components and
materials
90.    ‘watertight’: a structural component or
device so fitted as to prevent any ingress of water;
91.    ‘spray-proof and weathertight’: a
structural component or device so fitted that in normal conditions it allows
only a negligible quantity of water to penetrate;
92.    ‘gastight’: a structural component or
device so fitted as to prevent the ingress of gas and vapours;
93.    ‘non-combustible’: a substance which
neither burns nor produces flammable vapours in such quantities that they
ignite spontaneously when heated to approximately 750°C;
94.    ‘flame-retardant’: material which does
not readily catch fire, or whose surface at least restricts the spread of
flames pursuant to the test procedure referred to in Article 15.11(1)(c);
95.    ‘fire-resistance’: the property of
structural components or devices as certified by the test procedure referred to
in Article 15.11(1)(d);
96.    ‘Code for Fire Test Procedures’: the
International Code for the Application of Fire Test Procedures adopted under
Resolution MSC.61(67) by the Maritime Safety Committee of the IMO;
Other definitions
97     'Classification society': a classification
society that has been approved in accordance with the criteria and procedures
of Annex VII;
97a    'Navigation lights': light from signal
lamps to indicate vessels;
97b   'Light signals': light used to
supplement visual or sound signals
98     ‘radar installation’: an electronic
navigational aid for detecting and displaying the surroundings and traffic;
99.    ‘Inland ECDIS’: a standardised system
for displaying electronic navigational charts for inland waters and associated
information, that displays selected information from proprietary electronic
navigational charts for inland waters and optionally information from other
sensors of the craft;
100.  ‘Inland ECDIS installation’: an
installation for displaying electronic navigational charts for inland waters
that can be operated in two different modes: information mode and navigation
mode;
101.  ‘information mode’: use of Inland ECDIS
for information purposes only without radar overlay;
102.  ‘navigation mode’: use of Inland ECDIS
with radar overlay for navigating a craft;
103.‘shipboard personnel’: all employees on
board a passenger vessel who are not members of the crew;
104.  ‘persons with reduced mobility’: persons
facing particular problems when using public transport, such as the elderly and
the handicapped and persons with sensory disabilities, persons in wheelchairs,
pregnant women and persons accompanying young children;
105.  ‘Union inland navigation certificate’: a
certificate issued to an inland waterway vessel by the competent authority,
signifying compliance with the technical requirements of this Directive.
106   'expert': a person recognised by the
competent authority or by an authorised institution, having specialist
knowledge in the relevant area on the basis of his or her professional training
and experience, fully conversant with the relevant rules and regulations and
the generally accepted technical rules (e.g. EN standards, relevant
legislation, technical rules of other Member States of the European Union), and
able to examine and give an expert assessment of the relevant systems and
equipment;
107   'competent person': a person who has
acquired sufficient knowledge in the relevant area on the basis of his or her
professional training and experience and is sufficiently conversant with the
relevant rules and regulations and the generally accepted technical rules (such
as EN standards, relevant legislation, technical rules of other Member States
of the European Union) to be able to assess the operational safety of the
relevant systems and equipment.
CHAPTER 2
PROCEDURE
Article 2.01
Inspection bodies
1.                      
Inspection bodies shall be set up by the Member
States.
2.                      
Inspection bodies shall consist of a chairman
and experts.
At least the following shall form part of each
body as experts:
(a)     an official from the administration
that is responsible for inland navigation;
(b)     an expert on the design of inland
waterway vessels and their engines;
(c)     a nautical expert in possession of an
inland waterways boatmaster's licence, which authorises the holder to sail the
vessel to be inspected.
3.                      
The Chairman and the experts within each body
shall be designated by the authorities in the State in which the body is set
up. On taking up their duties, the Chairman and the experts shall submit a
written declaration that they will perform them completely independently. No
declaration shall be required from officials.
4.                      
Inspection bodies may be assisted by specialist
experts in accordance with the national provisions applying.
Article 2.02
Request for an inspection
1.                      
The procedure for making a request for an
inspection and establishing the place and time of that inspection fall within
the powers of the authorities issuing the Union inland navigation certificate.
The competent authority shall determine which documents are to be submitted.
The procedure shall take place in such a way as to ensure that the inspection
may be conducted within a reasonable period following the lodging of the
request.
2.                      
The owner of a craft that is not subject to this
Directive, or his representative, may request a Union inland navigation certificate.
His request shall be met if the vessel fulfils the requirements of this
Directive.
Article 2.03
Presentation of the craft
for inspection
1.                      
The owner, or his representative, shall present
the craft in an unladen, cleaned and equipped state. He shall provide any
assistance needed for the inspection, such as providing an appropriate dinghy
and staff, and uncovering any parts of the hull or fittings that are not
directly accessible or visible.
2.                      
The inspection body shall demand a dry
inspection on the first occasion. That dry inspection may be dispensed with if
a classification certificate or a certificate from an approved classification
society to the effect that the construction meets its requirements can be
produced or if a certificate is produced which shows that a competent authority
has already carried out a dry inspection for other purposes. Where there is a
periodical inspection or an inspection, as provided for in Article 14 of this
Directive, the inspection body may require an inspection out of the water.
The inspection body shall conduct trial runs
during an initial inspection of motor vessels or convoys or where major changes
are made to the propulsion or steering equipment
3.                      
The inspection body may require further
operational tests and other supporting documents. That provision shall also
apply during the building of the craft.
Article 2.04
(Left void)
Article 2.05
Provisional Union inland
navigation certificate
1.                      
The competent authority may issue a provisional Union
inland navigation certificate:
(a)     to craft intended to travel to a
certain place with the permission of the competent authority in order to obtain
a Union inland navigation certificate;
(b)     to craft whose Union inland navigation
certificate has been temporarily withdrawn in one of the instances referred to
in Article 2.07 or in Articles 11 and 15 of this Directive;
(c)     to craft whose Union inland navigation
certificate is in preparation following a successful inspection;
(d)     to craft where not all of the
conditions required for obtaining a Union inland navigation certificate as set
out in Part I of Annex V have been met;
(e)     to craft so damaged that their state
no longer complies with the Union inland navigation certificate;
(f)      to floating installations or equipment
where the authorities responsible for special transport operations make the
authorisation to carry out a special transport operation, as provided for by
the applicable navigational authority regulations of the Member States, subject
to obtaining such a Union inland navigation certificate;
(g)     to craft deviating from the provisions
of Part II of Annex II, as provided for in Article 18 of this Directive.
2.                      
The provisional Union inland navigation
certificate shall be drawn up using the model set out in Part III of Annex V
where the navigability of the craft, floating establishment or floating object
seems to have been adequately ensured.
This shall include the conditions considered
necessary by the competent authority and shall be valid
(a)     in the cases referred to in paragraph
1(a), (d) to (f), for a single specific trip to be made within a suitable
period that shall not exceed one month;
(b)     in the cases referred to in paragraph
1(b) and (c), for an appropriate duration;
(c)     in the cases referred to in paragraph
1(g), for six months. The provisionalUnion inland navigation certificate may be
extended for six months at a time until the Committee has taken a decision.
Article 2.06
(Left void) 
Article 2.07
Particulars in and
amendments to the Union inland navigation certificate
1.                      
The owner of a craft, or his representative,
shall bring to the notice of the competent authority any change in the name or
ownership of a craft, any re-measurement, and any change in the registration or
home port, and shall send the Union inland navigation certificate to that
authority for amendment.
2.                      
Any competent authority may add any information
or change to the Union inland navigation certificate.
3.                      
Where a competent authority adds any alteration
or information to a Union inland navigation certificate it shall inform the
competent authority which issued the Union inland navigation certificate
thereof.
Article 2.08
(Left void)
Article 2.09
Periodical inspection
1.                      
Craft shall be subjected to a periodical
inspection before expiry of their Union inland navigation certificate.
2.                      
Following a justified request by the owner or
his representative, the competent authority may, by way of an exception, and
without any further inspections, grant an extension of the validity of the Union
inland navigation certificate for not more than six months. That extension
shall be granted in writing and shall be kept on board the craft.
3.                      
The competent authority shall again lay down the
period of validity of the Union inland navigation certificate in accordance
with the results of that inspection.
The period of validity shall be entered on the Union
inland navigation certificate and brought to the attention of the authority
having issued that Union inland navigation certificate
4.                      
If, rather than have its period of validity extended,
a Union inland navigation certificate is replaced by a new version, the earlier
Union inland navigation certificate shall be returned to the competent
authority which issued it.
Article 2.10
Voluntary inspection
The owner of a craft, or his representative,
may voluntarily request an inspection at any time.
That request for an inspection shall be
acted upon.
Article 2.11
(Left void)
Article 2.12
(Left void)
Article 2.13
(Left void)
Article 2.14
(Left void)
Article 2.15
Expenses
The owner of a craft, or his
representative, shall bear all of the costs arising from the inspection of the
vessel and the issue of the Union inland navigation certificate in accordance
with a special set of charges drawn up by each of the Member States.
Article 2.16
Information
The competent authority may allow persons
demonstrating a well-founded interest to be informed of the contents of a Union
inland navigation certificate and may issue those persons with extracts or
copies of the Union inland navigation certificates certified as true and
designated as such.
Article 2.17
Register of Union inland
navigation certificates
1.                      
Competent authorities shall assign an order
number to the Union inland navigation certificates they issue. They shall keep
a register in accordance with the model set out in Annex VI of all the Union
inland navigation certificates they issue.
2.                      
Competent authorities shall keep the original,
or a copy of all the Union inland navigation certificates they have issued, and
shall enter on these any information and alterations, together with any Union
inland navigation certificate cancellations and replacements. They shall update
the register mentioned in paragraph 1 accordingly.
3.                      
In order to perform administrative measures for
maintaining safety and ease of navigation and for implementation of Articles 2.02 to 2.15 as well as Articles 7, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15 and
16 of this Directive read only access to the register
in accordance with the model set out in Annex VI will be granted to competent
authorities of other Member States, Contracting States of the Mannheim
Convention and, as far as an equivalent level of privacy is guaranteed, to
third countries on the basis of administrative agreements.
Article 2.18
Unique European Vessel
Identification Number
1.                      
The unique European Vessel Identification Number
(ENI), in the following referred to as European Vessel Identification Number,
consists of eight Arabic numerals according to Appendix III.
2.                      
The competent authority having issued a Union
inland navigation certificate shall enter on that Union inland navigation
certificate the European Vessel Identification Number. Unless the craft
possesses a European Vessel Identification Number at the time of issue of the Union
inland navigation certificate it shall be assigned to that craft by the competent
authority of the Member State in which the craft has been registered or has its
home port.
As far as craft from countries where an
assignation of a European Vessel Identification Number is not possible are
concerned the European Vessel Identification Number to be entered on the Union
inland navigation certificate shall be assigned by the competent authority
issuing that Union inland navigation certificate.
3.                      
Only one single European Vessel Identification
Number can be assigned to one craft. The European Vessel Identification Number
is issued only once and remains unchanged throughout the whole lifetime of the
craft.
4.                      
The owner of a craft, or his representative,
shall apply to the competent authority for assignment of the European Vessel
Identification Number. The owner or his representative shall also be
responsible for having the European Vessel Identification Number which is
entered in the Union inland navigation certificate affixed to the craft.
5.                      
Each Member State shall notify the Commission of
the competent authorities responsible for assigning European Vessel
Identification Numbers. The Commission shall keep a register of those competent
authorities and of competent authorities notified by third countries, and shall
make the register available to the Member States. On request this register
shall also be made available to competent authorities of third countries.
6.                      
The competent authorities refered to in
paragraph 5 shall enter each assigned European Vessel Identification Number, the
data for the identification of the vessel set out in Appendix IV as well as any
changes without delay into the electronic register kept by the Commission.
Member States shall, in accordance with Union and national legislation, take
the necessary measures to ensure the confidentiality and reliability of
information sent to them pursuant to this Directive and shall only use such information in compliance with this Directive. These data may be used by competent
authorities of other Member States and the Contracting States of the Mannheim
Convention for the sole purpose of performing administrative measures for
maintaining safety and ease of navigation and for implementation of Articles
2.02 to 2.15 as well as Articles 7, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15 and 16 of this Directive.
The competent authority of a Member State may
transfer personal data to a third country or international organisation
provided the requirements of Directive 95/46/EC, particularly of Articles 25 or
26, are fulfilled and only on a case-by-case basis. The competent authority of
the Member State shall ensure that the transfer is necessary for the purposes
referred to in subparagraph 1. The competent authority shall ensure that the
third country or international organisation does not transfer the data to
another third country or international organisation unless it is given express
written authorisation and complies with the conditions specified by the
competent authority of the Member State.
The transfer of personal data to a third
country or international organisation by the Commission shall be carried out
provided the requirements of Article 9 of Regulation 45/2001 are fulfilled and
only on a case-by-case basis. The Commission shall ensure that the transfer is
necessary for the purposes referred to in subparagraph 1. The Commission shall
ensure that the third country or international organisation does not transfer
the data to another third country or international organisation unless it is
given express written authorisation and complies with the conditions specified
by the competent authority of the Member State.
Article 2.19
(Left void)
Article 2.20
Notifications
1.                      
Member States or its compentent authorities shall
notify the Commission and the other Member States or each other: 
(a)     of the names and addresses of the
technical services which, together with their national competent authority are
responsible for the application of the chapter 8 of this Annex;
(b)     of the data sheet as shown in Appendix
VI, Part VII on the on board sewage treatment plant types for which an approval
has been issued since the last notification;
(c)     of the recognised type approvals for
on-board sewage treatment systems based on different standards than those laid
down in Chapter 14, for the use on their national waterways;
(d)     within one month of any withdrawal of
a type approval and of the reasons for such withdrawal for on-board sewage
treatment systems;
(e)     of the names and addresses of the
competent authorities and technical services responsible for carrying out the
functions outlined in Chapter 14;
(f)      of any authorised special anchor
following an application to reduce anchor mass, giving its type designation and
authorised reduction of anchor mass. The competent authority grants
authorisation to the applicant at the earliest 3 months after notifying the
Commission provided that the latter does not raise objections;
(g)     of the radar navigation equipment and of
the rate-of-turn indicators for which they have issued type approval. The
relevant notice shall include the type-approval number assigned, as well as the
type designation, the name of the manufacturer, the name of the holder of the
type-approval and the date of the type approval;
(h)     of the competent authorities
responsible for approval of specialised firms that can do the installation,
replacement, repair or maintenance of radar navigation equipment and
rate-of-turn indicators. 
2.                      
The Commission shall publish a register of radar
navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators approved as laid down in
Appendix VIII or on the basis of type-approvals recognised to be equivalent. 
Part II
CHAPTER 3
SHIPBUILDING REQUIREMENTS
Article 3.01
Basic requirements
Vessels shall be built in accordance with
good shipbuilding practice.
Article 3.02
Strength and stability
1.                      
The hull shall be sufficiently strong to withstand
all of the stresses to which it is normally subjected.
(a)     In the case of newly built vessels or
major conversions affecting vessel strength, adequate strength shall be
demonstrated by presenting design calculation proof. That proof is not required
where a classification certificate or a declaration from an approved
classification society is submitted.
(b)     Where there is an inspection as
referred to in Article 2.09, the minimum thickness of the bottom, bilge and
side plates of vessels made from steel shall be no less than the higher of the
values resulting from the following formulae:
         1. for vessels that are longer than
40 m: tmin = f · b · c (2,3 + 0,04 L) (mm);
         for vessels not more than 40 m in
length: tmin = f · b · c (1,5 + 0,06 L) (mm), however, not
less than 3.00 mm
         2.tmin = 0,005 · a
√(T)[mm]
         where:
 a || = || frame spacing (mm); 
 f || = || frame spacing factor:               f         =          1 for a ≤ 500 mm         f           =          1 + 0,0013 (a — 500) for a > 500 mm          
 b || = || factor for bottom, side or bilge plates               b        =          1,0 for bottom plates and side plates     b          =          1,25 for bilge plates.    
 f || = || 1 may be taken for the frame spacing when calculating the minimum thickness of the side plates. However, the minimum thickness of the bilge plates may in no case be less than that of the bottom plates and side plates. 
 c || = || factor for the type of structure:               c        =          0,95 for vessels with double bottom and wing void, where the partition between wing void and hold is located vertically in line with the coaming         c          =          1,0 for all other types of structure.         
(c)     In longitudinally framed vessels with
double bottom and wing voids, the minimum value calculated for the plate
thickness in accordance with the formulae in point (b) may be reduced to a
calculated value certified by an approved classification society for sufficient
hull strength (longitudinal, lateral and local strength).
Plates shall be renewed if bottom, bilge or
side plates are below the permissible value laid down in this way.
The minimum values calculated in accordance
with the method are limit values taking account of normal, uniform wear, and
provided that shipbuilding steel is used and that the internal structural
components such as frames, frame floor, main longitudinal and transverse
structural members are in a good state and that the hull shows no indication of
any overloading of the longitudinal strength.
As soon as these values are no longer achieved,
the plates in question shall be repaired or replaced. However, lesser
thicknesses, of not more than 10 % reduction from calculated values, are
acceptable locally for small areas.
2.                      
Where a material other than steel is used for
the construction of the hull, it shall be proved by calculation that the hull
strength (longitudinal, lateral and local strength) equals at least the
strength that would result from the use of steel under the assumption of
minimum thickness in accordance with paragraph1. If a certificate of class or a
declaration issued by a recognised classification society is presented, a proof
by calculation may be dispensed with.
3.                      
The stability of vessels shall correspond to
their intended use.
Article 3.03
Hull
1.                      
Bulkheads rising up to the deck or, where there
is no deck, up to the gunwale, shall be installed at the following points:
(a)     A collision bulkhead at a suitable
distance from the bow in such a way that the buoyancy of the laden vessel is
ensured, with a residual safety clearance of 100 mm if water enters the
watertight compartment ahead of the collision bulkhead.
As a general rule, the requirement referred to
in paragraph 1 shall be considered to have been met if the collision bulkhead
has been installed at a distance of between 0,04 L and 0,04 L + 2 m measured
from the forward perpendicular in the plane of maximum draught.
If this distance exceeds 0,04 L + 2 m, the
requirement set out in paragraph 1 shall be proved by calculation.
The distance may be reduced to 0,03 L. In that
case the requirement referred to in paragraph 1 shall be proved by calculation
on the assumption that the compartment ahead of the collision bulkhead and
those adjacent have all been filled with water.
(b)     An aft-peak bulkhead at a suitable
distance from the stern where the vessel length L exceeds 25 m.
2.                      
No accommodation or installations needed for
vessel safety or operation may be located ahead of the plane of the collision
bulkhead. This requirement shall not apply to anchor gear.
3.                      
The accommodation, engine rooms and boiler
rooms, and the workspaces forming part of these shall be separated from the
holds by watertight transverse bulkheads that extend up to the deck.
4.                      
The accommodation shall be separated from engine
rooms, boiler rooms and holds in a gastight manner and shall be directly
accessible from the deck. If no such access has been provided an emergency exit
shall also lead directly to the deck.
5.                      
The bulkheads specified in paragraphs 1 and 3
and the separation of areas specified in paragraph 4 shall not contain any
openings.
However, doors in the aft-peak bulkhead and
penetrations, in particular for shafts and pipework, shall be permitted where
they are so designed that the effectiveness of those bulkheads and of the
separation of areas is not impaired. Doors in the aft-peak bulkhead shall be
permitted only if it can be determined by remote monitoring in the wheelhouse
whether they are open or closed and shall bear the following readily legible
instruction on both sides:
‘Door to be closed immediately after use’.»
6.                      
The water inlets and discharges, and the
pipework connected to these, shall be such that no unintentional ingress of
water into the vessel is possible.
7.                      
The foresections of vessels shall be built in
such a way that the anchors neither wholly nor partly protrude beyond the side
plating.
Article 3.04
Engine and boiler rooms,
bunkers
1.                      
Engine or boiler rooms shall be arranged in such
a way that the equipment therein can be operated, serviced and maintained
easily and safely.
2.                      
The liquid-fuel or lubricant bunkers and
passenger areas and accommodation may not have any common surfaces which are
under the static pressure of the liquid when in normal service.
3.                      
Engine room, boiler room and bunker bulkheads,
ceilings and doors shall be made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible
material.
Insulation material used in engine rooms shall
be protected against the intrusion of fuel and fuel vapours.
All openings in walls, ceilings, and doors of
engine rooms, boiler rooms, and bunker rooms shall be such that they can be
closed from outside the room. The locking devices shall be made from steel or
an equivalently non-combustible material.
4.                      
Engine and boiler rooms and other premises in which
flammable or toxic gases are likely to escape shall be capable of being
adequately ventilated.
5.                      
Companionways and ladders providing access to
engine and boiler rooms and bunkers shall be firmly attached and be made of
steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible material.
6.                      
Engine and boiler rooms shall have two exits of
which one may be an emergency exit.
The second exit may be dispensed with if:
(a)     the total floor area (average length ×
average width at the level of the floor plating) of the engine or boiler room
does not exceed 35 m2; and
(b)     the path between each point where
servicing or maintenance operations are to be carried out and the exit, or foot
of the companionway near the exit providing access to the outside, is not
longer than 5 m; and
(c)     a fire extinguisher is located at the
servicing point that is furthest removed from the exit door and also, by way of
derogation from Article 10.03(1)(e), where the installed power of the engines
does not exceed 100 kW.
7.                      
The maximum permissible sound pressure level in
the engine rooms shall be 110 dB(A). The measuring points shall be selected as
a function of the maintenance work needed during normal operation of the plant
located therein.
CHAPTER 4
SAFETY CLEARANCE, FREEBOARD AND DRAUGHT MARKS
Article 4.01
Safety clearance
1.                      
The safety clearance shall be at least 300 mm.
2.                      
The safety clearance in the case of vessels
whose openings cannot be closed by spray-proof and weathertight devices, and
for vessels sailing with their holds uncovered, shall be increased in such a
way that each of those openings shall be at least 500 mm from the plane of
maximum draught.
Article 4.02
Freeboard
1.                      
The freeboard of vessels with a continuous deck,
without sheer and superstructures, shall be 150 mm.
2.                      
The freeboard of vessels with sheer and
superstructures shall be calculated using the following formula:
 [mm
where:
 a ||   || is a correction coefficient that takes account of all of the superstructures involved; 
 βv ||   || is a coefficient for correcting the effect of the forward sheer resulting from the presence of superstructures in the forward quarter of length L of the vessel; 
 βa ||   || is a coefficient correcting the effect of the aft sheer resulting from the presence of superstructures in the aft quarter of length L of the vessel; 
 Sev ||   || is the effective forward sheer in mm; 
 Sea ||   || is the effective aft sheer in mm. 
3.                      
The coefficient α is calculated using the
following formula:
where:
 lem ||   || is the effective length, in m, of a superstructure located in the median part corresponding to half of length L of the vessel; 
 lev ||   || is the effective length, in m, of a superstructure in the forward quarter of vessel length L; 
 lea ||   || is the effective length, in m, of a superstructure in the aft quarter of vessel length L. 
The effective length of a superstructure is
calculated using the following formulae:
where:
 l ||   || is the effective length, in m, of the superstructure involved; 
 b ||   || is the width, in m, of the superstructure involved; 
 B1 ||   || is the width of the vessel, in m, measured on the outside of the vertical sideplates at deck level halfway along the superstructure involved; 
 h ||   || is the height, in m, of the superstructure involved. However, in the case of hatches, h is obtained by reducing the height of the coamings by half of the safety distance according to Article 4.01(1) and (2). In no case will a value exceeding 0,36 m be taken for h. 
If or
is
less than 0,6 the effective length le of the superstructure will be zero.
4.                      
Coefficients βv and βa are calculated
using the following formulae:
5.                      
The effective aft/forward sheers Sev/Sea are
calculated using the following formulae:
Sev
= Sv · p
Sea
= Sa · p
where:
 Sv ||   || is the actual forward sheer, in mm; however Sv shall not be taken to be more than 1000 mm; 
 Sa ||   || is the actual aft sheer, in mm; however Sa may not be taken to be more than 500 mm; 
 p ||   || is a coefficient calculated using the following formula: 
 x ||   || is the abscissa, measured from the extremity of the point where the sheer is 0,25 Sv or 0,25 Sa (see figure).     
However, coefficient p will not be taken to
be more than 1.
6.                      
If βa · Sea is greater than βv
· Sev, the value βv · Sev of will be taken as being the value
for βa · Sea.
Article 4.03
Minimum freeboard
In view of the reductions referred to in
Article 4.02 the minimum freeboard shall be not less than 0 mm.
Article 4.04
Draught marks
1.                      
The plane of maximum draught shall be determined
in such a way that the specifications concerning minimum freeboard and minimum
safety clearance are both met. However, for safety reasons, the inspection body
may lay down a greater value for the safety clearance or freeboard. The plane
of maximum draught shall be determined at least for Zone 3.
2.                      
The plane of maximum draught shall be indicated
by means of highly visible, indelible draught marks.
3.                      
The draught marks for Zone 3 shall consist of a
rectangle 300 mm long and 40 mm deep, the base of which is horizontal and
coincides with the plane of the maximum authorised draught. Any differing
draught marks shall include such a rectangle.
4.                      
Vessels shall have at least three pairs of
draught marks, of which one pair shall be centrally located and the two others
located, respectively, at a distance from the bow and stern that is equal to
roughly one-sixth of the length.
However,
(a)     where a vessel is less than 40 m in
length it will suffice to affix two pairs of marks at a distance from the bow
and stern, respectively, that is equal to a quarter of the length;
(b)     where vessels are not intended for the
carriage of goods, a pair of marks located roughly halfway along the vessel
will suffice.
5.                      
Marks or indications which cease to be valid
following a further inspection shall be deleted or marked as being no longer
valid under the supervision of the inspection body. If a draught mark should
disappear, it may only be replaced under the supervision of an inspection body.
6.                      
Where a vessel has been measured in
implementation of the 1966 Convention on the Measurement of Inland Navigation
Vessels and the plane of the measurement marks meets the requirements of this
Directive, those measurement marks shall take the place of the draught marks;
this shall be mentioned in the Union inland navigation certificate.
7.                      
For vessels operating on zones of inland
waterways other than Zone 3 (Zones 1, 2 or 4) the bow and stern pairs of
draught marks provided for in paragraph 4 shall be supplemented by adding a
vertical line to which one or, in the case of several zones, several additional
draught lines 150 mm long shall be affixed towards the bow, in relation to the
draught mark for Zone 3.
This vertical line and the horizontal line
shall be 30 mm thick. In addition to the draught mark towards the bow of the
vessel, the relevant zone numbers shall be indicated in lettering 60 mm high ×
40 mm deep (see Figure 1).
 Figure 1 
Article 4.05
Maximum loaded draught of vessels
whose holds are not always closed so as to be spray-proof and weathertight
If the plane of maximum draught for Zone 3
of a vessel is determined by assuming that the holds may be closed in such a
way as to make them spray-proof and weathertight, and if the distance between
the plane of maximum draught and the upper edge of the coamings is less than
500 mm, the maximum draught for sailing with uncovered holds shall be
determined.
The following statement shall be entered on
the Union inland navigation certificate:
‘Where the hold hatches are totally or
partly uncovered the vessel may only be loaded up to ... mm below the draught
marks for Zone 3.’»
Article 4.06
Draught scales
1.                      
Vessels whose draught may exceed 1 m shall bear
a draught scale on each of their sides towards the stern; they may bear
additional draught scales.
2.                      
The zero points on each draught scale shall be
taken vertically to this within the plane running parallel to the plane of
maximum draught passing through the lowest point of the hull or of the keel
where such exists. The vertical distance above the zero point shall be
graduated in decimetres. That graduation shall be located on each scale, from
the unladen water line up to 100 mm above the maximum draught by means of
punched or chiselled marks, and shall be painted in the form of a
highly-visible band in two alternating colours. That graduation shall be
identified by figures at a distance of every five decimetres marked next to the
scale as well as at the top of the scale.
3.                      
The two stern measurement scales affixed pursuant
to the Convention referred to in Article 4.04 (6), may replace the draught
scales, provided that they include a graduation that meets the requirements
plus, where appropriate, figures indicating the draught.
CHAPTER 5
MANOEUVRABILITY
Article 5.01
General
Vessels and convoys shall display adequate
navigability and manoeuvrability.
Unpowered vessels intended to be towed
shall meet the specific requirements laid down by the inspection body.
Powered vessels and convoys shall meet the
requirements set out in Articles 5.02 to 5.10.
Article 5.02
Navigation tests
1.                      
Navigability and manoeuvrability shall be
checked by means of navigation tests. Compliance with the requirements of
Articles 5.06 to 5.10 shall, in particular, be examined.
2.                      
The inspection body may dispense with all or
part of the tests where compliance with the navigability and manoeuvrability
requirements is proven in another manner.
Article 5.03
Test area
1.                      
The navigation tests referred to in Article 5.02
shall be carried out on areas of inland waterways that have been designated by
the competent authorities.
2.                      
Those test areas shall be situated on a stretch
of flowing or standing water that is if possible straight, at least 2 km long
and sufficiently wide and is equipped with highly-distinctive marks for determining
the position of the vessel.
3.                      
It shall be possible for the inspection body to
plot the hydrological data such as depth of water, width of navigable channel
and average speed of the current in the navigation area as a function of the
various water levels.
Article 5.04
Degree of loading of
vessels and convoys during navigation tests
During navigation tests, vessels and
convoys intended to carry goods shall be loaded to at least 70 % of their
tonnage and loading, distributed in such a way as to ensure a horizontal
attitude as far as possible. If the tests are carried out with a lesser load
the approval for downstream navigation shall be restricted to that loading.
Article 5.05
Use of on-board facilities
for navigation test
1.                      
During the navigation test, all of the equipment
referred to in items 34 and 52 of the Union inland navigation certificate which
may be actuated from the wheelhouse may be used, apart from anchors.
2.                      
However, during the test involving turning into
the current referred to in Article 5.10, bow anchors may be used.
Article 5.06
Prescribed (forward) speed
1.                      
Vessels and convoys shall achieve a speed in
relation to the water of at least 13 km/h. That condition is not mandatory
where pusher are operating solo.
2.                      
The inspection body may grant exemptions to
vessels and convoys operating solely in estuaries and ports.
3.                      
The inspection body shall check if the unladen
vessel is capable of exceeding a speed of 40 km/h in relation to water. If this
can be confirmed, the following entry shall be made in item 52 of the Union
inland navigation certificate:
‘The vessel is capable of exceeding a speed of
40 km/h in relation to water.’»
Article 5.07
Stopping capacity
1.                      
Vessels and convoys shall be able to stop facing
downstream in good time while remaining adequately manoeuvrable.
2.                      
Where vessels and convoys are not longer than 86
m and not wider than 22.90 m the stopping capacity mentioned above may be
replaced by turning capacity.
3.                      
The stopping capacity shall be proved by means
of stopping manoeuvres carried out within a test area as referred to in Article
5.03 and the turning capacity by turning manoeuvres in accordance with Article
5.10.
Article 5.08
Capacity for going astern
Where the stopping manoeuvre required by
Article 5.07 is carried out in standing water it shall be followed by a
navigation test while going astern.
Article 5.09
Capacity for taking
evasive action
Vessels and convoys shall be able to take
evasive action in good time. That capacity shall be proven by means of evasive
manoeuvres carried out within a test area as referred to in Article 5.03.
Article 5.10
Turning capacity
Vessels and convoys not exceeding 86 m in
length or 22,90 m in breadth shall be able to turn in good time.
That turning capacity may be replaced by
the stopping capacity referred to in Article 5.07.
The turning capacity shall be proven by
means of turning manoeuvres against the current.
CHAPTER 6
STEERING SYSTEM
Article 6.01
General requirements
1.                      
Vessels shall be fitted with a reliable steering
system which provides at least the manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5.
2.                      
Powered steering systems shall be designed in
such a way that the rudder cannot change position unintentionally.
3.                      
The steering system as a whole shall be designed
for permanent lists of up to 15° and ambient temperatures from — 20 °C to + 50
°C.
4.                      
The component parts of the steering system shall
be rugged enough to always be able to withstand the stresses to which they may
be subjected during normal operation. No external forces applied to the rudder
shall impair the operating capacity of the steering apparatus and its drive
unit.
5.                      
The steering system shall incorporate a powered
drive unit if so required by the forces needed to actuate the rudder.
6.                      
A steering apparatus with powered drive unit
shall be protected against overloads by means of a system that restricts the
torque applied by the drive unit.
7.                      
The penetrations for the rudder stocks shall be
so designed as to prevent the spread of water-polluting lubricants.
Article 6.02
Steering apparatus drive
unit
1.                      
If the steering apparatus has a powered drive
unit, a second independent drive unit or an additional manual drive shall be
present. In case of failure or malfunction of the drive unit of the rudder
system, the second independent drive unit or the manual drive has to be in
operation within 5 seconds.
2.                      
If the second drive unit or manual drive is not
placed in service automatically, it shall be possible to do so immediately by
means of a single operation by the helmsman that is both simple and quick.
3.                      
The second drive unit or manual drive shall
ensure the manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 as well.
Article 6.03
Hydraulic steering
apparatus drive unit
1.                      
No other power consumers may be connected to the
hydraulic steering apparatus drive unit.
2.                      
Hydraulic tanks shall be equipped with a warning
system that monitors a dropping of the oil level below the lowest content level
needed for safe operation.
3.                      
The dimensions, design and arrangement of the
pipework shall as far as possible exclude mechanical damage or damage resulting
from fire.
4.                      
Hydraulic hoses are:
(a)     only permissible, if vibration
absorption or freedom of movement of components makes their use inevitable;
(b)     to be designed for at least the
maximum service pressure;
(c)     to be renewed at the latest every
eight years.
5.                      
Hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps and
hydraulic motors as well as electric motors shall be examined at the latest
every eight years by a specialised firm and repaired if required.
Article 6.04
Power source
1.                      
Steering systems fitted with two powered drive
units shall have at least two power sources.
2.                      
If the second power source for the powered
steering apparatus is not constantly available while the vessel is under way, a
buffer device carrying adequate capacity shall provide back-up during the
period needed for start-up.
3.                      
In the case of electrical power sources, no
other power consumers may be supplied by the main power source for the steering
system.
Article 6.05
Manual drive
1.                      
The manual wheel shall not be driven by a
powered drive unit.
2.                      
Regardless of rudder position, a kick-back of
the wheel shall be prevented when the manual drive is engaged automatically.
Article 6.06
Rudder-propeller,
water-jet, cycloidal-propeller and bow-thruster systems
1.                      
Where the thrust vectoring of rudder-propeller,
water-jet, cycloidal-propeller or bow‑thruster installations is remotely
actuated by electric, hydraulic or pneumatic means, there shall be two steering
controls, each independent of the other, between the wheelhouse and the
propeller- or thruster-installation which, mutatis mutandis, meet the requirements
of Articles 6.01 to 6.05.
Such systems are not subject to this paragraph
if they are not needed in order to achieve the manoeuvrability required by
Chapter 5 or if they are only needed for the stopping test.
2.                      
Where there are two or more rudder-propeller,
water-jet or cycloidal-propeller installations that are independent of each
other the second actuation system is not necessary if the vessel retains the
manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 if one of the systems fails.
Article 6.07
Indicators and monitoring
devices
1.                      
The rudder position shall be clearly displayed
at the steering position. If the rudder-position indicator is electric it shall
have its own power supply.
2.                      
An optical and acoustic alarm shall be present
at the steering position to signal the following: 
(a)     oil level of the hydraulic tanks
falling under the lowest content level in accordance with Article 6.03(2) and
decrease of service pressure of the hydraulic system;
(b)     failure of the electrical supply for
the steering control;
(c)     failure of the electrical supply for
the drive units;
(d)     failure of the rate-of-turn regulator;
(e)     failure of the required buffer
devices.
Article 6.08
Rate-of-turn regulators
1.                      
Rate-of-turn regulators and their components
shall meet the requirements laid down in Article 9.20.
2.                      
The proper functioning of the rate-of-turn
regulator shall be displayed at the steering position by means of a green
indicating light.
Any lack of or unacceptable variations in the
supply voltage and an unacceptable decrease in the speed of rotation of the
gyroscope shall be monitored.
3.                      
Where, in addition to the rate-of-turn
regulator, there are other steering systems, it shall be possible to clearly
distinguish at the steering position which of these systems has been activated.
It shall be possible to shift from one system to another immediately. The
rate-of-turn regulator shall not have any influence on the steering systems
4.                      
The electricity supply to the rate-of-turn
regulator shall be independent of other power consumers.
5.                      
The gyroscopes, detectors and rate-of-turn
indicators used in the rate-of-turn regulators shall meet the minimum
requirements of the minimum specifications and test conditions concerning
rate-of-turn displays for inland waterways, as laid down in Appendix VIII.
Article 6.09
Acceptance and periodical
inspections
1.                      
The correct installation of the steering system
shall be inspected by an inspection body. For this purpose the inspection body
can require the following documents:
(a)     description of the steering system;
(b)     drawings of and information on the
steering apparatus drive units and the steering control;
(c)     information concerning the steering
apparatus;
(d)     electrical wiring diagram;
(e)     description of the rate-of-turn
regulator;
(f)      operating and maintenance
instructions for the steering system.
2.                      
Operation of the entire steering system shall be
checked by means of a navigation test. If a rate-of-turn regulator is installed
it shall be checked that a predetermined course can be reliably maintained and
that bends can be negotiated safely.
3.                      
Power-driven steering systems shall be inspected
by an expert:
(a)     before being put into service;
(b)     after a failure;
(c)     after any modification or repair;
(d)     regularly at least every three years.
4.                      
The inspection has to cover at least:
(a)     a check of conformity with the
approved drawings and at periodical inspections whether alterations in the
steering system were made;
(b)     a functional test of the steering
system for all operational possibilities;
(c)     a visual check and a tightness check
of the hydraulic components, in particular valves, pipelines, hydraulic hoses,
hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps, and hydraulic strainers;
(d)     a visual check of the electrical
components, in particular relays, electric motors and safety devices;
(e)     a check of the optical and acoustic
control devices.
5.                      
An inspection certificate, signed by the
inspector, shall be issued, showing the date of inspection.
CHAPTER 7
WHEELHOUSE
Article 7.01
General
1.                      
Wheelhouses shall be arranged in such a way that
the helmsman may at all times perform his task while the vessel is under way.
2.                      
Under normal operating conditions, sound
pressure generated by the vessel and measured at the level of the helmsman's
head at the steering position shall not exceed 70 dB(A).
3.                      
Where a wheelhouse has been designed for radar
navigation by one person, the helmsman shall be able to accomplish his task
while seated and all of the display or monitoring instruments and all of the
controls needed for operation of the vessel shall be arranged in such a way
that the helmsman may use them comfortably while the vessel is under way
without leaving his position or losing sight of the radar screen.
Article 7.02
Unobstructed view
1.                      
There shall be an adequately unobstructed view
in all directions from the steering position.
2.                      
The area of obstructed vision for the helmsman
ahead of the vessel in an unladen state with half of its supplies but without
ballast shall not exceed two vessel lengths or 250 m whichever is less, to the
surface of the water.
Optical and electronic means for reducing the
area of obstructed vision may not be taken into account during the inspection.
To further reduce any area of obstructed
vision, only suitable electronic devices shall be used.
3.                      
The helmsman's field of unobstructed vision at
his normal position shall be at least 240° of the horizon and at least 140°
within the forward semicircle.
No window frame, post or superstructure shall
lie within the helmsman's usual axis of vision.
Even in the case where a field of unobstructed
vision of at least 240° of the horizon is provided, the inspection body may
require other measures and in particular the installation of suitable auxiliary
optical or electronic devices if no sufficiently unobstructed view is provided
towards the rear.
The height of the lower edge of the side
windows shall be kept as low as possible and the height of the upper edge of
the side and rear windows shall be kept as high as possible.
In determining whether the requirements in this
Article for visibility from the wheelhouse are met, the helmsman shall be
assumed to have a height of eye of 1650 mm above the deck at the steering
position.
4.                      
The upper edge of the forward facing windows of
the wheelhouse shall be high enough to allow a person at the steering position
with height of eye of 1800 mm a clear forward view to at least 10 degrees above
the horizontal at eye-level height.
5.                      
There shall in all weathers be suitable means of
providing a clear view through the windscreen.
6.                      
The glazing used in wheelhouses shall be made of
safety glass and have a light transmission of at least 75 %.
To avoid reflections, the bridge front windows
shall be glare-free or fitted so as to exclude reflections effectively. This
requirement shall be deemed to be fulfilled when the windows are inclined from
the vertical plane, so as to form an outward angle of not less than 10° and not
more than 25°.
Article 7.03
General requirements
concerning control, indicating and monitoring equipment
1.                      
Control equipment needed to operate the vessel
shall be brought into its operating position easily. That position shall be
unambiguously clear.
2.                      
Monitoring instruments shall be easily legible.
It shall be possible to adjust their lighting steplessly down to their
extinction. Light sources shall be neither intrusive nor impair the legibility
of the monitoring instruments.
3.                      
There shall be a system for testing the warning
and indicating lights.
4.                      
It shall be possible to clearly establish
whether a system is in operation. If its functioning is indicated by means of
an indicating light, this shall be green.
5.                      
Any malfunctioning or failure of systems that
require monitoring shall be indicated by means of red warning lights.
6.                      
An audible warning shall sound at the same time
that a red warning light lights up. Audible warnings may be given by a single,
collective signal. The sound pressure level of that signal shall exceed the
maximum sound pressure level of the ambient noise at the steering position by
at least 3 dB(A).
7.                      
The audible warning shall be capable of being
switched off after a malfunction or failure has been acknowledged. Such
shutdown shall not prevent the alarm signal from being triggered by other
malfunctions. The red warning lights shall only go out when the malfunction has
been corrected.
8.                      
The monitoring and indicating devices shall be
automatically switched to an alternative power supply if their own power supply
fails.
Article 7.04
Specific requirements
concerning control, indicating and monitoring 
equipment of main engines and steering system
1.                      
It shall be possible to control and monitor the
main engines and steering systems from the steering position. Main engines
fitted with a clutch which can be actuated from the steering position, or
driving a controllable pitch propeller which can be controlled from the
steering position, need only to be capable of being started up and shut down
from the engine room.
2.                      
The control for each main engine shall take the
form of a single lever which prescribes an arc within a vertical plane that is
approximately parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vessel. Movement of that
lever towards the bow of the vessel shall cause forward motion, whereas
movement of the lever towards the stern shall cause the vessel to go astern.
Clutch engagement and reversal of the direction of motion shall take place
about the neutral position of that lever. The lever shall catch in the neutral
position.
3.                      
The direction of the propulsion thrust imparted
to the vessel and the rotational speed of the propeller or main engines shall
be displayed.
4.                      
The indicating and monitoring devices required
by Article 6.07(2), Article 8.03(2), and Article 8.05 (13), shall be located at
the steering position.
5.                      
Vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar
navigation by one person shall be steered by means of a lever. It shall be
possible to move that lever easily by hand. The position of the lever in
relation to the longitudinal axis of the vessel shall correspond precisely to
the position of the rudder blades. It shall be possible to release hold of the
lever in any given position without that of the rudder blades changing. The
neutral position of the lever shall be clearly perceptible.
6.                      
Where the vessel is fitted with bow rudders or
special rudders, particularly for going astern, these shall be actuated in
wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person by special levers
which, mutatis mutandis, meet the requirements set out in paragraph 5.
That requirement shall also apply where, in
convoys, the steering system fitted to craft other than those powering the
convoy is used.
7.                      
Where rate-of-turn regulators are used, it shall
be possible for the rate-of-turn control to be released in any given position
without altering the speed selected.
The control shall turn through a wide enough
arc to guarantee adequately precise positioning. The neutral position shall be
clearly perceptible from the other positions. The scale illumination shall be
steplessly variable.
8.                      
The remote-control equipment for the entire
steering system shall be installed in a permanent manner and be arranged in
such a way that the course selected is clearly visible. If the remote control
equipment can be disengaged, it shall be equipped with an indicating device
displaying the respective operational conditions ‘in service’ or ‘out of
service’. The disposition and manipulation of the controls shall be functional.
For systems that are subsidiary to the steering
system, such as active bow thrusters, remote-control equipment not permanently
installed shall be acceptable provided that such a subsidiary installation can
be activated by means of an override at any time within the wheelhouse.
9.                      
In the case of rudder-propeller, water-jet,
cycloidal-propeller and bow-thruster systems, equivalent devices shall be
acceptable as control, indicating and monitoring devices.
The requirements set out in paragraphs 1 to 8
shall apply, mutatis mutandis, in view of the specific characteristics and
arrangements selected for the abovementioned active steering and propulsion
units. In analogy to paragraph 2, each unit shall be controlled by a lever
which moves in the form of an arc within a vertical plane that is approximately
parallel to the direction of the thrust of the unit. From the position of the
lever the direction of the thrust acting on the vessel shall be clear.
If rudder propeller or cycloidal-propeller
systems are not controlled by means of levers, the inspection body may allow
derogations from paragraph 2. These derogations shall be mentioned in the Union
inland navigation certificate in box 52 referred to in Annex V.
Article 7.05
Navigation lights, light
signals and sound signals
1.                      
Navigation lights, their casings and accessories
shall bear the approval mark prescribed by Council
Directive 2013/XXX/EC of XX MMM 2013 on marine equipment.*
(*)     OJ LXX, JJ.MM.JJJJ, p. XX. 
2.                      
Current indicating lights or other equivalent
devices, such as repeater lights, for monitoring the navigation lights shall be
installed in the wheelhouse unless that monitoring can be performed direct from
the wheelhouse.
3.                      
In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by
one person, repeater lights shall be installed on the control panel in order to
monitor the navigation lights and the light signals. Switches of navigation
lights shall be included in the repeater lights or be adjacent to these and
shall be clearly assigned to them.
The arrangement and colour of the repeater
lights for the navigation lights and light signals shall correspond to the
actual position and colour of those lights and signals.
The failure of a navigation light or light
signal to function shall cause the corresponding repeater light either to go
out or to provide a signal in another manner.
4.                      
In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by
one person it shall be possible to activate the sound signals by a foot
operated switch. That requirement shall not apply to the ‘do not approach’
signal in accordance with the applicable navigational authority regulations of
the Member States.
Article 7.06
Radar installations and
rate-of-turn indicators
1.                      
Radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn
indicators shall fulfil the requirements laid down in Appendix VIII Part I and
Part II. Compliance with these requirements shall be determined by a
type-approval issued by the competent authority. Inland Electronic Chart
Display Information System (hereinafter referred to as 'ECDIS') equipment which
can be operated in navigation mode shall be regarded as radar navigation
equipment.
The requirements concerning installation and
operational testing of radarnavigation systems and rate-of-turn indicators used
in inland waterway vessels, laid down in Appendix VIII, Part III shall be met. 
The information on radar navigation equipment
and rate-of-turn indicators approved as laid down in Appendix VIII, or on the
basis of type-approvals recognised to be equivalent, shall be publicly
available.
2.                      
In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by
one person:
(a)     the radar screen shall not be shifted
significantly out of the helmsman's axis of view in its normal position;
(b)     the radar image shall continue to be
perfectly visible, without a mask or screen, whatever the lighting conditions
outside the wheelhouse;
(c)     the rate-of-turn indicator shall be
installed directly above or below the radar image or be incorporated into this.
Article 7.07
Radio telephony systems
for vessels with wheelhouses designed 
for radar navigation by one person
1.                      
Where vessel wheelhouses have been designed for
radar navigation by one person, reception from the vessel-vessel networks and
that of nautical information shall be via a loudspeaker, and outgoing
communications via a fixed microphone. Send/receive shall be selected by means
of a push-button.
It shall not be possible to use the microphones
of those networks for the public correspondence network.
2.                      
Where vessel wheelhouses designed for radar
navigation by one person are equipped with a radio telephone system for the
public correspondence network, reception shall be possible from the helmsman's
seat.
Article 7.08
Internal communication
facilities on board
There shall be internal communication
facilities on board vessels with a wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by
one person.
It shall be possible to establish
communication links from the steering position:
(a)     with the bow of the vessel or convoy;
(b)     with the stern of the vessel or convoy
if no direct communication is possible from the steering position;
(c)     with the crew accommodation;
(d)     with the boatmaster's cabin.
Reception at all positions of these
internal communication links shall be via loudspeaker, and transmission shall
be via a fixed microphone. The link with the bow and stern of the vessel or
convoy may be of the radio-telephone type.
Article 7.09
Alarm system
1.                      
There shall be an independent alarm system
enabling the accommodation, engine rooms and, where appropriate, the separate
pump rooms to be reached.
2.                      
The helmsman shall have within reach an on/off
switch controlling the alarm signal; switches which automatically return to the
off position when released are not acceptable.
3.                      
The sound pressure level for the alarm signal
shall be at least 75 dB(A) within the accommodation area.
In engine rooms and pump rooms the alarm signal
shall take the form of a flashing light that is visible on all sides and
clearly perceptible at all points.
Article 7.10
Heating and ventilation
Wheelhouses shall be equipped with an
effective heating and ventilation system that can be regulated.
Article 7.11
Stern-anchor operating
equipment
On board vessels and convoys whose
wheelhouse has been designed for radar navigation by one person and exceeding
86 m in length or 22,90 m in breadth it shall be possible for the helmsman to
drop the stern anchors from his position.
Article 7.12
Retractable wheelhouses
Retractable wheelhouses shall be fitted
with an emergency lowering system.
All lowering operations shall automatically
trigger a clearly audible acoustic warning signal. That requirement shall not
apply if the risk of injury which may result from the lowering is prevented by
appropriate design features.
It shall be possible to leave the
wheelhouse safely whatever its position.
Article 7.13
Entry in the Union inland
navigation certificate for vessels with wheelhouses designed 
for radar navigation by one person
Where a vessel complies with the special
provisions for wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person as set
out in Articles 7.01, 7.04 to 7.08 and 7.11, the following entry shall be made
in the Union inland navigation certificate:
‘The vessel has a wheelhouse designed for radar
navigation by one person’.
CHAPTER 8
ENGINE DESIGN
Article 8.01
General
1.                      
Engines and their ancillaries shall be designed,
built and installed in accordance with best practice.
2.                      
Pressure vessels dedicated for the operation of
the vessel shall be        checked by       an expert to verify that they are
safe for operation:
(a)     before being put into service for the
first time,
(b)     before being put back into service
after any modification or repair, and
(c)     regularly, at least every five years.
The inspection shall involve an internal and an
external inspection. Compressed-air vessels the interior of which cannot be
properly inspected, or the condition of which cannot be clearly established
during the internal inspection, are required to undergo additional
non-destructive testing or a hydraulic pressure test.
An inspection certificate shall be issued,
signed by the expert and showing the date of the inspection.
Other installations requiring regular
inspection, particularly steam boilers, other pressure vessels and their
accessories, and lifts, shall meet the regulations applying in one of the
Member States of the Union.
3.                      
Only internal-combustion engines burning fuels
having a flashpoint of more than 55 °C may be installed.
Article 8.02
Safety equipment
1.                      
Engines shall be installed and fitted in such a
way as to be adequately accessible for operation and maintenance and shall not
endanger the persons assigned to those tasks. It shall be possible to make them
secure against unintentional starting.
2.                      
Main engines, auxiliaries, boilers and pressure
vessels, and their accessories, shall be fitted with safety devices.
3.                      
In case of emergency, it shall also be possible
to shut down the motors driving the blower and suction fans from outside the
space in which they are located, and from outside the engine room.
4.                      
Where necessary, connections of pipes which
carry fuel oil, lubricating oil, and oils used in power transmission systems,
control and activating systems and heating systems shall be screened or
otherwise suitably protected to avoid oil spray or leakages onto hot surfaces,
into machinery air intakes, or other sources of ignition. The number of
connections in such piping systems shall be kept to a minimum.
5.                      
External high pressure fuel delivery pipes of
diesel engines, between the high pressure fuel pumps and fuel injectors, shall
be protected with a jacketed piping system capable of containing fuel from a
high pressure pipe failure. The jacketed piping system shall include a means
for collection of leakages and arrangements shall be provided for an alarm to
be given of a fuel pipe failure, except that an alarm is not required for
engines with no more than two cylinders. Jacketed piping systems need not be
applied to engines on open decks operating windlasses and capstans.
6.                      
Insulation of engine parts shall meet the
requirements of Article 3.04(3), second paragraph.
Article 8.03
Power plant
1.                      
It shall be possible to start, stop or reverse
the ship's propulsion reliably and quickly.
2.                      
The following shall be monitored by suitable
devices which trigger an alarm once a critical level has been reached:
(a)     the temperature of the main-engine
cooling water;
(b)     the lubricating-oil pressure for the
main engines and transmissions;
(c)      the oil and air pressure of the main
engine reversing units, reversible transmissions or propellers.
3.                      
Where vessels have only one main engine, that
engine shall not be shut down automatically except in order to protect against
overspeed.
4.                      
Where vessels have only one main engine, that
engine may be equipped with an automatic device for the reduction of the engine
speed only if an automatic reduction of the engine speed is indicated both
optically and acoustically in the wheelhouse and the device for the reduction
of the engine speed can be switched off from the helmsman's position.
5.                      
Shaft bushings shall be designed in such a way
as to prevent the spread of water-polluting lubricants.
Article 8.04
Engine exhaust system
1.                      
The exhaust gases shall be completely ducted out
of the vessel.
2.                      
All suitable measures shall be taken to avoid
ingress of the exhaust gases into the various compartments. Exhaust pipes
passing through accommodation or the wheelhouse shall, within these, be covered
by protective gas-tight sheathing. The gap between the exhaust pipe and this
sheathing shall be open to the outside air.
3.                      
The exhaust pipes shall be arranged and
protected in such a way that they cannot cause a fire.
4.                      
The exhaust pipes shall be suitably insulated or
cooled in the engine rooms. Protection against physical contact may suffice
outside the engine rooms.
Article 8.05
Fuel tanks, pipes and
accessories
1.                      
Liquid fuels shall be stored in steel tanks
which are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly attached to
the hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, an equivalent material in
terms of fire-resistance may be used. These requirements shall not apply to
tanks having a capacity of no more than 12 litres that have been incorporated
in auxiliaries during their manufacture. Fuel tanks shall not have common
partitions with drinking-water tanks.
2.                      
Tanks and their pipework and other accessories
shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that neither fuel nor fuel vapours
may accidentally reach the inside of the vessel. Tank valves intended for fuel
sampling or water drainage shall close automatically.
3.                      
No fuel tanks may be located forward of the
collision bulkhead.
4.                      
Fuel tanks and their fittings shall not be
located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
5.                      
The filler orifices for fuel tanks shall be
marked distinctly.
6.                      
The orifice for the fuel tank filler necks shall
be on the deck, except for the daily-supply tanks. The filler neck shall be
fitted with a connection piece in accordance with European standard EN
12827:1999.
Such tanks shall be fitted with a breather pipe
terminating in the open air above the deck and arranged in such a way that no
water ingress is possible. The cross-section of the breather pipe shall be at least
1,25 times the cross-section of the filler neck.
If tanks are interconnected, the cross-section
of the connecting pipe shall be at least 1,25 times the cross-section of the
filler neck.
7.                      
Directly at tank outlets the pipework for the
distribution of fuels shall be fitted with a quick-closing valve that can be
operated from the deck, even when the rooms in question are closed.
If the operating device is concealed, the lid
or cover shall not be lockable.
The operating device shall be marked in red. If
the device is concealed it shall be marked with a symbol for the quick-closing
valve in accordance with Fig. 9 of Appendix I with a side length of at least 10
cm.
The first subparagraph shall not apply to fuel
tanks mounted directly on the engine.
8.                      
Fuel pipes, their connections, seals and
fittings shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the mechanical,
chemical and thermal stresses to which they are likely to be subjected. The
fuel pipes shall not be subjected to any adverse influence of heat and it shall
be possible to inspect them throughout their length.
9.                      
Fuel tanks shall be provided with a suitable
capacity-gauging device. Capacity-gauging devices shall be legible right up to
the maximum filling level. Glass gauges shall be effectively protected against
impacts, shall be fitted with an automatic closing device at their base and
their upper end shall be connected to the tanks above their maximum filling
level. The material used for glass gauges shall not deform under normal ambient
temperatures. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation spaces.
Sounding pipes terminating in an engine or boiler room shall be fitted with
suitable self-closing devices.
10.                  
(a) Fuel tanks shall be safeguarded against fuel
spills during bunkering by means of appropriate onboard technical devices which
shall be entered in item 52 of the Union inland navigation certificate.
              (b) If fuel is taken on from
bunkering stations with their own technical devices to prevent fuel spills on
board during bunkering, the equipment requirements in (a) and paragraph 11
shall no longer apply.
11.                  
If fuel tanks are fitted with an automatic
shut-off device, the sensors shall stop fuelling when the tank is 97 % full;
this equipment shall meet the ‘failsafe’ requirements.
If the sensor activates an electrical contact,
which can break the circuit provided by the bunkering station by a binary
signal, it shall be possible to transmit the signal to the bunkering station by
means of a watertight connection plug meeting the requirements of IEC publication
60309-1:1999 for 40 to 50 V DC, housing colour white, earthing contact position
ten o'clock.
12.                  
Fuel tanks shall be provided with openings
having leak-proof closures that are intended to permit cleaning and inspection.
13.                  
Fuel tanks directly supplying the main engines
and engines needed for safe operation of the vessel shall be fitted with a
device emitting both visual and audible signals in the wheelhouse if their
level of filling is not sufficient to ensure further safe operation.
Article 8.06
Storage of lubricating
oil, pipes and accessories
1.                      
Lubricating oil shall be stored in steel tanks
which are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly attached to
the hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, an equivalent material in
terms of fire-resistance may be used. These requirements shall not apply to
tanks having a capacity of no more than 25 litres. Lubricating oil tanks shall
not have common partitions with drinking-water tanks.
2.                      
Lubricating oil tanks and their pipework and
other accessories shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that neither
lubricating oil nor lubricating oil vapour may accidentally reach the inside of
the vessel.
3.                      
No lubricating oil tanks may be located forward
of the collision bulkhead.
4.                      
Lubricating oil tanks and their fittings shall
not be located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
5.                      
The filler orifices for lubricating oil tanks
shall be marked distinctly.
6.                      
Lubricating oil pipes, their connections, seals
and fittings shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the
mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to which they are likely to be
subjected. The pipes shall not be subjected to any adverse influence of heat
and it shall be possible to inspect them throughout their length.
7.                      
Lubricating oil tanks shall be provided with a
suitable capacity-gauging device. Capacity-gauging devices shall be legible
right up to the maximum filling level. Glass gauges shall be effectively
protected against impacts, shall be fitted with an automatic closing device at
their base and their upper end shall be connected to the tanks above their
maximum filling level. The material used for glass gauges shall not deform
under normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in
accommodation spaces. Sounding pipes terminating in an engine or boiler room
shall be fitted with suitable self-closing devices.
Article 8.07
Storage of oils used in
power transmission systems, control and activating 
systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories
1.                      
Oils used in power transmission systems, control
and activating systems and heating systems shall be stored in steel tanks which
are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly attached to the
hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, an equivalent material in terms
of fire-resistance may be used. These requirements shall not apply to tanks
having a capacity of no more than 25 litres. Such oil tanks shall not have
common partitions with drinking-water tanks.
2.                      
Such oil tanks and their pipework and other
accessories shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that neither such oil
nor such oil vapour may accidentally reach the inside of the vessel.
3.                      
No such oil tanks may be located forward of the
collision bulkhead.
4.                      
Such oil tanks and their fittings shall not be
located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
5.                      
The filler orifices for such oil tanks shall be
marked distinctly.
6.                      
Such oil pipes, their connections, seals and
fittings shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the mechanical,
chemical and thermal stresses to which they are likely to be subjected. The
pipes shall not be subjected to any adverse influence of heat and it shall be
possible to inspect them throughout their length.
7.                      
Such oil tanks shall be provided with a suitable
capacity-gauging device. Capacity-gauging devices shall be legible right up to
the maximum filling level. Glass gauges shall be effectively protected against
impacts, shall be fitted with an automatic closing device at their base and
their upper end shall be connected to the tanks above their maximum filling
level. The material used for glass gauges shall not deform under normal ambient
temperatures. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation spaces.
Sounding pipes terminating in an engine or boiler room shall be fitted with
suitable self-closing devices.
Article 8.08
Bilge pumping and drainage
systems
1.                      
It shall be possible to pump out each watertight
compartment separately. However, that requirement shall not apply to watertight
compartments that are normally sealed hermetically during operation.
2.                      
Vessels requiring a crew shall be equipped with
two independent bilge pumps which shall not be installed within the same space.
At least one of these shall be motor driven. However, for vessels with a power
of less than 225 kW or with a deadweight of less than 350 t, or where vessels
not intended for the carriage of goods have a displacement of less than 250 m3,
one pump will suffice which can be either manually-operated or motor-driven.
Each of the required pumps shall be capable of
use on each watertight compartment
3.                      
The minimum pumping capacity Q1 of
the first bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula:
Q1 = 0,1 · d12
(1/min)
d1 is calculated via the
formula:
The minimum pumping capacity Q2
of the second bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula:
Q2
= 0,1 · d22 (l/min)
d2
is calculated using the formula:
However, the value d2 need not
exceed value d1.
For the calculation of Q2 l
shall be taken to be the length of the longest watertight compartment.
In these formulae:
 l ||   || is the length of the watertight compartment in question, in (m); 
 d1 ||   || is the calculated internal diameter of the main drainage pipe, in (mm); 
 d2 ||   || is the calculated internal diameter of the branch pipe, in (mm). 
4.                      
Where the bilge pumps are connected to a
drainage system the drainage pipes shall have an internal diameter of at least
d1, in mm, and the branch pipes an internal diameter of at least d2, in mm.
Where vessels are less than 25 m in length the
values d1 and d2 may be reduced to 35 mm.
5.                      
Only self-priming bilge pumps are permitted.
6.                      
There shall be at least one suction on both the
starboard and port sides of all flat-bottomed, drainable compartments that are
wider than 5 m.
7.                      
It may be possible to drain the aft peak via the
main engine room by means of an easily accessible, automatically closable
fitting.
8.                      
Branch pipes of single compartments shall be
connected to the main drainage pipe by means of a lockable non-return valve.
Compartments or other spaces that are capable
of carrying ballast need to be connected to the drainage system only by means
of a simple closing device. That requirement shall not apply to holds that are
capable of carrying ballast. Such holds shall be filled with ballast water by
means of ballast piping that is permanently installed and independent of the
drainage pipes, or by means of branch pipes that can be connected to the main
drainage pipe by flexible pipes or flexible adaptors. Water intake valves
located in the bottom of the hold shall not be permitted for this purpose.
9.                      
Hold bilges shall be fitted with gauging
devices.
10.                  
Where a drainage system incorporates permanently
installed pipework the bilge-bottom drainage pipes intended to extract oily
water shall be equipped with closures that have been sealed in position by an
inspection body. The number and position of those closures shall be entered on
the Union inland navigation certificate.
11.                  
Locking the closures in position shall be
regarded as equivalent to sealing in accordance with paragraph 10. The key or
keys for the locking of the closures shall be indicated accordingly and kept in
a marked and easily accessible location in the engine room.
Article 8.09
Oily water and used oil
stores
1.                      
It shall be possible to store, on board, oily
water accumulated during operation. The engine-room bilge is considered to be a
store for this purpose.
2.                      
In order to store used oils there shall, in the
engine room, be one or several specific receptacles whose capacity corresponds
to at least 1,5 times the quantity of the used oils from the sumps of all of
the internal combustion engines and transmissions installed, together with the
hydraulic fluids from the hydraulic-fluid tanks.
The connections used in order to empty the
receptacles referred to above shall comply with European standard EN 1305:1996.
3.                      
Where vessels are only used on short-haul
operation the inspection body may grant exceptions from the requirements of paragraph
2.
Article 8.10
Noise emitted by vessels
1.                      
The noise produced by a vessel under way, and in
particular the engine air intake and exhaust noises, shall be damped by using
appropriate means.
2.                      
The noise generated by a vessel under way shall
not exceed 75 dB(A) at a lateral distance of 25 m from the ship's side.
3.                      
Apart from transhipment operations the noise
generated by a stationary vessel shall not exceed 65 dB(A) at a lateral
distance of 25 m from the ship's side.
CHAPTER 8a 
EMISSION OF GASEOUS AND PARTICULATE POLLUTANTS FROM DIESEL ENGINES
Article 8a.01
Definitions
For the purposes of this Chapter, the
following defintitons shall apply:
1.      ‘engine’ means an engine which works
on the compression-ignition principle (diesel engine);
1a.     ‘propulsion engine’ means an engine
for the propulsion of an inland waterway vessel, as defined in Article 2 of
Directive 97/68/EC[2];
1b.    ‘auxiliary engine’ means an engine for
use in applications other than the propulsion of a craft;
1c.     ‘exchange engine’ means a used,
overhauled engine which is intended to replace a currently operational engine
and which is of the same design (in-line engine, V-engine) as the engine to be
replaced, which has the same number of cylinders and whose power output and
speed do not differ by more than 10 % from the power output and speed of the
engine to be replaced;
2.      ‘type-approval’ means the procedure as
defined in Article 2, second indent of Directive 97/68/EC, as amended, whereby
a Member State certifies that an engine type or an engine family with regard to
the level of emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine(s)
satisfies the relevant technical requirements;
3.      ‘installation test’ means the
procedure whereby the competent authority makes sure that, even where an engine
fitted to a craft has undergone, since the issuing of the type-approval, any
modifications or adaptations with regard to the level of emission of gaseous
and particulate pollutants, that engine still complies with the technical
requirements of this Chapter;
4.      ‘intermediate test’ means the
procedure whereby the competent authority makes sure that, even where a craft’s
engine has undergone, since the installation test, any modifications or
adaptations with regard to the level of emission of gaseous and particulate
pollutants, that engine still complies with the technical requirements of this
Chapter;
5.      ‘special test’ means the procedure
whereby the competent authority makes sure that, after each significant
modification to a craft’s engine with regard to the level of emission of
gaseous and particulate pollutants, that engine still complies with the
technical requirements of this Chapter;
6.      (left void);
7.      ‘engine family’ means a manufacturer’s
grouping of engines which through their design, are expected to have similar
exhaust emission characteristics of gaseous and particulate pollutants as
defined in Article 2, fourth indent of Directive 97/68/EC and which comply with
the requirements of the rules in accordance with Article 8a.03;
8.      (left void);
9.      (left void);
10.    (left void);
11.    ‘manufacturer’ as defined in Article 2
of Directive 97/68/EC, as amended, means the person or body who is responsible
to the approval authority for all aspects of the type-approval process and for
ensuring conformity of production. It is not essential that the person or body
is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the engine;
12.    (left void);
13.    (left void);
14.    (left void);
15.    (left void);
16     ‘engine parameter protocol’ means the
document pursuant to Appendix V, in which all the parameters, together with
changes, and including components and engine settings which affect the level of
emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from the engine are duly
recorded;
17.    ‘engine manufacturer’s instructions on
monitoring the components and engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas
context’ means the document produced for the purpose of implementing the
installation test and the intermediate or special tests.
Article 8a.02
General provisions
1.                      
Without prejudice to the requirements of
Directive 97/68/EC, the provisions of this Chapter shall apply to all engines
with a rated power output more than 19 kW installed in inland waterway vessels
or in machinery on board such vessel.
2.                      
The engines shall comply with the requirements
of Directive 97/68/EC.
3.                      
Compliance with the exhaust gas emission limit
values of the applicable stage shall be determined on the basis of a
type-approval pursuant to Article 8a.03.
4.                      
Installation tests
(a)     After the installation of the engine
on board, but before it is brought into service, an installation test shall be
carried out. This test, which forms part of the initial inspection of the
craft, or of a special inspection by virtue of the relevant engine having been
installed, shall result either in the registration of the engine in the Union
inland navigation certificate to be issued for the first time or in the modification
of the existing Union inland navigation certificate.
(b)     The inspection body may dispense with
an installation test pursuant to (a), if an engine having a rated power output
PN of less than 130 kW is replaced by an engine covered by the same
type-approval. As a precondition, the vessel’s owner or his authorised
representative shall be required to notify the inspection body of the engine’s
replacement and to submit a copy of the type-approval document and details of
the identification number of the newly installed engine. The inspection body
shall make the appropriate amendments to the Union inland navigation
certificate (see box 52).
5.                      
Intermediate tests on the engine shall be
carried out in the context of the periodical inspection pursuant to Article
2.09.
6.                      
After each significant modification to an
engine, where such modifications have the potential to affect the emission of
gaseous and particulate pollutants from the engine, a special test must
invariably be carried out.
6a.          The results of the tests pursuant
to Article 8a.02(4) to (6) shall be registered in the engine parameter
protocol.
7.                      
The inspection body shall indicate in the Union
inland navigation certificate, in box 52, the type-approval numbers and
identification numbers of all the engines that are installed on board the
vessel and that are subject to the requirements of this Chapter. For engines
covered by Article 9(4)(a) of Directive 97/68/EC the identification number
shall suffice.
8.                      
For the purpose of discharging tasks pursuant to
this Chapter, the competent authority may employ a technical service.
Article 8a.03
Recognised type-approvals
1.                      
The following type-approvals shall be
recognised, provided that the engine application is covered by the appropriate
type approval:
(a)     type-approvals pursuant to Directive
97/68/EC;
(b)     type-approvals which, pursuant to
Directive 97/68/EC[3]
are recognised as equivalent.
2.                      
For each type-approved engine, the following
documents or copies of them shall be kept available on board:
(a)     the type-approval document;
(b)     the engine manufacturer’s instructions
on monitoring the components and engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust
gas context;
(c)     the engine parameter protocol.
Article 8a.04
Installation test and
intermediate and special test
1.                      
At the time of the installation test pursuant to
Article 8a.02(4) and in the event of intermediate tests pursuant to Article
8a.02(5) and special tests pursuant to Article 8a.02(6), the competent
authority will inspect the current state of the engine with reference to the
components, adjustments and parameters specified in the instructions pursuant
to Article 8a.01(17).
If the authority finds that the engine does not
comply with the approved engine type or the approved engine family, it may:
(a)     require that
         (aa) steps are taken to re-establish
engine conformity;
         (bb) require appropriate
modifications to the type-approval document; or
(b)     order the actual emissions to be
measured.
Failing the re-establishment of engine
conformity or in the absence of appropriate modifications to the type-approval
document or in the event that the measurements indicate non-compliance with the
emission limit values, the competent authority shall refuse to issue a Union
inland navigation certificate or shall revoke any Union inland navigation
certificate that has already been issued.
2.                      
In the case of engines with exhaust gas after
treatment systems, checks shall be carried out to establish that these systems
are functioning properly in the context of the installation test and the
intermediate or special tests.
3.                      
The tests according to paragraph 1 are made on
the basis of the engine manufacturer’s instruction on monitoring the components
and engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas emission context. The
instruction, to be drawn up by the manufacturer and to be approved by a
competent authority, shall specify the exhaust relevant components as well as
adjustments and parameters, whereby continuous compliance with the exhaust gas
emission limit values can be assumed. The instruction contains at least the
following details:
(a)     type of engine and, where appropriate,
engine family with an indication of the rated output and rated speed;
(b)     list of the components and engine
parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas emission context;
(c)     unambiguous features to identify the
permitted components of relevance in an exhaust gas emission context (e.g. part
numbers appearing on the components);
(d)     engine parameters of relevance in an
exhaust gas emission context such as setting ranges for the injection timing,
permitted cooling water temperature, maximum exhaust gas backpressure, etc.
In the case of engines fitted with exhaust gas
after treatment systems, the instruction shall also include procedures to check
that the exhaust gas after treatment installation is operating efficiently.
4.                      
The installation of engines in craft shall
comply with the restrictions set out in the scope of the type approval. In
addition, the intake under pressure and the exhaust gas back pressure shall not
exceed the values indicated for the approved engine.
5.                      
If the engines being installed on board belong
to an engine family, no readjustments or modifications which could adversely
affect exhaust gas and particulate emissions or which lie outside the proposed
adjustment range may be carried out.
6.                      
If, after type-approval, readjustments or
modifications to the engine need to be made, these should be accurately entered
in the engine parameter protocol.
7.                      
If the installation and intermediate tests show
that, in relation to their parameters, components and adjustable features, the
engines installed on board comply with the specifications set out in the
instructions pursuant to Article 8a.01(17), then it may be assumed that the
exhaust gas and particulate emissions from the engines likewise comply with the
basic limit values.
8.                      
Where an engine has obtained type-approval, the
competent authority may, at its own discretion, reduce the installation test or
intermediate test pursuant to these provisions. However, the full test shall be
carried out in respect of at least one cylinder or one engine of an engine
family and may only be reduced if there is reason to believe that all other
cylinders or engines behave similarly to the cylinder or engine under
investigation.
Article 8a.05
Technical services
1.                      
The technical services shall comply with the
European standard on general requirements for the competence of testing and
calibration laboratories (EN ISO/IEC 17025:2000), having due regard to the
following conditions:
(a)     Engine manufacturers cannot be
recognised as technical services.
(b)     For the purposes of this chapter, a
technical service may, with permission of the competent authority, use
facilities outside its own test laboratory.
(c)     If requested to do so by the competent
authority, technical services shall demonstrate that they are recognised to
perform the type of activities described in this paragraph within the European
Union.
(d)     Third country services may only be
notified as a recognised technical service in the framework of a bilateral or
multilateral agreement between the European Union and the third country in
question.
CHAPTER 9
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Article 9.01
General
1.                      
Where there are no specific requirements
concerning certain parts of an installation the safety level shall be
considered satisfactory where those parts have been produced in accordance with
a European standard in force or in accordance with the requirements of an
approved classification society.
The relevant documents shall be submitted to
the inspection body.
2.                      
Documents containing the following, and duly
stamped by the inspection body, shall be kept on board:
(a)     general drawings concerning the entire
electrical installation;
(b)     switching diagrams for the main
switchboard, the emergency switchboard and the distribution switchboard,
together with the most important technical data such as the amperage and rated
current of the protection and control devices;
(c)     power data concerning the electrical
machinery and equipment;
(d)     types of cable and information on
conductor cross-sections.
It is not necessary to keep such documents on
board unmanned craft, but they shall be available at all times with the owner.
3.                      
The equipment shall be designed for permanent
lists of up to 15° and ambient inside temperatures of between 0 and + 40 °C,
and on the deck between - 20 °C and + 40 °C. It shall function perfectly within
those limits.
4.                      
The electrical and electronic equipment and
appliances shall be fully accessible and easy to maintain.
Article 9.02
Electricity supply systems
1.                      
Where craft are fitted with an electrical
system, that system shall in principle have at least two power sources in such
a way that where one power source fails the remaining source is able to supply
the power consumers needed for safe navigation for at least 30 minutes.
2.                      
Adequate rating of the power supply shall be
demonstrated by means of a power balance. An appropriate simultaneity factor
may be taken into account.
3.                      
Independently of paragraph 1, Article 6.04 shall
apply to the power source for the steering system (rudder installations).
Article 9.03
Protection against
physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water
The type of minimum protection for
permanently installed parts of an installation shall be as set out in the
following table:
 Location || Type of minimum protection (in accordance with IEC publ. 60529: 1992) 
 Generators || Motors || Trans-formers || Panels Distributors Switches || Fittings || Lighting equipment 
 Operation rooms, engine rooms, steering-gear compartments || IP 22 || IP 22 || IP[4] 22 || IP[5] [6] 22 || IP 44 || IP 22 
 Holds ||   ||   ||   ||   || IP 55 || IP 55 
 Battery and paint lockers ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || IP 44 u. (Ex)[7] 
 Free decks and open steering positions ||   || IP 55 ||   || IP 55 || IP 55 || IP 55 
 Wheelhouse ||   || IP 22 || IP 22 || IP 22 || IP 22 || IP 22 
 Accommodation apart from sanitary facilities and washrooms ||   ||   ||   || IP 22 || IP 20 || IP 20 
 Sanitary facilities and washrooms ||   || IP 44 || IP 44 || IP 44 || IP 55 || IP 44 
Article 9.04
Protection from explosion
Only explosion-proof electrical equipment
(certified safety) may be installed in spaces where potentially explosive gases
or mixtures of gases are likely to accumulate, such as compartments dedicated
for accumulators or the storage of highly inflammable products. No light
switches or switches for other electrical appliances shall be installed in
these spaces. The protection from explosion shall take account of the characteristics
of the potentially explosive gases or mixtures of gases that are likely to
arise (explosion-potential group, temperature class).
Article 9.05
Earthing
1.                      
Systems under a voltage of more than 50 V need
to be earthed.
2.                      
Metal parts that are open to physical contact
and which, during normal operation, are not electrically live, such as engine
frames and casings, appliances and lighting equipment, shall be earthed
separately where they are not in electrical contact with the hull as a result
of their installation.
3.                      
The casings of mobile power consumers and
portable devices shall, during normal use, be earthed by means of an additional
earthing conductor that is incorporated into the power cable.
That provision shall not apply where a
protective circuit-separation transformer is used, nor to appliances fitted
with protective insulation (double insulation
4.                      
The cross-sections of the earthing conductors
shall be not less than given in the following table:
 Cross-section of outside conductors (mm2) || Minimum cross-section of earthing conductors 
 within insulated cables (mm2) || fitted separately (mm2) 
 from 0,5 to 4 || same cross-section as that of the outside conductor || 4 
 more than 4 to 16 || same cross-section as that of the outside conductor || same cross-section as that of the outside conductor 
 more than 16 to 35 || 16 || 16 
 more than 35 to 120 || half of the cross-section of the outside conductor || half of the cross-section of the outside conductor 
 more than 120 || 70 || 70 
Article 9.06
Maximum permissible
voltages
1.                      
The following voltages shall not be exceeded:
 Type of installation || Maximum permissible voltage 
 Direct current || Single-phase alternating current || Three-phase alternating current 
 a. Power and heating installations including the sockets for general use || 250 V || 250 V || 500 V 
 b. Lighting, communications, command and information installations including the sockets for general use || 250 V || 250 V || - 
 c. Sockets intended to supply portable devices used on open decks or within narrow or damp metal lockers, apart from boilers and tanks: ||   ||   ||   
  1. In general || 50 V[8] || 50 V[9] || - 
  2. Where a protective circuit-separation transformer only supplies one appliance || - || 250 V[10] || - 
  3. Where protective-insulation (double insulation) appliances are used || 250 V || 250 V || - 
  4. Where ≤ 30 mA default current circuit breakers are used. || - || 250 V || 500 V 
 d. Mobile power consumers such as electrical equipment for containers, motors, blowers and mobile pumps which are not normally moved during service and whose conducting parts which are open to physical contact are earthed by means of an earthing conductor that is incorporated into the connecting cable and which, in addition to that earthing conductor, are connected to the hull by their specific positioning or by an additional conductor || 250 V || 250 V || 500 V 
 e. Sockets intended to supply portable appliances used inside boilers and tanks || 50 V[11] || 50 V[12] || - 
2.                      
By way of derogation from paragraph1, if the
necessary protective measures are applied higher voltages shall be acceptable:
(a)     for power installations where their
power so requires;
(b)     for special on-board installations
such as radio and ignition systems.
Article 9.07
Distribution systems
1.                      
The following distribution systems are allowed
for direct current and single-phase alternating current:
(a)     two-conductor systems of which one is
earthed (L1/N/PE);
(b)     single-conductor systems using the
hull return principle, only for local installations (for example, starting gear
for combustion engines, cathodic protection) (L1/PEN);
(c)     two-conductor systems that are
insulated from the hull (L1/L2/PE).
2.                      
The following distribution systems are allowed
for three-phase alternating current:
(a)     four-conductor systems with earthing
of the neutral point, not using the hull return principle (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) =
(network TN-S) or (network TT);
(b)     three-conductor systems insulated from
the hull (Ll/L2/L3/PE) = (network IT);
(c)     three-conductor systems with earthing
of the neutral point using the hull return principle, however, that shall not
be allowed for terminal circuits (L1/L2/L3/PEN).
3.                      
The inspection body may allow the use of other
systems.
Article 9.08
Connection to shore or
other external networks
1.                      
Incoming supply lines from shore networks or
other external networks to the installations of the onboard network shall have
a permanent connection on board in the form of fixed terminals or fixed plug
sockets. The cable connections shall not be subjected to any pulling load.
2.                      
The hull shall be capable of being earthed
effectively when the connection voltage exceeds 50 V. The earthing connection
shall be specially marked.
3.                      
The switching devices for the connection shall
be arranged such as to prevent the concurrent operation of the onboard network
generators and the shore network or another external network. A brief period of
concurrent operation shall be permitted when changing from one system to
another without a break in voltage.
4.                      
The connection shall be protected against short
circuiting and overload.
5.                      
The main switchboard shall indicate whether the
connection is live.
6.                      
Indicator devices shall be installed to enable
comparison of polarity in the case of direct current and phase sequence in the
case of three-phase alternating current, between the connection and the onboard
network.
7.                      
A panel adjacent to the connection shall
indicate:
(a)     the measures required to establish the
connection;
(b)     the type of current and the nominal
voltage and, for alternating current, the frequency.
Article 9.09
Power supply to other
craft
1.                      
When power is supplied to other craft, a
separate connection shall be used. If power sockets rated at more than 16 A are
used to supply current to other craft, devices (such as switches or interlocks)
shall be provided to ensure that connection and disconnection can take place
only when the line is dead.
2.                      
Cable connections shall not be subjected to any
pulling load.
3.                      
Article 9.08, paragraphs 3 to 7, shall apply mutatis
mutandis.
Article 9.10
Generators and motors
1.                      
Generators, motors and their terminal boxes
shall be accessible for inspections, measurements and repairs. The type of
protection shall correspond to their location (see Article 9.03).
2.                      
Generators driven by the main engine, the
propeller shaft or by an auxiliary set intended for other purposes shall be
designed with respect to the range of rotational speeds which can occur during
normal operation.
Article 9.11
Accumulators
1.                      
Accumulators shall be accessible and so arranged
as not to shift due to movements of the craft. They shall not be placed where
they will be exposed to excessive heat, extreme cold, spray, steam or vapour.
They shall not be installed in the wheelhouse,
accommodation or holds. This requirement shall not apply to accumulators for
portable appliances, or to accumulators requiring a charging power of less than
0,2 kW.
2.                      
Accumulators requiring a charging power of more
than 2,0 kW (calculated on the basis of the maximum charging current and the
nominal voltage of the accumulator and taking into account the characteristic
charging curve of the charging appliance) shall be installed in a special room.
If placed on deck enclosing them in a cabinet will suffice.
Accumulators requiring a charging power not
exceeding 2,0 kW may be installed in a cabinet or chest not only if placed on
deck but also below decks. They may also be installed in an engine room or any
other well-ventilated space provided that they are protected against falling
objects and dripping water.
3.                      
The interior surfaces of all rooms, cabinets or
boxes, shelving or other built-in features intended for accumulators shall be
protected against the harmful effects of electrolytes.
4.                      
Provision shall be made for effective
ventilation when accumulators are installed in a closed compartment, cabinet or
chest. Forced-draught ventilation shall be provided for nickel-cadmium
accumulators requiring a charging power of more than 2 kW and for lead-acid
accumulators requiring more than 3 kW.
The air shall enter at the bottom and be
discharged at the top so as to ensure total gas extraction.
Ventilation ducts shall not include any devices
which obstruct the air flow, such as stop valves.
5.                      
The required air throughput (Q) shall be
calculated using the following formula:
Q = 0,11 · I · n (m3/h)
where:
 I || = || 1/4 of the maximum current, in A, provided by the charging device; 
 n || = || the number of cells. 
In the case of buffer accumulators within the
onboard network other methods of calculation taking into account the
characteristic charging curve of the charging device may be accepted by the
inspection body, provided that these methods are based on the provisions of
approved classification societies or on relevant standards.
6.                      
Where natural ventilation is used the
cross-section of the ducts shall be sufficient for the required air throughput
on the basis of an air-flow velocity of 0,5 m/section. However, the
cross-section shall be at least 80 cm2 for lead-acid accumulators and 120 cm2
for nickel-cadmium accumulators.
7.                      
Where forced-draught ventilation is used a fan
shall be provided, preferably of the suction type, whose motor shall be clear
of the gas or air stream.
Fans shall be so designed as to preclude the
generation of sparks through contact between a blade and the fan casing and to
avoid any electrostatic charges.
8.                      
‘Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited’ signs
according to Figure 2 of Appendix I having a minimum diameter of 10 cm shall be
affixed to the doors or covers of compartments, cabinets and chests containing
accumulators.
Article 9.12
Switchgear installations
1.                      
Electrical switchboards
(a)     Appliances, switches, fuses and
switchboard instruments shall be clearly arranged and shall be accessible for
maintenance and repair.
Terminals for voltages up to 50 V, and those
for voltages higher than 50 V, shall be kept separate and marked appropriately.
(b)     For all switches and appliances marker
plates identifying the circuit shall be affixed to the switchboards.
The nominal amperage and the circuit for fuses
shall be identified.
(c)     When appliances with an operating
voltage greater than 50 V are installed behind doors the live components of
those appliances shall be protected against accidental contact while the doors
are open.
(d)     The materials of switchboards shall
have suitable mechanical strength and be durable, flame-retardant and
self-extinguishing; they shall not be hygroscopic.
(e)     If high rupture capacity (HRC)-fuses
are installed in electrical switchboards, accessories and personal protective
equipment shall be available for installing and removing such fuses.
2.                      
Switches, protective devices
(a)     Generator circuits and power consumer
circuits shall be protected against short circuiting and overload on all
non-earthed conductors. Switching devices triggered by short-circuiting and
overload or fuses may be used for this purpose.
Circuits supplying electric motors of drive
units (steering system) and their control circuits shall only be protected
against short circuiting. Where circuits include thermal circuit-breakers these
shall be neutralised or set at not less than twice the nominal amperage.
(b)     Outputs from the main switchboard to
power consumers operating at more than 16 A shall include a load or power
switch.
(c)     Power consumers for the propulsion of
the craft, the steering system, the rudder position indicator, navigation or
safety systems, and power consumers with a nominal amperage greater than 16 A
shall be supplied by separate circuits.
(d)     The circuits of power consumers
required for propelling and manoeuvring the vessel shall be supplied directly
by the main switchboard.
(e)     Circuit-breaking equipment shall be
selected on the basis of nominal amperage, thermal or dynamic strength, and
breaking capacity. Switches shall simultaneously cut off all live conductors.
The switching position shall be identifiable.
(f)      Fuses shall be of the enclosed-melt
type and be made of ceramic or an equivalent material. It shall be possible to
change them without any danger of physical contact for the operator.
3.                      
Measuring and monitoring devices
(a)     Generator, accumulator and
distribution circuits shall be equipped with measuring and monitoring devices
where the safe operation of the installation so requires.
(b)     Non-earthed networks with a voltage of
more than 50 V shall be equipped with an earthing detection device capable of
giving both visual and audible alarm. In secondary installations such as
control circuits, this device may be dispensed with.
4.                      
Location of electrical switchboards
(a)     Switchboards shall be located in
accessible and well-ventilated spaces and be protected against water and
mechanical damage.
Piping and air ducts shall be so arranged that
in the event of leakage the switchboards cannot be damaged. If their
installation near electrical switchboards is inevitable, pipes shall not have
detachable connections nearby.
(b)     Cabinets and wall recesses in which
unprotected switching devices are installed shall be of a flame-retardant
material or be protected by a metal or other flame-retardant sheathing.
(c)     When the voltage is greater than 50 V,
insulating gratings or mats shall be placed at the operator's position in front
of the main switchboard.
Article 9.13
Emergency circuit breakers
Emergency circuit breakers for oil burners,
fuel pumps, fuel separators and engine-room ventilators shall be installed
centrally outside the spaces containing the equipment.
Article 9.14
Installation fittings
1.                      
Cable entries shall be sized as a function of
the cables to be connected and be appropriate to the types of cable used.
2.                      
Sockets for distribution circuits at different
voltages or frequencies shall be impossible to confuse.
3.                      
Switches shall simultaneously switch all
non-earthed conductors within a circuit. However, single-pole switches within
non-earthed circuitry shall be permitted in accommodation-lighting circuits
apart from in laundries, bathrooms, washrooms and other rooms with wet
facilities.
4.                      
Where amperage exceeds 16 A it shall be possible
to lock the sockets by means of a switch in such a way that the plug can only
be inserted and withdrawn with the power switched off.
Article 9.15
Cables
1.                      
Cables shall be flame-retardant,
self-extinguishing and resistant to water and oil.
In accommodation, other types of cable may be
used, provided that they are effectively protected, have flame-retardant
characteristics and are self-extinguishing.
Flame-retardant standards of electric cables
shall be in accordance with:
(a)     IEC publications 60332-1:1993,
60332-3:2000; or
(b)     equivalent regulations recognised by
one of the Member States.
2.                      
Conductors of cables used for power and lighting
circuits shall have a minimum cross-section of 1,5 mm2.
3.                      
Metal armouring, shielding and sheathing of
cables shall not, under normal operating conditions, be used as conductors or
for earthing.
4.                      
Metal shielding and sheathing of cables in power
and lighting installations shall be earthed at least at one end.
5.                      
The cross-section of conductors shall take
account of their maximum permissible end-temperature (current-carrying
capacity) and of the permissible voltage drop. The voltage drop between the
main switchboard and the least favourable point of the installation shall not
be more than 5 % for lighting or more than 7 % for power or heating circuits,
referred to the nominal voltage.
6.                      
Cables shall be protected against mechanical
damage.
7.                      
The means of fixing the cables shall ensure that
any pulling load remains within the permissible limits.
8.                      
When cables pass through bulkheads or decks, the
mechanical strength, watertightness and fire resistance of these bulkheads and
decks shall not be affected by the penetrations.
9.                      
Terminations and joints in all conductors shall
be so made as to retain the original electrical, mechanical, flame-retardant
and, where necessary, fire resistant properties. The number of cable joints
shall be kept to a minimum.
10.                  
Cables connected to retractable wheelhouses
shall be sufficiently flexible and shall have insulation with sufficient
flexibility down to — 20 °C and resistance to steam and vapour, ultraviolet
rays and ozone.
Article 9.16
Lighting installations
1.                      
Lighting appliances shall be so installed that
the heat they emit cannot set fire to nearby inflammable objects or components.
2.                      
Lighting appliances on open decks shall be so
installed as not to impede the recognition of navigation lights.
3.                      
When two or more lighting appliances are
installed in an engine room or boiler room, they shall be supplied by at least
two different circuits. This requirement shall also apply to spaces where
cooling machinery, hydraulic machinery, or electric motors are installed.
Article 9.17
Navigation lights
1.                      
Switchboards for navigation lights shall be
installed in the wheelhouse. They shall be supplied by a separate feeder from
the main switchboard or by two independent secondary distributions.
2.                      
Navigation lights shall be supplied, protected
and switched separately from the navigation lights switchboard.
3.                      
No fault in the monitoring installation, as
provided for in Article 7.05(2), shall affect the operation of the light which
it monitors.
4.                      
Several lights forming a functional unit and
installed together at the same point may be jointly supplied, switched and
monitored. The monitoring installation shall be capable of identifying the
failure of any one of these lights. However, it shall not be possible to use
both light sources in a double light (two lights mounted one above the other or
in the same housing) simultaneously.
Article 9.18
(Left void)
Article 9.19
Alarm and safety systems
for mechanical equipment
The alarm and safety systems for monitoring
and protecting mechanical equipment shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Alarm systems
The alarm systems shall be so designed that no
failure in the alarm system can result in failure of the apparatus or
installation being monitored.
Binary transmitters shall be designed on the
quiescent-current principle or on the monitored load-current principle.
Visual alarms shall remain visible until the
fault has been remedied; an alarm that has been acknowledged shall be
distinguishable from an alarm that has not yet been acknowledged. Each alarm
shall also comprise an audible warning. It shall be possible to switch off
acoustic alarms. Switching off one acoustic alarm shall not prevent another
signal from being set off by another cause.
Exceptions can be permitted in the case of
alarm systems comprising less than five measurement points.
(b) Safety systems
Safety systems shall be designed to halt or
slow down the operation of the affected equipment, or to warn a
permanently-manned station to do so before a critical state is reached.
Binary transmitters shall be designed according
to the load-current principle.
If safety systems are not designed to be
self-monitoring it shall be possible to check that they are operating
correctly.
Safety systems shall be independent of other
systems.
Article 9.20
Electronic equipment
1.                      
General
The test conditions in paragraph 2 shall apply
only to electronic devices that are necessary for the steering system and the
craft's power plants, including their ancillaries.
2.                      
Test conditions
(a)     The stresses arising from the
following tests shall not cause electronic devices to be damaged or to
malfunction. The tests in accordance with relevant international standards,
such as IEC publication 60092-504:2001, apart from the cold-condition test,
shall be carried out with the device switched on. These tests shall include
checking of proper operation.
(b) Variations in voltage and frequency
   || Variations 
   ||   || continuous || short-duration 
 General || Frequency || ± 5 % || ± 10 % 5 s 
 Voltage || ± 10 % || ± 20 % 1.5 s 
 Battery operation || Voltage || + 30 %/- 25 % ||   
(c) Heating test
The sample is brought up to a temperature of 55
°C within a half-hour period. After that temperature has been reached it is
maintained for 16 hours. An operating test is then carried out.
(d) Cold-condition test
The sample is switched off and cooled to -25 °C
and held at that temperature for two hours. The temperature is then raised to 0
°C and an operating test is carried out.
(e) Vibration test
The vibration test shall be carried out along
the three axes at the resonance frequency of the devices or of components for
the period of 90 minutes in each case. If no clear resonance emerges the
vibration test shall be carried out at 30 Hz.
The vibration test shall be carried out by
sinusoidal oscillation within the following limits:
General:
f = 2,0 to 13,2 Hz; a = ± 1 mm
(amplitude a = 1/2 the vibration width)
f = 13,2 Hz to 100 Hz: acceleration ± 0,7 g.
Equipment intended to be fitted to diesel
engines or steering apparatus shall be tested as follows:
f = 2,0 to 25 Hz; a = ± 1,6 mm
(amplitude a = 1/2 the vibration width)
f = 25 Hz to 100 Hz; acceleration ± 4 g.
The sensors intended to be installed in
diesel-engine exhaust pipes may be exposed to considerably higher stresses.
Account shall be taken of this during the tests.
(f)      The electromagnetic compatibility
test shall be carried out on the basis of IEC publications 61000-4-2:1995,
61000-4-3:2002, 61000-4-4:1995, at test degree number 3.
(g)     Proof that the electronic equipment is
adequate for these test conditions shall be provided by their manufacturer. A
certificate by an approved classification society shall likewise be considered
to be proof.
Article 9.21
Electromagnetic
compatibility
The operation of the electric and
electronic systems shall not be impaired by electromagnetic interference.
General measures shall, with equal importance, extend to:
(a)     disconnection of the transmission
paths between the source of interference and affected devices;
(b)     reducing the causes of disturbance at
their source;
(c)     reducing the sensitivity of affected
devices to interference.
CHAPTER 10
EQUIPMENT
Article 10.01
Anchor equipment
1.                      
Vessels intended for the carriage of goods,
apart from ship-borne lighters whose length L does not exceed 40m, shall be
equipped with bow anchors whose total mass P is obtained using the following
formula:
P = k · B · T (kg)
where
 k ||   || is a coefficient that takes account of the relationship between length L and beam B, and of the type of vessel: for lighters, however, k = c will be taken; 
 c ||   || is an empirical coefficient given in the following table:               Dead-weight tonnage in t        Coefficient c               up to 400 inclusive      45               from 400 to 650 inclusive       55               from 650 to 1000 inclusive     65               more than 1000          70 
On vessels whose dead-weight tonnage is not
greater than 400 t and which, owing to their design and intended purpose, are
used only on predetermined short-haul sections, the inspection body may accept
that only two-thirds of total mass P is required for the bow anchors.
2.                      
Passenger vessels and vessels not intended for
the carriage of goods, apart from pushers, shall be fitted with bow anchors
whose total mass P is obtained using the following formula:
P = k · B · T (kg)
where:
 k ||   || is the coefficient corresponding to paragraph 1, but where in order to obtain the value of the empirical coefficient (c) the water displacement in m3 entered in the Union inland navigation certificate shall be taken instead of the deadweight tonnage. 
3.                      
Vessels referred to in paragraph 1 whose maximum
length does not exceed 86 m shall be equipped with stern anchors whose total
mass is equal to 25 % of mass P.
Vessels whose maximum length exceeds 86 m shall
be equipped with stern anchors whose total mass is equal to 50 % of mass P
calculated in accordance with paragraph 1 or 2.
Stern anchors are not required for:
(a)     vessels for which the stern anchor
mass will be less than 150 kg; in the case of vessels referred to in paragraph
1, final subparagraph, the reduced mass of the bow anchors shall be taken into
account;
(b) lighters.
4.                      
Vessels intended to propel rigid convoys which
do not exceed 86 m in length shall be equipped with stern anchors whose total
mass is equal to 25 % of maximum mass P calculated in accordance with
paragraph1 for the formations (considered to be a nautical unit) permitted and
entered in the Union inland navigation certificate.
Vessels intended to propel rigid convoys which
exceed 86 m in length downstream shall be equipped with stern anchors whose
total mass is equal to 50 % of the maximum mass P calculated in accordance with
paragraph 1 for the formations (considered to be a nautical unit) permitted and
entered in the Union inland navigation certificate.
5.                      
The anchor masses established in accordance
withparagraphs 1 to 4 may be reduced for certain special anchors.
6.                      
The total mass P specified for bow anchors may
be distributed between one or two anchors. It may be reduced by 15 % where the
vessel is equipped with only a single bow anchor and the hawse pipe is located
amidships.
The total mass required for stern anchors for
pushers and vessels whose maximum length exceeds 86 m may be distributed between
one or two anchors.
The mass of the lightest anchor shall not be
less than 45 % of that total mass.
7.                      
Cast iron anchors shall not be permitted.
8.                      
On anchors their mass shall be indicated in
characters which stand out in relief in a durable manner.
9.                      
Anchors having a mass in excess of 50 kg shall
be equipped with windlasses.
10.                  
Each bow anchor chain shall have a minimum
length of:
(a)     40 m for vessels not exceeding 30 m in
length;
(b)     10 m longer than the vessel where this
is more than 30 m and up to 50 m in length;
(c)     60 m where vessels are more than 50 m
in length.
Each of the stern anchor chains shall be at
least 40 m long. However, where vessels need to stop facing downstream they
shall have stern anchor chains that are each at least 60 m in length.
11.                  
The minimum tensile strength R of the anchor
chains shall be calculated using the following formulae:
(a) anchors having a mass up to 500 kg:
              R = 0,35 · P' (kN);
(b) anchors having a mass of more than 500 kg
and not exceeding 2000 kg:
;
(c) anchors having a mass of more than 2000
kg:
              R = 0,25 · P' (kN).
where
 P' ||   || is the theoretical mass of each anchor determined in accordance with paragraphs 1 to 4 and 6. 
The tensile strength of anchor chains shall be
stated according to a standard in force in a Member State.
Where the anchors have a mass greater than that
required by paragraphs 1 to 6, the tensile strength of the anchor chain shall
be determined as a function of the actual anchor mass.
12.                  
In cases where heavier anchors with
correspondingly stronger anchor chains are aboard, only the minimum masses and
minimum tensile strengths required according to paragraphs 1 to 6 and 11 shall
be entered in the Union inland navigation certificate.
13.                  
Connecting pieces (swivels) between anchor and
chain shall withstand a tensile load 20 % higher than the tensile strength of
the corresponding chain.
14.                  
The use of cables instead of anchor chains is
permitted. The cables shall have the same tensile strength as that required for
chains, but shall be 20 % longer.
Article 10.02
Other equipment
1.                      
At least the following equipment in accordance
with the applicable navigational authority regulations in force in the Member
States shall be onboard:
(a)     radio-telephone equipment;
(b)     appliances and devices necessary for
emitting visual and acoustic signals and for marking the vessel;
(c)     stand-alone back-up lights for the
prescribed mooring lights.
The following receptacles must also be present:
(a)     A marked receptacle for domestic
waste;
(b)     Separate, marked receptacles, with
sealing covers, made of steel or another sturdy, non-flammable material, of
adequate size but holding at least 10 l, for the collection of 
(aa)    oily cleaning cloths,
(bb)   hazardous or pollutant solid wastes,
(cc)    hazardous or pollutant liquid wastes,
and, inasmuch as they may arise, for the
collection of
(dd)   slops,
(ee)    other oily or greasy waste.
2.                      
In addition, the equipment shall include at
least:
(a)     Mooring cables;
Vessels shall be equipped with three mooring
cables. Their minimum lengths shall be at least the following:
 — || first cable || : || L + 20 m, but not more than 100 m, 
 — || second cable || : || 2/3 of the first cable, 
 — || third cable || : || 1/3 of the first cable. 
The shortest cable is not required on board
vessels whose L is less than 20 m.
The cables shall have a tensile strength Rs
that is calculated using the following formulae;
for L · B · T up to 1000 m3: Rs = 60
+         [kN];
for L · B · T exceeding 1000 m3: Rs =
150 +            [kN].
For the required cables a certificate in
accordance with European standard EN 10 204:1991, under No 3.1, shall be on
board.
These cables may be replaced by ropes having
the same length and tensile strength. The minimum tensile strength of these
ropes shall be indicated in a certificate.
(b)     Towing cables;
Tugs shall be equipped with a number of cables
that are suitable for their operation.
However, the main cable shall be at least 100 m
long and have a tensile strength, in kN, not less than one third of the total
power, in kW, of the main engine(s).
Motor vessels and pushers that are also able to
tow shall be equipped with a towing cable that is at least 100 m long and whose
tensile strength, in kN, is not less than one quarter of the total power, in
kW, of the main engine(s).
(c)     A heaving line;
(d)     A boarding gangway at least 0,4 m wide
and 4 m long whose side edges are defined by a brightly-coloured strip; that
gangway shall be equipped with a handrail. The inspection body may permit
shorter gangways for small vessels;
(e)     A gaff hook;
(f)      An appropriate first-aid kit with a
content in accordance with a relevant standard of a Member State. The first-aid
kit shall be kept in an accommodation room or in the wheelhouse and be stored
in such a way that it is easily and safely accessible if necessary. If
first-aid kits are stored under cover, the cover shall be marked by a symbol
for first-aid kit according to Figure 8 of Appendix I, having a side length of
at least 10 cm;
(g)     A pair of binoculars, 7 × 50 or with
larger lens diameter;
(h)     A notice concerning the rescue and
revival of persons overboard;
(i)      A searchlight that can be operated
from the wheelhouse.
3.                      
There shall be an embarkation stairway or ladder
on vessels whose side height above the unladen waterline exceeds 1,50 m.
Article 10.03
Portable fire
extinguishers
1.                      
There shall be at least one portable fire
extinguisher in accordance with the European standards EN 3­7 : 2007 and EN 3-8
: 2007 at each of the following places:
(a)     in the wheelhouse;
(b)     close to each entrance from the deck
to accommodation spaces;
(c)     close to each entrance to service
spaces which are not accessible from the accommodation spaces and which contain
heating, cooking or refrigeration equipment using solid or liquid fuels or
liquefied gas;
(d)     at each entrance to engine rooms and
boiler rooms;
(e)     at suitable points below deck in
engine rooms and boiler rooms such that no position in the space is more than
10 metres walking distance away from an extinguisher.
2.                      
For the portable fire extinguishers required by
paragraph 1, only powder type extinguishers with a content of at least 6 kg or
other portable extinguishers with the same extinguishing capacity may be used.
They shall be suitable for Class A, B, C fires.
By way of derogation on vessels with no
liquefied gas installations, spray foam fire extinguishers using aqueous
film-forming foam (AFFF-AR)frost proof to minus (-) 20°C are permissible even
if they are unsuitable for Class C fires. These fire extinguishers shall have a
minimum capacity of 9 litres. 
All extinguishers shall be suitable to
extinguish fires in electrical systems of up to 1000V.
3.                      
In addition powder, water or foam fire
extinguishers may be used which are suitable at least for the class of fire
most likely to occur in the room for which they are intended.
4.                      
Portable fire extinguishers with CO2 as the
extinguishing agent may be used only for extinguishing fires in galleys and
electrical installations. The content of these fire extinguishers shall be no
more than 1 kg per 15 m3 of the room in which they are made available for use.
5.                      
Portable fire extinguishers shall be checked at
least every two years by a competent person. An inspection label shall be
affixed to the fire extinguisher, signed by the competent person and showing
the date of the inspection.
6.                      
If portable fire extinguishers are installed in
such a way that they are out of sight the panel covering them shall be
identified by a symbol for fire extinguishers as shown in Figure 3 of Appendix
I, and having a side length of at least 10 cm.
Article 10.03a
Permanently installed
firefighting systems for protecting accommodation 
spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces 
1.                      
For protecting accommodation spaces, wheelhouses
and passenger spaces only suitable automatic pressurised water sprinklers are
admitted as permanently installed fire-fighting systems.
2.                      
Installation or conversion of the systems shall
be carried out only by specialised firms.
3.                      
The systems shall be made of steel or equivalent
non-combustible materials.
4.                      
The systems shall be able to spray water at a
rate of at least 5 l/m2 per minute over the area of the largest room to be
protected.
5.                      
Systems spraying smaller quantities of water
shall have a type-approval pursuant to IMO Resolution A 800(19) or another
recognised standard. Type-approval shall be carried out by an approved
classification society or an accredited testing institution. The accredited
testing institution shall comply with the European standard for general
requirements for the competence of testing and calibrating laboratories (EN
ISO/IEC 17025: 2000).
6.                      
The systems shall be checked by an expert:
(a)     before being put into service for the
first time,
(b)     before being put back into service
after they have been triggered,
(c)     before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair,
(d)     regularly, at least every two years.
Inspections as referred to in point (d) may
also be carried out by a competent person from a competent firm specialising in
fire extinguishing systems.
7.                      
When carrying out the check in accordance with
paragraph 6, the expert or competent person shall verify whether the systems
meet the requirements of this paragraph.
The check shall at least include:
(a)     external inspection of the entire
system;
(b)     functional testing of the safety
systems and nozzles; 
(c)     functional testing of the pressure
tanks and pumping system.
8.                      
An inspection certificate, signed by the expert
or competent person, shall be issued, showing the date of inspection.
9.                      
The number of installed systems shall be entered
in the Union inland navigation certificate.
10.                  
(left void)
Article 10.03b
Permanently installed
firefighting systems for protecting engine rooms, 
boiler rooms and pump rooms 
1.                      
Extinguishing agents
For protecting engine rooms, boiler rooms
and pump rooms, the following extinguishing agents may be used in permanently
installed fire-fighting systems:
(a)     CO2 (carbon dioxide);
(b)     HFC 227 ea (heptafluoropropane);
(c)     IG-541 (52 % nitrogen, 40 % argon, 8 %
carbon dioxide);
(d)     FK-5-1-12
(Dodecafluoro-2-methylpentane-3-on).
2.                      
Ventilation, air intake
(a)     Combustion air for the propulsion
engines shall not be extracted from rooms that are to be protected by
permanently installed fire-fighting systems. This shall not apply where there
are two mutually independent and hermetically separated main engine rooms or if
next to the main engine room there is a separate engine room with a bow thruster,
ensuring that the vessel is able to make way under its own power in the event
of fire in the main engine room.
(b)     Any forced ventilation present in the
room to be protected shall switch off automatically if the fire-fighting system
is triggered.
(c)     There shall be devices available with
which all apertures which can allow air to enter or gas to escape from the room
to be protected can be quickly closed. It shall be clearly recognisable whether
they are open or closed.
(d)     The air escaping from relief valves in
the compressed-air tanks installed in engine rooms shall be conveyed to the
open air.
(e)     Over- or underpressure resulting from
the inflow of extinguishing agent shall not destroy the components of the
surrounding partitions of the room to be protected. It shall be possible for
the pressure to equalise without danger.
(f)      Protected rooms shall have a facility
for extracting the extinguishing agent and the combustion gases. Such
facilities shall be capable of being operated from positions outside the
protected rooms and which would not be made inaccessible by a fire within such
spaces. If there are permanently installed extractors, it shall not be possible
for these to be switched on while the fire is being extinguished.
3.                      
Fire alarm system
The room to be protected shall be monitored by
means of an appropriate fire alarm system. The alarm shall be noticeable in the
wheelhouse, the accommodation spaces and the room to be protected.
4.                      
Piping system
(a)     The extinguishing agent shall be
conveyed to the room to be protected and distributed there by means of a fixed
piping system. Inside the room to be protected the piping and associated
fittings shall made of steel. Tank connecting pipes and expansion joints shall
be exempt from this provided the materials used have equivalent properties in
case of fire. Pipes shall be both internally and externally protected against
corrosion.
(b)     Outlet nozzles shall be dimensioned
and fitted such that the extinguishing agent is evenly distributed. In
particular the extinguishing agent shall also be effective beneath the floor
plates.
5.                      
Triggering device
(a)     Fire-fighting systems with automatic
triggering shall not be permissible.
(b)     It shall be possible to trigger the
fire-fighting system from a suitable place outside the room to be protected.
(c)     Triggering devices shall be installed
in such a way that they can be operated even in case of a fire and in the event
of damage by fire or explosion in the room to be protected the necessary
quantity of extinguishing agent can still be conveyed.
Non-mechanical triggering devices shall be
powered from two different mutually independent energy sources. These energy
sources shall be located outside the room to be protected. Control lines in the
room to be protected shall be designed so as to remain functional for at least
30 minutes in the event of fire. This requirement shall be fulfilled in the
case of electric wiring if it complies with the standard IEC 60331-21:1999.
If triggering devices are installed in such a
way that they are out of sight the panel covering them shall be identified by
the ‘fire-fighting installation’ symbol as shown in Figure 6 of Appendix I,
having a side length of at least 10 cm, and the following text in red lettering
on a white background:
‘Feuerlöscheinrichtung
Installation d'extinction
Brandblusinstallatie
Fire-fighting installation’.»
(d)     If the fire-fighting system is
intended for the protection of several rooms, the triggering devices for each
room have to be separate and clearly identified.
(e)     Next to each triggering device
operating instructions in one of the languages of the Member States shall be
posted up visibly and indelibly. They shall contain, in particular,
instructions regarding:
(aa)    triggering of the fire-fighting
system;
(bb)   the need for checking to ensure that
all persons have left the room to be protected;
(cc)    action to be taken by the crew when
the firefighting system is triggered and when accessing the protected room
after triggering or flooding, in particular with regard to the possible presence
of dangerous substances;
(dd)   action to be taken by the crew in the
case of failure of the fire-fighting system.
(f)      The operating instructions shall
point out that before the fire-fighting system is triggered combustion engines
drawing air from the room to be protected are to be shut down.
6.                      
Warning system
(a)     Permanently installed fire-fighting
systems shall be provided with acoustic and optical warning systems.
(b)     The warning system shall be set off
automatically as soon as the fire-fighting system is first triggered. The
warning signal shall sound for an appropriate time before the extinguishing
agent is released and it shall not be possible to switch it off.
(c)     Warning signals shall be clearly
visible in the rooms to be protected and outside the accesses to them and
clearly audible even under operating conditions producing the loudest inherent
noise. They shall be clearly distinct from all other acoustic and optical
signals in the room to be protected.
(d)     The acoustic warning signals shall be
clearly audible in the adjacent rooms even when connecting doors are closed and
under operating conditions producing the loudest inherent noise.
(e)     If the warning system is not
self-monitoring as regards short-circuits, wire breaks and voltage drops, it
shall be possible to check that it is working properly.
(f)      At every entrance to a room that can
be supplied with extinguishing agent, a clearly visible notice shall be put up
bearing the following text in red lettering on a white background:
‘Vorsicht, Feuerlöscheinrichtung!
Bei Ertönen des Warnsignals (Beschreibung des
Signals) den Raum sofort verlassen!
Attention, installation d'extinction
d'incendie!
Quitter immédiatement ce local au signal
(description du signal)
Let op, brandblusinstallatie!
Bij het in werking treden van het alarmsignaal
(omschrijving van het signaal) deze ruimte onmiddellijk verlaten!
Warning, fire-fighting installation!
Leave the room as soon as the warning signal
sounds (description of signal)’.»
7.                      
Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes
(a)     Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure
pipes shall comply with the provisions in force in one of the Member States.
(b)     Pressure tanks shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(c)     Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes
are not to be installed in accommodation spaces.
(d)     The temperature in cabinets and
installation spaces containing pressure tanks shall not exceed 50 °C.
(e)     Cabinets or installation spaces on
deck shall be firmly fixed in place and have air vents which are to be arranged
in such a way that in the event of a leak in the pressure tank no gas can
escape into the interior of the vessel. Direct connections to other rooms are
not permitted.
8.                      
Quantity of extinguishing agent
If the quantity of extinguishing agent is
intended for protecting more than one room, the total amount of extinguishing
agent available does not need to be greater than the quantity necessary for the
largest room to be protected.
9.                      
Installation, inspection and documentation
(a)     The system shall be installed or
converted only by a firm specialising in fire-fighting systems. The
requirements specified by the extinguishing agent manufacturer and the system
manufacturer (product data sheet, safety data sheet) are to be complied with.
(b)     The system shall be checked by an
expert
(aa)    before being put into service for the
first time,
(bb)   before being put back into service
after it has been triggered,
(cc)    before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair,
(dd)   regularly, at least every two years.
Inspections as referred to in point (dd) may
also be carried out by a competent person from a competent firm specialising in
fire extinguishing systems.
(c)     In the inspection the expert or
competent person shall check whether the system meets the requirements of this
Article.
(d)     The inspection shall cover at least
the following:
(aa) external inspection of the entire
installation;
(bb) tightness check on pipes;
(cc) functional checking of control and
triggering systems;
(dd) checking of tank pressure and content;
(ee) checking of tightness and facilities for
locking the room to be protected;
(ff) checking the fire alarm system;
(gg) checking the warning system.
(e)     An inspection certificate, signed by
the expert or competent person, shall be issued, showing the date of
inspection.
(f)      The number of permanently installed
fire-fighting systems shall be entered in the Union inland navigation
certificate.
10.                  
CO2 fire-fighting systems
Fire-fighting systems using CO2 as
the extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition
to the requirements under paragraphs1 to 9:
(a)     CO2 containers shall be
housed outside the room to be protected in a space or cabinet hermetically
separated from other rooms. The doors to these installation spaces and cabinets
shall open outwards, be lockable and bear on the outside a symbol for ‘General
danger warning’ in accordance with Figure 4 of Appendix I, at least 5 cm in
height, together with the marking ‘CO2’ in the same colour and with
the same height;
(b)     installation spaces below decks for CO2
containers shall be accessible only from the open air. These spaces shall have
their own adequate artificial ventilation system with extraction ducts,
completely separate from other ventilation systems on board;
(c)     the CO2 containers shall
not be filled to more than 0,75 kg/l. The specific volume of unpressurised CO2
gas is to be taken as 0,56 m3/kg;
(d)     the volume of CO2 for the
room to be protected shall be at least 40 % of its gross volume. It shall be
possible to supply this volume within 120 seconds, and to check whether supply
has been completed;
(e)     opening the container valves and
operating the flood valve shall be separate control operations;
(f)      the appropriate time mentioned under
paragraph 6(b) shall be at least 20 seconds. There shall be a reliable device
to ensure the delay before delivery of the CO2 gas.
11.                  
HFC-227ea — fire-fighting systems
Fire-fighting systems using HFC-227ea as the
extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition to
the requirements under paragraphs 1 to 9:
(a)     if there are several rooms to be
protected, each with a different gross volume, each room shall be provided with
its own fire-fighting system;
(b)     each container of HFC-227ea that is
installed in the room to be protected shall be equipped with an overpressure
relief valve. This shall harmlessly release the contents of the container into
the room to be protected if the container is exposed to the effects of fire and
the fire-fighting system has not been triggered;
(c)     each container shall be fitted with a
device for checking the gas pressure;
(d)     the containers shall not be filled to
more than 1,15 kg/l. The specific volume of the unpressurised HFC-227ea is to
be taken as 0,1374 m3/kg;
(e)     the volume of HFC-227ea for the room
to be protected shall be at least 8 % of the room's gross volume. This volume
shall be supplied within 10 seconds;
(f)      the HFC-227ea containers shall be
provided with a pressure monitor which triggers an acoustic and optical alarm
signal in the wheelhouse in the event of an unauthorised loss of propellant. If
there is no wheelhouse, this alarm signal shall be given outside the room to be
protected;
(g)     after flooding, the concentration in
the room to be protected shall not exceed 10,5 %;
(h)     the fire-fighting system shall not
contain any parts made of aluminium.
12.                  
IG-541 — fire-fighting systems
Fire-fighting systems using IG-541 as the
extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition to
the requirements under paragraphs 1 to 9:
(a)     if there are several rooms to be
protected, each with a different gross volume, each room shall be provided with
its own fire-fighting system;
(b)     each container of IG-541 that is
installed in the room to be protected shall be equipped with an overpressure
relief valve. This shall harmlessly release the contents of the container into
the room to be protected if the container is exposed to the effects of fire and
the fire-fighting system has not been triggered;
(c)     each container shall be fitted with a
device for checking the contents;
(d)     the filling pressure of the container
shall not exceed 200 bar at + 15 °C;
(e)     the volume of IG-541 for the room to
be protected shall be at least 44 % and no more than 50 % of the room's gross
volume. This volume shall be supplied within 120 seconds.
13.                  
FK-5-1-12 — firefighting systems
Firefighting systems using FK-5-1-12 as the
extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition to
the requirements under paragraphs 1 to 9:
(a)     if there are several rooms to be
protected, each with a different gross volume, each room shall be provided with
its own firefighting system;
(b)     each container of FK-5-1-12 installed
in the room to be protected shall be equipped with an overpressure relief
valve. The overpressure relief valve shall harmlessly release the contents of
the container into the room to be protected if the container is exposed to the
effects of fire and the firefighting system has not been triggered;
(c)     each container shall be fitted with a
device for checking the gas pressure;
(d)     the containers shall not be filled to
more than 1,00 kg/l. The specific volume of the unpressurised FK-5-1-12 is to
be taken as 0,0719 m3/kg;
(e)     the volume of FK-5-1-12 for the room
to be protected shall be at least 5,5 % of the room’s gross volume. This volume
shall be supplied within 10 seconds;
(f)      the FK-5-1-12 containers shall be
provided with a pressure monitor which triggers an acoustic and optical alarm
signal in the wheelhouse in the event of an unauthorised loss of propellant. If
there is no wheelhouse, this alarm signal shall be given outside the room to be
protected;
(g)     after flooding, the concentration in
the room to be protected shall not exceed 10,0 %.
Article 10.03c
(left void)
Article 10.04
Ship's boats
1.                      
The following craft shall carry a ship's boat
according to European standard EN 1914: 1997:
(a) motor vessels and barges exceeding 150 t
deadweight;
(b) tugs and pushers with a water displacement
of more than 150 m3;
(c) floating equipment;
(d) passenger vessels.
2.                      
It shall be possible for one person to launch
such ship's boats safely within five minutes from the first manual action
necessary. If a powered launching device is used this shall be such that safe,
quick launching shall not be impaired if its power supply fails.
3.                      
Inflatable ship's boats shall be inspected
according to manufacturer's instructions.
Article 10.05
Lifebuoys and lifejackets
1.                      
On board craft there shall be at least three
lifebuoys in accordance with European standard EN 14144: 2002. They shall be
ready for use and attached to the deck at appropriate points without being
attached to their mounting. At least one lifebuoy shall be in the immediate
vicinity of the wheelhouse and shall be equipped with a self-igniting, battery-powered
light that will not be extinguished in water.
2.                      
A personalised, automatically inflatable
lifejacket in accordance with European standards EN 395:1998, EN 396:1998, EN
ISO 12402-3:2006 or EN ISO 12402-4:2006 shall be within reach of every person who
is regularly on board a craft.
Non-inflatable lifejackets in accordance with
these standards shall also be admissible for children.
3.                      
Lifejackets shall be inspected in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
CHAPTER 11
SAFETY AT WORK STATIONS
Article 11.01
General
1.                      
Vessels shall be built, arranged and equipped in
such a way as to enable persons to work and move about in safety.
2.                      
Permanently installed facilities that are
necessary for working on board shall be arranged, laid out and secured in such a
way as to permit safe and easy operation, use and maintenance. If necessary,
mobile or high-temperature components shall be fitted with protective devices.
Article 11.02
Protection against falling
1.                      
Decks and side decks shall be flat and at no
point be likely to cause tripping; it shall be impossible for puddles to form.
2.                      
Decks, side decks, engine-room floors, landings,
stairways and the tops of side deck bollards shall have non-slip surfaces.
3.                      
The tops of side deck bollards and obstacles in
passageways, such as the edges of steps, shall be painted in a colour
contrasting with the surrounding deck.
4.                      
The outer edges of decks and side decks shall be
fitted with bulwarks that are at least 0,90 m high or with a continuous guard
rail in accordance with European standard EN 711 : 1995. Work stations where
persons might fall more than 1 m, shall be fitted with bulwarks or coamings
that are at least 0,90 m high or with a continuous guard rail in accordance
with European standard EN 711 : 1995. Where the guard rails of side decks are
retractable,
(a)     a continuous handrail 0.02 to 0.04 m
in diameter shall additionally be secured to the coaming at a height of 0,7 to
1,1 m and
(b)     signs in accordance with Appendix I,
Figure 10, at least 15 cm in diameter, shall be affixed in clearly visible
positions at the point where the side deck begins.
         Where there is no coaming, a fixed
guard rail shall be installed instead.
4a.          By way of derogation from
paragraph 4, in the case of lighters and barges without accommodation, bulwarks
or guard rails shall not be required where:
(a)     foot rails have been fitted to the
outer edges of the decks and side decks,
(b)     handrails in accordance with paragraph
4 (a) have been fitted to the coamings and 
(c)     signs in accordance with Appendix I,
Figure 10, at least 15 cm in diameter, have been affixed in clearly visible
positions on deck.
4b.         By way of derogation from
paragraph 4, in the case of vessels with flush- or trunk-decks it shall not be
required that guard rails be fitted directly on the outer edges of those decks,
or on side decks where:
(a)     the passageway runs over those flush
decks, surrounded by fixed guard rails in accordance with EN 711 : 1995 and
(b)     signs in accordance with Appendix I,
Figure 10, at least 15 cm in diameter, have been affixed in clearly visible
positions at the transitions to areas unprotected by guard rails
5.                      
At work stations where there is danger of
falling more than 1 m the inspection body may require appropriate fittings and
equipment to ensure safe working.
6.                      
Paragraphs 4, 4a and 4b are temporary
requirements according to Article 25 of this Directive and will be valid until
01 December 2016
Article 11.03
Dimensions of working
spaces
Working spaces shall be large enough to
provide every person working in them with adequate freedom of movement.
Article 11.04
Side decks
1.                      
The clear width of a side deck shall be at least
0,60 m. That figure may be reduced to 0,50 m at certain points that are
necessary for the operation of the vessel such as deck-washing valves. It may
be reduced to 0,40 m at bollards and cleats.
2.                      
Up to a height of 0,90 m above the side deck,
the clear width of the side deck may be reduced to 0,50 m provided that the
clear width above, between the outer edge of the hull and the inner edge of the
hold, is not less than 0,65 m.
3.                      
The requirements of paragraphs 1 and 2 shall
apply up to a height of 2,00 m above the side deck.
4.                      
Paragraph 2 is a temporary requirement according
to Article 25 of this Directive and will be valid until 01 December 2016.
Article 11.05
Access to working spaces
1.                      
Points of access and passageways for the
movement of persons and objects shall be of sufficient size and so arranged
that:
(a)     in front of the access opening, there
is sufficient room not to impede movement;
(b)     the clear width of the passageway
shall be appropriate for the intended use of the working space and shall be not
less than 0,60 m, except in the case of craft less than 8 m wide, where it may
be reduced to 0,50 m;
(c)     the clear height of the passageway
including the sill is not less than 1,90 m.
2.                      
Doors shall be so arranged that they can be
opened and closed safely from either side. They shall be protected against
accidental opening or closing.
3.                      
Appropriate stairs, ladders or steps shall be
installed in accesses, exits and passageways where there is more than a 0,50 m
difference in floor level.
4.                      
Working spaces which are manned continuously
shall be fitted with stairs if there is a difference in floor level of more
than 1,00 m. This requirement shall not apply to emergency exits.
5.                      
Vessels with holds shall have at least one
permanently installed means of access at each end of each hold.
By way of derogation from the first sentence
the permanently installed means of access may be dispensed with if at least two
movable ladders are provided which reach at least 3 rungs over the hatch
coaming at an angle of inclination of 60°.
Article 11.06
Exits and emergency exits
1.                      
The number, arrangement and dimensions of exits,
including emergency exits, shall be in keeping with the purpose and dimensions
of the relevant space. Where one of the exits is an emergency exit, it shall be
clearly marked as such.
2.                      
Emergency exits or windows or the covers of
skylights to be used as emergency exits shall have a clear opening of not less
than 0,36 m2, and the smallest dimension shall be not less than 0,50 m.
Article 11.07
Ladders, steps and similar
devices
1.                      
Stairs and ladders shall be securely fixed.
Stairs shall be not less than 0,60 m wide and the clear width between handrails
shall be not less than 0,60 m; steps shall be not less than 0,15 m deep; steps
shall have non-slip surfaces and stairs with more than three steps shall be
fitted with handrails.
2.                      
Ladders and separately attached rungs shall have
a clear width of not less than 0,30 m; rungs shall be not more than 0,30 m apart
and the distance between rungs and structures shall be not less than 0,15 m.
3.                      
Ladders and separately attached rungs shall be
clearly recognisable from above and shall be equipped with safety handles above
exit openings.
4.                      
Movable ladders shall be at least 0,40 m wide,
and at least 0,50 m wide at the base; it shall be possible to ensure that they
will not topple or skid; the rungs shall be securely fixed in the uprights.
Article 11.08
Interior spaces
1.                      
The dimensions, arrangement and layout of
interior working spaces shall be in keeping with the work to be carried out and
shall meet the health and safety requirements. They shall be equipped with
sufficient non-dazzle lighting and with sufficient ventilation arrangements. If
necessary, they shall be fitted with heating appliances capable of maintaining
an adequate temperature.
2.                      
The floors of interior working spaces shall be
solid and durable, and shall be designed not to cause tripping or slipping.
Openings in decks and floors shall, when open, be secured against the danger of
falling, and windows and skylights shall be so arranged and fitted that they
can be operated and cleaned safely.
Article 11.09
Protection against noise
and vibration
1.                      
Working spaces shall be so situated, equipped
and designed that crew members are not exposed to harmful vibrations.
2.                      
Permanent working spaces shall, in addition, be
so constructed and soundproofed that the health and safety of crew members are
not affected by noise.
3.                      
For crew members who are likely to be exposed to
noise levels exceeding 85 dB(A) every day individual acoustic protection
devices shall be available. In working spaces where noise levels exceed 90
dB(A) it shall be indicated that wearing of acoustic protection devices is
mandatory by a symbol ‘Wear acoustic protection device’ with a diameter of at
least 10 cm in accordance with Figure 7 of Appendix I.
Article 11.10
Hatch covers
1.                      
Hatch covers shall be easily accessible and safe
to handle. Hatch-cover components weighing more than 40 kg shall be designed to
slide or pivot or be fitted with mechanical opening devices. Hatch covers
operated by lifting gear shall be fitted with adequate and easily accessible
attachment devices. Non-interchangeable hatch covers and upper sills shall be
clearly marked to show the hatches to which they belong and their correct
position on those hatches.
2.                      
Hatch covers shall be secured against being
tilted by the wind or by loading gear. Sliding covers shall be fitted with
catches to prevent accidental horizontal movement of more than 0,40 m; they shall
be capable of being locked in their final position. Appropriate devices shall
be fitted to hold stacked hatch covers in position.
3.                      
The power supply for mechanically operated hatch
covers shall be cut off automatically when the control switch is released.
4.                      
Hatch covers shall be capable of bearing the
loads to which they are likely to be subjected: Hatch covers designed to be
walked on shall be capable of bearing concentrated loads of at least 75 kg.
Hatch covers not designed to be walked on shall be marked as such. Hatch covers
designed to receive deck cargo shall have the permissible load in t/m2 marked
on them. Where supports are needed to achieve the maximum permissible load this
shall be indicated in an appropriate place; in this case the relevant drawings
shall be kept on board.
Article 11.11
Winches
1.                      
Winches shall be designed in such a way as to
enable work to be carried out safely. They shall be fitted with devices that
prevent unintentional load release. Winches that do not lock automatically
shall be fitted with a brake that is adequate to deal with their tractive
force.
2.                      
Hand-operated winches shall be fitted with
devices to prevent kickback of the crank. Winches that are both power- and
manually driven shall be designed in such a way that the motive-power control
cannot actuate the manual control.
Article 11.12
Cranes
1.                      
Cranes shall be built in accordance with best
practice. The forces arising during their operation shall be safely transmitted
into the vessel's structure; they shall not impair its stability.
2.                      
A manufacturer's plate containing the following
information shall be affixed to cranes:
(a) manufacturer's name and address;
(b) the CE marking, together with the year of
manufacture;
(c) series or type reference;
(d) where applicable, serial number.
3.                      
The maximum permissible loadings shall be
permanently marked in a clearly legible manner on cranes.
Where a crane's safe working load does not
exceed 2000 kg it will be sufficient if the safe working load at the maximum
reach is permanently marked in a clearly legible manner on the crane.
4.                      
There shall be devices to protect against
crushing or shearing accidents. The outer parts of the crane shall leave a
safety clearance of 0,5 m upwards, downwards and to the sides, between them and
all surrounding objects. The safety clearance to the sides shall not be
required outside work stations and passageways.
5.                      
It shall be possible to protect power driven
cranes against unauthorised use. It shall only be possible to start these up
from the crane's driving position. The control shall be of the automatic-return
type (buttons without stops); their operating direction shall be unambiguously
clear.
If the motive power fails it shall not be
possible for the load to drop uncontrolled. Unintentional crane movements shall
be prevented.
Any upward movement of the hoisting device and
any exceeding of the safe working load shall be limited by an appropriate
device. Any downward movement of the hoisting device shall be limited if under
any envisaged operating conditions at the moment of attaching the hook there
can be less than two cable windings on the drum. The corresponding counter
movement shall still be possible after the automatic limiting devices have been
actuated.
The tensile strength of the cables for running
rigging shall correspond to five times the cable's permissible loading. The
cable construction shall be faultless and the design shall be suitable for use
on cranes.
6.                      
Cranes shall be inspected by an expert: 
(a)     before being put into service for the
first time, 
(b)     before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair
(c)     regularly, at least every ten years
In this inspection proof of adequate strength
and stability shall be provided by calculations and an on-board load test.
Where a crane’s safe working load does not
exceed 2000 kg the expert may decide that the proof by calculation may be fully
or partly replaced by a test with a load 1.25 times the safe working load
carried out over the full working range.
An inspection certificate shall be issued, signed
by the expert and showing the date of the inspection.
7.                      
Cranes shall be checked regularly and in any
case at least every 12 months, by a competent person. During that inspection
the safe working condition of the crane shall be determined by a visual check
and an operating check.
An inspection certificate shall be issued,
signed by the competent person and showing the date of the inspection.
8.                      
left void.
9.                      
Cranes with a safe working load exceeding 2000
kg, or which are used for transhipment of cargo, or which are mounted on board
lifting jacks, pontoons and other floating equipment or worksite craft shall in
addition meet the requirements of one of the Member States.
10.                  
The crane manufacturer's operating instructions
shall be kept on board. These shall include at least the following information:
(a)     operating range and function of the
controls;
(b)     maximum permissible safe working load
as a function of the reach;
(c)     maximum permissible inclination of the
crane;
(d)     assembly and maintenance instructions;
(e)     general technical data.
Article 11.13
Storing flammable liquids
To store flammable liquids with a flash
point of less than 55°C there shall be a ventilated cupboard made of
non-combustible material on deck. On its outside there shall be a symbol ‘Fire,
naked flame and smoking prohibited’ with a diameter of at least 10 cm in
accordance with Figure 2 of Appendix I.
CHAPTER 12
ACCOMMODATION
Article 12.01
General
1.                      
Vessels shall have accommodation for the persons
lodging habitually on board, and at least for the minimum crew.
2.                      
Accommodation shall be so designed, arranged and
fitted out as to meet the health, safety and comfort needs of those on board.
It shall be of safe and easy access and adequately insulated against heat and
cold.
3.                      
The inspection body may authorise exceptions to
the provisions of this Chapter if the health and safety of those on board are
ensured by other means.
4.                      
The inspection body shall enter on the Union
inland navigation certificate any restrictions on the vessel's daily operating
periods and its operating mode resulting from the exceptions referred to in
paragraph 3.
Article 12.02
Special design requirements for
accommodation
1.                      
It shall be possible to ventilate accommodation
adequately even when the doors are closed; in addition, communal living quarters
shall receive adequate daylight and, as far as possible, provide a view out.
2.                      
Where there is no deck-level access to the
accommodation and the difference in level is 0,30 m or more the accommodation
shall be accessible by means of stairs.
3.                      
In the foresection of the vessel no floor shall
be more than 1,20 m below the plane of maximum draught.
4.                      
Living and sleeping quarters shall have at least
two exits which are as far apart from each other as possible and which serve as
escape routes. One exit may be designed as an emergency exit. This does not
apply to rooms with an exit leading directly onto the deck or into a corridor
which serves as an escape route, provided the corridor has two exits apart from
each other leading to port and starboard. Emergency exits, which may include
skylights and windows, shall have a clear opening of at least 0,36 m2 and a
shortest side no less than 0,50 m and permit rapid evacuation in an emergency.
Insulation and cladding of escape routes shall be made of flame-retardant
materials and the usability of escape routes shall be guaranteed at all times
by appropriate means such as ladders or separately attached rungs.
5.                      
Accommodation shall be protected against
inadmissible noise and vibration. Sound pressure levels shall not exceed:
(a)     70 dB(A) in communal living quarters;
(b)     60 dB(A) in sleeping quarters. This
provision shall not apply to vessels operating exclusively outside the rest
periods of the crew as laid down by the national legislation of the Member
States. The restriction of the daily operating period shall be entered on the Union
inland navigation certificate.
6.                      
Headroom in the accommodation shall be not less
than 2,00 m.
7.                      
As a general rule, vessels shall have at least
one communal living room partitioned off from the sleeping quarters.
8.                      
The free floor area of communal living quarters
shall be not less than 2 m2 per person, and in any event not less than 8 m2 in
total (not counting furniture, except tables and chairs).
9.                      
The cubic capacity of private living and
sleeping rooms shall be not less than 7 m3 each.
10.                  
The volume of airspace per person shall be at
least 3,5 m3 in private living quarters. In sleeping quarters it shall be at
least 5 m3 for the first occupant and at least 3 m3 for each additional
occupant (not counting volume of furniture). Sleeping cabins shall, as far as
possible, be intended for no more than two persons. Berths shall be not less
than 0,30 m above the floor. Where one berth is placed over another, the
headroom above each berth shall be not less than 0,60 m.
11.                  
Doors shall have an opening whose upper edge is
at least 1,90 m above deck or above the floor and a clear width of at least
0,60 m. The prescribed height may be achieved by means of sliding or hinged
covers or flaps. Doors shall open to the outside and it shall be possible to
open them from either side. Sills shall not be more than 0,40 m high, but shall
nonetheless comply with the provisions of other safety regulations.
12.                  
Stairways shall be permanently fixed and safely
negotiable. They shall be deemed to be so when:
(a)     they are at least 0,60 m wide;
(b)     the tread is at least 0,15 m deep;
(c)     the steps are non-slip;
(d)     stairways with more than three steps
are fitted with at least one handrail or handle.
13.                  
Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids, and
particularly those under such a high pressure that a leak could pose a danger
to persons, shall not be located in the accommodation or in corridors leading
to the accommodation. This does not apply to steam pipes and hydraulic system
pipes, provided they are fitted in metal sleeves, and for the pipes of
liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes.
Article 12.03
Sanitary installations
1.                      
At least the following sanitary installations
shall be provided in vessels with accommodation:
(a)     one toilet per accommodation unit or
per six crew members; it shall be possible to ventilate these with fresh air;
(b)     one washbasin with waste pipe and
connected up to hot and cold potable water per accommodation unit or per four
crew members;
(c)     one shower or bath connected up to hot
and cold potable water per accommodation unit or per six crew members.
2.                      
The sanitary installations shall be in close
proximity to the accommodation. Toilets shall not have direct access to
galleys, mess rooms or combined communal living quarters/galleys.
3.                      
Toilet compartments shall have a floor space of
at least 1 m2, not less than 0,75 m wide and not less than 1,10 m long. Toilet
compartments in cabins for no more than two persons may be smaller. Where a
toilet contains a wash basin and/or shower, the floor space shall be increased
at least by the floor space occupied by the wash basin and/or shower (or bath).
Article 12.04
Galleys
1.                      
Galleys may be combined with communal living
quarters.
2.                      
Galleys shall comprise:
(a) a cooker;
(b) a sink with waste connection;
(c) a supply of potable water;
(d) a refrigerator;
(e) sufficient storage and working space.
3.                      
The eating area of combined galleys/communal
living quarters shall be large enough to accommodate the number of crew
normally using it at the same time. Seats shall be not less than 0,60 m wide.
Article 12.05
Potable water
1.                      
Vessels with accommodation shall have a potable
water installation. Potable water tank filling apertures and potable water
hoses shall be marked as being intended exclusively for potable water. Potable
water filler necks shall be installed above the deck.
2.                      
Potable water installations shall:
(a)     on their inner surfaces be made of a
material which resists corrosion and poses no physiological danger;
(b)     be free of pipe sections where a
regular flow of water is not guaranteed, and
(c)     be protected against excessive
heating.
3.                      
In addition to paragraph 2, potable water tanks
shall:
(a)     have a capacity of at least 150 l per
person normally living on board, and at least per member of the minimum crew;
(b)     have a suitable, lockable opening to
enable the inside to be cleaned;
(c)     have a water level indicator;
(d)     have ventilation pipes which lead to
the open air or are fitted with appropriate filters.
4.                      
Potable water tanks shall not share walls with
other tanks. Potable water pipes shall not pass through tanks containing other
liquids. Connections are not permitted between the potable water supply system
and other pipes. Pipes carrying gas or liquids other than potable water shall
not pass through potable water tanks.
5.                      
Potable water pressure vessels shall operate
only on uncontaminated compressed air. Where it is produced by means of
compressors, appropriate air filters and oil separators shall be installed
directly in front of the pressure vessel unless the water and the air are
separated by a diaphragm.
Article 12.06
Heating and ventilation
1.                      
It shall be possible to heat accommodation in
accordance with its intended use. Heating installations shall be appropriate
for the weather conditions which may arise.
2.                      
It shall be possible to ventilate the living and
sleeping quarters adequately even when the doors are closed. Ventilation shall
ensure adequate air circulation in all climatic conditions.
3.                      
The accommodation shall be so designed and
arranged as to prevent as far as possible the entry of foul air from other
areas of the vessel such as engine rooms or holds; where forced-air ventilation
is used, the intake vents shall be so placed as to satisfy the above
requirements.
Article 12.07
Other accommodation
installations
1.                      
Each crew member living on board shall have an
individual berth and an individual clothes locker fitted with a lock. The
internal measurements of the berth shall be not less than 2,00 × 0,90 m.
2.                      
Suitable places for storing and drying work
clothes shall be provided, but not in the sleeping quarters.
3.                      
All accommodation areas shall be fitted with
electric lighting. Additional lamps using gas or liquid fuel may only be used
in communal living quarters. Lighting devices using liquid fuel shall be made
of metal and shall burn only fuels with a flash point above 55 °C or commercial
paraffin oil. They shall be placed or attached so as not to constitute a fire
hazard.
CHAPTER 13
FUEL-FIRED HEATING, COOKING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
Article 13.01
General
1.                      
Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment
running on liquefied gas shall meet the requirements of Chapter 14.
2.                      
Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment,
together with its accessories, shall be so designed and installed that it is
not dangerous even in the event of overheating. It shall be so installed that
it cannot overturn or be moved accidentally.
3.                      
The equipment referred to inparagraph 2 shall
not be installed in areas in which substances with a flash point below 55 °C
are used or stored. No flues from these installations may pass through such
areas.
4.                      
The supply of air necessary for combustion shall
be ensured.
5.                      
Heating appliances shall be securely connected
to flues, which shall be fitted with suitable cowls or devices affording
protection against the wind. They shall be arranged in such a manner as to
permit cleaning.
Article 13.02
Use of liquid fuels,
oil-fired equipment
1.                      
Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment
which uses liquid fuel may be operated only with fuels whose flash point is
above 55 °C.
2.                      
By way of derogation fromparagraph 1, cooking
appliances and heating and refrigeration appliances fitted with burners with
wicks and running on commercial paraffin oil may be permitted in the
accommodation and wheelhouse provided the capacity of the fuel tank does not
exceed 12 litres.
3.                      
Appliances fitted with burners with wicks shall
be:
(a)     fitted with a metal fuel tank whose
filling aperture may be locked and which has no soft-solder joints below the
maximum filling level, and shall be designed and installed in such a way that
the fuel tank cannot be opened or emptied accidentally;
(b)     capable of being lit without the aid
of another liquid fuel;
(c)     so installed as to ensure the safe
evacuation of combustion gases.
Article 13.03
Vaporising oil burner
stoves and atomising oil burner heating appliances
1.                      
Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil
burner heating appliances shall be built in accordance with best practice.
2.                      
Where a vaporising oil burner stove or an
atomising oil burner heating appliance is installed in an engine room, the air
supply to the heating appliance and the engines shall be so designed that the
heating appliance and the engines can operate properly and safely independently
of one another. Where necessary, there shall be a separate air supply. The
equipment shall be installed in such a way that no flame from the burner can
reach other parts of the engine room installations.
Article 13.04
Vaporising oil burner
stoves
1.                      
It shall be possible to light vaporising oil
burner stoves without the aid of another combustible liquid. They shall be
fixed above a metal drip pan which encompasses all the fuel-carrying parts,
whose sides are at least 20 mm high and which has a capacity of at least two
litres.
2.                      
For vaporising oil burner stoves installed in an
engine room, the sides of the metal drip pan prescribed in paragraph 1 shall be
at least 200 mm high. The lower edge of the vaporising burner shall be located
above the edge of the drip pan. In addition, the upper edge of the drip pan
shall extend at least 100 mm above the floor.
3.                      
Vaporising oil burner stoves shall be fitted
with a suitable regulator which, at all settings, ensures a virtually constant
flow of fuel to the burner and which prevents any fuel leak should the flame go
out. Regulators shall be considered suitable which function properly even when
exposed to vibration and inclined up to 12° and which, in addition to a
level-regulating float, have
(a)     a second float which closes off the
fuel supply safely and reliably when the permitted level is exceeded, or
(b)     an overflow pipe, but only if the drip
pan has sufficient capacity to accommodate at least the contents of the fuel
tank.
4.                      
Where the fuel tank of a vaporising oil burner
stove is installed separately:
(a)     the drop between the tank and the
burner feed may not exceed that laid down in the manufacturer's operating
instructions;
(b)     it shall be so installed as to be
protected from unacceptable heating;
(c)     it shall be possible to interrupt the
fuel supply from the deck.
5.                      
The flues of vaporising oil burner stoves shall
be fitted with a device to prevent draught inversion.
Article 13.05
Atomising oil burner
heating appliances
Atomising oil burner heating appliances
shall in particular meet the following requirements:
(a)     adequate ventilation of the burner
shall be ensured before the fuel is supplied;
(b)     the fuel supply shall be regulated by
a thermostat;
(c)     the fuel shall be ignited by an
electric device or by a pilot flame;
(d)     a flame monitoring device shall cut
off the fuel supply when the flame goes out;
(e)     the main switch shall be placed at an
easily accessible point outside the installation room.
Article 13.06
Forced-air heating
appliances
Forced-air heating appliances consisting of
a combustion chamber around which the heating air is conducted under pressure
to a distribution system or to a room shall meet the following requirements:
(a)     if the fuel is atomised under pressure
the combustion air shall be supplied by a blower;
(b)     the combustion chamber shall be well
ventilated before the burner can be lit. Ventilation may be considered complete
when the combustion air blower continues to operate after the flame has gone
out;
(c)     the fuel supply shall be automatically
cut off if:
the fire goes out;
the supply of combustion air is not sufficient;
the heated air exceeds a previously set
temperature, or
the power supply of the safety devices fails.
In the above cases the fuel supply shall not be
re-established automatically after being cut off;
(d)     it shall be possible to switch off the
combustion air and heating air blowers from outside the room where the heating
appliance is located;
(e)     where heating air is drawn from
outside, the intake vents shall be located as far as possible above the deck.
They shall be installed in such a manner that rain and spray water cannot enter;
(f)      heating air pipes shall be made of
metal;
(g)     it shall not be possible to close the
heating air outlet apertures completely;
(h)     it shall not be possible for any
leaking fuel to reach the heating air pipes;
(i)      it shall not be possible for
forced-air heating appliances to draw their heating air from an engine room.
Article 13.07
Solid fuel heating
1.                      
Solid fuel heating appliances shall be placed on
a metal plate with raised edges such that no burning fuel or hot cinders fall
outside the plate.
This requirement does not apply to appliances
installed in compartments built of non-combustible materials and intended
solely to house boilers.
2.                      
Solid fuel boilers shall be fitted with
thermostatic controls to regulate the flow of combustion air.
3.                      
A means by which cinders can be quickly doused
shall be placed in the vicinity of each heating appliance.
CHAPTER 14
LIQUEFIED GAS INSTALLATIONS FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES
Article 14.01
General
1.                      
Liquefied gas installations consist essentially
of a supply unit comprising one or more gas receptacles, and of one or more
pressure regulators, a distribution system and a number of gas-consuming
appliances.
Spare and empty receptacles not in the supply
unit shall not be considered part of the installation. Article 14.05 shall
apply to them mutatis mutandis.
2.                      
Installations may be operated only with
commercial propane.
Article 14.02
Installations
1.                      
Liquefied gas installations shall be suitable
throughout for use with propane and shall be built and installed in accordance
with best practice.
2.                      
Liquefied gas installations may be used only for
domestic purposes in the accommodation and the wheelhouse, and for
corresponding purposes on passenger vessels.
3.                      
There may be a number of separate installations
on board. A single installation shall not be used to serve accommodation areas
separated by a hold or a fixed tank.
4.                      
No part of a liquefied gas installation shall be
located in the engine room.
Article 14.03
Receptacles
1.                      
Only receptacles with an approved content of
between 5 and 35 kg are permitted. In the case of passenger vessels, the
inspection body may approve the use of receptacles with a larger content.
2.                      
Receptacles shall bear the official stamp
certifying that they have been accepted following the required tests.
Article 14.04
Location and arrangement
of supply units
1.                      
Supply units shall be installed on deck in a
freestanding or wall cupboard located outside the accommodation in a position
such that it does not interfere with movement on board. They shall not,
however, be installed against the fore or aft bulwark. The cupboard may be a
wall cupboard set into the superstructure provided that it is gastight and can
only be opened from outside the superstructure. It shall be so located that the
distribution pipes leading to the gas consumption points are as short as
possible.
No more receptacles may be in operation
simultaneously than are necessary for the functioning of the installation.
Several receptacles may be connected only if a reversing coupler is used. Up to
four receptacles may be connected per supply unit. The number of receptacles on
board, including spare receptacles, shall not exceed six per installation.
Up to six receptacles may be connected on
passenger vessels with galleys or canteens for passengers. The number of
receptacles on board, including spare receptacles, shall not exceed nine per
installation.
Pressure regulators, or in case of two-stage
regulation the first pressure regulator, shall be fitted to a wall in the same
cupboard as the receptacles.
2.                      
Supply units shall be so installed that any
leaking gas can escape from the cupboard into the open without any risk of it
penetrating inside the vessel or coming into contact with a source of ignition.
3.                      
Cupboards shall be constructed of
flame-retardant materials and shall be sufficiently ventilated by apertures in
the top and bottom. Receptacles shall be placed upright in the cupboards in
such a way that they cannot overturn.
4.                      
Cupboards shall be so built and placed that the
temperature of the receptacles cannot exceed 50 °C.
5.                      
The words ‘Liquefied gas’ and a ‘Fire, naked
flame and smoking prohibited’ symbol at least 10 cm in diameter in accordance
with Figure 2 of Appendix I shall be affixed to the outer wall of the cupboard.
Article 14.05
Spare and empty
receptacles
Spare and empty receptacles not located in
the supply unit shall be stored outside the accommodation and the wheelhouse in
a cupboard built in accordance with Article 14.04.
Article 14.06
Pressure regulators
1.                      
Gas-consuming appliances may be connected to
receptacles only through a distribution system fitted with one or more pressure
regulators to bring the gas pressure down to the utilisation pressure. The
pressure may be reduced in one or two stages. All pressure regulators shall be
set permanently at a pressure determined in accordance with Article 14.07.
2.                      
The final pressure regulators shall be either
fitted with or immediately followed by a device to protect the pipe
automatically against excess pressure in the event of a malfunctioning of the
pressure regulator. It shall be ensured that in the event of a leak in the
protection device any leaking gas can escape into the open without any risk of
it penetrating inside the vessel or coming into contact with a source of
ignition; if necessary, a special pipe shall be fitted for this purpose.
3.                      
The protection devices and vents shall be
protected against the entry of water.
Article 14.07
Pressure
1.                      
Where two-stage regulating systems are used, the
mean pressure shall be not more than 2,5 bar above atmospheric pressure.
2.                      
The pressure at the outlet from the last
pressure regulator shall be not more than 0,05 bar above atmospheric pressure,
with a tolerance of 10 %.
Article 14.08
Piping and flexible tubes
1.                      
Pipes shall consist of permanently installed
steel or copper tubing.
However, pipes connecting with the receptacles
shall be high-pressure flexible tubes or spiral tubes suitable for propane.
Gas-consuming appliances may, if not permanently installed, be connected by
means of suitable flexible tubes not more than 1 m long.
2.                      
Pipes shall be able to withstand any stresses,
in particular regarding corrosion and strength, which may occur under normal
operating conditions on board and their characteristics and layout shall be
such that they ensure a satisfactory flow of gas at the appropriate pressure to
the gas-consuming appliances.
3.                      
Pipes shall have as few joints as possible. Both
pipes and joints shall be gastight and shall remain gastight despite any
vibration or expansion to which they may be subjected.
4.                      
Pipes shall be readily accessible, properly
fixed and protected at every point where they might be subject to impact or
friction, particularly where they pass through steel bulkheads or metal walls.
The entire surface of steel pipes shall be treated against corrosion.
5.                      
Flexible pipes and their joints shall be able to
withstand any stresses which may occur under normal operating conditions on
board. They shall be installed in such a way that they are free of tension,
cannot be heated excessively and can be inspected over their entire length.
Article 14.09
Distribution system
1.                      
It shall be possible to shut off the entire
distribution system by means of a main valve which is at all times easily and
rapidly accessible.
2.                      
Each gas-consuming appliance shall be supplied
by a separate branch of the distribution system, and each branch shall be
controlled by a separate closing device.
3.                      
Valves shall be fitted at points where they are
protected from the weather and from impact.
4.                      
An inspection connection shall be fitted after
each pressure regulator. It shall be ensured using a closing device that in
pressure tests the pressure regulator is not exposed to the test pressure.
Article 14.10
Gas-consuming appliances
and their installation
1.                      
The only appliances that may be installed are
propane-consuming appliances approved in one of the Member States and equipped
with devices that effectively prevent the escape of gas in the event of either
the flame or the pilot light being extinguished.
2.                      
Appliances shall be so placed and connected that
they cannot overturn or be accidentally moved and any risk of accidental
wrenching of the connecting pipes is avoided.
3.                      
Heating and water-heating appliances and
refrigerators shall be connected to a flue for evacuating combustion gases into
the open air.
4.                      
The installation of gas-consuming appliances in
the wheelhouse is permitted only if the wheelhouse is so constructed that no
leaking gas can escape into the lower parts of the craft, in particular through
the penetrations for control lines to the engine room.
5.                      
Gas-consuming appliances may be installed in
sleeping quarters only if combustion is independent of ambient air in the
quarters.
6.                      
Gas-consuming appliances in which combustion
depends on ambient air shall be installed in rooms which are sufficiently
large.
Article 14.11
Ventilation and evacuation
of combustion gases
1.                      
In rooms containing gas-consuming appliances in
which combustion depends on ambient air, fresh air shall be supplied and
combustion gases evacuated by means of ventilation apertures of adequate
dimensions, with a clear section of at least 150 cm2 per aperture.
2.                      
Ventilation apertures shall not have any closing
device and shall not lead to sleeping quarters.
3.                      
Evacuation devices shall be so designed as to
ensure the safe evacuation of combustion gases. They shall be reliable in
operation and made of non-combustible materials. Their operation shall not be
affected by forced ventilation.
Article 14.12
Operating and safety
requirements
An operating instruction shall be affixed
on board in a suitable place. It shall contain at least the following:
‘The valves of receptacles not connected to
the distribution system shall be closed, even if the receptacles are presumed
empty’;»
‘Flexible pipes shall be replaced as soon
as their condition so requires’;»
‘All gas-consuming appliances shall be
connected or the corresponding connecting pipes shall be sealed’.»
Article 14.13
Acceptance test
Liquefied gas installations shall be
checked by an expert, in order to verify whether the installation conforms to
the requirements of this Chapter: 
(a)     before being put into service for the
first time,
(b)     before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair, 
(c)     on every renewal of the attestation
referred to in Article 14.15. 
An inspection certificate shall be issued,
signed by the expert and showing the date of the inspection. A copy of the
inspection certificate shall be submitted to the inspection body.
Article 14.14
Test conditions
Tests on the installation shall be carried
out under the following conditions:
1.                      
Medium-pressure pipes between the closing
device, referred to in Article 14.09 (4), of the first pressure regulator and
the valves fitted before the final pressure regulator:
(a)     pressure test, carried out with air,
an inert gas or a liquid at a pressure 20 bar above atmospheric pressure;
(b)     tightness test, carried out with air
or an inert gas at a pressure 3,5 bar above atmospheric pressure.
2.                      
Pipes at the service pressure between the
closing device, referred to in Article 14.09(4), of the only pressure regulator
or the final pressure regulator and the valves fitted before the gas-consuming
appliances:
tightness test, carried out with air or an
inert gas at a pressure of 1 bar above atmospheric pressure.
3.                      
Pipes situated between the closing device,
referred to in Article 14.09 (4), of the only pressure regulator or the final
pressure regulator and the controls of gas-consuming appliances:
tightness test at a pressure of 0,15 bar above
atmospheric pressure.
4.                      
In the tests referred to in paragraphs 1(b), 2
and 3, the pipes are deemed gastight if, after sufficient time to allow for
equalisation with ambient temperature, no decrease in the test pressure is
observed during a further 10 minute test period.
5.                      
Receptacle connectors, pipe joints and other
fittings subjected to the pressure in the receptacles, and joints between
pressure regulators and the distribution pipe:
tightness test, carried out with a foaming
substance, at the service pressure.
6.                      
All gas-consuming appliances shall be brought
into service at the nominal capacity and shall be tested for satisfactory and undisturbed
combustion at different capacity settings.
Flame failure devices shall be checked to
ensure that they operate satisfactorily.
7.                      
After the test referred to in paragraph 6, it
shall be verified for each gas-consuming appliance connected to a flue, whether,
after five minutes' operation at the nominal capacity, with windows and doors
closed and the ventilation devices in operation, any combustion gases are
escaping into the room through the air intake.
If there is a more than momentary escape of
such gases, the cause shall immediately be detected and remedied. The appliance
shall not be approved for use until all defects have been eliminated.
Article 14.15
Attestation
1.                      
The Union inland navigation certificate shall
include an attestation to the effect that all liquefied gas installations
conform to the requirements of this Chapter.
2.                      
The attestation will be issued by the inspection
body following the acceptance test referred to in Article 14.13.
3.                      
The attestation shall be valid for a period not
exceeding three years. It may be renewed only after a further acceptance test
carried out in accordance with Article 14.13.
Exceptionally, where the owner of a vessel or
his representative submits a reasoned request, the inspection body may extend
the validity of the attestation for not more than three months without carrying
out the acceptance test referred to in Article 14.13. Such extension shall be
entered in the Union inland navigation certificate.
Chapter
14a
On-board sewage treatment plants on passenger vessels
Article 14a.01
Definitions
For the purposes of this Chapter, the
following defintions shall apply:
1.                      
'on-board sewage treatment plant' means a sewage
treatment plant of compact design for treating the quantities of domestic waste
water accruing on board;
2.                      
'type approval' means the decision whereby the
competent authority confirms that an on‑board sewage treatment plant
satisfies the technical requirements of this Chapter;
3.                      
'special test' means the procedure carried in
accordance with Article 14a.11 whereby the competent authority ensures that the
on-board sewage treatment plant operated in a craft satisfies the requirements
of this Chapter;
4.                      
'manufacturer' means the person or body who is
responsible to the competent authority for all aspects of the type approval procedure
and for ensuring conformity of production. This person or body does not have to
be involved in all stages of the construction of the on‑board sewage
treatment plant. If the on‑board sewage treatment plant is converted by
modifications or retrofitting after its original manufacture for use on a craft
for the purposes of this Chapter, the person or body having carried out the
modifications or retrofitting is considered as the manufacturer; 
5.                      
'information document' means the document set
out in Appendix VI, Part II that lists the information to be supplied by an
applicant;
6.                      
'information folder' means the complete set of
data, drawings, photographs or other documents supplied by the applicant to the
technical service or the competent authority as prescribed in the information
document;
7.                      
'information package' means the information
folder plus any test reports or other documents that the technical service or
the competent authority have added to the information folder in the course of
their duties;
8.                      
'type approval certificate' means the document
drawn up in accordance with Appendix VI, Part III with which the competent
authority certifies the type approval;
9.                      
'on-board sewage treatment plant parameters
record' means the document drawn up in accordance with Appendix VI, Part VIII
which records all parameters, including components of and adjustments to the
on-board sewage treatment plant having an effect on the level of sewage
treatment, including modifications thereto;
10.                  
'manufacturer's guide to checking the components
and parameters relevant to sewage treatment' means the document compiled in
accordance with Article 14a.11(4) for the purpose of implementing the special
test;
11.                  
'domestic waste water' means waste water from
galleys, dining rooms, washrooms and laundries and faecal water;
12.                  
'sewage sludge' means residues accruing from
operation of a sewage treatment plant on board a craft.
Article
14a.02
General provisions
13.                  
This Chapter applies to all on-board sewage
treatment plants which are installed on passenger vessels.
14.                  
(a) On-board sewage treatment plants shall
comply with the limit values set out in Table 1 during the type test.
Table 1: Limit values to be observed in operation
in the outflow of the on‑board sewage treatment plant (test plant) during
the type test
 Parameter || concentration || Sample 
 Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD5) ISO 5815-1 and 5815-2 (2003)1 || 20 mg/l || 24h composite sample, homogenised 
 25 mg/l || Random sample, homogenised 
 Chemical oxygen demand (COD)2 ISO 6060 (1989)1) || 100 mg/l || 24h composite sample, homogenised 
 125 mg/l || Random sample, homogenised 
 Total organic carbon (TOC) EN 1484 (1997)1 || 35 mg/l || 24h composite sample, homogenised 
 45 mg/l || Random sample, homogenised 
1)             Member States may implement equivalent
procedures
2)             Instead of the chemical oxygen demand
(COD) the total organic carbon (TOC) may also bereferred to for the check
(b)     During operation the control values
set out in Table 2 shall be observed
Table 2: Control values to be observed in
the outflow of the on-board sewagetreatment plant during operation on board
passenger vessels 
 Parameter || concentration || Sample 
 Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD5) ISO 5815-1 and 5815-2 (2003)1 || 25 mg/l || Random sample, homogenised 
 Chemical oxygen demand (COD)2 ISO 6060 (1989)1 || 125 mg/l || Random sample, homogenised 
 150 mg/l || Random sample 
 Total organic carbon (TOC) EN 1484 (1997)1 || 45 mg/l || Random sample, homogenised 
1)             Member States may implement equivalent
procedures
2)             Instead of the chemical oxygen demand
(COD) the total organic carbon (TOC) may also bereferred to for the check
(c)     The respective values in Tables 1 and
2 must not be exceeded in the random sample
15.                  
Procedures using products containing chlorine
are not admissible. 
It is equally inadmissible to dilute domestic
waste water so as to reduce the specific load and thereby also enable disposal
16.                  
Adequate arrangements shall be made for storage,
preservation (if necessary), and discharge of the sewage sludge. This shall
also include a management plan for the sewage sludge.
17.                  
Compliance with the limit values set out in
Table 1 in paragraph 2 shall be confirmed by a type test and determined by a
type approval. The type approval shall be certified in a type approval
certificate. The owner or their authorised representative shall include a copy
of the type approval certificate with the application for inspection in
accordance with Article 2.02. A copy of the type approval certificate and
the on-board sewage treatment plant parameters record shall be carried on
board.
18.                  
After the on‑board sewage treatment plant
has been installed on board a performance test shall be carried out by the
manufacturer before scheduled service begins. The on‑board sewage
treatment plant shall be entered in item 52 of the vessel certificate with the
following plant particulars: 
name
(a)         
type‑approval number;
(b)         
serial number;
(c)         
year of construction.
19.                  
Any significant modification to an on‑board
sewage treatment plant that has an effect on the sewage treatment shall always
be followed by a special test in accordance with Article 14a.11(3).
20.                  
The competent authority may make use of a
technical service in order to fulfil the tasks as described in this Chapter.
21.                  
The on-board sewage treatment plant shall be
regularly maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions in
order to ensure that it is in perfect working order. A maintenance log
corroborating such maintenance shall be carried on board. 
Article
14a.03
Application for type approval
1.                      
An application for type approval for an on‑board
sewage treatment plant type shall be submitted by the manufacturer to the
competent authority. An information folder in accordance with Article 14a.01(6)
and the draft of an on‑board sewage treatment plant parameters record in
accordance with Article 14a.01(9), as well as the draft of a manufacturer's
guide to checking the components and parameters relevant to sewage treatment
for that on‑board sewage treatment plant type in accordance with Article
14a.01(10) shall be enclosed with the application. For the type test the
manufacturer shall demonstrate a prototype of the on‑board sewage
treatment plant. 
2.                      
If, in a particular application for type
approval for an on‑board sewage treatment plant type, the competent
authority finds that the application submitted with regard to the presented
plant prototype is not representative of the characteristics of this type of on‑board
sewage treatment plant as described in Appendix VI, Part II, Addendum I
another, if necessary additional, prototype, to be designated by the competent
authority, shall be supplied for approval in accordance with paragraph 1.
3.                      
No application for type approval for an on‑board
sewage treatment plant type may be submitted to more than one competent
authority. A separate application shall be submitted for each on‑board
sewage treatment plant type to be approved.
Article 14a.04
Type approval procedure
1.                      
The competent authority to which the application
is submitted shall issue the type approval for the on-board sewage treatment
plant type which corresponds to the descriptions in the information folder and
satisfies the requirements of this Chapter. The fulfilling of these
requirements will be examined in accordance with Appendix VII. 
2.                      
For each on‑board sewage treatment plant
type that it type‑approves, the competent authority shall complete all
relevant parts of the type approval certificate, the model for which is to be
found in Appendix VI, Part III, and shall compile or verify the contents of the
index to the information package. Type approval certificates shall be numbered
in accordance with the method described in Appendix VI, Part IV. The completed
type approval certificate and its appendices shall be delivered to the
applicant.
3.                      
If the on‑board sewage treatment plant to
be approved can only fulfil its function or only has specific properties in
conjunction with other components of the craft in which it is to be installed
and if for this reason compliance with one or more requirements can only be
checked if the on-board sewage treatment plant to be approved is operated
together with other real or simulated components of the craft, the scope of the
type approval for this on‑board sewage treatment plant shall be limited
accordingly. In such cases, all restrictions on use and all installation
requirements shall be detailed in the type approval certificate for that plant
type. 
4.                      
Each competent authority shall send the
following documents:
(a)         
the list of on‑board sewage treatment
plant types including the details as set out in Appendix VI, Part V, for which
it has issued, denied or withdrawn approval in the period in question to the
other competent authorities each time this list is amended;
(b)         
if requested to do so by another competent
authority, 
(1)         
a copy of the type approval certificate for the
on‑board sewage treatment plant type, with or without information package,
for each type of on‑board sewage treatment plant for which it has issued,
denied or withdrawn an approval, and, if applicable, 
(2)         
the list of the on‑board sewage treatment
plants which have been manufactured in accordance with the type approvals issued,
as laid down in Article 14a.06(3), which contains the details in accordance
with Appendix VI, Part VI. 
Article 14a.05
Amendment of type
approvals
1.                      
The competent authority which issued the type ­approval
shall make the necessary arrangements to ensure that it is informed of any
change in the particulars appearing in the information package.
2.                      
The application for amendment or extension of a
type approval shall be made exclusively to the competent authority which issued
the original type approval.
3.                      
Should characteristics of the on‑board
sewage treatment plant as described in the information package have been
modified, the competent authority shall:
(a)         
issue revised pages of the information package
as necessary, marking each revised page to show clearly the nature of the
change and the date of re‑issue. Whenever revised pages are issued, the
index to the information package which is attached to the type approval
certificate shall also be updated accordingly
(b)         
issue a revised type approval certificate (with
an extension number) if any information on it (excluding its annexes) has
changed or if the minimum requirements of this Chapter have changed since the
original approval date. The revised approval certificate shall clearly show the
reason for its modification and the date of the re-issue
Should the competent authority which issued the
type approval find that new trials or tests are justified owing to a
modification made to the information package, it shall notify the manufacturer
of this fact and issue the documents specified above only after new trials or
tests have been successfully completed
Article
14a.06
Conformity
1.                      
The manufacturer shall affix to each on‑board
sewage treatment plant manufactured in conformity with the type approval the
markings as defined in Appendix VI, Part I, including the type approval number.
2.                      
Should the type approval contain limitations of
usage in accordance with Article 14a.04(3), the manufacturer shall enclose
detailed information on these limitations and all installation requirements with
each unit manufactured.
3.                      
If requested by the competent authority which
issued the type approval, the manufacturer shall provide a list of the serial
numbers of all on‑board sewage treatment plants which have been
manufactured in accordance with the requirements set out in this Chapter since
the last report, or since the point at which these provisions first came into
force, within 45 days after the end of each calendar year, and immediately
after each additional date specified by the competent authority. The list shall
set out the correlations between the serial numbers, the corresponding on‑board
sewage treatment plant types and the type approval numbers. Furthermore, the
list shall also include particular information for those cases where the
manufacturer discontinues production of a type‑approved on‑board
sewage treatment plant type. Should the competent authority not demand the
regular provision of such a list from the manufacturer, the manufacturer shall
retain the data recorded for a period of at least 40 years.
Article
14a.07
Acceptance of equivalent approvals
Member States can recognize type approvals
for on-board sewage treatment systems based on different standards for the use
on their national waterways. 
Article
14a.08
Checking of serial numbers
1.                      
The competent authority issuing a type approval
shall ensure – if necessary working in conjunction with the other competent
authorities – that the serial numbers of the on‑board sewage treatment
plants manufactured in conformity with the requirements of this Chapter are
registered and checked. 
2.                      
An additional check of the serial numbers may
take place in conjunction with the check on conformity of production as laid
down in Article 14a.09. 
3.                      
In relation to the checking of the serial
numbers, the manufacturer or their authorised representatives located in the Member
States shall, if requested, promptly supply the competent authority with all
necessary information relating to their direct purchasers as well as the serial
numbers of those on‑board sewage treatment plants which have been
reported as manufactured in accordance with Article 14a.06(3). 
4.                      
Should a manufacturer be unable to comply with
the requirements set out in Article 14a.06 when requested to do so by the
competent authority, the approval for the on‑board sewage treatment plant
type concerned may be withdrawn. In such a case the notification procedure
specified in Article 14a.10(4) shall be used. 
Article
14a.09
Conformity of production
1.                      
The competent authority issuing a type approval
shall ascertain in advance – if necessary working in conjunction with the other
competent authorities – that suitable arrangements have been made to ensure
effective checking of conformity of production in respect of the requirements
of Appendix VI, Part I. 
2.                      
The competent authority which has issued a type
approval shall ascertain – if necessary working in conjunction with the other
competent authorities – that the arrangements specified in paragraph 1 in
respect of the provisions of Appendix VI, Part I continue to be sufficient and
that every on‑board sewage treatment plant provided with a type approval
number in accordance with the requirements of this Chapter continues to
correspond to the description in the type approval certificate and its annexes
for the type‑approved on-board sewage treatment plant type.
3.                      
The competent authority may recognise comparable
tests by other competent authorities as equivalent to the provisions of
paragraphs 1 and 2.       
Article
14a.10
Non-conformity with the type‑approved
on-board sewage treatment plant type
1.                      
Non-conformity with the type‑approved on‑board
sewage treatment plant type shall be deemed to exist when there are deviations
from the characteristics in the type approval certificate or, as the case may
be, from the information package which have not been approved in accordance
with Article 14a.05(3) by the competent authority which issued the type
approval.
2.                      
Should the competent authority which has issued
a type approval find that on‑board sewage treatment plants do not conform
with the on‑board sewage treatment plant type for which it issued the
approval, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that on‑board
sewage treatment plants in production again conform with the type‑approved
on‑board sewage treatment plant type. The competent authority which found
the non‑conformity shall notify the other competent authorities of the
measures taken, which may extend to withdrawal of the type approval. 
3.                      
If a competent authority is able to demonstrate
that on‑board sewage treatment plants provided with a type approval
number do not conform with the type‑approved on‑board sewage
treatment plant type, it may require the competent authority which issued the
type approval to have the on‑board sewage treatment plant type that is in
production checked for conformity with the type‑approved on‑board
sewage treatment plant type. Such action shall be taken within six months of
the date of the request. 
Article
14a.11
Random sample measurement / Special test
1.                      
No later than three months after the
commissioning of the passenger vessel or, in the case of retrofitting of the on‑board
sewage treatment plant, after it has been installed and the appropriate
performance test has been carried out, the competent authority shall take a
random sample during operation of the passenger vessel in order to check the
values set out in Article 14a.02(2), Table 2. 
At irregular intervals the competent authority
shall carry out functionality checks on the on-board sewage treatment plant by
means of random sample measurements to check the values set out in
Article 14a.02(2), Table 2. 
Should the competent authority find that the
values of the random sample measurements do not conform with the values set out
in Article 14a.02(2), Table 2, it may demand
(a)         
that the defects in the on‑board sewage
treatment plant be remedied so as to ensure that it runs properly
(b)         
that the on‑board sewage treatment plant
be made to conform with the type approval again; or
(c)         
that a special test be carried out in accordance
with paragraph 3
Once the non-conformities have been remedied
and the on‑board sewage treatment plant has been made to conform with the
type approval again, the competent authority may carry out new random sample
measurements
If the defects are not remedied or the
conformity of the on‑board sewage treatment plant with the specifications
of the type approval is not restored, the competent authority shall seal the on‑board
sewage treatment plant and inform the inspection body to make an entry to that
effect in item 52 of the vessel certificate. 
2.                      
The random samples shall be measured in
accordance with the specifications of Article 14a.02(2), Table 2. 
3.                      
Should the competent authority find any
discrepancies in the on‑board sewage treatment plant indicating a
deviation from the type approval, the competent authority shall carry out a
special test to determine the present state of the on‑board sewage
treatment plant in relation to the components specified in the on-board sewage
treatment plant parameters record, the calibration and the setting of the
parameters of the on-board sewage treatment plant. 
Should the competent authority come to the
conclusion that the on‑board sewage treatment plant is not in conformity
with the type‑approved on-board sewage treatment plant type, it may take
the following actions
(a)         
demand that
(1)         
the conformity of the on-board sewage treatment
plant be restored or
(2)         
the type approval in accordance with Article
14a.05 be amended accordingly, or 
(b)         
order measurement in accordance with the test
specification as set out in Appendix VII
If conformity is not restored or the type
approval is not amended accordingly, or if it becomes apparent from the
measurements made in accordance with point (b) that the limit values laid down
in Article 14a.02(2), Table 1 are not complied with, the competent authority
shall seal the on‑board sewage treatment plant and inform the inspection
body to make an entry to that effect in item 52 of the vessel certificate. 
4.                      
The tests in accordance with paragraph 3 shall
be carried out on the basis of the manufacturer's guide to checking the
components and parameters of the on-board sewage treatment plant relevant to
sewage treatment. This guide, which shall be compiled by the manufacturer and
approved by a competent authority, shall specify the treatment‑relevant
components as well as settings, dimensioning criteria and parameters to be
applied in order to ensure that the values set out in Article 14a.02(2),
Tables 1 and 2 are continuously maintained. It shall include at least the
following information:
(a)         
a specification of the on‑board sewage
treatment plant type with a process description and an indication of whether
waste‑water storage tanks are to be installed upstream of the on-board
sewage treatment plant
(b)         
a list of the components specific to sewage
treatment
(c)         
the design and dimensioning criteria,
dimensioning specifications and regulations applied
(d)         
a schematic representation of the on-board
sewage treatment plant with identifying features of the approved treatment‑relevant
components (e.g. part numbers on the components
5.                      
An on‑board sewage treatment plant that
has been shut down may be brought back into service only after a special test
in accordance with paragraph 3, first subparagraph. 
Article
14a.12
Competent authorities and technical services
The technical services responsible for
carrying out the functions outlined in this Chapter shall satisfy the European
standard on general requirements for the competence of testing and calibration
laboratories (EN ISO/IEC 17025 : 2005 - 8), taking the
following conditions into account:
(a)         
manufacturers of on-board sewage treatment
plants cannot be recognised as technical services
(b)         
for the purposes of this Chapter a technical
service may, with the agreement of the competent authority, make use of
facilities external to its own laboratory
CHAPTER 15
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO PASSENGER VESSELS
Article 15.01
General provisions
1.                      
The following provisions shall not apply:
(a) Article 3.02(1)(b);
(b) Articles 4.01 to 4.03;
(c) Article 8.08(2), second sentence, and
paragraph 7;
(d) Article 9.14(3), second sentence, for
rated voltages of over 50V.
2.                      
The following items of equipment are prohibited
on passenger vessels:
(a) lamps powered by liquefied gas or liquid
fuel according to Article 12.07(3);
(b) vaporising oil-burner stoves according to
Article 13.04;
(c) solid fuel heaters according to Article
13.07;
(d) devices fitted with wick burners according
to Article 13.02(2) and (3), and
(e) liquefied gas devices according to Chapter
14.
3.                      
Vessels without their own power cannot be
licensed for passenger transport.
4.                      
(left void)
Article 15.02
Vessels' hulls
1.                      
In the course of the inspections referred to in
Article 2.09, the thickness of the outside plating of steel passenger vessels
shall be determined as follows:
(a)     the minimum thickness tmin
of the bottom, bilge and side plating of the outer hull of passenger vessels is
determined in accordance with the larger value of the following formulae:
t1min = 0,006 · a ·
(√(T))[mm];
t2min = f · 0,55 ·
(√(LWL))[mm].
In these formulae:
 f || = || 1 + 0,0013 · (a — 500); 
 a || = || longitudinal or transverse frame spacing (mm), and where the frame spacing is less than 400 mm, a = 400 mm should be entered; 
(b)     it is permissible to fall short of the
minimum value determined in accordance with (a) above for the plate thickness
in cases where the permitted value has been determined and certified on the
basis of a mathematical proof for the sufficient strength (longitudinal,
transverse and local) of the vessel's hull;
(c)     at no point of the outside plating
shall the thickness calculated in accordance with (a) or (b) above be less than
3 mm;
(d)     plate renewals shall be carried out
when bottom, bilge or side plate thicknesses have fallen short of the minimum
value determined in accordance with (a) or (b), in conjunction with (c) above.
2.                      
The number and position of bulkheads shall be
selected such that, in the event of flooding, the vessel remains buoyant
according to Article 15.03(7) to (13). Every portion of the internal structure
which affects the efficiency of the subdivision of such vessels shall be
watertight, and shall be of a design which will maintain the integrity of the
subdivision.
3.                      
The distance between the collision bulkhead and
the forward perpendicular shall be at least 0,04 LWL and not more than 0,04 LWL
+ 2 m.
4.                      
A transverse bulkhead may be fitted with a
bulkhead recess, if all parts of this offset lie within the safe area.
5.                      
The bulkheads, which are taken into account in
the damaged stability calculation according to Article 15.03(7) to (13), shall
be watertight and be installed up to the bulkhead deck. Where there is no
bulkhead deck, these bulkheads shall extend to a height at least 20 cm above
the margin line.
6.                      
The number of openings in these bulkheads shall
be kept as low as is consistent with the type of construction and normal operation
of the vessel. Openings and penetrations shall not have a detrimental effect on
the watertight function of the bulkheads.
7.                      
Collision bulkheads shall have no openings and
no doors.
8.                      
Bulkheads separating the engine rooms from
passenger areas or crew and shipboard personnel accommodation shall have no
doors.
9.                      
Manually operated doors without remote control
in bulkheads referred to in paragraph 5, are permitted only in areas not
accessible to passengers. They shall:
(a)     remain closed at all times and be opened
only temporarily to allow access;
(b)     be fitted with suitable devices to
enable them to be closed quickly and safely;
(c)     display the following notice on both
sides of the doors:
‘Close door immediately after passing
through’.»
10.                  
Doors in bulkheads referred to inparagraph 5
that are open for long periods shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)     They shall be capable of being closed
from both sides of the bulkhead and from an easily accessible point above the
bulkhead deck.
(b)     After being closed by remote control
the door shall be such that it can be opened again locally and closed safely.
Closure shall not be impeded by carpeting, foot rails or other obstructions.
(c)     The time taken for the
remote-controlled closure process shall be at least 30 seconds but not more
than 60 seconds.
(d)     During the closure procedure an
automatic acoustic alarm shall sound by the door.
(e)     The door drive and alarm shall also be
capable of operating independently of the on-board power supply. There shall be
a device at the location of the remote control that displays whether the door
is open or closed.
11.                  
Doors in bulkheads referred to in paragraph 5,
and their actuators shall be located in the safe area.
12.                  
There shall be a warning system in the
wheelhouse to indicate which of the doors in bulkheads referred to in paragraph
5 are open.
13.                  
Open-ended piping and ventilation ducts shall be
offset in such a way that, in any conceivable flooding, no additional spaces or
tanks are flooded through them.
(a)     If several compartments are openly
connected by piping or ventilation ducts, such piping and ducts shall, in an
appropriate place, be lead above the waterline corresponding to the worst
possible flooding.
(b)     Piping need not meet the requirement
under (a) if shut-off devices are fitted in the piping where it passes through
the bulkheads and which can be remotely controlled from a point above the
bulkhead deck.
(c)     Where a pipework system has no open
outlet in a compartment, the pipework shall be regarded as intact in the event
of this compartment being damaged, if it runs within the safe area and is more
than 0,50 m from the bottom of the vessel.
14.                  
Remote controls of bulkhead doors according to
paragraph 10 and shut-off devices according to paragraph 13(b) above the
bulkhead deck shall be clearly indicated as such.
15.                  
Where double bottoms are fitted, their height
shall be at least 0,60 m, and where wing voids are fitted, their width shall be
at least 0,60 m.
16.                  
Windows may be situated below the margin line if
they are watertight, cannot be opened, possess sufficient strength and conform
to Article 15.06(14).
Article 15.03
Stability
1.                      
The applicant shall prove by a calculation based
on the results from the application of a standard for intact stability that the
intact stability of the vessel is appropriate. All calculations shall be
carried out free to trim and sinkage. The lightship data taken into account for
the stability calculation shall be determined by means of a heeling test.
2.                      
The intact stability shall be proven for the
following standard load conditions:
(a) at the start of the voyage:
100 % passengers, 98 % fuel and fresh water, 10
% waste water;
(b) during the voyage:
100 % passengers, 50 % fuel and fresh water, 50
% waste water;
(c) at the end of the voyage:
100 % passengers, 10 % fuel and fresh water, 98
% waste water;
(d) unladen vessel:
no passengers, 10 % fuel and fresh water, no
waste water.
For all standard load conditions, the ballast
tanks shall be considered as either empty or full in accordance with normal
operational conditions.
In addition, the requirement of section 3(d)
shall be proved for the following load condition:
100 % passengers, 50 % fuel and fresh water, 50
% waste water, all other liquid (including ballast) tanks are considered filled
to 50 %.
3.                      
The proof of adequate intact stability by means
of a calculation shall be produced using the following definitions for the
intact stability and for the standard load conditions mentioned in paragraph
2(a) to (d):
(a)     the maximum righting lever hmax
shall occur at a heeling angle of φmax ≥ (φmom
+ 3°) and shall not be less than 0,20 m. However, in case φf
< φmax the righting lever at the downflooding angle φf
shall not be less than 0,20 m;
(b)     the downflooding angle φf
shall not be less than (φmom + 3°);
(c)     the area A under the curve of the
righting levers shall, depending on the position of φf and
φmax, reach at least the following values:
 Case ||   ||   || A 
 1 || φmax ≤ 15° or φf ≤ 15° ||   || 0,05 m·rad up to the smaller of the angles φmax or φf 
 2 || 15° < φmax < 30° || φmax ≤ φf || 0,035+0,001 · (30-φmax) m·rad up to the angle φmax 
 3 || 15° < φf < 30° || φmax > φf || 0,035+0,001 · (30-φf) m·rad up to the angle φf 
 4 || φmax ≥ 30° and φf ≥ 30° ||   || 0,035 m·rad up to the angle φ = 30° 
Where:
 hmax ||   || is the maximum lever; 
 φ ||   || the heeling angle; 
 φf ||   || the downflooding angle, that is the heeling angle, at which openings in the hull, in the superstructure or deck houses which cannot be closed so as to be watertight, submerge; 
 φmom ||   || the maximum heeling angle according to (e); 
 φmax ||   || the heeling angle at which the maximum righting lever occurs; 
 A ||   || the area under the curve of the righting levers; 
(d)     the initial metacentric height, GMo,
corrected by the effect of the free surfaces in liquid tanks, shall not be less
than 0,15 m;
(e)     in each of the following two cases the
heeling angle φmom shall not exceed 12:
(aa)    in application of the heeling moment
due to persons and wind according to sections 4 and 5;
(bb)   in application of the heeling moment
due to persons and turning according to sections 4 and 6;
(f)      for a heeling moment resulting from
moments due to persons, wind and turning according to paragraphs 4, 5 and 6,
the residual freeboard shall be not less than 0,20 m;
(g)     for vessels with windows or other
openings in the hull located below the bulkhead decks and not closed watertight,
the residual safety clearance shall be at least 0,10 m on the application of
the three heeling moments resulting from subparagraph (f).
4.                      
The heeling moment due to one-sided accumulation
of persons shall be calculated according to the following formula:
 [kNm
where:
 P || = || total mass of persons on board in (t), calculated by adding up the maximum permitted number of passengers and the maximum number of shipboard personnel and crew under normal operating conditions, assuming an average mass per person of 0,075 t 
 y || = || lateral distance of centre of gravity of total mass of persons P from centre line in (m) 
 g || = || acceleration of gravity (g = 9,81 m/s2) 
 Pi || = || mass of persons accumulated on area Ai in (t)          Pi          =          ni · 0,075 · Ai (t)           where    Ai         =          area occupied by persons in (m2)           ni   =          number of persons per square meter           ni             3,75 for free deck areas and deck areas with movable furniture; for deck areas with fixed seating furniture such as benches, ni shall be calculated by assuming an area of 0,50 m in width and 0,75 m in seat depth per person 
 yi || = || lateral distance of geometrical centre of area Ai from centre line in (m). 
The calculation shall be carried out for an
accumulation of persons both to starboard and to port.
The distribution of persons shall
correspond to the most unfavourable one from the point of view of stability.
Cabins shall be assumed unoccupied for the calculation of the persons' moment.
For the calculation of the loading cases,
the centre of gravity of a person shall be taken as 1 m above the lowest point
of the deck at 0,5 LWL, ignoring any deck curvature and assuming a
mass of 0,075 t per person.
A detailed calculation of deck areas which
are occupied by persons may be dispensed with if the following values are used:
 P || = ||               1,1 · Fmax · 0,075       for day trip vessels               1,5 · Fmax · 0,075       for cabin vessels where               Fmax   =          maximum permitted number of passengers on board 
 y || = || B/2 in (m). 
5.                      
The heeling moment due to wind pressure (MW)
shall be calculated as follows:
MW= pW • AW •
(lW + T/2) [kNm]
where:
pW =  the specific wind pressure of
0.25 kN/m²;
AW = lateral plane of the vessel
above the plane of draught according to theconsidered loading condition in
[m²];
lW =   distance of the centre of
gravity of the lateral plane AW from the plane of draught according to the
considered loading condition in [m].
In calculating the lateral plane, account shall
be taken of the intended enclosure of the deck by awnings and similar mobile
installations
6.                      
The moment due to centrifugal force (Mdr),
caused by the turning of the vessel, shall be calculated as follows:
Mdr = cdr · CB
· v2 · D/LWL · (KG — T/2) (kNm)
where
 cdr || = || a coefficient of 0,45; 
 CB || = || block coefficient (if not known, taken as 1,0); 
 v || = || maximum speed of the vessel in m/s; 
 KG || = || distance between the centre of gravity and the keel line in m. 
For passenger vessels with propulsion systems
according to Article 6.06, Mdr shall be derived from full-scale or
model tests or else from corresponding calculations.
7.                      
The applicant shall prove, by means of a
calculation based on the method of lost buoyancy, that the damaged stability of
the vessel is appropriate in the event of flooding. All calculations shall be
carried out free to trim and sinkage.
8.                      
Buoyancy of the vessel in the event of flooding
shall be proven for the standard load conditions specified in paragraph 2.
Accordingly, mathematical proof of sufficient stability shall be determined for
the three intermediate stages of flooding (25, 50 and 75 % of flood build-up)
and for the final stage of flooding.
9.                      
Passenger vessels shall comply with the
one-compartment status and the two-compartment status.
The following assumptions concerning the
extent of damage shall be taken into account in the event of flooding:
   || 1-compartment status || 2-compartment status 
 Dimension of the side damage ||   ||   
 longitudinal l [m] || 0,10 · LWL, however not less than 4,00 m || 0,05 · LWL, however not less than 2,25 m 
 transverse b [m] || B/5 || 0,59 
 vertical h [m] || from vessel bottom to top without delimitation 
 Dimension of the bottom damage ||   ||   
 longitudinal l [m] || 0,10 · LWL, however not less than 4,00 m || 0,05 · LWL, however not less than 2,25 m 
 transverse b [m] || B/5 
 vertical h [m] || 0,59; pipework installed according to Article 15.02(13)(c), shall be deemed intact 
(a)     For
one-compartment status the bulkheads can be assumed to be intact if the
distance between two adjacent bulkheads is greater than the damage length.
Longitudinal bulkheads at a distance of less than B/3 to the hull, measured
perpendicular to the centre line from the shell plating at the maximum draft
shall not be taken into account
for calculation purposes. A bulkhead recess in a transverse bulkhead that is longer than 2.50 m, is considered a
longitudinal bulkhead.
(b)     For two-compartment status each
bulkhead within the extent of damage will be assumed to be damaged. This means
that the position of the bulkheads shall be selected in such a way as to ensure
that the passenger vessel remains buoyant after flooding of two or more
adjacent compartments in the longitudinal direction.
(c)     The lowest point of every
non-watertight opening (e.g. doors, windows, access hatchways) shall lie at
least 0,10 m above the damaged waterline. The bulkhead deck shall not be
immersed in the final stage of flooding.
(d)     Permeability is assumed to be 95 %. If
it is proven by a calculation that the average permeability of any compartment
is less than 95 %, the calculated value can be used instead.
The values to be adopted shall not be less
than:
 Lounges || 95 % 
 Engine and boiler rooms || 85 % 
 Luggage and store rooms || 75 % 
 Double bottoms, fuel bunkers, ballast and other tanks, depending on whether, according to their intended purpose, they are to be assumed to be full or empty for the vessel floating at the plane of maximum draught || 0 or 95 % 
(e)     If damage of a smaller dimension than
specified above produces more detrimental effects with respect to heeling or
loss of metacentric height, such damage shall be taken into account for
calculation purposes.
10.                  
For all intermediate stages of flooding referred
to in paragraph 8, the following criteria shall be met:
(a)     the heeling angle φ at the
equilibrium position of the intermediate stage in question shall not exceed
15°;
(b)     beyond the heel in the equilibrium
position of the intermediate stage in question, the positive part of the
righting lever curve shall display a righting lever value of GZ ≥ 0,02 m
before the first unprotected opening becomes immersed or a heeling angle φ
of 25° is reached;
(c)     non-watertight openings shall not be
immersed before the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate stage
in question has been reached;
(d)     the calculation of the free surface
effect in all intermediate stages of flooding shall be based on the gross
surface area of the damaged compartments.
11.                  
During the final stage of flooding, the
following criteria shall be met taking into account the heeling moment in
accordance with paragraph 4:
(a)     the heeling angle φE
shall not exceed 10°;
(b)     beyond the equilibrium position the
positive part of the righting lever curve shall display a righting lever value
of GZR ≥ 0,02 m with an area A ≥ 0,0025 m·rad.
These minimum values for stability shall be met until the immersion of the
first unprotected opening or in any case before reaching a heeling angle φm
of 25°.

Where:
 φE ||   || is the heeling angle in the final stage of flooding taking into account the moment in accordance with section 4; 
 φm ||   || is the angle of vanishing stability or the angle at which the first unprotected opening immerses or 25°; whichever is less is to be used; 
 GZR ||   || is the remaining righting lever in the final stage of flooding taking into account the moment in accordance with section 4; 
 GZK ||   || is the heeling lever resulting from the moment in accordance with section 4; 
(c)     non-watertight openings shall not be
immersed before the equilibrium position has been reached; if such openings are
immersed before this point, the rooms affording access are deemed to be flooded
for damaged stability calculation purposes.
12.                  
The shut-off devices which shall be able to be
closed watertight shall be marked accordingly.
13.                  
If cross-flood openings to reduce asymmetrical
flooding are provided, they shall meet the following conditions:
(a)     for the calculation of cross-flooding,
IMO Resolution A.266 (VIII) shall be applied;
(b)     they shall be self-acting;
(c)     they shall not be equipped with
shut-off devices;
(d)     the total time allowed for
compensation shall not exceed 15 minutes.
Article 15.04
Safety clearance and
freeboard
1.                      
The safety clearance shall be at least equal to
the sum of:
(a)     the additional lateral immersion,
which, measured on the outside plating, is produced by the permissible heeling
angle according to Article 15.03(3)(e), and
(b)     the residual safety clearance
according to Article 15.03(3)(g).
For vessels without a bulkhead deck, the safety
clearance shall be at least 500 mm.
2.                      
The freeboard shall be at least equal to the sum
of:
(a)     the additional lateral immersion,
which, measured on the outside plating, is produced by the heeling angle
according to Article 15.03(3)(e), and
(b)     the residual freeboard according to
Article 15.03(3)(f).
However, the freeboard shall be at least 300
mm.
3.                      
The plane of maximum draught is to be set so as
to ensure compliance with the safety clearance according to paragraph 1, and
the freeboard according to paragraph 2 and Articles 15.02 and 15.03.
4.                      
For safety reasons, the inspection body may
stipulate a greater safety clearance or a greater freeboard.
Article 15.05
Maximum permitted number
of passengers
1.                      
The inspection body shall set the maximum
permitted number of passengers and shall enter this number on the Union inland
navigation certificate.
2.                      
The maximum permitted number of passengers shall
not exceed any of the following values:
(a)     number of passengers for whom the
existence of an evacuation area according to Article 15.06(8), has been proven;
(b)     number of passengers that has been
taken into account for the stability calculation according to Article 15.03;
(c)     number of available berths for
passengers on cabin vessels used for voyages including overnight stays.
3.                      
For cabin vessels which are also used as day
trip vessels, the number of passengers shall be calculated for use both as a
day trip vessel and as a cabin vessel and entered on the Union inland
navigation certificate.
4.                      
The maximum permitted number of passengers shall
be displayed on clearly legible and prominently positioned notices on board the
vessel.
Article 15.06
Passenger rooms and areas
1.                      
Passenger rooms shall:
(a)     on all decks, be located aft of the
level of the collision bulkhead and, if they are below the bulkhead deck,
forward of the level of the aft-peak bulkhead, 
(b)     be separated from the engine and
boiler rooms in a gas-tight manner, 
(c)     be so arranged, that sight lines in
accordance with Article 7.02 do not pass through them.
Deck areas which are enclosed by awnings or
similar mobile installations not only above but also fully or partially to the
side must satisfy the same requirements as enclosed passenger rooms.
2.                      
Cupboards and rooms referred to in Article 11.13
and intended for the storage of flammable liquids shall be outside the
passenger area.
3.                      
The number and width of the exits of passenger
rooms shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)     rooms or groups of rooms designed or
arranged for 30 or more passengers or including berths for 12 or more
passengers shall have at least two exits. On day trip vessels one of these two
exits can be replaced by two emergency exits; rooms, with the exception of
cabins, and groups of rooms that have only one exit, shall have at least one
emergency exit; 
(b)     if rooms are located below the
bulkhead deck, one of the exits can be a watertight bulkhead door, according to
Article 15.02(10), leading into an adjacent compartment from which the upper
deck can be reached directly. The other exit shall lead directly or, if
permitted in accordance with (a), as an emergency exit into the open air, or to
the bulkhead deck. This requirement does not apply to individual cabins;
(c)     exits according to (a) and (b) shall
be suitably arranged and shall have a clear width of at least 0,80 m and also a
clear height of at least 2,00 m. For doors of passenger cabins and other small
rooms, the clear width can be reduced to 0,70 m;
(d)     in the case of rooms or groups of
rooms intended for more than 80 passengers the sum of the widths of all exits
intended for passengers and which shall be used by them in an emergency shall
be at least 0,01 m per passenger;
(e)     if the total width of the exits is
determined by the number of passengers, the width of each exit shall be at
least 0,005 m per passenger;
(f)      emergency exits shall have a shortest
side at least 0,60 m long or a minimum diameter of 0,70 m. They shall open in
the direction of escape and be marked on both sides;
(g)     exits of rooms intended for use by
persons with reduced mobility shall have a clear width of at least 0,90 m.
Exits normally used for embarking and disembarking people with reduced mobility
shall have a clear width of at least 1,50 m.
4.                      
Doors of passenger rooms shall comply with the
following requirements:
(a)     with the exception of doors leading to
connecting corridors, they shall be capable of opening outwards or be
constructed as sliding doors;
(b)     cabin doors shall be made in such a
way that they can also be unlocked from the outside at any time;
(c)     powered doors shall open easily in the
event of failure of the power supply to this mechanism;
(d)     for doors intended for use by persons
with reduced mobility, there shall be from the direction from which the door
opens, a minimum clearance of 0,60 m between the inner edge of the doorframe on
the lock side and an adjacent perpendicular wall.
5.                      
Connecting corridors shall comply with the
following requirements:
(a)     they shall have a clear width of at
least 0,80 m. If they lead to rooms used by more than 80 passengers, they shall
comply with the provisions mentioned in (3)(d) and (e) regarding the width of
the exits leading to connecting corridors;
(b)     their clear height shall be not less
than 2,00 m;
(c)     connecting corridors intended for use
by persons with reduced mobility shall have a clear width of 1,30 m. Connecting
corridors more than 1,50 m wide shall have handrails on either side;
(d)     where a part of the vessel or a room
intended for passengers is served by a single connecting corridor, the clear
width thereof shall be at least 1,00 m;
(e)     connecting corridors shall be free of
steps;
(f)      they shall lead only to open decks,
rooms or staircases;
(g)     dead ends in connecting corridors
shall be not longer than two meters.
6.                      
In addition to the provisions of paragraph 5,
escape routes shall also comply with the following requirements:
(a)     stairways, exits and emergency exits
shall be so disposed that, in the event of a fire in any given area, the other
areas may be evacuated safely;
(b)     the escape routes shall lead by the
shortest route to evacuation areas according toparagraph 8;
(c)     escape routes shall not lead through
engine rooms or galleys;
(d)     there shall be no rungs, ladders or
the like installed at any point along the escape routes;
(e)     doors to escape routes shall be
constructed in such a way as not to reduce the minimum width of the escape
route referred to in paragraph 5(a) or (d);
(f)      escape routes and emergency exits
shall be clearly signed. The signs shall be lit by the emergency lighting
system.
7.                      
Escape routes and emergency exits shall have a
suitable safety guidance system.
8.                      
For all persons on board, there shall be muster
areas available which satisfy the following requirements:
(a)     the total area of the muster areas (AS)
shall correspond to at least the following value:
 Day trip vessels || : || AS = 0,35 · Fmax (m2) 
 Cabin vessels || : || AS = 0,45 · Fmax (m2) 
In these formulae the following definition
applies:
 Fmax ||   || maximum permitted number of passengers on board; 
(b)     each individual muster or evacuation
area shall be larger than 10 m2;
(c)     the muster areas shall be clear of
furniture, whether movable or fixed;
(d)     if movable furniture is located in a
room in which muster areas are defined, it shall be secured appropriately to
avoid slipping;
(e)     if fixed seats or benches are located
in a room in which muster areas are defined the corresponding number of persons
need not be taken into account when calculating the total area of muster areas
according to (a). However, the number of persons for whom fixed seats or
benches in a certain room are taken into account must not exceed the number of
persons for whom muster areas are available in this room;
(f)      lifesaving appliances shall be easily
accessible from the evacuation areas;
(g)     it shall be possible to evacuate
people safely from these evacuation areas, using either side of the vessel;
(h)     the muster areas shall lie above the
margin line;
(i) the muster and evacuation areas are to be
shown as such in the safety plan and signposted on board the vessel;
(j)      the provisions of (d) and (e) shall
also apply to free decks on which muster areas are defined;
(k)     if collective life-saving appliances
complying with Article 15.09(5), are available on board, the number of persons
for whom such appliances are available may be disregarded when calculating the
total surface area of the muster areas referred to in (a);
(l)      however, in all cases where
reductions according to (e), (j) and (k) are applied, the total area according
to (a) shall be sufficient for at least 50 % of the maximum permitted number of
passengers.
9.                      
Stairs and their landings in the passenger areas
shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)     they shall be constructed in accordance
with European standard EN 13056: 2000;
(b)     they shall have a clear width of at
least 0,80 m or, if they lead to connecting corridors or areas used by more
than 80 passengers, at least 0,01 m per passenger;
(c)     they shall have a clear width of at least
1,00 m if they provide the only means of access to a room intended for
passengers;
(d)     where there is not at least one
staircase on each side of the vessel in the same room, they shall lie in the
safe area;
(e)     in addition, stairs intended for use
by persons with reduced mobility shall comply with the following requirements:
(aa)    The gradient of the stairs shall not
exceed 38°;
(bb)   The stairs shall have a clear width of
at least 0,90 m;
(cc)    Spiral staircases are not allowed;
(dd)   The stairs shall not run in a direction
transverse to the vessel;
(ee)    The handrails of the stairs shall
extend approximately 0,30 m beyond the top and bottom of the stairs without
restricting traffic routes;
(ff)     Handrails, front sides of at least
the first and the last step as well as the floor coverings at the ends of the
stairs shall be colour highlighted.
Lifts intended for persons with reduced
mobility, and lifting equipment, like stairlifts or lifting platforms, shall be
constructed according to a relevant standard or a regulation of a Member State.
10.                  
Parts of the deck intended for passengers, and
which are not enclosed, shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)     they shall be surrounded by a fixed
bulwark or guard rail at least 1,00 m high or a railing according to the
European standard EN 711: 1995, construction type PF, PG or PZ. Bulwarks and
railings of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall be at
least 1,10 m high;
(b)     openings and equipment for embarking
or disembarking and also openings for loading or unloading shall be such that
they can be secured and have a clear width of at least 1,00 m. Openings, used
normally for the embarking or disembarking of persons with reduced mobility,
shall have a clear width of at least 1,50 m;
(c)     if the openings and equipment for
embarking or disembarking cannot be observed from the wheelhouse, optical or
electronic aids shall be provided;
(d)     passengers sitting down shall not
interrupt sight lines in accordance with Article 7.02.
11.                  
The parts of the vessel not intended for
passengers, in particular access to the wheelhouse, to the winches and to the
engine rooms, shall be such that they can be secured against unauthorised
entry. At any such access, a symbol corresponding to Figure 1 in Appendix I
shall be displayed in a prominent position.
12.                  
Gangways shall be constructed in accordance with
European standard EN 14206: 2003. By way of derogation from Article
10.02(2)(d), their length can be less than 4 m.
13.                  
Traffic areas intended for use by persons with
reduced mobility shall have a clear width of 1,30 m and be free of doorsteps
and sills more than 0,025 m high. Walls in traffic areas intended for use by
persons with reduced mobility shall be equipped with handrails at a height of
0,90 m above the floor.
14.                  
Glass doors and walls in traffic areas and also
window panes shall be manufactured from pre-stressed glass or laminated glass.
They may also be made from a synthetic material, provided this is authorised
for use in a fire-protection context.
Transparent doors and transparent walls
extending as far as the floor in traffic areas shall be prominently marked.
15.                  
Superstructures or their roofs consisting
completely of panoramic panes and enclosures created by awnings or similar
mobile installations and their substructures shall be so designed as to, and
shall only be manufactured from materials which, in the event of an accident,
reduce as much as possible the risks of injury to the persons on board.
16.                  
Potable water systems shall, at least, comply
with the requirements of Article 12.05.
17.                  
There shall be toilets available for passengers.
At least one toilet shall be fitted for use by persons with reduced mobility
according to a relevant standard or a regulation of a Member State and shall be
accessible from areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility.
18.                  
Cabins without an opening window shall be
connected to a ventilation system.
19.                  
By analogy, rooms in which crew members or
shipboard personnel are accommodated shall comply with the provisions of this
Article.
Article 15.07
Propulsion system
In addition to the main propulsion system,
vessels shall be equipped with a second independent propulsion system so as to
ensure that, in the event of a breakdown affecting the main propulsion system,
the vessel can continue to make steerageway under its own power.
The second independent propulsion system
shall be placed in a separate engine room. If both engine rooms have common
partitions, these shall be built according to Article 15.11 (2).
Article 15.08
Safety devices and
equipment
1.                      
All passenger vessels shall have internal
communication facilities according to Article 7.08. Such facilities shall also
be available in the operation rooms and, where there is no direct communication
from the wheelhouse, in the access and muster areas for passengers as referred
to in Article 15.06(8).
2.                      
All passenger areas shall be reachable via a
loudspeaker system. The system shall be designed in such a way as to ensure
that the information transmitted can be clearly distinguished from background
noise. Loudspeakers are optional where direct communication between the
wheelhouse and the passenger area is possible.
3.                      
The vessel shall be equipped with an alarm
system. The system shall include:
(a)     an alarm system enabling passengers,
crew members and shipboard personnel to alert the vessel's command and crew.
This alarm should be given only in areas
assigned to the vessel's command and to the crew; it should only be possible
for the vessel's command to stop the alarm. The alarm shall be capable of being
triggered from at least the following places:
(aa)    in each cabin;
(bb)   in the corridors, lifts and stairwells,
with the distance to the nearest trigger not exceeding 10 m and with at least
one trigger per watertight compartment;
(cc)    in lounges, dining rooms and similar recreation
rooms;
(dd)   in toilets, intended for use by persons
with reduced mobility;
(ee)    in engine rooms, galleys and similar
rooms where there is a fire risk;
(ff)     in the cold-storage rooms and other
store rooms.
The alarm triggers shall be installed at a
height above the floor of 0,85 m to 1,10 m;
(b)     an alarm system enabling the vessel's
command to alert passengers.
This alarm shall be clearly and unmistakably
audible in all rooms accessible to passengers. It shall be capable of being
triggered from the wheelhouse and from a location that is permanently staffed;
(c)     an alarm system enabling the vessel's
command to alert the crew and shipboard personnel.
The alarm system referred to in Article
7.09(1), shall also reach the recreation rooms for the shipboard personnel, the
cold-storage rooms and other store rooms.
Alarm triggers shall be protected against
unintentional use.
4.                      
Each watertight compartment shall be fitted with
a bilge level alarm.
5.                      
Two motor-driven bilge pumps shall be provided.
6.                      
A bilge pumping system with permanently
installed pipe work shall be available.
7.                      
Cold-storage room doors, even when locked, shall
also be capable of being opened from the inside.
8.                      
Where CO2 bar-systems are situated in rooms
below deck these rooms shall be fitted with an automatic ventilation system
which turns itself on automatically when the door or hatch to the room is
opened. The ventilation ducts shall run down to 0,05 m from the floor of this
room.
9.                      
In addition to the first-aid kit according to
Article 10.02(2)(f), further first-aid kits shall be provided in sufficient
number. The first-aid kits and their storage shall comply with the requirements
set out in Article 10.02(2)(f).
Article 15.09
Life-saving equipment
1.                      
In addition to the lifebuoys specified in
Article 10.05(1), all parts of the deck intended for passengers and not
enclosed shall be equipped with suitable lifebuoys, which shall be positioned
on both sides of the vessel not more than 20 m apart. Lifebuoys shall be
considered as suitable if they comply with
–              
the European standard EN 14144:2003, or
–              
the International Convention for the Safety of
Life at Sea (SOLAS 1974) Chapter III Rule 7.1 and the International Life-Saving
Appliance (LSA) Code, paragraph 2.1.
Half of all the prescribed lifebuoys shall be
fitted with a buoyant cord at least 30 m long with a diameter of 8 to 11 mm.
The other half of the prescribed lifebuoys shall be fitted with a
self-igniting, battery-powered light which will not be extinguished in water.
2.                      
In addition to the lifebuoys referred to in section
1, individual life-saving equipment according to Article 10.05, section 2,
shall be within reach for all shipboard personnel. For shipboard personal not
responsible for undertaking duties according to the safety rota not inflatable
or semi-automatically inflatable lifejackets according to the standards
mentioned in Article 10.05, section 2, are allowed.
3.                      
Passenger vessels shall have appropriate
equipment to enable persons to be transferred safely to shallow water, to the
bank or to another craft.
4.                      
In addition to the life-saving equipment
referred to in sections 1 and 2, individual life-saving equipment according to
Article 10.05, section 2, shall be available for 100 % of the maximum permitted
number of passengers. Not inflatable or semi-automatically inflatable
lifejackets according to the standards mentioned in Article 10.05, section 2,
are also allowed.
5.                      
The term ‘collective life-saving equipment’
covers ship's boats according to Article 10.04, and life rafts.
Life rafts shall:
(a)     bear a notice indicating their purpose
and the number of persons for whom they are approved;
(b)     offer adequate seating space for the
permitted number of persons;
(c)     provide a buoyancy of at least 750 N
per person in fresh water;
(d)     be provided with a rope linked to the
passenger vessel to prevent them drifting away;
(e)     be made of suitable materials and be
resistant to oil, oil products and temperatures up to 50 °C;
(f)      assume and maintain a stable trim
and, in this respect, be fitted with appropriate devices enabling them to be
grabbed by the indicated number of persons;
(g)     be fluorescent orange in colour or
have fluorescent surfaces, visible from all sides, of at least 100 cm2;
(h)     be such that they can be released from
their stowed position and put overboard quickly and safely by one person, or
can float free from their stowed position;
(i)      be provided with appropriate means of
evacuation from the evacuation areas referred to in Article 15.06(8), onto the
life rafts if the vertical distance between the deck of the evacuation areas
and the plane of maximum draught is greater than 1 m.
6.                      
Additional collective life-saving appliances are
items of life-saving equipment which ensure the buoyancy of several persons in
the water. These shall:
(a)     bear a notice indicating their purpose
and the number of persons for whom they are approved;
(b)     provide a buoyancy of at least 100 N
per person in fresh water;
(c)     be made of suitable materials and be
resistant to oil, oil products and to temperatures of up to 50 °C;
(d)     assume and maintain a stable trim and,
in this respect, be fitted with appropriate devices enabling them to be grabbed
by the indicated number of persons;
(e)     be fluorescent orange in colour or
have fluorescent surfaces, visible from all sides, of at least 100 cm2;
(f)      be such that they can be released
from their stowed position and put overboard quickly and safely by one person,
or can float free from their stowed position.
7.                      
Inflatable collective life-saving appliances
shall in addition:
(a)     comprise at least two separate air compartments;
(b)     inflate automatically or by manual
command when launched;
(c)     assume and maintain a stable trim
irrespective of the load to be supported, even when only half the air
compartments are inflated.
8.                      
The life-saving appliances shall be stowed on board
in such a way that they can be reached easily and safely when required.
Concealed storage places shall be clearly marked.
9.                      
Life-saving equipment shall be checked according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
10.                  
The ship's boat shall be equipped with an engine
and a searchlight.
11.                  
A suitable stretcher shall be available.
Article 15.10
Electrical Equipment
1.                      
Only electrical equipment shall be permitted for
lighting.
2.                      
Article 9.16(3), shall also apply additionally
for passageways and recreation rooms for passengers.
3.                      
For the following rooms and locations, adequate
lighting and emergency lighting shall be provided:
(a)     locations where life-saving equipment
is stored and where such equipment is normally prepared for use;
(b)     escape routes, access for passengers,
including gangways, entrances and exits, connecting corridors, lifts and
accommodation area companionways, cabin areas and accommodation areas;
(c)     markings on the escape routes and
emergency exits;
(d)     in other areas intended for use by
persons with reduced mobility;
(e)     operation rooms, engine rooms,
steering equipment rooms and their exits;
(f)      wheelhouse;
(g)     emergency power supply room;
(h)     points at which extinguishers and fire
extinguishing equipment controls are located;
(i)      areas in which passengers, shipboard
personnel and crew muster in the event of danger.
4.                      
There shall be an emergency power plant,
consisting of an emergency power source and emergency switchboard, which, in
the event of a failure of the supply to the following electrical equipment, can
immediately take over as their replacement supply, where the equipment does not
have its own power source:
(a)     signal lights;
(b)     audible warning devices;
(c)     emergency lighting in accordance with
paragraph 3;
(d)     radiotelephone installations;
(e)     alarm, loudspeaker and on-board
message communications systems;
(f)      searchlights according to Article
10.02(2)(i);
(g)     fire alarm system;
(h)     other safety equipment such as
automatic pressurised sprinkler systems or fire extinguishing pumps;
(i) lifts and lifting equipment within the
meaning of Article 15.06 (9), second sentence.
5.                      
The light fittings for the emergency lighting
shall be marked as such.
6.                      
The emergency power plant shall be installed
outside the main engine room, outside the rooms housing the power sources
referred to in Article 9.02(1), and outside the room where the main switchboard
is located; it shall be separated from these rooms by partitions according to
Article 15.11(2).
Cables feeding the electrical installations in
the event of an emergency shall be installed and routed in such a way as to
maintain the continuity of supply of these installations in the event of fire
or flooding. These cables shall never be routed through the main engine room,
galleys or rooms where the main power source and its connected equipment is
installed, except insofar as it is necessary to provide emergency equipment in
such areas.
The emergency power plant shall be installed
either above the margin line or as far away as possible from the power sources
according to Article 9.02(1), so as to ensure that, in the event of flooding in
accordance with Article 15.03(9), it is not flooded at the same time as these
power sources.
7.                      
The following are admissible for use as an
emergency power source:
(a)     auxiliary generator sets with their
own independent fuel supply and independent cooling system which, in the event
of a power failure, turn on and take over the supply of power within 30 seconds
automatically or, if they are located in the immediate vicinity of the
wheelhouse or any other location permanently manned by crew members, can be
turned on manually;, or
(b)     accumulator batteries, which, in the
event of a power failure, turn on automatically or, if they are located in the
immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse or any other location permanently manned
by crew members, can be turned on manually. They shall be capable of powering
the abovementioned power consumers throughout the prescribed period without
recharging and without an unacceptable voltage reduction.
8.                      
The projected operating period for the emergency
power supply is to be defined according to the defined purpose of the passenger
vessel. It shall not be less than 30 minutes.
9.                      
The insulation resistances and the earthing for
electrical systems shall be tested on the occasion of inspections according to
Article 2.09.
10.                  
The power sources according to Article 9.02(1),
shall be independent of each other.
11.                  
A failure of the main or emergency power
equipment shall not mutually affect the operational safety of the
installations.
Article 15.11
Fire protection
1.                      
The suitability for fire protection of materials
and components shall be established by an accredited test institution on the
basis of appropriate test methods.
(a)     The test institution shall satisfy:
(aa)    the Code for Fire Test Procedures; or
(bb)   European standard EN ISO/IEC 17025:
2000 concerning the general requirements for the competence of testing and
calibration laboratories.
(b)     The recognised test methods for
determining the non-flammability of materials are:
(aa)    Annex 1, Part 1, of the Code for Fire
Test Procedures; and
(bb)   the equivalent regulations of one of
the Member States.
(c)     The recognised test methods for
determining that a material is flame-retardant are:
(aa)    the respective requirements laid down
in Annex 1, Parts 5 (Surface flammability test), 6 (Test for the deck
coverings), 7 (Test for hanging textiles and plastics), 8 (Test for upholstered
furniture) and 9 (Test for components of bedding) of the Code for Fire Test
Procedures; and
(bb)   the equivalent regulations of one of
the Member States.
(d)     The recognised test methods for
determining fire resistance are:
(aa)    Annex I, part 3, of the Code for Fire
Test Procedures, and
(bb)   the equivalent regulations of one of
the Member States.
(e)     The inspection body may, in accordance
with the Code for Fire Test Procedures, prescribe a test on a sample partition
in order to ensure compliance with the provisions of paragraph 2 on resistivity
and temperature increase.
2.                      
Partitions
(a)     between rooms shall be designed in
accordance with the following          tables:
(aa)    Table for partitions between rooms, in
which no pressurised sprinkler systems according to Article 10.03a are
installed 
 Rooms || Control centres || Stairwells || Muster areas || Lounges || Engine rooms || Galleys || Store rooms 
 Control centres || - || A0 || A0/B151) || A30 || A60 || A60 || A30/A605) 
 Stairwells ||   || - || A0 || A30 || A60 || A60 || A30 
 Muster areas ||   ||   || - || A30/B152) || A60 || A60 || A30/A605) 
 Lounges ||   ||   ||   || -/A0/B153) || A60 || A60 || A30 
 Engine rooms ||   ||   ||   ||   || A60/A04) || A60 || A60 
 Galleys ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || A0 || A30/B156) 
 Store rooms ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || - 
(bb)   Table for partitions between rooms, in
which pressurised sprinkler systems according to Article 10.03a are installed 
 Rooms || Control centres || Stairwells || Muster areas || Lounges || Engine rooms || Galleys || Store rooms 
 Control centres || - || A0 || A0/ B15 1) || A0 || A60 || A30 || A0/A305) 
 Stairwells ||   || - || A0 || A0 || A60 || A30 || A0 
 Muster areas ||   ||   || - || A30/B15 2) || A60 || A30 || A0/A305) 
 Lounges ||   ||   ||   || -/B15/ B 03) || A60 || A30 || A0 
 Engine rooms ||   ||   ||   ||   || A60/A0 4) || A60 || A60 
 Galleys ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || - || A0/B156) 
 Store rooms ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || - 
 1)       Partitions between control centres and internal muster areas shall correspond to Type A0, but external muster areas only to Type B15. 
 2)       Partitions between lounges and internal muster areas shall correspond to Type A30, but external muster areas only to Type B15. 
 3)       Partitions between cabins, partitions between cabins and corridors and vertical partitions separating lounges according to paragraph 10 shall comply with Type B15, for rooms fitted with pressurised sprinkler systems B0. Partitions between cabins and saunas shall comply with Type A0, for rooms fitted with pressurised sprinkler systems B15. 
 4)       Partitions between engine rooms according to Articles 15.07 and 15.10 (6) shall comply with Type A60; in other cases they shall comply with Type A0. 
 5)       Partitions between store rooms for the storage of flammable liquids and control centres and muster areas shall comply with Type A60, for rooms fitted with pressurised sprinkler systems A30. 
 6)       B15 is sufficient for partitions between galleys, on the one hand, and cold-storage rooms and food store rooms, on the other." 
(b)     Type A partitions are bulkheads, walls
and decks which satisfy the following requirements:
(aa)    They are made of steel or of another
equivalent material;
(bb)   They are appropriately stiffened;
(cc)    They are insulated with an approved
non-combustible material such that the average temperature on the side facing
away from the fire rises to not more than 140 °C above the initial temperature
and at no point, including the gaps at the joints, does a temperature increase
of more than 180 °C above the initial temperature occur within the following
specified periods:
Type A60 — 60 minutes
Type A30 — 30 minutes
Type A0 — 0 minutes;
(dd)   they are constructed in such a way as
to prevent the transmission of smoke and flames until the end of the one-hour
normal fire test;
(c)     Type B partitions are bulkheads,
walls, decks, ceilings or facings that meet the following requirements:
(aa)    they are made of an approved
non-combustible material. Furthermore, all materials used in the manufacture
and assembly of partitions shall be non-combustible, except for the facing,
which shall be at least flame retardant;
(bb)   they demonstrate an insulation value
such that the average temperature on the side facing away from the fire rises
to not more than 140 °C above the initial temperature and at no point,
including the gaps at the joints, does a temperature increase of more than 225
°C above the initial temperature occur within the following specified periods:
Type B15 — 15 minutes
Type B0 — 0 minutes;
(cc)    they are constructed in such a way as
to prevent the transmission of flames until the end of the first half hour of
the normal fire test.
3.                      
Paints, lacquers and other surface treatment
products as well as deck coverings used in rooms except engine rooms and store
rooms shall be flame-retardant. Carpets, fabrics, curtains and other hanging
textile materials as well as upholstered furniture and components of bedding
shall be flame-retardant if the rooms in which they are located are not
equipped with a pressurised sprinkler system according to Article 10.03a.
4.                      
Lounge ceilings and wall claddings, including
their substructures, shall, where these lounges do not have a pressurised
sprinkler system in accordance with Article 10.03a, be manufactured from
non-combustible materials with the exception of their surfaces, which shall be
at least flame-retardant. The first sentence shall not apply to saunas.
5.                      
Furniture and fittings in lounges which serve as
muster areas shall, where the rooms do not have a pressurised sprinkler system
according to Article 10.03a, be manufactured from non-combustible materials.
6.                      
Paints, lacquers and other materials used on
exposed internal areas shall not produce excessive amounts of smoke or toxic
substances. This shall be proven in accordance with the Code for Fire Test
Procedures.
7.                      
Insulation materials in lounges shall be
non-combustible. This does not apply to insulations used on coolant-carrying
pipes. The surfaces of the insulation materials used on these pipes shall be at
least flame-retardant.
7a.          Awnings and similar mobile
installations with which deck areas are fully or partially enclosed and their
substructures shall be at least flame-retardant.
8.                      
Doors in partitions according to paragraph 2
shall satisfy the following requirements:
(a)     they shall satisfy the same requirements
set out in paragraph 2 as the partitions themselves;
(b)     they shall be self-closing in the case
of doors in partition walls according toparagraph 10 or in the case of
enclosures around engine rooms, galleys and stairwells;
(c)     self-closing doors which remain open
in normal operation shall be such that they can be closed from a location
permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members; Once a door has been
remotely closed, it shall be possible to reopen and close it safely on the
spot;
(d)     watertight doors according to Article
15.02 need not be insulated.
9.                      
Walls according to paragraph 2 shall be
continuous from deck to deck or end at continuous ceilings, which satisfy the
same requirements as referred to in paragraph 2.
10.                  
The following passenger areas shall be divided
by vertical partitions as referred to in paragraph 2:
(a)     passenger areas with a total surface
area of more than 800 m2;
(b)     passenger areas in which there are
cabins, at intervals of not more than 40 m.
The vertical partitions shall be smoke-tight
under normal operating conditions and shall be continuous from deck to deck.
11.                  
Hollows above ceilings, beneath floors and
behind wall claddings shall be separated at intervals of not more than 14 m by
non-combustible draught stops which, even in the event of fire, provide an
effective fireproof seal.
12.                  
Stairs shall be made of steel or another
equivalent non-combustible material.
13.                  
Internal stairs and lifts shall be encapsulated
at all levels by walls according to paragraph 2. The following exceptions are
permissible:
(a)     a staircase connecting only two decks
does not need to be encapsulated, if on one of the decks the staircase is
enclosed according to paragraph 2;
(b)     in a lounge, stairs need not be
encapsulated if they are located entirely within the interior of this room, and
(aa)    if this room extends over only two
decks, or
(bb)   if there is a pressurised sprinkler
system according to Article 10.03a installed in this room on all decks, this
room has a smoke extraction system according to paragraph 16 and the room has
access on all decks to a stairwell.
14.                  
Ventilation systems and air supply systems shall
satisfy the following requirements:
(a)     they shall be designed in such a way
as to ensure that they themselves do not cause the spread of fire and smoke;
(b)     openings for air intake and extraction
and air supply systems shall be such that they can be closed off;
(c)     ventilation ducts shall be made from
steel or an equivalent non-combustible material and be securely connected to
each other and to the superstructure of the vessel;
(d)     when ventilation ducts with a
cross-section of more than 0,02 m2 are passed through partitions
according to paragraph 2 of Type A or partitions according to paragraph 10,
they shall be fitted with automatic fire dampers which can be operated from a
location permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members;
(e)     ventilation systems for galleys and
engine rooms shall be separated from ventilation systems which supply other
areas;
(f)      air extraction ducts shall be
provided with lockable openings for inspection and cleaning. These openings
shall be located close to the fire dampers;
(g)     built-in ventilators shall be such
that they can be switched off from a central location outside the engine room.
15.                  
Galleys shall be fitted with ventilation systems
and stoves with extractors. The air extraction ducts of the extractors shall
satisfy the requirements according to paragraph 14 and, additionally, be fitted
with manually operated fire dampers at the inlet openings.
16.                  
Control centres, stairwells and internal muster
areas shall be fitted with natural or mechanical smoke extraction systems.
Smoke extraction systems shall satisfy the following requirements:
(a)     they shall offer sufficient capacity
and reliability;
(b)     they shall comply with the operating
conditions for passenger vessels;
(c)     if smoke extraction systems also serve
as general ventilators for the rooms, this shall not hinder their function as
smoke extraction systems in the event of a fire;
(d)     smoke extraction systems shall have a
manually operated triggering device;
(e)     mechanical smoke extraction systems
shall additionally be such that they can be operated from a location
permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members;
(f)      natural smoke extraction systems
shall be fitted with an opening mechanism, operated either manually or by a
power source inside the extraction system;
(g)     manually operated triggering devices
and opening mechanisms shall be accessible from inside or outside the room
being protected.
17.                  
Lounges not constantly supervised by shipboard
personnel or crew members, galleys, engine rooms and other rooms presenting a
fire risk shall be connected to an appropriate fire alarm system. The existence
of a fire and its exact whereabouts shall be automatically displayed at a
location permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members.
Article 15.12
Fire-fighting
1.                      
In addition to the portable extinguishers
according to Article 10.03, at least the following portable extinguishers shall
be available on board:
(a)     one portable extinguisher for every
120 m2 of gross floor area in passenger areas;
(b)     one portable extinguisher per group of
10 cabins, rounded upwards;
(c)     one portable extinguisher in each
galley and in the vicinity of any room in which flammable liquids are stored or
used. In galleys the extinguishing agent shall also be suitable for fighting
fat fires.
These additional fire extinguishers shall meet
the requirements laid down in Article 10.03, paragraph 2, and be installed and
distributed on the vessel so that, in the event of a fire starting at any point
and at any time, a fire extinguisher can be reached immediately. In every
galley and also in hairdressing salons and perfumeries, there shall be a fire
blanket to hand.
2.                      
Passenger vessels shall be provided with a
hydrant system consisting of:
(a)     two motor-driven fire extinguishing
pumps of sufficient capacity, at least one of which is permanently installed;
(b)     one fire extinguisher line with a
sufficient number of hydrants with permanently connected fire hoses at least 20
m in length and fitted with a nozzle capable of producing both a mist and a jet
of water and incorporating a shut-off facility.
3.                      
Hydrant systems shall be designed and
dimensioned in such a way that:
(a)     any point of the vessel can be reached
from at least two hydrants in different places, each with a single hose length
of not more than 20 m;
(b)     the pressure at the hydrants is at
least 300 kPa; and
(c)     on all decks a water jet length of at
least 6 m can be attained.
If a hydrant chest is provided, an
‘extinguisher hose’ symbol similar to that shown in Figure 5 in Appendix I, of
at least 10 cm side length, shall be affixed to the outside of the chest.
4.                      
Hydrant valves with screw threads or cocks shall
be such that they can be set so that each of the fire hoses can be separated
and removed during operation of the fire extinguishing pumps.
5.                      
Fire extinguisher hoses in the internal area
shall be rolled up on an axially connected reel.
6.                      
Materials for fire-fighting equipment shall
either be heat-resistant or shall be suitably protected against failure to work
when subjected to high temperatures.
7.                      
Pipes and hydrants shall be arranged in such a
way that the possibility of freezing is avoided.
8.                      
The fire extinguishing pumps shall:
(a)     be installed or housed in separate
rooms;
(b)     be such that they can be operated
independently of each other;
(c)     each be capable, on all decks, of
maintaining the necessary pressure at the hydrants and achieving the requisite
length of water jet;
(d)     be installed forward of the aft
bulkhead.
Fire extinguishing pumps may also be used for
general purposes.
9.                      
Engine rooms shall be fitted with a permanently
fitted fire extinguishing system according to Article 10.03b.
10.                  
On cabin vessels there shall be:
(a)     two self-contained breathing apparatus
sets corresponding to European standard EN 137: 1993 with full-face masks
corresponding to European standard EN 136: 1998;
(b)     two sets of equipment consisting of at
least a protective suit, helmet, boots, gloves, axe, crowbar, torch and
safety-line, and
(c)     four smoke hoods.
Article 15.13
Safety organisation
1.                      
A safety rota shall be provided on board
passenger vessels. The safety rota describes the duties of the crew and the
shipboard personnel in the following eventualities:
(a) breakdown;
(b) fire on board;
(c) evacuation of passengers;
(d) person overboard.
Specific safety measures for persons with
reduced mobility shall be taken into consideration.
The crew members and shipboard personnel
designated in the safety rota should be assigned their various duties,
depending on the posts they occupy. Special instructions to the crew shall
ensure that, in the event of danger, all doors and openings in the watertight
bulkheads referred to in Article 15.02 will be hermetically closed immediately.
2.                      
The safety rota includes a safety plan, in which
at least the following are clearly and precisely designated:
(a)     areas intended for use by persons with
reduced mobility;
(b)     escape routes, emergency exits and
muster and evacuation areas as referred to in Article 15.06(8);
(c)     life-saving equipment and ship's
boats;
(d)     fire extinguishers and fire
extinguishing and pressurised sprinkler systems;
(e)     other safety equipment;
(f)      the alarm system referred to in
Article 15.08(3)(a);
(g)     the alarm system referred to in Article
15.(3)(b) and (c);
(h)     the bulkhead doors referred to in
Article 15.02(5), and the position of their controls, as well as the other
openings referred to in Article 15.02(9), (10) and (13), and Article 15.03(12);
(i)      doors referred to in Article 15.11(8);
(j)      fire dampers;
(k)     fire alarm system;
(l)      emergency power plant;
(m)    ventilation system control units;
(n)     shore connections;
(o)     fuel line shut-offs;
(p)     liquefied gas installations;
(q)     public address systems;
(r)      radiotelephone equipment;
(s)     first-aid kits.
3.                      
The safety rota according to paragraph 1 and the
safety plan according to paragraph 2 shall:
(a)     be duly stamped by the inspection
body, and
(b)     be prominently displayed at an
appropriate point on each deck.
4.                      
A code of conduct for passengers shall be posted
up in each cabin and also a simplified safety plan containing only the
information referred to in paragraph 2(a) to (f).
This code of conduct shall include at least:
(a) designation of emergencies
–              
fire,
–              
flooding,
–              
general hazard;
(b) description of the various alarm signals;
(c) instructions concerning the following:
–              
escape routes,
–              
what to do,
–              
need to keep calm;
(d) instructions concerning the following:
–              
smoking,
–              
use of fire and naked flame,
–              
opening windows,
–              
use of certain items of equipment.
These details shall be posted up in Dutch,
English, French and German.
Article 15.14
Waste water collection and
disposal facilities
1.                      
Passenger vessels shall be equipped with
collection tanks for domestic waste water in accordance with paragraph 2 of
this Article or appropriate on-board sewage treatment plants in accordance with
Chapter 14a.
2.                      
Waste water collection tanks shall have
sufficient capacity. Tanks shall be fitted with a device to indicate their
content level. There shall be on-board pumps and pipes for emptying the tanks,
whereby waste water can be passed from both sides of the vessel. It shall be
possible to pass waste water from other vessels through.
The pipes shall be fitted with a discharge
connection according to European standard EN 1306: 1996.
Article 15.15
Derogations for certain
passenger vessels
1.                      
Passenger vessels authorised to carry up to a
maximum of 50 passengers and with a length LWL of not more than 25 m shall
prove adequate stability after damage according to Article 15.03(7 to 13) or,
as an alternative, prove that they comply with the following criteria after
symmetrical flooding: 
(a) the immersion of the vessel shall not
exceed the margin line and
(b) the metacentric height GMR
shall not be less than 0,10 m.
The necessary residual buoyancy shall be
assured through the appropriate choice of material used for the construction of
the hull or by means of highly cellular foam floats, solidly attached to the
hull. In the case of vessels with a length of more than 15 m, residual buoyancy
can be ensured by a combination of floats and subdivision complying with the
1-compartment status according to in Article 15.03.
2.                      
For passenger vessels in accordance with
paragraph1 the inspection body may permit minor derogations from the clear
height required in Article 15.06(3)(c) and paragraph 5(b). The derogation shall
not be more than 5 %. In the case of derogations the relevant parts shall be
indicated by colour.
3.                      
By way of derogation from Article 15.03(9),
passenger vessels not exceeding 45 m in length and authorised to carry up to a
maximum of 250 passengers do not need to have two-compartment status.
4.                      
(Left void)
5.                      
The inspection body may waive the application of
Article 10.04 in the case of passenger vessels authorised to carry up to a
maximum of 250 passengers and with a length LWL of not more than 25 m, provided
they are equipped with a platform, accessible from each side of the vessel,
directly above the line of flotation, so as to enable persons to be recovered
from the water. Passenger vessels may be equipped with a comparable
installation, subject to the following conditions:
(a)     one person alone shall be able to
operate the installation;
(b)     mobile installations are allowed;
(c)     the installations shall be outside the
danger area of the propulsion systems; and
(d)     effective communication shall be
possible between the boatmaster and the person in charge of the installation.
6.                      
The inspection body may waive the application of
Article 10.04 in the case of passenger vessels authorised to carry up to a
maximum of 600 passengers and with a length of not more than 45 m, provided
they are equipped with a platform according to paragraph 5, first sentence, or
with an equivalent installation according to paragraph 5, second sentence. In
addition, the passenger vessel shall have:
(a) a rudder propeller, a cycloidal propeller
or a water jet as main propulsion, or
(b) a main propulsion system with two
propulsion units, or
(c) a main propulsion system and a
bow-thruster.
7.                      
By way of derogation from Article 15.02(9),
passenger vessels not exceeding 45 m in length and authorised to carry at most
a number of passengers corresponding to the length of the vessel in metres are
allowed to have on board, in the passenger area, a manually controlled bulkhead
door without remote control according to Article 15.02(5), if:
(a)     the vessel has only one deck;
(b)     this door is accessible directly from
the deck and is not more than 10 m away from the deck;
(c)     the lower edge of the door opening
lies at least 30 cm above the floor of the passenger area, and
(d)     each of the compartments divided by
the door is fitted with a bilge level alarm.
8.                      
On passenger vessels in accordance with
paragraph 7, by way of derogation from Article 15.06(6)(c), one escape route
may lead through a galley, as long as there is a second escape route available.
9.                      
For passenger vessels with a length not
exceeding 45 m the following shall not apply: Article 15.01(2)(e), when the
liquefied gas installations are fitted with appropriate alarm systems for CO
concentrations posing a health risk and for potentially explosive mixtures of
gas and air.
10.                  
The following provisions shall not apply to
passenger vessels with a length LWL not exceeding 25 m: 
(a) Article 15.04(1), last sentence;
(b) Article 15.06(6)(c), for the galleys, as
long as a second escape route is available;
(c) Article 15.07.
11.                  
For cabin vessels not exceeding 45 m in length,
Article 15.12(10), shall not apply, provided smoke-hoods in a number
corresponding to the number of berths are readily accessible in each cabin.
CHAPTER 15a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PASSENGER SAILING VESSELS
Article 15a.01
Application of Part II
In addition to the provisions of Part II,
the requirements in this Chapter shall apply to passenger sailing vessels.
Article 15a.02
Exceptions for certain passenger
sailing vessels
1.                      
For passenger sailing vessels having an LWL not
exceeding 45 m and a maximum permissible number of passengers not exceeding LWL
in whole meters, the following provisions shall not apply:
(a) Article 3.03(7), provided that anchors are
not transported in hawse pipes;
(b) Article 10.02(2)(d), with regard to
length;
(c) Article 15.08(3)(a);
(d) Article 15.15(9)(a).
2.                      
By way of derogation from paragraph1, the number
of passengers may be raised to 1,5 times the LWL in whole meters, if sails,
rigging and deck fittings so permit.
Article 15a.03
Stability requirements for
vessels under sail
1.                      
For the calculation of the heeling moment
according to Article 15.03(3), the furled sails shall be taken into account
when determining the centre of gravity of the vessel.
2.                      
Taking into consideration all load conditions
according to Article 15.03(2), and using a standard arrangement of sails, the
heeling moment caused by wind pressure shall not be so high as to exceed a
heeling angle of 20°. At the same time
(a) a constant wind pressure of 0,07 kN/m2
shall be applied for the calculation,
(b) the residual safety clearance shall be at
least 100 mm, and
(c) the residual freeboard shall not be
negative.
3.                      
The righting lever of static stability shall
(a) reach its maximum value at a heeling angle
of 25° or over,
(b) amount to at least 200 mm at a heeling
angle of 30° or over,
(c) be positive at a heeling angle of up to
60°.
4.                      
The area under the righting lever curve shall
not be less than
(a)     0,055 mrad up to 30°;
(b)     0,09 mrad up to 40° or at the angle at
which an unprotected opening reaches the water surface and which is less than
40°.
Between
(c)     30° and 40°, or
(d)     30° and the angle at which an
unprotected opening reaches the water surface and which is less than 40°,
this area shall not be less than 0,03 mrad.
Article 15a.04
Shipbuilding and
mechanical requirements
1.                      
By way of derogation from Article 6.01(3), and
Article 9.01(3), the equipment must be designed for permanent lists of up to
20°.
2.                      
By way of derogation from Article 15.06(5)(a)
and Article 15.06(9)(b), the inspection body may, in the case of passenger
sailing vessels not more than 25 m long, authorise a clear width of less than
800 mm for connecting corridors and companionways. However, the clear width
shall be at least 600 mm.
3.                      
By way of derogation from Article 15.06(10)(a),
the inspection body may, in specific cases, authorise the use of removable
guard rails in areas where this is necessary for controlling the sails.
4.                      
Within the meaning of Article 15.07, sails rank
as a main propulsion system.
5.                      
By way of derogation from Article 15.15(7)(c),
the height of the lower edge of the door opening may be reduced to 200 mm above
the floor of the passenger area. Once opened, the door shall close and lock
automatically.
6.                      
If there is a possibility of the propeller
idling while the vessel is under sail, any endangered parts of the propulsion
system shall be protected against potential damage.
Article 15a.05
Rigging in general
1.                      
The parts of the rigging shall be arranged in
such a way as to prevent unacceptable chafing.
2.                      
If a material other than wood is used or if
special types of rigging are used, such a design shall guarantee equivalent
levels of safety with the dimensions and strength values laid down in this
Chapter. As evidence of the strength
(a)     a strength calculation shall be
carried out, or
(b)     confirmation of sufficient strength
shall have been obtained from an approved classification society, or
(c)     dimensioning shall be based on the
procedures set out in a recognised regulatory framework (e.g. Middendorf,
Kusk-Jensen).
The evidence shall be presented to the
inspection body.
Article 15a.06
Masts and spars in general
1.                      
All spars shall be made of high-quality
material.
2.                      
Wood for masts shall:
(a) be free of knot concentrations;
(b) be free of sapwood within the required
dimensions;
(c) as far as possible be straight-grained;
(d) contain as little as possible twisted
growth.
3.                      
If the chosen timber is either pitch pine or
Oregon pine of quality level ‘clear and better’ the diameters in the tables
reproduced in Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12 can be reduced by 5 %.
4.                      
If the timbers used for masts, topmasts,
yardarms, booms and bowsprits are not round in cross-section, such timbers must
be of equivalent strength.
5.                      
Mast pedestals, mast trunks and fastenings on
deck, on floor-plates and on stem or stern shall be constructed in such a way
that they can either absorb the forces they are subjected to or transfer them
to other connected parts of the structure.
6.                      
Depending on the stability of the vessel and the
external forces it is subjected to and also the distribution of the available
sail area, the inspection body may, on the basis of the dimensions laid down in
Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12, allow reductions in the cross-sections of the spars
and, where appropriate, of the rigging. Evidence shall be submitted in
accordance with Article 15a.05(2).
7.                      
If the vessel's period of oscillation/period of
roll, in seconds, is less than three quarters of its breadth, in metres, the
dimensions set out in Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12 shall be increased. Evidence
shall be submitted in accordance with Article 15a.05(2).
8.                      
In the tables reproduced in Articles 15a.07 to
15a.12 and 15a.14, possible intermediate values shall be interpolated.
Article 15a.07
Special provisions for
masts
1.                      
Wooden masts shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
 Length[13] (m) || Diameter on deck (cm) || Diameter on the cross-tree (cm) || Diameter on the mast cap (cm) 
 10 || 20 || 17 || 15 
 11 || 22 || 17 || 15 
 12 || 24 || 19 || 17 
 13 || 26 || 21 || 18 
 14 || 28 || 23 || 19 
 15 || 30 || 25 || 21 
 16 || 32 || 26 || 22 
 17 || 34 || 28 || 23 
 18 || 36 || 29 || 24 
 19 || 39 || 31 || 25 
 20 || 41 || 33 || 26 
 21 || 43 || 34 || 28 
 22 || 44 || 35 || 29 
 23 || 46 || 37 || 30 
 24 || 49 || 39 || 32 
 25 || 51 || 41 || 33 
If a mast has two yards, the diameters shall be
increased by at least 10 %.
If a mast has more than two yards, the
diameters shall be increased by at least 15 %.
In the case of masts fitted through the deck,
the diameter at the mast foot shall be at least 75 % of the diameter of the
mast at deck level.
2.                      
Mast fittings, mast bands, cross-trees and mast
caps shall be sufficiently strongly dimensioned and attached.
Article 15a.08
Special provisions for
topmasts
1.                      
Wooden topmasts shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
 Length[14] (m) || Diameter at the foot (cm) || Half-length diameter (cm) || Diameter at fitting[15] (cm) 
 4 || 8 || 7 || 6 
 5 || 10 || 9 || 7 
 6 || 13 || 11 || 8 
 7 || 14 || 13 || 10 
 8 || 16 || 15 || 11 
 9 || 18 || 16 || 13 
 10 || 20 || 18 || 15 
 11 || 23 || 20 || 16 
 12 || 25 || 22 || 17 
 13 || 26 || 24 || 18 
 14 || 28 || 25 || 20 
 15 || 31 || 27 || 21 
If square sails are attached to a topmast, the
dimensions set out in the table shall be increased by 10 %.
2.                      
The overlap between the topmast and the mast
shall be at least 10 times the required foot diameter of the topmast.
Article 15a.09
Special provisions for
bowsprits
1.                      
Wooden bowsprits shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
 Length[16] (m) || Diameter at stem (cm) || Half-length diameter (cm) 
 4 || 14,5 || 12,5 
 5 || 18 || 16 
 6 || 22 || 19 
 7 || 25 || 23 
 8 || 29 || 25 
 9 || 32 || 29 
 10 || 36 || 32 
 11 || 39 || 35 
 12 || 43 || 39 
2.                      
The inboard section of the bowsprit shall have a
length of at least four times the diameter of the bowsprit at the stem.
3.                      
The diameter of the bowsprit at its head shall
be at least 60 % of the diameter of the bowsprit at the stem.
Article 15a.10
Special provisions for
jib-booms
1.                      
Wooden jib-booms shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
 Length[17] (m) || 2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9 || 10 
 Diameter at the stem (cm) || 7 || 10 || 14 || 17 || 21 || 24 || 28 || 31 || 35 
2.                      
The diameter of the jib-boom at its head shall
be at least 60 % of the diameter at the stem.
Article 15a.11
Special provisions for
main booms
1.                      
Wooden main booms shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
 Length[18] (m) || 5 || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9 || 10 || 11 || 12 || 13 || 14 || 15 || 16 
 Diameter (cm) || 14 || 15 || 16 || 17 || 18 || 20 || 21 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27 
2.                      
The diameter at the swivel pin shall be at least
72 % of the diameter specified in the table.
3.                      
The diameter at the clew shall be at least 85 %
of the diameter specified in the table.
4.                      
Measured from the mast, the greatest diameter
shall be at two thirds of the length.
5.                      
Where:
(a)     there is an angle of less than 65°
between the main boom and the after leech and the main sheet is attached to the
end of the boom, or
(b)     the attachment point of the sheet is
not abreast of the clew,
the inspection body may, according to Article
15a.05(2), require a greater diameter.
6.                      
For sail areas of less than 50 m2, the
inspection body may authorise reductions in the dimensions set out in the
table.
Article 15a.12
Special provisions for
gaffs
1.                      
Wooden gaffs shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
 Length[19] (m) || 4 || 5 || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9 || 10 
 Diameter (cm) || 10 || 12 || 14 || 16 || 17 || 18 || 20 
2.                      
The unsupported length of the gaff shall be not
more than 75 %.
3.                      
The breaking strength of the crowfoot shall be
at least equal to 1,2 times the breaking strength of the peak halyard.
4.                      
The top angle of the crowfoot shall be a maximum
of 60°.
5.                      
If, by way of derogation from paragraph 4, the
top angle of the crowfoot is greater than 60°, the tensile strength shall be
adjusted to accommodate the forces that will then occur.
6.                      
For sail areas of less than 50 m2, the
inspection body may authorise reductions in the dimensions set out in the
table.
Article 15a.13
General provisions for
standing and running rigging
1.                      
Standing and running rigging shall comply with the
strength requirements set out in Articles 15a.14 and 15a.15.
2.                      
Wire cable connections may take the form of:
(a) splicings,
(b) compression sleeves, or
(c) sealing sleeves.
Splicings shall be marled and ends shall be
whipped.
3.                      
Eye splices shall be provided with thimbles.
4.                      
Ropes shall be routed in such a way as not to
obstruct entrances and companionways.
Article 15a.14
Special provisions for
standing rigging
1.                      
Forestays and shrouds shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
 Mast length[20] (m) || 11 || 12 || 13 || 14 || 15 || 16 || 17 || 18 
 Tensile strength of the forestay (kN) || 160 || 172 || 185 || 200 || 220 || 244 || 269 || 294 
 Tensile strength of the shrouds (kN) || 355 || 415 || 450 || 485 || 525 || 540 || 630 || 720 
 Number of shroud cables and ropes per side || 3 || 3 || 3 || 3 || 3 || 3 || 4 || 4 
2.                      
Backstays, topmasts, flying jib-stays, jib-booms
and bowsprit shrouds shall meet the following minimum requirements:
 Mast length[21] (m) || <13 || 13-18 || >18 
 Tensile strength of the backstay (kN) || 89 || 119 || 159 
 Tensile strength of the topmast (kN) || 89 || 119 || 159 
 Length of topmast (m) || <6 || 6-8 || >8 
 Tensile strength of the flying jib-stay (kN) || 58 || 89 || 119 
 Length of jib-boom (m) || <5 || 5-7 || >7 
 Tensile strength of the bow sprit shrouds (kN) || 58 || 89 || 119 
3.                      
The preferred rope design shall be based on Rope
Construction Method 6 × 7 FE in the strength class 1550 N/mm2. Alternatively, at
the same strength class, Construction Method 6 × 36 SE or 6 × 19 FE may be
used. Because of the higher elasticity of Construction Method 6 × 19, the
tensile strengths given in the table shall be increased by 10 %. Use of a
different rope design shall be permitted provided it has comparable properties.
4.                      
If rigid rigging is used, the tensile strengths
shown in the table shall be increased by 30 %.
5.                      
For rigging, only approved forks, round eyes and
bolts may be used.
6.                      
Bolts, forks, round eyes and turnbuckles shall
be capable of being properly secured.
7.                      
The tensile strength of the bobstay shall be at
least 1,2 times the tensile strength of the respective jib-stay and flying
jib-stay.
8.                      
For vessels with less than 30 m3 water
displacement, the inspection body may permit the reductions in tensile
strengths shown in the table set out below:
 Water displacement divided by the number of masts (m3) || Reduction (%) 
 >20 to 30 || 20 
 10 to 20 || 35 
 < 10 || 60 
Article 15a.15
Special provisions for
running rigging
1.                      
For running rigging, fibre ropes or steel wire
ropes shall be used. The minimum tensile strength and the diameter for running
rigging shall, in relation to the sail area, meet the following minimum
requirements:
 Type of running rigging || Rope material || Sail area (m2) || Minimum tensile strength (KN) || Diameter of rope (mm) 
 Staysail halyards || Steel wire || up to 35 || 20 || 6 
 > 35 || 38 || 8 
 Fibre (polypropylene-PP) || Rope diameter of at least 14 mm and one rope sheave for every 25 m2 or part thereof 
 Gaff sail halyards Top sail halyards || Steel wire || up to 50 || 20 || 6 
 > 50 to 80 || 30 || 8 
 > 80 to 120 || 60 || 10 
 >120 to 160 || 80 || 12 
 Fibre (PP) || Rope diameter of at least 18 mm and one rope sheave for every 30 m2 or part thereof 
 Staysail sheets || Fibre (PP) || up to 40 || 14 ||   
 > 40 || 18 ||   
 For sail areas of more than 30 m2, the sheet shall take the form of a tackle or shall be capable of being operated by a winch 
 Gaff-/Top-sail sheets || Steel wire || < 100 || 60 || 10 
 100 to 150 || 85 || 12 
 > 150 || 116 || 14 
 For top sail sheets, elastic connection elements (fore runners) are necessary. 
 Fibre (PP) || Rope diameter of at least 18 mm and at least three rope sheaves. Where the sail area is greater than 60 m2, one rope sheave per 20 m2 
2.                      
Running rigging forming part of the staying
shall have a tensile strength which corresponds to that of the respective stay
or shrouds.
3.                      
If materials other than those stated in
paragraph 1 are used, the strength values given in the table in paragraph 1
shall be complied with.
Fibre ropes of polyethylene shall not be used
Article 15a.16
Fittings and parts of the
rigging
1.                      
If steel wire ropes or fibre ropes are used, the
diameters of the rope sheaves (measured from centre of rope to centre of rope)
shall meet the following minimum requirements:
 Steel wire (mm) || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9 || 10 || 11 || 12 
 Fibre (mm) || 16 || 18 || 20 || 22 || 24 || 26 || 28 
 Rope sheave (mm) || 100 || 110 || 120 || 130 || 145 || 155 || 165 
2.                      
By way of derogation from paragraph 1, the
diameter of the rope sheaves may be equal to six times the diameter of the
steel wire, provided that the steel wire does not constantly run over sheaves.
3.                      
The tensile strength of the fittings (e.g.
forks, round eyes, turnbuckles, eye-plates, bolts, rings and shackles) shall be
compatible with the tensile strength of the standing or running rigging that is
attached to them.
4.                      
The fastenings of stay and shroud futtocks shall
be designed to take up the forces they are subjected to.
5.                      
Only one shackle, along with the relevant stay
or shroud, may be attached to each eye.
6.                      
Blocks of halyards and topping lifts shall be
securely fastened to the mast, and the revolving crowfeet used for this purpose
shall be in good condition.
7.                      
Attachments of eye-bolts, cleats, belaying pins
and fife-rails shall be designed to cope with the forces they are subjected to.
Article 15a.17
Sails
1.                      
It shall be ensured that sails can be taken in
simply, swiftly and safely.
2.                      
The sail area shall be appropriate for the type
of vessel and the water displacement.
Article 15a.18
Equipment
1.                      
Vessels that are fitted with a jib-boom or a
bowsprit shall have a jib-net and an adequate number of appropriate holding and
tensioning devices.
2.                      
The equipment according to paragraph 1 may be
dispensed with if the jib-boom or bowsprit is equipped with a hand becket and a
foot rope adequately dimensioned to allow for the attachment of a safety
harness to be carried on board.
3.                      
For work on the rigging, a boatswain's chair
shall be provided.
Article 15a.19
Testing
1.                      
The rigging shall be tested by the inspection
body every 2,5 years. As a minimum, the test shall cover the following:
(a)     the sails, including leeches, clews
and reef eyes;
(b)     the state of the masts and spars;
(c)     the state of the standing and running
rigging together with cable wire connections;
(d)     facilities for taking in the sail
swiftly and safely;
(e)     the secure fastening of blocks of
halyards and topping lifts;
(f)      the fastening of mast trunks and
other fastening points for standing and running rigging that are attached to
the vessel;
(g)     the winches for operating the sails;
(h)     other facilities fitted for the
purposes of sailing, such as lee-boards and the fittings for operating them;
(i)      the measures taken to prevent the
chafing of the spars, the running and standing rigging and the sails;
(j)      the equipment according to Article
15a.18.
2.                      
That part of the wooden mast passing through the
deck and located below the deck shall be re-examined at intervals to be
determined by the inspection body, but at the very least on the occasion of
each periodical inspection according to Article 2.09. The mast shall be
extracted for this purpose.
3.                      
A certificate of the last inspection carried out
in accordance withparagraph 1 and issued, dated and signed by the inspection
body, shall be carried on board.
CHAPTER 16
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT INTENDED TO FORM PART OF A
PUSHED OR TOWED CONVOY OR OF A SIDE-BY-SIDE FORMATION
Article 16.01
Craft suitable for pushing
1.                      
Craft which are to be used for pushing purposes
shall incorporate a suitable pushing device. They shall be designed and
equipped in such a way as to:
(a)     enable crews easily and safely to
cross over to the pushed craft with the coupling devices connected;
(b)     enable them to occupy a fixed position
in relation to the coupled craft;
(c)     prevent relative movement between the
craft themselves.
2.                      
If the craft are joined together with cables the
pusher craft shall be equipped with at least two special winches or equivalent
coupling devices for tensioning the cables.
3.                      
The coupling devices shall enable a rigid
assembly to be formed with the pushed craft.
Where convoys consist of a pusher craft and a
single pushed craft the coupling devices may permit controlled articulation.
The necessary drive units shall easily absorb the forces to be transmitted and
shall be capable of being controlled easily and safely. Articles 6.02 to 6.04
shall apply mutatis mutandis to such drive units.
4.                      
The collision bulkhead referred to in Article
3.03(1)(a), can be dispensed with for pushers.
Article 16.02
Craft suitable for being
pushed
1.                      
The following shall not apply to lighters
without steering system, accommodation, engine or boiler rooms:
(a) Chapters 5 to 7 and 12;
(b) Article 8.08(2) to (8), Article 10.02 and
Article 10.05(1).
If steering systems, accommodation, engine or
boiler rooms are present the relevant requirements of this Annex shall apply to
them.
2.                      
In addition, ship-borne lighters whose length L
does not exceed 40 m shall meet the following requirements:
              (a) collision bulkheads referred
to in Article 3.03(1), can be dispensed with if their front faces are able to
bear a load at least 2,5 times that set for the collision bulkheads on inland
waterway vessels with the same draught and built in accordance with the
requirements of an approved classification society;
              (b) by way of derogation from
Article 8.08(1), compartments of the double bottom to which access is difficult
do not have to be drainable unless their volume exceeds 5 % of the water
displacement of the ship-borne lighter at the maximum authorised loaded
draught.
3.                      
Craft intended for being pushed shall be fitted
with coupling devices ensuring a safe connection to other craft.
Article 16.03
Craft suitable for
propelling side-by-side formations
Craft intended to propel side-by-side
formations shall be equipped with bollards or equivalent devices which, as a
result of their number and arrangement, enable the formation to be coupled in a
safe manner.
Article 16.04
Craft suitable for being
propelled in convoys
Craft intended to be propelled in convoys
shall be equipped with coupling devices, bollards or equivalent devices which,
as a result of their number and arrangement, ensure a safe connection to other
craft in the convoy.
Article 16.05
Craft suitable for towing
1.                      
Craft intended for towing shall meet the
following requirements:
(a)     the towing devices shall be arranged
in such a way that their use does not compromise the safety of the craft, crew
or cargo;
(b)     tugging and towing craft shall be
fitted with a tow hook which shall be capable of being released safely from the
wheelhouse; this shall not apply if the design or other fittings prevent
capsizing;
(c)     towing devices shall consist of
winches or a tow hook. The towing devices shall be located ahead of the
propeller plane. This requirement shall not apply to craft that are steered by
their propulsion units such as rudder propellers or cycloidal propellers;
(d)     by way of derogation from the
requirements of (c), for craft solely giving — in accordance with applicable
navigational authority regulations of the Member States — towing assistance to
motorised craft, a towing device such as a bollard or an equivalent device
shall suffice. Point (b) shall apply mutatis mutandis;
(e)     where the towing cables could snag on
the stern of the vessel, deflector hoops with cable catchers shall be provided.
2.                      
Craft of length L exceeding 86 m shall not be
authorised for towing downstream.
Article 16.06
Navigation tests on convoys
1.                      
In order to authorise a pusher or motor vessel
to propel a rigid convoy, and to enter this on the Union inland navigation
certificate, the inspection body shall decide which formations are to be
presented and shall conduct the navigation tests referred to in Article 5.02
with the convoy in the formation(s) applied for, which the inspection body
regards to be the least favourable one(s). The requirements set out in Articles
5.02 to 5.10 shall be met by this convoy.
The inspection body shall check that the rigid
connection of all craft in the convoy is maintained during the manoeuvres
required by Chapter 5.
2.                      
If during the navigation tests referred to
inparagraph 1 there are specific installations on board the craft that are
being either pushed or propelled side-by-side, such as the steering system,
propulsion units or manoeuvring equipment, or articulated couplings in order to
meet the requirements set out in Articles 5.02 to 5.10, the following shall be
entered on the Union inland navigation certificate for the craft propelling the
convoy: formation, position, name and European Vessel Identification Number of
those craft which are fitted with the specific installations used.
Article 16.07
Entries on the Union
inland navigation certificate
1.                      
If a craft is intended to propel a convoy, or be
propelled in a convoy, its compliance with the relevant requirements as set out
in Articles 16.01 to 16.06 shall be entered on the Union inland navigation
certificate.
2.                      
The following information shall be entered on
the Union inland navigation certificate for the propelling craft:
(a)     the convoys and formations that have
been accepted;
(b)     the types of coupling;
(c)     the maximum coupling forces
determined, and
(d)     where appropriate, the minimum tensile
strength of the coupling cables for the longitudinal connection and also the
number of cable windings.
CHAPTER 17
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO FLOATING EQUIPMENT
Article 17.01
General
For construction and equipment of floating
equipment Chapters 3, 7 to 14 and 16 shall apply. Floating equipment with its
own means of propulsion shall also meet the requirements of Chapters 5 and 6.
Propulsion units permitting only short-haul operation shall not constitute own
means of propulsion.
Article 17.02
Derogations
1.                      
The inspection body may grant derogations from
the following requirements:
(a)     Article 3.03(1) and (2), shall apply mutatis
mutandis;
(b)     Article 7.02 shall apply mutatis
mutandis;
(c)     the maximum sound pressure levels
prescribed by Article 12.02 (5), second sentence, may be exceeded while the
floating equipment's working gear is operating, provided that, during service,
nobody sleeps on board at night;
(d)     derogations may be granted from other
requirements concerning structure, working gear or equipment provided that
equal safety is ensured in each case.
2.                      
The inspection body may dispense with the
application of the following requirements:
(a)     Article 10.01(1), shall not apply if
during operation of floating equipment that equipment can be securely anchored
by means of a working anchor or piles. However, floating equipment with its own
means of propulsion shall have at least one anchor meeting the requirements in
Article 10.01 (1), where an empirical coefficient k is taken to be equal to 45,
and the smallest height is taken for T;
(b)     Article 12.02(1), second part of
sentence, if the accommodation can be adequately lit by means of electricity.
3.                      
In addition, the following shall apply:
(a)     for Article 8.08(2), second sentence,
the bilge pump shall be motor driven;
(b)     for Article 8.10(3), the noise may
exceed 65 dB(A) at a lateral distance of 25 m from the ship's side of any
stationary floating equipment while its working gear is operating;
(c)     for Article 10.03(1), at least one
further portable extinguisher is required if working gear not permanently
attached to the craft is placed on the deck;
(d)     for Article 14.02(2), in addition to
the liquefied-gas equipment for domestic use, there may also be other
liquefied-gas facilities. Those facilities and their accessories shall meet the
requirements of one of the Member States.
Article 17.03
Additional requirements
1.                      
Floating equipment on which persons are present
during operation shall be fitted with a general alarm system. The alarm signal
shall be clearly distinguishable from other signals and, within accommodation
and at all work stations, shall produce a sound pressure level that is at least
5 dB(A) higher than the maximum local sound pressure level. It shall be
possible to actuate the alarm system from the wheelhouse and the main work
stations.
2.                      
Working equipment shall have sufficient strength
to withstand the loads it is subjected to and shall meet the requirements of
Directive 98/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June
1998 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
machinery[22];
3.                      
The stability (resistance to overbalancing) and
strength of working equipment, and where appropriate its attachments, shall be
such that it may withstand the forces resulting from the expected heel, trim
and movement of the floating equipment.
4.                      
If loads are lifted by means of hoists the
maximum authorised load deriving from stability and strength shall be
prominently displayed on panels on deck and at the control stations. If the
lifting capacity can be increased by connecting additional floats the values
authorised both with and without these additional floats shall be clearly
stated.
Article 17.04
Residual safety clearance
1.                      
For the purposes of this Chapter and by way of
derogation from Article 1.01 of this Annex, residual safety clearance means the
shortest vertical distance between surface of the water and the lowest part of
the floating equipment beyond which it is no longer watertight, taking into
account trim and heel resulting from the moments referred to in Article
17.07(4).
2.                      
The residual safety clearance is sufficient
according to Article 17.07(1), for any spray-proof and weathertight aperture if
it is at least 300 mm.
3.                      
At an aperture that is not spray-proof and
weathertight the residual safety clearance shall be at least 400 mm.
Article 17.05
Residual freeboard
1.                      
For the purposes of this Chapter and by way of
derogation from Article 1.01 of this Annex, residual freeboard means the
smallest vertical distance between the surface of the water and the upper
surface of the deck at its edge taking into account trim and heel resulting
from the moments referred to in Article 17.07 (4).
2.                      
The residual freeboard is sufficient according
to Article 17.07(1), if it is at least 300 mm.
3.                      
The residual freeboard may be reduced if it is
proven that the requirements of Article 17.08 have been met.
4.                      
Where the shape of a float differs perceptibly
from that of a pontoon, as in the case of a cylindrical float, or where the
cross-section of a float has more than four sides, the inspection body may
require or authorise a residual freeboard that differs from programme 2. This
shall also apply to floating equipment consisting of several floats.
Article 17.06
Heeling test
1.                      
Confirmation of stability according to Articles
17.07 and 17.08 shall be based on a heeling test that has been carried out in a
proper manner.
2.                      
If during a heeling test it is not possible to
achieve adequate heeling angles, or if the heeling test causes unreasonable
technical difficulties, this may be replaced by a calculation of the craft's
centre of gravity and weight. The result of the weight calculation shall be
checked by measuring the draught, and the difference shall not exceed ± 5 %.
Article 17.07
Confirmation of stability
1.                      
It shall be confirmed that, when taking into
account the loads applied during operation of the working gear and whilst under
way, the residual freeboard and the residual safety clearance are sufficient.
For that purpose the sum of the trim and heeling angles shall not exceed 10°
and the bottom of the float shall not emerge.
2.                      
Confirmation of stability shall include the
following data and documents:
(a)     scale drawings of floats and working
gear and the detailed data relating to these that are needed to confirm
stability, such as content of the tanks, openings providing access to the
inside of the vessel;
(b)     hydrostatic data or curves;
(c)     righting lever curves for
static-stability to the extent required in accordance with paragraph 5 below or
Article 17.08;
(d)     description of the operating
conditions together with the corresponding data concerning weight and centre of
gravity, including its unladen state and the equipment situation as regards
transport;
(e)     calculation of the heeling, trimming
and righting moments, with a specification of the trim and heeling angles and
the corresponding residual freeboard and residual safety clearances;
(f)      a compilation of the results of the
calculation with a specification of the limits for operation and the maximum
loads.
3.                      
Confirmation of stability shall be based on at
least the following load assumptions:
(a)     specific mass of the dredging products
for dredgers:
–              
sands and gravels: 1,5 t/m3,
–              
very wet sands: 2,0 t/m3,
–              
soil, on average: 1,8 t/m3,
–              
mixture of sand and water in the ducts: 1,3 t/m3;
(b)     for clamshell dredgers, the values
given under point (a) shall be increased by 15 %;
(c)     for hydraulic dredgers the maximum
lifting power shall be considered.
4.1.        Confirmation of stability
shall take account of the moments resulting from:
(a) load;
(b) asymmetric structure;
(c) wind pressure;
(d) turning whilst under way of self-propelled
floating equipment;
(e) cross current, if necessary;
(f) ballast and provisions;
(g) deck loads and, where appropriate, cargo;
(h) free surfaces of liquids;
(i) inertia forces;
(j) other mechanical equipment.
The moments which may act simultaneously shall
be added up.
4.2.        The moment caused by the
wind pressure shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula:
Mw
= c · pw · A(lw + ((T)/(2)))[kNm]
where:
 c || = || shape-dependent coefficient of resistance For frameworks c = 1,2 and for solid-section beams c = 1,6. Both values take account of gusts of wind. The whole area encompassed by the contour line of the framework shall be taken to be the surface area exposed to the wind. 
 pw || = || specific wind pressure; this shall uniformly be taken to be 0,25 kN/m2; 
 A || = || lateral plane above the plane of maximum draught in m2; 
 lw || = || distance from the centre of area of the lateral plane A from the plane of maximum draught, in m. 
4.3.        In order to determine the
moments due to turning whilst under way according toparagraph 4.1(d) for
self-propelled floating equipment, the formula set out in Article 15.03 (6)
shall be used.
4.4.        The moment resulting from
cross current according to paragraph 4.1(e) shall be taken into account only
for floating equipment which is anchored or moored across the current while
operating.
4.5.        The least favourable extent
of tank filling from the point of view of stability shall be determined and the
corresponding moment introduced into the calculation when calculating the
moments resulting from liquid ballast and liquid provisions according to
paragraph 4.1(f).
4.6.        The moment resulting from
inertia forces according to paragraph 4.1(i) shall be given due consideration
if the movements of the load and the working gear are likely to affect
stability.
5.           The righting moments for
floats with vertical side walls may be calculated using the following formula
Ma = 10 · D · MG‾
· sinφ (kNm)
where:
 MG‾ || = || metacentric height, in m; 
 φ || = || heeling angle in degrees. 
That formula shall apply up to heeling angles
of 10° or up to a heeling angle corresponding to immersion of the edge of the
deck or emergence of the edge of the bottom; the smallest angle shall be
decisive. The formula may be applied to slanting side walls up to heeling
angles of 5°; the limit conditions set out in paragraphs 3 and 4 shall also
apply.
If the particular shape of the float(s) does
not permit such simplification the righting lever curves according to paragraph
2(c) shall be required.
Article 17.08
Confirmation of stability
in the case of reduced residual freeboard
If a reduced residual freeboard according
to Article 17.05(3), is used, it shall be proven for all operating conditions
that:
(a)     after correction for the free surfaces
of liquids, the metacentric height is not less than 0,15 m;
(b)     for heeling angles between 0 and 30°,
there is a righting lever of at least
h = 0,30 - 0,28 · φn (m)
φn being the heeling angle from
which the righting lever curve displays negative values (range of stability);
it shall not be less than 20° or 0,35 rad and shall not be introduced into the
formula for more than 30° or 0,52 rad, taking the radian (rad) (1° = 0,01745 rad)
for the unit of φ°;
(c)     the sum of the trim and heeling angles
does not exceed 10°;
(d)     a residual safety clearance meeting
the requirements in Article 17.04 remains;
(e)     a residual freeboard of at least 0,05
m remains;
(f)      for heeling angles between 0 and 30°,
a residual righting lever of at least
h = 0,20 - 0,23 · φn (m)
remains, where φn is the heeling angle
from which the righting lever curve displays negative values; it shall not be
introduced into the formula for more than 30° or 0,52 rad.
Residual righting lever means the maximum
difference existing between 0° and 30° of heel between the righting lever curve
and the heeling lever curve. If an opening towards the inside of the vessel is
reached by the water at a heeling angle less than that corresponding to the
maximum difference between the lever curves, the lever corresponding to that
heeling angle shall be taken into account.
Article 17.09
Draught marks and draught
scales
Draught marks and draught scales shall be
affixed in accordance with Articles 4.04 and 4.06.
Article 17.10
Floating equipment without
confirmation of stability
1.                      
The application of Articles 17.04 to 17.08 may
be dispensed with for floating equipment:
(a)     whose working gear can in no way alter
their heeling or trim, and
(b)     where any displacement of the centre
of gravity can be reasonably excluded.
2.                      
However,
(a)     at maximum load the safety clearance
shall be at least 300 mm and the freeboard at least 150 mm;
(b)     for apertures which cannot be closed
spray-proof and weathertight the safety clearance shall be at least 500 mm.
CHAPTER 18
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO WORKSITE CRAFT
Article 18.01
Operating conditions
Worksite craft designated as such in the Union
inland navigation certificate set out in Part I or II of Annex V may navigate
outside worksites only when unladen. That restriction shall be entered on the Union
inland navigation certificate.
For this purpose worksite craft shall have
a certificate issued by the competent authority indicating the duration of
works and the geographical boundaries of the worksite in which the craft may be
operated.
Article 18.02
Application of Part II
Unless otherwise specified in this Chapter
the construction and equipment of worksite craft shall be in line with Chapters
3 to 14 of Part II.
Article 18.03
Derogations
1.                      
(a)      Article 3.03(1), shall apply mutatis
mutandis;
(b)     Chapters 5 and 6 shall apply mutatis
mutandis where the craft is self-propelled;
(c)     Article 10.02(2)(a) and (b), shall
apply mutatis mutandis;
(d)     the inspection body may grant
exceptions to the other requirements concerning construction, arrangement and
equipment provided that equivalent safety is proven in every case.
2.                      
The inspection body may dispense with the
following provisions:
(a)     Article 8.08 (2) to (8), if no crew is
required;
(b)     Article 10.01(1) and (3), if the
worksite craft can be securely anchored by means of working anchors or piles.
However, self-propelled worksite craft shall be equipped with at least one
anchor meeting the requirements set out in Article 10.01(1), where coefficient k
is taken to be 45 and T is taken to be the lowest height;
(c)     Article 10.02(1)(c), if the worksite
craft is not self-propelled.
Article 18.04
Safety clearance and
freeboard
1.                      
If a worksite craft is used as a reclamation
barge or a hopper barge the safety clearance outside the hold area shall be at
least 300 mm and the freeboard at least 150 mm. The inspection body may permit
a smaller freeboard if proof by calculation is provided that stability is
sufficient for a cargo having a specific mass of 1,5 t/m3 and that no side of
the deck reaches the water. The effect of liquefied cargo shall be taken into
account.
2.                      
The provisions of Articles 4.01 and 4.02 shall
apply mutatis mutandis to worksite craft not covered by paragraph 1. The
inspection body may determine values departing from the above for safety
clearance and freeboard.
Article 18.05
Ship's boats
Worksite craft shall not be required to
have a ship's boat where:
(a) they are not self-propelled or
(b) a ship's boat is available elsewhere on
the worksite.
That derogation shall be entered on the Union
inland navigation certificate.
CHAPTER 19
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO HISTORIC VESSELS
(Left void)
CHAPTER 19a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CANAL BARGES
(Left void)
CHAPTER 19b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VESSELS NAVIGATING ON ZONE 4
WATERWAYS
Article 19b.01
Application of Chapter 4
1.                      
By way of derogation from Article 4.01(1) and
(2), the safety clearance of doors and openings other than hold hatches for
vessels navigating on Zone 4 waterways is reduced as follows:
(a) for openings which can be closed
spray-proof and weathertight, to 150 mm;
(b) for openings which cannot be closed
spray-proof and weathertight, to 200 mm.
2.                      
By way of derogation from Article 4.02, the
minimum freeboard of vessels navigating on Zone 4 waterways is 0 mm, if the
safety clearance according to paragraph 1 is respected.
CHAPTER 20
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO SEA-GOING VESSELS
(Left void)
CHAPTER 21
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO RECREATIONAL CRAFT
Article 21.01
General
Only Articles 21.02 and 21.03 shall apply
to the construction and equipment of recreational craft.
Article 21.02
Application of Part II
1.                      
Recreational craft shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) from Chapter 3:
Article 3.01, Article 3.02(1)(a) and 2, Article
3.03(1)(a) and (6), and Article 3.04(1);
(b) Chapter 5;
(c) from Chapter 6:
Article 6.01(1), and Article 6.08;
(d) from Chapter 7:
Article 7.01(1) and (2), Article 7.02, Article
7.03(1) and (2), Article 7.04(1), Article 7.05(2), Article 7.13 if there is a
wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person;
(e) from Chapter 8:
Article 8.01(1) and (2), Article 8.02(1) and
(2), Article 8.03(1) and (3), Article 8.04, Article 8.05(1) to (10) and (13),
Article 8.06, Article 8.07, Article 8.08 (1), (2), (5), (7) and (10), Article
8.09(1), and Article 8.10;
(f) from Chapter 9:
Article 9.01(1), mutatis mutandis;
(g) from Chapter 10:
Article 10.01(2), (3) and (5) to (14), Article
10.02(1)(a) to (c), and (2)(a) and (e) to (h), Article 10.03(1)(a), (b) and
(d): however, there shall be at least two fire extinguishers on board; Article
10.03(2) to (6), Article 10.03a, Article 10.03b, Article 18(1e) of this
Directive and Article 10.05;
(h) Chapter 13:
(i) Chapter 14.
2.                      
For recreational craft subject to Directive
94/25/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 June 1994 on the
approximation of laws, regulations and administrative provisions of the Member
States relating to recreational craft[23],
first inspection and periodical inspections only extend to:
(a)     Article 6.08, if there is a
rate-of-turn indicator;
(b)     Article 7.01(2), Article 7.02, Article
7.03(1), and Article 7.13, if there is a wheelhouse designed for radar
navigation by one person;
(c)     Article 8.01(2), Article 8.02(1),
Article 8.03(3), Article 8.05(5), Article 8.08(2), and Article 8.10;
(d)     Article 10.01(2), (3), (6) and (14),
Article 10.02(1)(b) and (c), (2)(a) and (e) to (h), Article 10.03 (1)(b) and
(d) and (2) to (6), and Article 10.05;
(e)     Chapter 13;
(f)      from Chapter 14:
(aa)    Article 14.12;
(bb)   Article 14.13; the acceptance test
after putting into service of the liquefied gas installation shall be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of Directive 94/25/EC, and an
acceptance report shall be submitted to the inspection body;
(cc)    Articles 14.14 and 14.15; the
liquefied gas installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Directive 94/25/EC;
(dd)   Chapter 14 entirely, if the liquefied
gas installation is fitted after placing on the market of the recreational craft.
Article 21.03
(Left void)
CHAPTER 22
STABILITY OF VESSELS CARRYING CONTAINERS
Article 22.01
General
1.                      
The provisions of this Chapter shall apply to
vessels carrying containers where stability documents are required according to
the applicable navigational authority regulations in force in the Member
States.
Stability documents shall be checked, or
submitted elsewhere for checking, and duly stamped by an inspection body.
2.                      
Stability documents shall provide the boatmaster
with comprehensible information on vessel stability for each loading condition.
Stability documents shall include at least the
following:
(a)     information on the permissible
stability coefficients, the permissible  -
values or the permissible heights for the centre of gravity of the cargo;
(b)     data concerning spaces that can be
filled with ballast water;
(c)     forms for checking stability;
(d)     instructions for use or an example of
a calculation for use by the boatmaster.
3.                      
For vessels where it is optional whether
containers are carried non-secured or secured, separate calculation methods
shall be provided for confirmation of stability both for transport of
non-secured and secured cargoes of containers.
4.                      
A cargo of containers shall only be considered
to be secured if each individual container is firmly attached to the hull of
the vessel by means of container guides or securing equipment and its position
cannot alter during the voyage.
Article 22.02
Limit conditions and
method of calculation for confirmation of stability 
for the transport of non-secured containers
1.                      
All methods of calculating vessel stability in
the case of non-secured containers shall meet the following limit conditions:
(a)     Metacentric height MG‾
shall be not less than 1,00 m.
(b)     Under the joint action of the
centrifugal force resulting from the vessel's turning, wind pressure and the
free surfaces of liquids the heeling angle shall not exceed 5° and the edge of
the deck shall not be immersed.
(c)     The heeling lever resulting from the
centrifugal force caused by the vessel's turning shall be determined in
accordance with the following formula:
 [m
              where:
 cKZ ||   || parameter (cKZ = 0,04) (s2/m); 
 v ||   || the maximum speed of the vessel in relation to the water (m/s); 
 KG‾ ||   || height of centre of gravity of the laden vessel above its base (m); 
 T' ||   || draught of the laden vessel (m). 
(d)     The heeling lever resulting from the
wind pressure shall be determined in accordance with the following formula:
 [m]
              where:
 cKW ||   || parameter (cKW = 0,025) (t/m2); 
 A' ||   || lateral plane above the respective plane of draught with the vessel laden (m2); 
 D' ||   || displacement of the laden vessel (t); 
 lW ||   || height of the centre of gravity of the lateral plane A' above the respective plane of draught (m); 
 T' ||   || draught of the laden vessel (m). 
(e)     The heeling lever resulting from the
free surfaces of rainwater and residual water within the hold or the double
bottom shall be determined in accordance with the following formula:
 [m]
where:
 cKfO ||   || parameter (cKfO = 0,015) (t/m2) 
 b ||   || width of hold or section of the hold in question (m);[24]   
 l ||   || length of hold or section of the hold in question (m);[25]   
 D' ||   || displacement of the laden vessel (t). 
              (f) Half of the fuel and fresh
water supply shall be taken into account for each load condition.
2.                      
The stability of a vessel carrying non-secured
containers shall be considered to be sufficient if the effective KG‾ does
not exceed the KG‾zul resulting from the following formulae. The KG‾zul
shall be calculated for various displacements covering the entire range of
draughts.
(a)      [m]
No value less than 11,5 (11,5 = 1/tan5°) shall
be taken for 
(b)     
The lowest value of in
accordance with formula (a) or (b) shall be decisive.
Within the formulae:
 ||   || maximum permissible height of the laden vessel's centre of gravity above its base (m); 
 ||   || height of the metacentre above the base (m) in accordance with the approximation formula in paragraph 3; 
 F ||   || respective effective freeboard at 1/2 L (m); 
 Z ||   || parameter for the centrifugal force resulting from turning  [-] 
 v ||   || maximum speed of the vessel in relation to the water (m/s); 
 Tm ||   || respective average draught (m); 
 hKW ||   || heeling lever resulting from lateral wind pressure according to paragraph 1(d) (m); 
 hKfO ||   || sum of the heeling levers resulting from the free surfaces of liquids according to paragraph 1(e) (m). 
3.                      
Approximation formula for KM‾
Where no sheet of hydrostatic curves is
available the value KM‾ for the calculation in accordance
withparagraph 2 and Article 22.03 (2), may be determined by the following
approximation formulae:
(a) for vessels in the shape of a pontoon
 [m]
(b) for other vessels
 [m]
Article 22.03
Limit conditions and
method of calculation for confirmation of stability 
for the transport of secured containers
1.                      
All methods of calculating vessel stability in
the case of secured containers shall meet the following limit conditions:
(a)     metacentric height MG‾
shall be not less than 0,50 m;
(b)     no hull opening shall be immersed by
the joint action of the centrifugal force resulting from the turning of the
vessel, the wind pressure and the free surfaces of liquids;
(c)     the heeling levers resulting from the
centrifugal force due to the vessel's turning, the wind pressure and the free
surfaces of liquids shall be determined in accordance with the formulae
referred to in Article 22.02(1)(c) to (e);
(d)     half of the fuel and fresh water
supply shall be taken into account for each load condition.
2.                      
The stability of a vessel carrying secured
containers shall be considered to be sufficient if the effective KG‾ does
not exceed KG‾zul the resulting from the following formulae that has been
calculated for various displacements covering the entire range of draughts.
(a)      [m]
No value less than 6,6 shall be taken for (BWL)/(F’)
and
no value less than 0 for 
(b)     KG‾zul =
KM‾ - 0,50 (m)
The lowest value for KG‾zul
in accordance with formula (a) or (b) shall be decisive.
Within these formulae, apart from the terms
defined previously:
 I ||   || transverse moment of inertia of water line area at Tm (m4) (for the approximation formula see paragraph 3); 
 i ||   || transverse moment of inertia of the water line area parallel to the base, at height Tm + ((2)/(3)) F’[m4] 
 " ||   || water displacement of the vessel at Tm (m3); 
 F' ||   || ideal freeboard F' = H' — Tm (m) or F’ = ((a · BWL)/(2 · b))[m], the lowest value shall be decisive; 
 a ||   || the vertical distance between the lower edge of the opening that is first immersed in the event of heeling and the water line in the vessel's upright position (m); 
 b ||   || distance from that same opening from the centre of the vessel (m); 
 H' ||   || ideal side height H’ = H + ((q)/(0,9 · L · BWL))[m]; 
 q ||   || sum of the volumes of the deckhouses, hatches, trunk decks and other superstructures up to a maximum height of 1,0 m above H or up to the lowest aperture in the volume under consideration, the lowest value being decisive. Parts of volumes located within a range of 0,05 L from the extremities of the vessel shall not be taken into account (m3). 
3.                      
Approximation formula for I
Where there is no sheet of hydrostatic curves
available the value for the transverse moment of inertia I of the water line
area may be calculated by the following approximation formulae:
(a) for vessels in the shape of a pontoon
 [m]
(b) for other vessels
 [m]
Article 22.04
Procedure for assessing
stability on board
The procedure for assessing stability may
be determined by the documents referred to in Article 22.01(2).
CHAPTER 22a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT LONGER THAN 110 M
Article 22a.01
Application of Part I
(left
void)
Article 22a.02
Application of Part II
In addition to Part II, Articles 22a.03 to
22a.05 shall apply to craft that are longer than 110 m.
Article 22a.03
Strength
Sufficient hull strength in accordance with
Article 3.02(1)(a) (longitudinal, lateral and local strength) shall be verified
by a certificate issued by an approved classification society.
Article 22a.04
Buoyancy and stability
1.                      
Paragraphs 2 to 10 shall apply to craft that are
longer than 110 m, with the exception of passenger vessels.
2.                      
The basic values for the stability calculation,
the vessel's lightweight and the location of the centre of gravity shall be
determined by means of an inclining experiment carried out in accordance with
Annex I to IMO Resolution MSC 267 (85).
3.                      
The applicant shall prove, by means of a
calculation based on the method of lost buoyancy, that the buoyancy and
stability of the vessel are appropriate in the event of flooding. All
calculations shall be carried out with free sinkage and trim.
Sufficient buoyancy and stability of the vessel
in the event of flooding shall be proven with a cargo corresponding to its
maximum draught and evenly distributed among all the holds and with maximum
supplies and fully fuelled. 
For diversified cargo, the stability
calculation shall be performed for the most unfavourable loading condition. This
stability calculation shall be carried on board.
For this purpose, mathematical proof of
sufficient stability shall be determined for the intermediate stages of
flooding (25%, 50% and 75% of flood build up, and, where appropriate, for the
stage immediately prior to transverse equilibrium) and for the final stage of
flooding, in the loading conditions specified above.
The following assumptions shall be taken into
consideration for the damaged condition:
(a)         
Extent of side damage:
longitudinal extent       :           at least
0,10 L,
transverse extent         :           0,59 m,
vertical extent :           from the bottom
upwards without limit.
(b)         
Extent of bottom damage:
longitudinal extent       :           at least
0,10 L,
transverse extent         :           3,00 m,
vertical extent :           from the base 0,39
m upwards, the sump excepted.
(c)         
Any bulkheads within the damaged area shall be
assumed damaged, which means that the subdivision shall be chosen so that the
vessel remains afloat after the flooding of two or more adjacent compartments
in the longitudinal direction. For the main engine room only the one
compartment standard need be taken into account, i.e. the end bulkheads of the
engine room shall be assumed as not damaged.
For bottom damage, adjacent athwart ship
compartments shall also be assumed as flooded
(d)         
Permeability
Permeability shall be assumed to be 95%.
If a calculation proves that the average
permeability of a compartment is less than 95%, the calculated value may be
used instead.
The values used shall not be less than:
–              
engine and operation rooms       85%
–              
cargo holds :     70%
–              
double bottoms, fuel tanks, ballast tanks, etc.
depending on whether, according to their function, they have to be assumed as
full or empty for the vessel floating at the maximum permissible draught: 0 or
95% 
(e)         
The calculation of free surface effect in
intermediate stages of flooding shall be based on the gross surface area of the
damaged compartments.
4.                      
For all intermediate stages of flooding referred
to in paragraph 3, the following criteria shall be met:
(a)         
the heeling angle φ at the equilibrium
position of the intermediate stage in question shall not exceed 15° (5° where
containers are not secured);
(b)         
beyond the heel in the equilibrium position of
the intermediate stage in question, the positive part of the righting lever
curve shall display a righting lever value of GZ ≥ 0,02 m (0,03 m where
containers are not secured) before the first unprotected opening becomes
immersed or a heeling angle φ of 27° is reached (15° where containers are
not secured);
(c)         
non-watertight openings shall not be immersed
before the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate stage in
question has been reached. 
5.                      
During the final stage of flooding, the
following criteria shall be met:
(a)         
the lower edge of non-watertight openings (e.g.,
doors, windows, access hatches) shall be not less than 0,10 m above the damaged
waterline; 
(b)         
the heeling angle φ at the equilibrium
position shall not exceed 12° (5° where containers are not secured);
(c)         
beyond the heel in the equilibrium position of
the intermediate stage in question, the positive part of the righting lever
curve shall display a righting lever value of GZ ≥ 0,05 m and the area
under the curve shall reach at least 0,0065 m.rad before the first unprotected
opening becomes immersed or a heeling angle φ of 27° (10° where containers
are not secured) is reached;
(d)         
if non-watertight openings are immersed before
the equilibrium position is reached, the rooms affording access shall be deemed
flooded for the purposes of the damaged stability calculation.
6.                      
If cross-flood openings to reduce asymmetrical
flooding are provided, the following conditions shall be met:
(a)         
for the calculation of cross-flooding, IMO
Resolution A.266 (VIII) shall be applied;
(b)         
they shall be self-acting;
(c)         
they shall not be equipped with shut-off
devices;
(d)         
the total time allowed for equalisation shall
not exceed 15 minutes.
7.                      
If openings through which undamaged compartments
may additionally become flooded are capable of being closed watertight, the
shut-off devices shall bear the following readily legible instruction on both
sides:
"Close immediately after passage
8.                      
The proof by calculation in accordance with
paragraphs 3 to 7 shall be considered to have been provided if damaged
stability calculations in accordance with Part 9 of the Regulations annexed to
the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods
by Inland Waterways (hereinafter referred to as 'ADN') are produced with a
positive result.
9.                      
Where necessary in order to meet the
requirements in paragraph 3, the plane of maximum draught shall be
re-established.
Article 22a.05
Additional requirements
1.                      
Craft longer than 110 m shall:
(a)     be fitted with a multi-propeller
propulsion system, with at least two independent engines of equal power and a
bow thruster that is controlled from the wheelhouse and is also effective when
the craft is in an unladen state; or
have a single-propeller propulsion system and a
bow thruster that is controlled from the wheelhouse with its own power supply
and which is also effective when the craft is in an unladen state and makes it
possible for the craft to proceed under its own power in the event of a
breakdown of the main propulsion system;
(b)     be fitted with a radar navigation
system, together with a rate-of-turn indicator in accordance with Article
7.06(1);
(c)     have a permanently-installed bilge
pumping system in accordance with Article 8.08;
              (d) meet the requirements of
Article 23.09(1)(1).
2.                      
For craft, except passenger ships, with a length
of more than 110 m, which in addition to paragraph 1
(a)     are capable of being separated, in the
event of an accident, in the middle third of the vessel without the use of
heavy salvage equipment while the separated parts of the vessel shall remain
afloat after separation;
(b)     are provided with a certificate that
shall be carried on board and which is issued by an approved classification
society regarding the buoyancy, trim position and stability of the separate
parts of the vessel, indicating the degree of loading above which buoyancy of
the two parts is no longer ensured;
(c)     are built as double-hull vessels in
accordance with the ADN, where for dry cargo vessels sections 9.1.0.91 to
9.1.0.95, and for tank vessels paragraph 9.3.2.11.7 and sections 9.3.2.13 to
9.3.2.15 or paragraph 9.3.3.11.7 and sections 9.3.3.13 to 9.3.3.15 of Part 9 of
the ADN shall apply;
(d)     are fitted with a multi-screw propulsion
system in accordance withparagraph 1(a), first half sentence;
it shall be entered in item 52 of the Union
inland navigation certificate that they comply with all the requirements of
points (a) to (d).
3.                      
For passenger vessels with a length of more than
110 m which in addition to paragraph 1
(a)     are built or converted for their
highest class under the supervision of an approved classification society, in
which case compliance shall be confirmed by means of a certificate issued by
the classification society while current class is not necessary;
(b)     either
have a double bottom with a height of at least
600 mm and subdivision to ensure that, in the event of flooding of any two
adjacent watertight compartments, the vessel does not immerse lower than the
margin line and a residual safety clearance of 100 mm remains,
or
have a double bottom with a height of at least
600 mm and a double hull with a distance of at least 800 mm between the side
wall of the vessel and the longitudinal bulkhead;
(c)     be fitted with a multi-screw
propulsion system with at least two independent engines of equal power and a
bow thruster system which can be operated from the wheelhouse and which
operates longitudinally as well as transversely;
(d)     allow the stern anchor to be operated
directly from the wheelhouse;
it shall be entered in item 52 of the Union
inland navigation certificate that they comply with all the requirements of
points (a) to (d).
Article 22a.06
(left void)
CHAPTER 22b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO HIGH-SPEED VESSELS
Article 22b.01
General
1.                      
High-speed vessels shall not be constructed as
cabin vessels.
2.                      
The following installations are prohibited on
board high-speed vessels:
(a) appliances fitted with wick burners
according to Article 13.02;
(b) vaporising oil burner stoves according to
Articles 13.03 and 13.04;
(c) solid-fuel heating appliances according
Article 13.07;
(d) liquefied gas installations according to
Chapter 14.
Article 22b.02
Application of Part I
1.                      
In addition to the provisions of Article 2.03,
high-speed vessels shall be constructed and classified under the supervision
and in accordance with the applicable rules of an approved classification
society which has special rules for high-speed vessels. The class shall be
maintained.
2.                      
By way of derogation from Article10 of this
Directive, Union inland navigation certificates issued in accordance with the
provisions of this Chapter shall be valid for a maximum of five years.
Article 22b.03
Application of Part II
1.                      
Notwithstanding paragraph 2 and Article
22b.02(2), Chapters 3 to 15 shall apply to high-speed vessels, with the
exception of the following provisions:
(a) Article 3.04(6), second subparagraph;
(b) Article 8.08(2), second sentence;
(c) Article 11.02(4), second and third
sentences;
(d) Article 12.02(4), second sentence;
(e) Article 15.06(3)(a), second sentence.
2.                      
By way of derogation from Article 15.02(9), and
Article 15.15(7), all doors in watertight bulkheads shall be capable of being
remote controlled.
3.                      
By way of derogation from Article 6.02(1), in
case of failure or malfunctioning of the steering apparatus drive unit a second
independent steering apparatus drive unit or a manually operated drive unit
shall come into operation without time delay.
4.                      
In addition to the requirements of Part II,
high-speed vessels shall meet the requirements of Articles 22b.04 to 22b.12.
Article 22b.04
Seats and safety belts
Seats shall be available for the maximum
number of passengers permitted on board. Seats shall be fitted with safety
belts. Safety belts may be dispensed with where suitable impact protection is
provided or where they are not required under Chapter 4, part 6, of the HSC
Code 2000.
Article 22b.05
Freeboard
By way of derogation from Articles 4.02 and
4.03, the freeboard shall be at least 500 mm.
Article 22b.06
Buoyancy, stability and
subdivision
For high-speed vessels, proper
documentation shall be provided for:
(a)     buoyancy and stability characteristics
adequate for safety where the craft is operated in the displacement mode, both
when intact and when damaged;
(b)     stability characteristics and
stabilising systems ensuring the safety of the craft when used in the dynamic
buoyancy phase and the transition phase;
(c)     stability characteristics in the
non-displacement and transitional modes adequate to transfer the craft safely
to displacement mode in case of any system malfunction.
Article 22b.07
Wheelhouse
1.                      
Arrangement
(a)     By way of derogation from Article
7.01(1), wheelhouses shall be arranged in such a way that the helmsman and a
second member of the crew may at all times perform their tasks while the vessel
is under way.
(b)     The steering position shall be
arranged so as to accommodate workstations for the persons mentioned in (a).
The instruments for navigation, manoeuvring, monitoring and communication and
other important operating controls shall be sufficiently close together to
allow a second member of the crew as well as the helmsman to obtain the
necessary information and to operate the controls and installations as
necessary while seated. The following requirements shall apply in all cases:
(aa)    the steering position for the helmsman
shall be arranged so as to allow radar navigation by one person.
(bb)   the second member of the crew shall
have his own radar screen (slave) at his workstation and shall be able to
intervene from his workstation to transmit information and control the
propulsion of the vessel.
(c)     The persons mentioned in (a) shall be
able to operate the installations mentioned in (b) without any hindrance,
including when safety belts are properly worn.
2.                      
Unobstructed view
(a)     By way of derogation from Article
7.02(2), the area of obstructed view forward of the bow for the helmsman in a
seated position shall not be more than one vessel length irrespective of the
amount of cargo.
(b)     By way of derogation from Article
7.02(3), the total arc of blind sectors from right ahead to 22,5° abaft the
beam on either side shall not exceed 20°. Each individual blind sector shall
not exceed 5°. The clear sector between two blind sectors shall not be less
than 10°.
3.                      
Instruments
Instrument panels for operating and
monitoring the installations mentioned in Article 22b.11 shall be in separate
and clearly marked positions in the wheelhouse. This shall also apply, where
appropriate, to controls for launching collective lifesaving equipment.
4.                      
Lighting
Red light shall be used for areas or pieces
of equipment which shall be lit during use.
5.                      
Windows
Reflections shall be avoided. A means for
avoiding dazzle by sunlight shall be provided.
6.                      
Surface materials
The use of reflective surface materials in
the wheelhouse shall be avoided.
Article 22b.08
Additional equipment
High-speed craft shall have the following
equipment:
(a)     a radar installation and rate-of-turn
indicator according to Article 7.06(1),
(b)     readily accessible individual
lifesaving equipment conforming to European Standard EN 395:1998 for the
maximum number of persons permitted on board.
Article 22b.09
Closed areas
1.                      
General
Public spaces and accommodation and the
equipment they contain shall be designed so that any person making proper use
of those facilities will not suffer injury during a normal and emergency start
or stop, or during manoeuvring in normal cruise and in failure or malfunction
conditions.
2.                      
Communication
(a)     For the purpose of informing
passengers of safety measures, all passenger vessels shall be fitted with
acoustic and visual installations visible and audible to everyone on board.
(b)     The installations described under (a)
shall enable the boatmaster to give instructions to passengers.
(c)     Every passenger shall have access to
instructions for emergency situations close to their seat, including a plan of
the vessel showing all exits, escape routes, emergency equipment, lifesaving
equipment and instructions for the use of lifejackets.
Article 22b.10
Exits and escape routes
Escape and evacuation routes shall satisfy
the following requirements:
(a)          there shall be easy, safe and
quick access from the steering position to spaces and accommodation accessible
to the public;
(b)          escape routes leading to
emergency exits shall be clearly and permanently marked;
(c)          all exits shall be properly
marked. The operation of the opening mechanism shall be obvious from the
outside and the inside;
(d)          the escape routes and emergency
exits shall have a suitable safety guidance system;
(e)          sufficient space for a member of
the crew shall be left next to exits.
Article 22b.11
Fire protection and
fire-fighting
1.                      
Corridors, rooms and accommodation accessible to
the public and also galleys and engine rooms shall be connected to an
appropriate fire alarm system. Any fire and its location shall be indicated
automatically in a place permanently manned by crew.
2.                      
Engine rooms shall be equipped with a
permanently installed fire-fighting system according to Article 10.03b.
3.                      
Rooms and accommodation accessible to the public
and their escape routes shall be equipped with a pressurised water sprinkler
system according to Article 10.03a. It shall be possible to drain the used
water rapidly and directly to the outside.
Article 22b.12
Transitional provisions
High-speed vessels according to Article
1.01(22) which have a valid Union inland navigation certificate on 31 March
2003 shall meet the following provisions of this Chapter:
(a) Articles 22b.01, 22b.04, 22b.08, 22b.09,
22b.10, 22b.11(1)
when the Union inland navigation certificate is
renewed;
(b) on 1 April 2013,
Article 22b.07(1), (3), (4), (5) and (6);
(c) on 1 January 2023
all other provisions.
PART III
CHAPTER 23
EQUIPMENT OF VESSELS WITH REGARD TO MANNING
Article 23.01
(Left void)
Article 23.02
(Left void)
Article 23.03
(Left void)
Article 23.04
(Left void)
Article 23.05
(Left void)
Article 23.06
(Left void)
Article 23.07
(Left void)
Article 23.08
(Left void)
Article 23.09
Vessels' equipment
1.                      
For motor vessels, pushers, pushed convoys and
passenger vessels, compliance with, or failure to comply with, the provisions
of subparagraphs 1.1 or 1.2 shall be entered in item 47 of the Union inland
navigation certificate by the inspection body.
1.1.                
Standard S1
(a)     The propulsion systems shall be
arranged in such a way that speed can be changed and the direction of the
propeller thrust reversed from the steering position.
It shall be possible for the auxiliary engines
needed for operational purposes to be switched on or off from the steering
position, unless this is done automatically or the engines run continuously
during each voyage.
(b)     In the danger areas of,
–              
the temperature of the main-engine cooling
water,
–              
the lubricating-oil pressure for the main
engines and transmissions,
–              
the oil and air pressure of the main-engine
reversing units, reversible transmissions or propellers,
–              
the bilge levels in the main engine room,
 there shall be monitoring by means of
instruments which set off acoustic and visual signals in the wheelhouse in the
event of malfunction. The acoustic alarm signals may be combined in one audible
warning device. They may be switched off as soon as the malfunction has been
acknowledged. The visual alarm signals may only be switched off when the
malfunctions which set them off have been corrected.
(c)     The fuel shall be supplied and the
main engine cooled automatically.
(d)     The steering system shall be able to
be operated by one person, even in maximum draught, without requiring
particular force.
(e)     It shall be possible to give the
visual and acoustic signals required under national or international
navigational authority regulations, as appropriate, from the steering position.
(f)      Where there is no direct
communication between the steering position and the foresection, the aft, the
accommodation and the engine rooms, a voice communication system shall be
provided. For communication with the engine rooms, this may be in the form of
an optical or acoustic signal.
(g)     The required ship's boat shall be
capable of being released by one crew member alone and in an appropriate amount
of time.
(h)     There shall be a searchlight which can
be operated from the steering position.
(i)      The operation of cranks and similar
revolving parts of lifting devices shall not require a force of more than 160
N.
(k)     The towing winches entered in the Union
inland navigation certificate shall be motorised.
(l)      The bilge and deck-wash pumps shall
be motorised.
(m)    The principal control units and
monitoring instruments shall be ergonomically arranged.
(n)     The equipment required under Article
6.01(1), shall be capable of being remotely operated from the steering
position.
1.2.                
Standard S2
(a)     For motor vessels operating
seperately:
standard S1 and additionally equipped with a
bow thruster which can be operated from the steering position;
(b)     For motor vessels propelling in
side-by-side formation:
standard S1 and additionally equipped with a
bow thruster which can be operated from the steering position;
(c)     For motor vessels propelling pushed
convoys made up of the motor vessel itself and a craft in front:
standard S1 and additionally equipped with
hydraulic or electrically operated coupling winches. This equipment is,
however, not required if the foremost vehicle in the pushed convoy is equipped
with a bow thruster which can be operated from the steering position of the
pushing motor vessel;
(d)     For pushers propelling a pushed
convoy:
standard S1 and additionally equipped with
hydraulic or electric coupling winches. This equipment is, however, not
required if the foremost craft in the pushed convoy is equipped with a bow
thruster which can be operated from the steering position of the pusher;
(e)     For passenger vessels:
standard S1 and additionally equipped with a
bow thruster which can be operated from the steering position. This equipment
is, however, not required if the propulsion system and steering system of the
passenger vessel guarantee equal manoeuvrability.
Article 23.10
(Left void)
Article 23.11
(Left void)
Article 23.12
(Left void)
Article 23.13
(Left void)
Article 23.14
(Left void)
Article 23.15
(Left void)
PART IV
CHAPTER 24
TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 24.01
Applicability of
transitional provisions to craft which are already in service
1.                      
The provisions of Articles 24.02 to 24.04 apply
only to craft carrying on 30 December 2008 a valid vessel certificate according
to the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994, or
which were under construction or undergoing conversion on 31 December 1994.
2.                      
For craft not covered by paragraph 1, the
provisions of Article 24.06 apply.
Article 24.02
Derogations for craft
which are already in service
1.                      
Without prejudice to Articles 24.03 and 24.04,
craft which do not fully comply with the provisions of this Directive must
(a)     be adapted to comply with those
provisions in accordance with the transitional provisions listed in table 1 below,
and
(b)     until their adaptation, comply with
the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994.
2.                      
The following definitions apply in table 1:
–                        
‘NRC’: the provision does not apply to craft
which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or
converted, i.e. the provision applies only to Newly-built craft and to
the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If
existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and
of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning
of the transitional provisions.
–                        
‘Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation
certificate’: the provision must be complied with the time of the next issue or
renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after the date indicated.
Table 1
 Article and paragraph || Content || Deadline and comments 
 CHAPTER 3 ||   ||   
 3.03(1)(a) || Situation of collision bulkhead || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 2 || Accommodations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 Safety equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 4 || Gastight separation of accommodations from engine rooms, boiler rooms and holds || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 5, second subparagraph || Monitoring of doors in aft-peak bulkheads || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 7 || Anchors not protruding in foresections of vessels || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2041 
 3.04(3), second sentence || Insulation material used in engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 3, third and fourth sentences || Openings and locking devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 3.04(6) || Exits of engine rooms || Engine rooms which were not considered as engine rooms according to Article 1.01 before 1995 must be equipped with a second exit at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 CHAPTER 5 ||   ||   
 5.06(1), first sentence || Minimum speed || For craft laid down before 1996 at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 CHAPTER 6 ||   ||   
 6.01(1) || Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 3 || Permanent lists and ambient temperatures || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 7 || Design of rudder stocks || For craft laid down before 1996: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 6.02(1) || Presence of separate hydraulic tanks || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 Duplicated pilot valves in case of hydraulic drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 
 Separated pipework for the second drive unit in case of hydraulic drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 
 paragraph 2 || Activating the second drive unit by means of a single operation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 3 || Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 ensured by second drive unit/manual drive || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 6.03(1) || Connection of other consumers to hydraulic steering apparatus drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 
 --- || --- || --- 
 6.05(1) || Wheel of manual drive not driven by powered drive unit || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 6.06(1) || Two independent steering controls || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 6.07(2)(a) || level alarm of the hydraulic tanks and alarm of the service pressure || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 2(e) || Monitoring of buffer devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 6.08(1) || Requirements for electrical equipment according to Article 9.20 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 7 ||   ||   
 7.02(2) || Obstructed vision ahead of the vessel 2 vessel lengths if less than 250 m || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2049 
 7.02(3), second subparagraph || Unobstructed view in the helmsman's usual axis of vision || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 6 || Minimal light transmission || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 7.03(7) || Shutdown of alarms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate, unless the wheelhouse has been designed for radar navigation by one person 
 paragraph 8 || Automatic switch to another power supply || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 7.04(1) || Control of main engines and steering systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 2 || Control of main engine || Unless wheelhouses have been designed for radar navigation by one person: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 if the direction of motion can be achieved directly; 1.1.2010 for other engines 
 paragraph 3 || Display || If there is no wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 9, third sentence || Control by a lever || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 fourth sentence || Clearly show the direction of the thrust || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 7.05(1) || Navigation lights, their casings, accessories and light sources || Navigation lights, their casings, accessories, and light sources that fulfill the requirements for color and light intensity of navigation lights, and for the admission of signal lights for navigation on the Rhine, as of 30 November 2009 may still be used 
 7.06(1) || Radar navigation equipment which has received an approval before 1.1.1990       Rate-of-turn indicators, which have received an approval before 1.1.1990       Radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators which have received an approval after 1.1.1990 || Radar navigation equipment which has received an approval before 1.1.1990 may be installed and used until issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 31.12.2009, in any case at the latest until 31.12.2011, if there is a valid installation certificate pursuant to this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35. Rate-of-turn indicators, which have received an approval before 1.1.1990 and have been installed before 1-1-2000, may be installed and used until issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015, if there is a valid installation certificate pursuant to this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35.   Radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators which have received an approval on or after 1 January 1990 pursuant to the minimum requirements and test conditions for radar installations used for navigation in inland waterway navigation on the Rhine and the minimum requirements and test conditions for rate-of-turn indicators used in inland waterway navigation on the Rhine may continue to be installed and operated if there is a valid installation certificate pursuant to this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35. 
 7.09 || Alarm system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 7.12 first paragraph || Retractable wheelhouses || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate Non-hydraulic lowering system: at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 second and third paragraphs ||   || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 CHAPTER 8 ||   ||   
 8.01(3) || Only internal-combustion engines burning fuels having a flashpoint of more than 55°C || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 8.02(1) || Securing of engines against unintentional starting || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 4 || Screening of pipe connections || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2025 
 paragraph 5 || Jacketed piping system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2025 
 paragraph 6 || Insulation of engine parts || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 8.03(2) || Monitoring devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 3 || Automatic protection against overspeed || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 5 || Design of shaft bushings || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 8.05(1) || Steel tanks for liquid fuels || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 2 || Automatic closing of tank valves || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 3 || No fuel tanks located forward of the collision bulkhead || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 4 || No fuel tanks and their fittings above engines or exhaust pipes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010. Until then, appropriate devices must ensure the safe evacuation of fuels. 
 paragraph 6, third to fifth sentences || Installation and measurements of breather pipes and connection pipes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 7, first subparagraph || Quick-closing valve on the tank operated from deck, even when the rooms in question are closed. || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 9 second sentence || Capacity-gauging devices to be legible up to maximum filling level || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 13 || Filling level control not only for main engines but also other engines needed for safe operation of the vessel || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 8.06 || Tanks for lubricating oil, pipes and accessories || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 8.07  || Tanks for oils in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 8.08(8) || Simple closing device not sufficient for connection of ballast spaces to drainage pipes for holds capable of carrying ballast || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 9 || Gauging devices in hold bilges || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 8.09(2) || Installations for the collection of oily water and used oil stores || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 8.10(3) || Emission limit of 65 dB(A) for stationary vessels || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 8a ||   ||   
 8a.02(2) and (3) || Compliance with the requirements/exhaust gas emission limit values || The regulations do not apply:               (a) for engines, which were installed before 1.1.2003; and               (b) for exchange engines, which up to 31.12.2011 are installed on board craft which were in operation on 1.1.2002. For engines which were installed:               (a) in craft between 1.1.2003 and 1.7.2007 the exhaust gas limit values as referred to in Annex XIV of Directive 97/68 apply;               (b) in craft or in on-board machinery after 30.6.2007 the exhaust gas limit values as referred to in Annex XV of Directive 97/68 apply. The requirements for the categories:               (aa) V for propulsion engines and for auxiliary engines above 560 kW; and               (bb) D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K for auxiliary engines of Directive 97/68/EC apply as equivalent 
 CHAPTER 9 ||   ||   
 9.01(1), second sentence || Relevant documents to be submitted to the inspection body || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 2, second indent || Switching diagrams for main, emergency and distribution switchboard to be kept on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 3 || Ambient inside and deck temperatures || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 9.02(1) to (3) || Electricity supply systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 9.05(4) || Cross-section of the earthing conductors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.11(4) || Effective ventilation when accumulators are installed in a closed compartment, cabinet or chest || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 9.12(2)(d) || Switch-gear installations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 3(b) || Earth detection device capable of giving both visual and audible alarm || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 9.13 || Emergency circuit breakers || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 9.14(3), second sentence || Prohibition of single-pole switches in laundries, bathrooms, washrooms and other rooms with wet facilities || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 9.15(2) || Minimum cross-section of 1,5 mm2 per cable || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 10 || Cables connected to retractable wheelhouses || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 9.16(3), second sentence || Second circuit || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.19 || Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.20 || Electronic equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 9.21 || Electromagnetic compatibility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 CHAPTER 10 ||   ||   
 10.01 || Anchor equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 10.02(1) second sentence point b || Receptacles made of steel or another sturdy, non-flammable material and holding at least 10 L || N.R.C., at the latest on renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 10.02(2)(a) || Certificate for mooring and other cables || First cable to be replaced on the vessel: NRC, at the latest 1.1.2008 Second and third cables: 1.1.2013 
 10.03(1) || European standard || For replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 2 || Suitability for Class A, B and C fires || For replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 4 || Relation of CO2 content and size of room || For replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 
 10.03a || Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 10.03b || Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms || [26] 
 10.04 || Application of the European standard to dinghies || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 10.05(2) || Inflatable life jackets || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010. Life jackets which have been on board on 30.9.2003 may be used until the issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010. 
 CHAPTER 11 ||   ||   
 11.02(4), first sentence || Equipment of outer edges of decks, side decks and work stations Height of coamings || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020   NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 11.04(1) || Clear width of side deck || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035, for craft exceeding 7,30 m in width 
 Paragraph 2 || Shipside guard rails on vessels of L<55 m with only aft accommodation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 
 11.05(1) || Access to workplaces || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraphs. 2 and 3 || Doors and accesses, exits and passageways where there is more than a 0,50 m difference in floor level || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 4 || Stairs in working spaces which are manned continuously || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 11.06(2) || Exits and emergency exits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 11.07(1), 2nd sentence || Ladders, steps and similar devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraphs 2 and 3 ||   || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 11.10 || Hatch covers || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 11.11 || Winches || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 11.12(2), (4), (5) and (10) || Manufacturer’s plate, protection devices, certificates on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015. 
 11.13 || Storing of flammable liquids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 CHAPTER 12 ||   ||   
 12.01(1) || Accommodation for the persons lodging habitually on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 12.02(3) || Situation of floors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 4 || Living and sleeping quarters || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 6 || Headroom in the accommodation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 8 || Free floor area of communal living quarters || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 9 || Cubic capacity of rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 10 || Volume of airspace per person || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 11 || Size of doors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 12(a) and (b) || Situation of stairs || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 13 || Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 12.03 || Sanitary installations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 12.04 || Galleys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 12.05 || Potable water || NRC, at the latest on 31.12.2006 
 12.06 || Heating and ventilation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 12.07(1), second sentence || Other accommodation installations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 CHAPTER 14a ||   ||   
 Article 14a.02(2), Tables 1 and 2 and paragraph 5 || Limit/control values and type approvals || NRC, as long as (a)           the limit and control values do not exceed the values according to Article 14a.02 by more than the factor 2, (b)           the on-board sewage treatment plant has a manufacturer's or expert's certificate confirming that it can cope with the typical loading patterns on board the craft and (c) a system of sewage sludge management is in place for it which is appropriate to the conditions of operating a sewage treatment plant aboard a passenger vessel; 
 CHAPTER 15 ||   ||   
 15.01(1)(c)  || Non-application of Article 8.08(2), second sentence || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2007 
 (d)  Non-application of Article 9.14 Paragraph 3 second sentence for rated voltages of over 50 V || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 2(c) || Prohibition of solid fuel heaters according to Article 13.07 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 The provision does not apply to craft with solid fuel engines (steam engines). 
 (e)  Prohibition of liquefied gas installations according to Chapter 14 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045. The transitional provision applies only if alarm systems are fitted in accordance with Article 15.15(9) 
 15.02(2) || Number and position of bulkheads || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 5, second sentence || Margin line if no bulkhead deck || For passenger vessels which have been laid down before 1.1.1996, the requirement applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 10(c) || Time for closure process || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 12 || Optical warning system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 15 || Minimum height of double bottoms, width of wing voids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.03(1) to (6) || Intact stability || NRC, and when the maximum number of passengers is raised, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 Paragraphs 7 and 8 || Damaged stability || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 Paragraph 9 || Damaged stability   Vertical extent of damage to the bottom of the boat   || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 N.R.C. applicable for vessels with watertight decks on a minimum distance of 0,50m and less then 0,60 m of the bottom of vessels that obtained a Union inland navigation certificate or other traffic licence before 31.12.2005 
 paragraph 9 || Two-compartment status || NRC 
 paragraphs 10 to 13 || Damaged stability || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.05(2)(a) || Number of passengers for whom the existence of an evacuation area according to Article 15.06(8) has been proven || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 (b)  Number of passengers that has been taken into account for the stability calculation according to Article 15.03 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 Article 15.06(1), first subparagraph     Article 15.06(1), second subparagraph || Passenger area's under the bulkhead deck behind the collision bulkhead and in front of the aft peak bulkhead   Enclosures || NRC, at the latest on renewal of Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045     N.R.C, at the latest on renewal of Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 3(c), first sentence || Clear height of exits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 second sentence || Clear width of doors of passenger cabins and other small rooms || For the measurement of 0,7 m, NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045, applies 
 15.06(3)(f), first sentence || Size of emergency exits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 (g)  Exits of rooms intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 4(d) || Doors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 5 || Requirements for connecting corridors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 6(b) || Escape routes to evacuation areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 (c)  No escape routes through engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2007 
 No escape routes through galleys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 (d)  No rungs, ladders or the like installed along the escape routes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 7 || Suitable safety guidance system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 8 || Requirements for muster areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 9 || Requirements for stairs and their landings in the passenger areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 10(a), first sentence || Railing according to European standard EN 711: 1995 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 second sentence || Height of bulwarks and railings of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.06(10)(b), second sentence || Clear width of openings used normally for the embarking or disembarking of persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 13 || Traffic areas and walls in traffic areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 14, first sentence || Design of glass doors and walls in traffic areas and window panes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 Paragraph 15 || Requirements for enclosures within the superstructure that consist totally or partly of panoramic windows || NRC, at the latest on renewal of Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 Requirements for enclosures || N.R.C, at the latest on renewal of Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 16 || Potable water systems in accordance with Article 12.05 || NRC, at the latest 31.12.2006 
 paragraph 17, second sentence || Requirements for toilets fitted for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 18 || Ventilation system for cabins without an opening window || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 19 || Requirements of Article 15.06 for rooms in which crew members or shipboard personnel are accommodated || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.07 || Requirements for the propulsion system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 15.08(2) || Requirements for loudspeaker systems in passenger areas || For passenger vessels with LWL of less than 40 m or for not more than 75 persons the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 3 || Requirements for the alarm system || For day-trip vessels the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 4 || Bilge level alarm for each watertight compartment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 5 || Two motor-driven bilge pumps || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 6 || Permanently installed bilge system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 8 || Ventilation system for CO2 bar-systems in rooms below deck || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 15.09(3) || Appropriate transfer equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 4 || Life-saving equipment || For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09(5) before 1.1.2006, these appliances are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment. For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09(6) before 1.1.2006, these are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment until the issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 5(b) and (c) || Adequate seating space, buoyancy of at least 750 N || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 (f)  Stable trim and appropriate grabbing devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 (i)  Appropriate means of evacuation from evacuation areas on to life rafts || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 10 || Ship's boat equipped with engine and searchlight || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 15.10(2) || Article 9.16(3) also applicable to passageways and recreation rooms for passengers || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 3 || Adequate emergency lighting || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 15.10(4) || Emergency power plant || For day-trip vessels with LWL of 25 m or less, the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 (f)  Emergency supply for searchlights according to Article 10.02 (2)(i) || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 (i)  Emergency supply for lifts and lifting equipment according to Article 15.06(9), second sentence || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 6, first sentence || Partitions according to Article 15.11(2). || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 second and third sentence || Installation of cables || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 fourth sentence || Emergency power plant above the margin line || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 15.11 || Fire protection ||   
 paragraph 1 || Suitability for fire protection of materials and components || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 2 || Design of partitions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 3 || Paints, lacquers and other surface treatment products as well as deck coverings used in rooms except engine rooms and store rooms shall be flame-retardant || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 paragraph 4 || Lounge ceilings and wall claddings manufactured from non-combustible material || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 5 || Furniture and fittings in muster areas manufactured from non-combustible material || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 6 || Tested according to Code || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 7 || Insulation materials in lounges || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 Paragraph 7a || Enclosures || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 8 || Requirements for doors in partitions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 9 || Walls || On cabin vessels without automatic pressurised-water spraying systems, ends of walls between cabins: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 10 || Partitions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.11(11) || Draught stops || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 12, 2nd sentence || Stairs made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible material || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 13 || Encapsulation of internal stairs || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 14 || Ventilation systems and air supply systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 15 || Ventilation systems in galleys and stoves with extractors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 16 || Control centres, stairwells, muster areas and smoke extraction systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 17 || Fire alarm system || For day-trip vessels: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 15.12(1)(c) || Portable fire extinguishers in galleys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 2(a) || Second fire-extinguishing pump || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 3(b) and (c) || Pressure and water jet length || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 6 || Materials, protection against failure || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 15.12(7) || Avoidance of the possibility of freezing of pipes and hydrants || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 8(b) || Independent operation of fire extinguishing pumps || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 (c)  Water jet length on all decks || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 (d)  Installation of fire extinguishing pumps || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 9 || Fire-extinguishing system in engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 15.14(1) || Waste water collection and disposal facilities || For cabin vessels with no more than 50 berths and for day-trip vessels: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 2 || Requirements for waste water collection tanks || For cabin vessels with no more than 50 berths and for day-trip vessels with no more than 50 passengers: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.15(1) || Damage stability || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 paragraph 4 || (Left void) ||   
 paragraph 5 || Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation || For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 15.15(6) || Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation || For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 paragraph 9(a) || Alarm systems for liquefied gas installations || NRC, at the latest on renewal of the certificate according to Article 14.15 
 (b)  Collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09(5) || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 
 CHAPTER 16 ||   ||   
 16.01(2) || Special winches or equivalent coupling devices || The requirement applies to craft licensed before 1.1.1995 for pushing without proper securing equipment, only at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035. 
 16.01(3), last sentence || Requirements for drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 CHAPTER 17 ||   ||   
 17.02(3) || Additional requirements || The same transitional provisions as those indicated under the relevant article apply. 
 17.03(1) || General alarm system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 4 || Maximum authorised load || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 17.04(2) and (3) || Residual safety clearance || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 17.05(2) and (3) || Residual freeboard || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 17.06, 17.07 and 17.08 || Heeling test and confirmation of stability || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 17.09 || Draught marks and draught scales || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 CHAPTER 20 ||   ||   
   || The transitional provisions on Chapter 20 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation apply ||   
 CHAPTER 21 ||   ||   
 21.01 to 21.02 ||   || The requirements apply to recreational craft built before 1.1.1995, only at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035. 
Article 24.03
Derogations for craft
which were laid down on or before 1 April 1976
1.                      
In addition to Article 24.02, the following
provisions may be applied to craft which were laid down on or before 1 April
1976.
The following definitions apply in table 2:
–                        
‘RC’: The provision does not apply to craft
which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or
converted, i.e. the provision applies only to the Replacement or Conversion
of the parts or areas concerned. If existing parts are replaced by replacement
parts using the same technology and of the same type, this does not constitute
replacement (‘R’) within the meaning of the transitional provisions.
–                        
‘Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation
certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the next issue
or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after the date indicated.
Table 2
 Article and paragraph || Content || Deadline and comments 
 CHAPTER 3 ||   ||   
 3.03(1)(a) || Situation of collision bulkhead || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 3.04(2) || Common surfaces of bunkers and accommodation and passenger areas || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 paragraph 7 || Maximum permissible sound pressure level || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 4 ||   ||   
 4.01(2), 4.02 and 4.03 || Safety clearance, freeboard, minimum freeboard || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 7 ||   ||   
 7.01(2) || Sound pressure generated by the vessel || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 7.05(2) || Monitoring of navigation lights || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 CHAPTER 8 ||   ||   
 8.08(3) and (4) || Minimum pumping capacity and internal diameter of drainage pipes || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 8.10(2) || Noise generated by a vessel under way || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 9 ||   ||   
 9.01 || Requirements for electrical equipment || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.03 || Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.06 || Maximum permissible voltages || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.10 || Generators and motors || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.11(2) || Installation of accumulators || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.12 || Switch-gear installations || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.14 || Installation fittings || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.15 || Cables || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 9.17 || Navigation lights || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 12 ||   ||   
 12.02(5) || Noise and vibration in accommodations || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 CHAPTER 15 ||   ||   
 15.02(5), (6), first sentence, (7) to (11) and (13) || Margin line if no bulkhead deck || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.02(16) || Watertight windows || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.04 || Safety clearance, freeboard, immersion measures || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.05 || Number of passengers || Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
 15.10(4), (6), (7), (8) and (11) || Emergency power plant || RC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 
2.                      
Article 15.11(3)(a) applies to day-trip vessels
laid down on or before 1 April 1976 until the first issue or renewal of the Union
inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045, with the proviso that only
paints, varnishes, coatings and other materials used on surfaces facing escape
routes and other materials for the surface treatment of panels must be
fire-resistant and that smoke or toxic vapours may not develop to any dangerous
extent.
3.                      
Article 15.11(12) applies to day-trip vessels
laid down on or before 1 April 1976 until the first issue or renewal of the Union
inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045, with the proviso that it is
sufficient if, instead of stairs in the form of a load-bearing steel assembly,
the stairs serving as an escape route are designed in such a way that they
remain useable, in the event of a fire, for about the same time as stairs in
the form of a load-bearing steel assembly.
Article 24.04
Other derogations
1.                      
For craft the minimum freeboard of which was
determined in accordance with Article 4.04 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection
Regulation as applicable on 31 March 1983, the inspection body may, at the
request of the owner, determine the freeboard in accordance with Article 4.03
of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 1 January 1995.
2.                      
Craft laid down before 1 July 1983 do not need
to conform to Chapter 9 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation, but must at
least conform to Chapter 6 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as
applicable on 31 March 1983.
3.                      
Article 15.06(3)(a) to (e), and Article
15.12(3)(a), with regard to the rule concerning a single hose length, apply
only to craft laid down after 30 September 1984, and to conversions of the
areas concerned, at the latest when the Union inland navigation certificate is
renewed after 1 January 2045.
4.                      
(left void) 
5.                      
Where this provision refers, with regard to
equipment design requirements, to a European or an international standard, such
equipment may, after any revision of the standard, continue to be used for a
further 20 years following the revision of the standard.
Article 24.05
(Left void)
Article 24.06
Derogations for craft not
covered by Article 24.01
1.                      
The following provisions apply:
              (a) to craft for which a vessel
certificate in accordance with the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation was
issued for the first time between 1 January 1995 and 30 December 2008, provided
they were not under construction or undergoing conversion on 31 December 1994;
              (b) to craft which have obtained
another traffic licence between 1 January 1995 and 30 December 2008.
2.                      
It must be proved that those craft comply with
the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulations as applicable on the date on which the
vessel certificate or the other traffic licence has been granted.
3.                      
The craft must be adapted to comply with
provisions which enter into force following the first issue of the vessel
certificate or other traffic licence in accordance with the transitional
provisions set out in table 3.
4.                      
Article 18(1g) of this Directive and Article
24.04(5) of this Annex , apply MUTATIS MUTANDIS.
5.                      
The following definitions apply in table 3:
–                        
 ‘NRC’: The provision does not apply to craft
which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or
converted, i.e. the provision applies only to Newly-built craft and to
the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If
existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and
of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning
of the transitional provisions.
–                        
‘Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation
certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the next issue
or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after the date indicated.
Table 3
 Article and paragraph || Content || Deadline and comments || Valid for craft with vessel certificate or traffic licence before 
 CHAPTER 3 ||   ||   ||   
 3.03(7) || Anchors not protruding in foresections of vessels || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2041 || 1.10.1999 
 3.04(3), second sentence || Insulation in engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.4.2003 
 paragraph 3, third and fourth sentences || Openings and closing devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.10.2003 
 CHAPTER 6 ||   ||   ||   
 6.02(1) || Duplicated pilot valves in case of hydraulic drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 || 1.4.2007 
 Separated pipework for the second drive unit in case of hydraulic drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 || 1.4.2007 
 6.03(1) || Connection of other consumers to hydraulic steering apparatus drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 || 1.4.2007 
 6.07(2)(a) || level alarm of the hydraulic tanks and alarm of the service pressure || NRC, at the latest with renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2007 
 CHAPTER 7 ||   ||   ||   
 7.02(2) || Obstructed vision ahead of the vessel 2 vessel lengths if less than 250 m || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2049 || 30.12.2008 
 7.04(3) || Display || If there is no wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2007 
 paragraph 9, third sentence || Control by a lever || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2007 
 fourth sentence || Prohibition of indicating the direction of the jet || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2007 
 7.05(1) || Navigation lights, their casings, accessories and light sources || Navigation lights, their casings, accessories, and light sources that fulfil the requirements for color and light intensity of navigation lights and for the admission of signal lights for navigation on the Rhine as of 30 November 2009 may still be used. || 01.12.2013 
 7.06(1 || Radar navigation equipment which has received an approval before 1.1.1990 || Radar navigation equipment which has received an approval before 1.1.1990 may be installed and used until issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 31.12.2009, in any case at the latest until 31.12.2011, if there is a valid installation certificate pursuant to this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35. || 01.12.2013 
 Rate-of-turn indicators, which have received an approval before 1.1.1990 || Rate-of-turn indicators, which have received an approval before 1.1.1990 and have been installed before 1-1-2000, may be installed and used until issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015, if there is a valid installation certificate pursuant to this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35 || 01.12.2013 
 Radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators which have received an approval after 1.1.1990 || Radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators which have received an approval after 1 January 1990 pursuant the minimum requirements and test conditions for radar installations used for navigation in inland waterway navigation on the Rhine and the minimum requirements and test conditions for rate-of-turn indicators used in inland waterway navigation on the Rhine may continue to be installed and operated if a valid installation certificate pursuant to this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35 has been issued. || 01.12.2013 
 CHAPTER 8 ||   ||   ||   
 8.02(4) || Screening of pipe connections || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 2025 || 1.4.2007 
 paragraph 5 || Jacketed piping system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2025 || 1.4.2007  
 paragraph 6  || Insulation of engine parts || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2025 || 1.4.2003 
 8.03(3) || Protection against overspeed || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2004 
 8.05(7) first sentence || Quick-closing valve on the tank operated from deck, even when the rooms in question are closed. || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.4.2008 
 8.05(9), second sentence || Sounding devices must be readable up to the maximum filling level || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.4.1999 
 paragraph 13 || Filling level control not only for main engines but also other engines needed for safe operation of the vessel || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.4.1999 
 8.06 || Tanks for lubricating oil, pipes and accessories || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.4.2007 
 8.07 || Tanks for oils in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.4.2007 
 CHAPTER 8a ||   ||   ||   
   ||   || The regulations do not apply:               (a) for engines, which were installed before 1.1.2003; and               (b) for exchange engines, which up to 31.12.2011 are installed on board craft which were in operation on 1.1.2002. || 1.1.2002 
 8a.02(2) and (3) || Compliance with the requirements/exhaust gas emission limit values || For engines which were installed:               (a) in craft between 1.1.2003 and 1.7.2007 the exhaust gas limit values as referred to in Annex XIV of Directive 97/68 apply;               (b) in craft or in on-board machinery after 30.6.2007 the exhaust gas limit values as referred to in Annex XV of Directive 97/68 apply. The requirements for the categories:               (aa) V for propulsion engines and for auxiliary engines above 560 kW; and               (bb) D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K for auxiliary engines of Directive 97/68/EC; apply as equivalent. || 1.7.2007 
 CHAPTER 10 ||   ||   ||   
 Article 10.02(1) second sentence point b || Receptacles made of steel or another sturdy, non-flammable material and holding at least 10 L || N.R.C., at the latest on renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 01.12.2013 
 10.02(2)(a) || Certification of wire ropes and other ropes || The first rope replaced on the vessel: NRC, at the latest 1.1.2008. Second and third ropes: 1.1.2013. || 1.4.2003 
 10.03(1) || European standard || On replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2002 
 paragraph 2 || Suitable for fire category A, B and C || On replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 || 1.4.2002 
 10.03a || Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in cabins, wheelhouses and passenger areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 || 1.4.2002 
 10.03b || Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms || [27] at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 || 1.4.2002 
 10.04 || Application of the European standard to dinghies || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.10.2003 
 10.05(2) || Inflatable life-jackets || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010. Life jackets which have been on board on 30.9.2003 may be used until the issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010. || 1.10.2003 
 CHAPTER 11 ||   ||   ||   
 11.02(4), first sentence || Height of bulwarks and coamings, and shipside guard rails Height of coamings || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 || 01.12.2013 
 11.04(2) || Shipside guard rails on vessels of L<55 m with only aft accommodation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 || 01.12.2013 
 11.12 (2),(4),(5) and (9) || Manufacturer’s plate, protection devices, certificates on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 01.12.2013 
 11.13 || Storage of flammable liquids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.10.2002 
 CHAPTER 14a ||   ||   ||   
 Article 14a.02(2), Tables 1 and 2 and paragraph 5 || Limit/control values and type approvals || NRC, as long as (a)           the limit and control values do not exceed the values according to Article 14a.02 by more than the factor 2, (b)           the on-board sewage treatment plant has a manufacturer's or expert's certificate confirming that it can cope with the typical loading patterns on board the craft and (c) a system of sewage sludge management is in place for it which is appropriate to the conditions of operating a sewage treatment plant aboard a passenger vessel; || 01.12.2013 
 CHAPTER 15 ||   ||   ||   
 15.01(1)(c) || Non-application of Article 8.08(2), second sentence || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 (d)  Non-application of Article 9.14(3), second sentence for rated voltages of over 50V || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 2(b) || Prohibition of vaporising oil-burner stoves according to Article 13.04 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 (c)  Prohibition of solid fuel heaters according to Article 13.07 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 (e)  Prohibition of liquefied gas installations according to Chapter 14 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045. The transitional provision applies only if alarm systems are fitted in accordance with Article 15.15(9) || 1.1.2006 
 15.02(2) || Number and position of bulkheads || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 5, second sentence || Margin line if no bulkhead deck || For passenger vessels laid down before 1.1.1996, the requirement applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 15 || Minimum height of double bottoms, width of wing voids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 15.03(1) to (6) || Intact stability || NRC, and when the maximum number of passengers is raised, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 15.03(7) and (8) || Damaged stability || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.12.2006 
 paragraph 9   || Damaged stability || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 01.12.2006 
 Vertical extent of damage to the bottom of the boat     || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 N.R.C. applicable for vessels with watertight decks on a minimum distance of 0,50m and less then 0,60 m of the bottom of vessels that obtained a Union inland navigation certificate or other traffic licence before 31.12.2005 || 01.12.2013 
 2-compartment status || NRC ||   
 paragraphs 10 to 13 || Damaged stability || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.12.2006 
 15.05(2)(a) || Number of passengers for whom the existence of an evacuation area according to Article 15.06 section 8 has been proven || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 (b)  Number of passengers that has been taken into account for the stability calculation according to Article 15.03 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 Article15.06(1), first subparagraph || Passenger areas under the bulkhead deck and in front of the aft peak bulkhead. || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.12.2013 
 Article15.06(1), second subparagraph || Enclosures || N.R.C, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 01.12.2013 
 paragraph 2 || Cupboards and rooms referred to in Article 11.13 and intended for the storage of flammable liquids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 3(c), first sentence || Clear height of exits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 second sentence || Clear width of doors of passenger cabins and other small rooms || For the measurement of 0,7 m, NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045, applies || 1.1.2006 
 15.06(3)(f), first sentence || Size of emergency exits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 (g)  Exits intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4(d) || Doors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 5 || Requirements for connecting corridors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 6(b) || Escape routes to evacuation areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 (c)  No escape routes through engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2007 || 1.1.2006 
 No escape routes through galleys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 
 (d)  No rungs, ladders or the like installed along the escape routes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 7 || Suitable safety guidance system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 8 || Requirements for muster areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 9(a) to (c), (e), and last sentence || Requirements for stairs and their landings in the passenger areas || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 10(a), first sentence || Railing according to European standard EN 711: 1995 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 second sentence || Height of bulwarks and railings of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 (b), second sentence || Clear width of openings used for the embarking or disembarking of persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 12 || Gangways in accordance with European standard EN 14206: 2003 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 13 || Traffic areas and walls in traffic areas, intended for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 14, first sentence || Design of glass doors and walls in traffic areas and window panes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 15 || Requirements for superstructures or their roofs consisting completely of panoramic panes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 15 || Requirements for enclosures within the superstructure that consist totally or partly of panoramic windows. || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 01.12.2013 
 Requirements for enclosures || N.R.C, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 01.12.2013 
 paragraph 16 || Potable water systems in accordance with Article 12.05 || NRC, at the latest 31.12.2006 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 17, second sentence || Requirements for toilets fitted for use by persons with reduced mobility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 18 || Ventilation system for cabins without an opening window || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 15.07 || Requirements for the propulsion system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 15.08(2) || Requirements for loudspeaker systems in passenger areas || For passenger vessels with LWL of less than 40 m or for not more than 75 persons the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 3 || Requirements for the alarm system || For day-trip vessels the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 3(c) || Alarm system enabling the vessel's command to alert the crew and shipboard personnel || For cabin vessels the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4 || Bilge level alarm for each watertight compartment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 5 || Two motor-driven bilge pumps || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 6 || Permanently installed bilge system according to Article 8.06 section 4 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 7 || Inside opening of cold-storage rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 8 || Ventilation system for CO2 bar-systems in rooms below deck || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 9 || First-aid kits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 15.09(1), first sentence || Lifebuoys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 2 || Individual life-saving equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 3 || Appropriate transfer equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4 || Life-saving equipment || For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09(5) before 1.1.2006, these appliances are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment. For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09(6) before 1.1.2006, these are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment until the issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 5(b) and (c) || Adequate seating space, buoyancy of at least 750 N || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 (f)  Stable trim and appropriate grabbing devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 (i)  Appropriate means of evacuation from the evacuation areas onto the life rafts || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 9 || Check on life-saving equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 10 || Ship's boat equipped with engine and searchlight || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 11 || Stretcher || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
   || Electrical Equipment ||   || 1.1.2006 
 15.10(2) || Article 9.16(3) also applicable to passageways and recreation rooms for passengers || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 3 || Adequate emergency lighting || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4 || Emergency power plant || For day-trip vessels with LWL of 25 m or less, the provision applies at NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 (f)  Emergency supply for searchlights according to Article 10.02(2)(i || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 (i)  Emergency supply for lifts and lifting equipment according to Article 15.06(9), second sentence || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 6, first sentence || Partitions according to Article 15.11(2). || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 second and third sentences || Installation of cables || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 fourth sentence || Emergency power plant above the margin line || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 15.11 || Fire protection ||   || 1.1.2007 
 paragraph 1 || Suitability for fire protection of materials and components || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 15.11(2) || Design of partitions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 3 || Paints, lacquers and other surface treatment products as well as deck coverings used in rooms except engine rooms and store rooms shall be flame-retardant || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4 || Lounge ceilings and wall claddings manufactured from non-combustible material || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 5 || Furniture and fittings in muster areas manufactured from non-combustible material || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 6 || Tested according to Code || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 7 || Insulation materials in lounges non-combustible || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 Paragraph 7a || Enclosures || N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 01.12.2013 
 paragraph 8, (a), (b), (c), second sentence and (d) || Requirements for doors in partitions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 9 || Walls || On cabin vessels without automatic pressurised-water spraying systems, ends of walls between cabins: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 10 || Partitions || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 12, second sentence || Stairs made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible material || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 13 || Encapsulation of internal stairs by walls according to paragraph 2 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 14 || Ventilation systems and air supply systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 15 || Ventilation systems in galleys and stoves with extractors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 16 || Control centres, stairwells, muster areas and smoke extraction systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 17 || Fire alarm system || For day-trip vessels: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 15.12(1)(c) || Portable fire extinguishers in galleys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 2(a) || Second fire-extinguishing pump || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4 || Hydrant valves || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 5 || Axially connected reel || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 6 || Materials, protection against failure || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 7 || Avoidance of the possibility of freezing of pipes and hydrants || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 8(b) || Independent operation of fire extinguishing pumps || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 (d)  Installation of fire extinguishing pumps || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 9 || Fire-extinguishing system in engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2015. The transitional provision does not apply to passenger vessels which have been laid down after 31.12.1995, the hull of which is made of wood, aluminium or plastic and the engine rooms of which are not made of a material according to Article 3.04(3) and (4). || 1.1.2006 
 15.13 || Safety organisation || For day-trip vessels: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate || 1.1.2006 
 15.14(1) || Waste water collection and disposal facilities || For cabin vessels with 50 or fewer berths, and for day-trip vessels: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 2 || Requirements for waste water collection tanks || For cabin vessels with 50 or fewer berths, and for day-trip vessels with 50 or fewer passengers: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 15.15 || Derogations for certain passenger vessels ||   || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 1 || Damage stability || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2045 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 4 || (Left void) ||   ||   
 paragraph 5 || Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation || For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 paragraph 6 || Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation || For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
 15.15(9)(a) || Alarm systems for liquefied gas installations || NRC, at the latest on renewal of the attestation according to Article 14.15 || 1.1.2006 
 (b)  Collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 section 5 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2010 || 1.1.2006 
Article 24.07
(Left void)
Article 24.08
Transitional provision applicable
to Article 2.18
When issuing a Union inland navigation
certificate to craft which after 31 March 2007 carried a valid vessel
certificate according to the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation, the already
assigned Unique European Vessel Identification Number shall be used, and where
appropriate completed by ranking first the figure ‘0’.
CHAPTER 24a
TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS FOR CRAFT NOT NAVIGATING ON ZONE R WATERWAYS
Article 24a.01
Application of
transitional provisions to craft already in service 
and validity of previous Union inland navigation certificates
1.                      
The following provisions apply to craft not
navigating a Zone R waterway:
              (a) for which a Union inland
navigation certificate was issued for the first time before 30 December 2008; 
              (b) which obtained another
traffic licence before 30 December 2008.
2.                      
It must be proved that those craft comply with
the provisions of Chapters 1 to 12 of Annex II to Directive 82/714/EEC on the
date on which the Union inland navigation certificate or the other traffic
licence is issued.
3.                      
 Union inland navigation certificates delivered
before 30 December 2008 remain valid until the date of expiry indicated on the
certificate. Article 2.09(2), remains applicable.
Article 24a.02
Derogations for craft
already in service
1.                      
Without prejudice to Article 24a.03 of this
Annex and Article 18(-(1g) of this Directive, craft which do not fully comply
with the this Directive must be adapted to comply with the provisions of that
Directive which enter into force after the first issue of their Union inland
navigation certificate or other traffic licence in accordance with the
transitional provisions listed in table 4.
2.                      
The following definitions apply in table 4:
–                        
‘NRC’: The provision does not apply to craft
which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or
converted, i.e. the provision applies only to Newly-built craft and to
the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If
existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and
of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning
of the transitional provisions.
–                        
‘Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation
certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the issue or
next renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2008.
If the certificate expires between 30 December 2008 and the day before 30
December 2009, that requirement is, however, only mandatory from 30 December
2009.
Table 4
 Article and paragraph || Content || Deadline and comments 
 CHAPTER 3 ||   ||   
 3.03(1)(a) || Location of collision bulkhead || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 3.03(2) || Accommodations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 3.03(2) || Safety equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 3.03(4) || Gastight separation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 3.03(5), second paragraph || Monitoring of doors in the aft-peak bulkhead ||   
 3.03(7) || Anchors not protruding in foresections of vessels || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 3.04(3), second sentence || Insulation in engine rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 3.04(3), third and fourth sentences || Openings and locking devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 3.04(6) || Exits from spaces classified as engine rooms as a result of this Directive || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 CHAPTER 4 ||   ||   
 4.04 || Draught marks || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 CHAPTER 5 ||   ||   
 5.06(1), first sentence || Minimum speed || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 CHAPTER 6 ||   ||   
 6.01(1) || Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 3 || Permanent lists and ambient temperatures || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 6.01(7) || Design of rudder stocks || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 6.02(1) || Presence of separate hydraulic tanks || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2026 
 Duplicated pilot valves in case of hydraulic drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2026 
 Separated pipework for the second drive unit in case of hydraulic drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2026 
 paragraph 2 || Activating the second drive unit by means of a single action || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2026 
 paragraph 3 || Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 ensured by second drive unit/manual service || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 6.03(1) || Connection of other consumers to hydraulic steering apparatus drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2026 
 --- || --- || --- 
 6.05(1) || Wheel of manual drive not driven by powered drive unit || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 6.06(1) || Two independent steering controls || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 6.07(2)(a) || Level alarm of the hydraulic tanks and alarm of the service pressure || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2026 
 (e)  Monitoring of buffer devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 6.08(1) || Requirements for electronic equipment according to Article 9.20 || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 CHAPTER 7 ||   ||   
 7.02(2) to (6) || Unobstructed view from the wheelhouse, except the following sections || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2049 
 7.02(3), second paragraph || Unobstructed view in the sightline of the helmsman || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 paragraph 6 || Minimal light transmission of glazing || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 7.03(7) || Shutdown of alarms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 8 || Automatic switch to alternative power supply || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 7.04(1) || Control of main engines and steering devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 7.04(2) || Control of main engines || If wheelhouses have not been designed for radar navigation by one person: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 if the direction of motion can be achieved directly; at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 for other engines 
 paragraph 3 || Display || If there is no wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30.12.2024 
 paragraph 9, third sentence || Control by a lever || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30.12.2024 
 fourth sentence || Prohibition of indicating the direction of the jet || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30.12.2024 
 7.05(1) || Navigation lights, their casings, accessories and light sources || Navigation lights, their casings, accessories, and light sources that fulfill -the requirements for color and light intensity of navigation lights and for the admission of signal lights for navigation on the Rhine as of 30 November 2009 or - the respective requirements of a Member State as of 30 November 2009 may still be used. 
 7.06(1) || Radar navigation systems and rate-of-turn indicators || Radar navigation systems and rate-of-turn indicators, which have been approved and installed pursuant to a member State’s regulations before 31 December 2012 may continue to be installed and operated until the issue or replacement of the Union inland navigation certificate after 31 December 2018. These systems must be entered in the Union inland navigation certificate under number 52. Radar navigation systems and rate-of-turn indicators, which have been approved since 1 January 1990 pursuant to the regulations concerning the minimum requirements and test conditions for navigation radar systems for navigation on the Rhine and of the regulations concerning the minimum requirements and test conditions for rate-of-turn indicators for navigation on the Rhine may continue to be installed and operated, provided that an installation certificate that is valid in accordance with this Directive or Resolution CCNR 1989-II-35, is available 
 7.09 || Alarm system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 7.12 first paragraph || Retractable wheelhouses || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate. Without automatic retraction: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 second and third paragraphs ||   || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 CHAPTER 8 ||   ||   
 8.01(3) || Only internal-combustion engines burning fuels having a flashpoint of more than 55 °C || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 8.02(1) || Securing of engines against unintentional starting || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 4. || Screening of pipe connections || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30.12.2024 
 paragraph 5 || Jacketed piping system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30.12.2024 
 paragraph 6 || Insulation of engine parts || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 8.03(2) || Monitoring devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 3 || Automatic protection against overspeed || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 5 || Design of shaft bushings || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 8.05(1) || Steel tanks for liquid fuels || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 8.05(2) || Automatic closing of tank valves || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 3 || No fuel tanks forward of the collision bulkhead || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 4 || No fuel tanks and their fittings above engines or exhaust pipes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024. Until then, appropriate devices must ensure the safe evacuation of fuels 
 paragraph 6 third to fifth sentences || Installation and measurements of breather pipes and connection pipes || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 7, first subparagraph || Quick-closing valve on the tank operated from deck, even when the rooms in question are closed. || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2029 
 paragraph 9, second sentence || Capacity-gauging devices to be legible up to maximum filling level || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 13 || Filling level control not only for main engines but also other engines needed for safe operation of the vessel || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 8.06 || Storage of lubricating oil, pipes and accessories || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 8.07 || Storage of oils used in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 8.08(8) || Simple closing device not sufficient for connection of ballast spaces to drainage pipes for holds capable of carrying ballast || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 8.08(9) || Gauging devices in hold bilges || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 8.09(2) || Installations for the collection of oily water and used oil stores || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 8.10(3) || Emission limit of 65 dB(A) for stationary craft || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 CHAPTER 8a ||   ||   
   ||   || The regulations do not apply to:               (a) propulsion engines and auxiliary engines with a rated power output of more than 560 kW of the following categories according to appendix I section 4.1.2.4 of Directive 97/68/EC:          (aa) V1:1 to V1:3, which until 31 December 2006;          (bb) V1:4 and V2:1 to V2:5, which until 31 December 2008;               are installed in craft or in on-board machinery;               (b) auxiliary engines with a rated power up to 560 kW and variable speed, of the following categories according to Article 9.4a of Directive 97/68/EC:          (aa) H which until 31 December 2005;          (bb) I and K which until 31 December 2006;          (cc) J which until 31 December 2007;               are installed in craft or in on-board machinery;               (c) auxiliary engines with a rated power up to 560 kW and constant speed, of the following categories according to Article 9.4a of Directive 97/68/EC:          (aa) D, E, F and G which until 31 December 2006[28];          (bb) H, I and K which until 31 December 2010;          (cc) J which until 31 December 2011;               are installed in craft or in on-board machinery.               (d) engines, which meet the limit values as referred to in Annex XIV of Directive 97/68/EC and which until 30 June 2007, are installed in craft or in on-board machinery;               (e) exchange engines, which until 31 December 2011 are installed in craft or in on-board machinery to replace an engine to which in accordance with points a) to d) above, the regulations do not apply. The dates mentioned in paragraphs (a), (b), (c) and (d) shall be postponed by two years in respect of engines with a production date prior to the mentioned dates. 
 CHAPTER 9 ||   ||   
 9.01(1), second sentence || Relevant documents to be submitted to the inspection body || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 9.01(2), second indent || Switching diagrams for main, emergency and distribution switchboard to be kept on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 3 || Ambient inside and deck temperatures || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 9.02(1) to (3) || Electricity supply systems || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 9.03 || Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.05(4) || Cross-section of the earthing conductors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.11(4) || Effective ventilation when accumulators are installed in a closed compartment, cabinet or chest || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 9.12 || Switch-gear installations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.12(3)(b) || Earth detection device capable of giving both visual and audible alarm || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 9.13 || Emergency circuit breakers || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 9.14 || Installation fittings || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.14(3), second sentence || Prohibition of single-pole switches in laundries, bathrooms, washrooms and other rooms with wet facilities || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 9.15(2) || Minimum cross-section of 1,5 mm2 per cable || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 10 || Cables connected to retractable wheelhouses || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 9.16(3), second sentence || Second circuit || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.19 || Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 30 December 2029 
 9.20 || Electronic equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 9.21 || Electromagnetic compatibility || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 CHAPTER 10 ||   ||   
 10.01 || Anchor equipment || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 10.02(2)(a) || Certificate for mooring and other cables || First cable to be replaced on the vessel: NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 Second and third cables: 30 December 2029 
 10.03(1) || European standard || At replacement, at the latest 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 2 || Suitability for Class A, B and C fires || At replacement, at the latest 30 December 2024 
 paragraph 4 || Relation of CO2 content and size of room || At replacement, at the latest 30 December 2024 
 10.03a || Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 10.03b || Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms || CO2 fire-fighting systems permanently installed before 1 October 1985 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 if they comply with the requirements of Article 13.03 of Annex II of Directive 82/714/EEC 
 10.04 || Application of the European standard to dinghies || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 10.05(2) || Inflatable life jackets || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 Life jackets which are on board on the day before 30 December 2008 can be used until renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 CHAPTER 11 ||   ||   
 11.02(4), first sentence || Equipment of outer edges of decks, side decks and work stations   Height of bulwarks or coamings || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2020 NRC, NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035 
 11.04(1) || Clear width of side deck || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1.1.2035, for craft exceeding 7,30 m in width 
 paragraph 2 || Shipside guard rails on vessels of L<55 m with only aft accommodation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1-1-2020 
 11.04 || Side decks || First issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate[29] after 30 December 2049 where width exceeds 7,30 m 
 11.05(1) || Access to workplaces || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraphs 2 and 3 || Doors and accesses, exits and passageways where there is more than a 0,50 m difference in floor level || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 paragraph 4 || Stairs in working spaces which are manned continuously || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 11.06(2) || Exits and emergency exits || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 11.07(1), second sentence || Ladders, steps and similar devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraphs 2 and 3 ||   || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 11.10 || Hatch covers || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 11.11 || Winches || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2024 
 11.12(2) to (6) and (8) to (10) || Cranes: manufacturer's plate, maximum permissible loadings, protection devices, calculation test, inspection by experts, certificates on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 11.13 || Storing of flammable liquids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 CHAPTER 12 ||   ||   
 12.01(1) || Accommodation for the persons lodging habitually on board || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 12.02(3) || Situation of floors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 4 || Living and sleeping quarters || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 12.02(5) || Noise and vibration in accommodations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 paragraph 6 || Headroom in accommodations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 8 || Free floor area of communal living quarters || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 9 || Cubic capacity of rooms || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 10 || Volume of airspace per person || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 11 || Size of doors || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 12(a) and (b) || Situation of stairs || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 13 || Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 12.03 || Sanitary installations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 12.04 || Galleys || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 12.05 || Potable water || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 12.06 || Heating and ventilation || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 12.07 section 1, second sentence || Other accommodation installations || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 CHAPTER 14a ||   ||   
 Article 14a.02(2), Tables 1 and 2 and paragraph 5 || Limit/control values and type approvals || NRC, as long as (a)           the limit and control values do not exceed the values according to Article 14a.02 by more than the factor 2, (b)           the on-board sewage treatment plant has a manufacturer's or expert's certificate confirming that it can cope with the typical loading patterns on board the craft and (c) a system of sewage sludge management is in place for it which is appropriate to the conditions of operating a sewage treatment plant aboard a passenger vessel; 
 CHAPTER 15 ||   ||   
   || Passenger vessels || see Article 8 of this Directive 
 CHAPTER 15a ||   ||   
   || Passenger sailing vessels || see Article 8 of this Directive 
 CHAPTER 16 ||   ||   
 16.01(2) || Special winches or equivalent coupling devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 paragraph 3, last sentence || Requirements for drive units || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2049 
 CHAPTER 17 ||   ||   
   || Floating equipment || see Article 8 of this Directive 
 CHAPTER 21 ||   ||   
   || Recreational craft || see Article 8 of this Directive 
 CHAPTER 22b ||   ||   
 22b.03 || Second independent steering apparatus drive unit || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
Article 24a.03
Derogations for craft
which were laid down before 1 January 1985
1.                      
In addition to Article 24a.02 of this Annex,
craft which were laid down before 1 January 1985 may be exempted from the
following provisions, under the conditions described in column 3 of table 5 ,
provided the safety of the vessel and its crew is ensured in an appropriate
manner.
2.                      
The following definitions apply in table 5:
–                        
‘NRC’: The provision does not apply to craft
which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or
converted, i.e. the provision only applies to Newly-built craft and to
the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If
existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and
of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning
of these transitional provisions.
–                        
‘Issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation
certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the first
issue or next renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30
December 2008. If the certificate expires between 30 December 2008 and the day
before 30 December 2009, that requirement is, however, only mandatory from 30
December 2009.
Table 5
 Article and parag raph || Content || Deadline and comments 
 CHAPTER 3 ||   ||   
 3.03(1) || Watertight collision bulkheads || NRC 
 3.03(2) || Accommodations, safety installations || NRC 
 3.03(5) || Openings in watertight bulkheads || NRC 
 3.04(2) || Surfaces of bunkers || NRC 
 3.04(7) || Maximum permissible sound pressure level in engine rooms || NRC 
 CHAPTER 4 ||   ||   
 4.01 || Safety clearance || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2019 
 4.02 || Freeboard || NRC 
 CHAPTER 6 ||   ||   
 6.01(3) || Requirements of steering system || NRC 
 CHAPTER 7 ||   ||   
 7.01(2) || Maximum permissible sound pressure level in wheelhouse || NRC 
 7.05(2) || Monitoring of navigation lights || NRC 
 7.12 || Retractable wheelhouses || NRC 
 CHAPTER 8 ||   ||   
 8.01(3) || Prohibition of certain liquid fuels || NRC 
 8.04 || Engine exhaust system || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 8.05(13) || Alarm device for level of fuel filling || NRC 
 8.08(2) || Equipment with bilge pumps || NRC 
 8.08(3) and (4) || Diameter and minimum pumping capacity of bilge pumps || NRC 
 8.08(5) || Self-priming bilge pumps || NRC 
 8.08(6) || Equipment with strainers || NRC 
 8.08(7) || Automatically closable fitting for aft peak || NRC 
 8.10(2) || Noise emitted by craft || NRC 
 CHAPTER 9 ||   ||   
 9.01(2) || Certificates for electrical equipment || NRC 
 9.01(3) || Installation of electrical equipment || NRC 
 9.06 || Maximum permissible voltages || NRC 
 9.10 || Generators and motors || NRC 
 9.11(2) || Accumulators || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.12(2) || Switches, protective devices || NRC, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Union inland navigation certificate after 30 December 2029 
 9.14(3) || Simultaneous switching || NRC 
 9.15 || Cables || NRC 
 9.16(3) || Lighting in engine rooms || NRC 
 9.17(1) || Switchboards for navigation lights || NRC 
 9.17(2) || Power supply for navigation lights || NRC 
 CHAPTER 10 ||   ||   
 10.01(9) || Anchor windlasses || NRC 
 10.04(1) || Dinghies according to standard || NRC 
 10.05(1) || Lifebuoys according to standard || NRC 
 10.05(2) || Life jackets according to standard || NRC 
 CHAPTER 11 ||   ||   
 11.11(2) || Safety of winches || NRC 
 CHAPTER 12 ||   ||   
 12.02(13) || Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids || NRC 
Article 24a.04
(left void) 
Article 24a.05
Transitional provision applicable
to Article 2.18
Article 24.08 shall apply mutatis
mutandis.
Appendix I
SAFETY SIGNS
 Figure 1 No entry for unauthorised persons || || Colour: red / white / black 
 Figure 2 Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited || || Colour: red / white / black 
 Figure 3 Fire extinguisher || || Colour: red / white 
 Figure 4 General danger warning || || Colour: black / yellow 
 Figure 5 Extinguisher hose || || Colour: red / white 
 Figure 6 Fire-fighting installation || || Colour: red / white 
 Figure 7 Wear acoustic protection device || || Colour: blue / white 
 Figure 8 First-aid kit || || Colour: green / white 
 Figure 9 Quick-closing valve on the tank  ||   || Colour: brown / white 
 Figure 10 Wear life jacket || || Colour Bleu / white 
The symbols actually used may slightly
differ from or be more detailed than the graphical representations in this
Appendix, provided the meaning is not changed and differences and modifications
do not render the meaning incomprehensible.
Appendix II
Administrative instructions
 No 1 || : || Requirements relating to the capacity for taking evasive action and turning capacity 
 No 2 || : || Requirements concerning prescribed (forward) speed, stopping capacity and capacity for going astern 
 No 3 || : || Requirements for coupling systems and coupling devices for craft suitable for propelling or being propelled in a rigid assembly 
 No 4 || : || Application of transitional provisions 
 No 5 || : || Noise measurements 
 No 6 || : || Application of regulations in Chapter 15 
 No 7 || : || Special anchors with reduced mass 
 No 8 || : || Strength of watertight windows 
 No 9 || : || Requirements for automatic pressurised water sprinklers 
 No 10 || : || Left void 
 No 11 || : || Completion of the Union inland navigation certificate 
 No 12 || : || Fuel tanks on floating equipment 
 No 13 || : || Minimum hull thickness of barges 
 No 14 || : || Left void 
 No 15 || : || Steerageway under vessel's own power 
 No 16 || : || Left void 
 No 17 || : || Appropriate fire alarm system 
 No 18 || : || Proof of buoyancy, trim and stability of the separated parts of a vessel 
 No 19 || : || Left void 
 No 20 || : || Equipment for vessels to be operated according to standards S1 and S2 
 No 21 || : || Requirements for low-location lighting 
 No 22 || : || Specific safety needs of persons with reduced mobility 
 No 23 || : || Engine application covered by the appropriate type approval 
 No 24 || : || Suitable gas warning equipment 
 No 25 || : || Electrical cables 
 No 26 ||   || experts/competent persons 
 No 27 ||   || Recreational craft 
Note:
              In accordance with Article 5(7)
of this Directive, for subjects covered by Annex IV, each Member State may
allow less stringent requirements for the respective values indicated in the
following Administrative instructions for craft operating exclusively on Zone 3
and Zone 4 waterways within its territory.
              In accordance with Article 5(1)
and (3) of this Directive, for subjects covered by Annex III, each Member State
may adopt more stringent requirements for the respective values indicated in
the following Administrative instructions for craft operating on Zone 1 and
Zone 2 waterways within its territory.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 1
Requirements relating to the
capacity for taking evasive action and turning capacity
(Articles 5.09 and 5.10 in
conjunction with Articles 5.02(1), 5.03(1), 5.04 and 16.06 of Annex II)
1.           General conditions and boundary conditions relating to
the evasive action test
1.1. According to Article 5.09, vessels and
convoys shall be able to take evasive action in good time and the capacity for
such action shall be proved by evasive action manoeuvres in the test area in
accordance with Article 5.03. This shall be proved by simulated evasive action
manoeuvres to port and starboard with prescribed values whereby for specific
turning speeds of the vessel in response to putting across and then checking
the helm a certain time limit shall be complied with.
During tests the requirements of Section 2
shall be complied with keeping a keel clearance of at least 20 % of the
draught, but not less than 0,50 m.
2. Evasive action test procedure and recording of data
(Diagram in Annex 1)
2.1. Evasive action manoeuvres shall be
performed as follows:
With the vessel or convoy under way at a
constant speed of V0 = 13 km/h in relation to the water, at the
start of the manoeuvre (time t0 = 0 s, turning speed r = 0°/min,
rudder angle δ0 = 0°, engine speed kept constant), evasive
action to port or starboard is to be initiated by putting across the helm. The
rudder shall be set to an angle δ, or the steering unit to an angle δa
in the case of an active steering device, at the start of the manoeuvre, in
accordance with the indications given in point 2.3. The rudder angle δ
(e.g. 20° to starboard) shall be maintained until the value r1 of
the turning speed referred to in point 2.2 for the corresponding dimensions of
the vessel or convoy is reached. When the turning speed r1 is
reached, the time t1 shall be recorded and the rudder set to the
same angle on the opposite side (e.g. 20° to port) so as to stop the turn and
commence turning in the opposite direction, i.e., to reduce the turning speed
to r2 = 0 and let it to rise again to the value given in point 2.2.
When the turning speed r2 = 0 is reached, the time t2
shall be recorded. When the turning speed r3 given in point 2.2 is
reached, the rudder shall be set in the opposite direction to the same angle
δ, so as to stop the turning movement. The time t3 shall be
recorded. When the turning speed r4 = 0 is reached, the time t4
shall be recorded and the vessel or convoy shall be returned to its original
course.
2.2. The following limit values shall be
complied with to reach turning speed r4 depending on the dimensions
of the vessels or the convoys and on the water depth h:
   || Dimensions of vessels or convoys L × B || Required turning speed r1 = r3 (°/min) || Limit values for the time t4 (s) in shallow and deep water 
 δ = 20° || δ = 45° || 1,2 ≤ h/T ≤ 1,4 || 1,4 < h/T < 2 || h/T > 2 
 1 || All motor vessels; single-in-line convoys ≤ 110 × 11,45 || 20°/min || 28°/min || 150 s || 110 s || 110 s 
 2 || Single-in-line convoys up to 193 × 11,45 or two-abreast convoys up to 110 × 22,90 || 12°/min || 18°/min || 180 s || 130 s || 110 s 
 3 || Two-abreast convoys ≤ 193 × 22,90 || 8°/min || 12°/min || 180 s || 130 s || 110 s 
 4 || Two-abreast convoys up to 270 × 22,90 or three-abreast convoys up to 193 × 34,35 || 6°/min || 8°/min || [30] || [31] || [32] 
The times t1, t2, t3
and t4 required to reach turning speeds r1, r2,
r3 and r4 shall be recorded in the measurements report in
Annex 2. The t4 values shall not exceed the limits given in the
table.
2.3. At least four evasive action
manoeuvres shall be carried out, namely:
–                        
one to starboard with a rudder angle δ =
20°
–                        
one to port with a rudder angle δ = 20°
–                        
one to starboard with a rudder angle δ =
45°
–                        
one to port with a rudder angle δ = 45°.
If necessary (e.g. in the case of
uncertainty about the values measured or of unsatisfactory manoeuvres), the
evasive action manoeuvres shall be repeated. The turning speeds given in point
2.2 and the time limits shall be complied with. For active steering devices or
special types of rudder, a position δa of the steering unit or
rudder angle δa other than δ = 20° and δ = 45° may be
selected, according to the expert’s assessment, depending on the type of
steering system.
2.4. In order to determine the turning
speed, a rate-of-turn indicator in accordance with Appendix VIII this Directive
shall be on board.
2.5. In accordance with Article 5.04, the
load condition during the evasive action manoeuvre shall be between 70 % and
100 % of the maximum deadweight. If the test is carried out with a smaller
load, approval for downstream and upstream navigation shall be restricted to
that load limit.
The procedure for evasive action manoeuvres
and the terms used are shown in a diagram in Annex 1.
3. Turning capacity
The turning capacity of vessels and convoys
whose length (L) does not exceed 86 m and width (B) does not exceed 22,90 m
shall be considered sufficient under Article 5.10, in conjunction with Article
5.02(1) when during an upstream turning manoeuvre with an initial speed in
relation to the water of 13 km/h, the limit values for stopping facing
downstream established in Administrative instruction No 2 are complied with.
The keel clearance conditions according to Section 1.1 shall be complied with.
4. Other requirements
4.1. Notwithstanding points 1 to 3, the
following requirements shall be met:
              (a) for manually controlled
steering systems, a single turn of the wheel shall correspond to a rudder angle
of at least 3°;
              (b) for powered steering
systems, when the rudder is at maximum immersion, it shall be possible to
achieve an average angular velocity of 4°/s over the rudder’s entire turning
range.
This requirement shall also be checked,
with the vessel at full speed, for moving the rudder over a range from 35° port
to 35° starboard. In addition, it shall be checked whether the rudder keeps the
position of maximum angle at maximum propulsion power. For active steering
systems or special types of rudder, this provision applies mutatis mutandis.
4.2. If any of the additional equipment
referred to in Article 5.05 is needed in order to reach the required
manoeuvring capacities, it shall comply with the requirements of chapter 6, and
the following particulars shall be entered under item 52 of the Union inland
navigation certificate:
‘Flanking rudders[33]/bow steering systems[34]/other equipment[35] referred to under item 34 is[36]/are[37] necessary to comply with the
manoeuvrability requirements of chapter 5.’»
5. Recording of data and reports
The measurements, reports and recording of
data shall be carried out according to the procedure set out in Annex 2.
ANNEX 1
to Administrative instruction No 1
Diagram of the evasive action manoeuvre
 t0 || = || Start of evasive action manoeuvre 
 t1 || = || Time to reach turning speed r1 
 t2 || = || Time to reach turning speed r2 = 0 
 t3 || = || Time to reach turning speed r3 
 t4 || = || Time to reach turning speed r4 = 0 (end of evasive action manoeuvre) 
 δ || = || Rudder angle [°] 
 r || = || Turning speed [°/min] 
ANNEX 2
to Administrative instruction No 1
Report on evasive action manoeuvre and turning capacity
Inspection body: …
Date: …
Name: …
Name of craft: …
Owner: …
 Type of craft: … || Test area: … 
 or convoy: … || Relevant water level [m]: … 
 L × B [m × m]: … || Depth of water h [m]: … 
 Ttest [m]: … || h/T: … 
Speed of the current [m/s]:
Load: … % of maximum …
(during test) [t]: … deadweight: …
Rate-of turn indicator
Type: …
Type of rudder construction: normal
construction/special construction[38]
Active steering system: yes/no[39]
Results of evasive action manoeuvres:
 Time t1 to t4 required for the evasive action || Rudder angle δ or δa[40] at which evasive action commences and turning speed to be complied with r1 = r3 || Comments 
   || δ = 20° STAR[41] || δ = 20° PORT[42] || δ = 45° STAR[43] || δ = 45° PORT[44] ||   
 δa = … STAR[45] || δa = … PORT[46] || δa = … STAR[47] || δa = … PORT[48] 
 r1 = r3 = … °/min ||   || r1 = r3 = … °/min ||   
 t1 [s] ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 t2 [s] ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 t3 [s] ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 t4 [s] ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Limit value t4 according to 2.2 || Limit value t4 = … [s] ||   ||   
Turning capacity[49]
Geographic position at start of turning
manoeuvre … km
Geographic position at end of turning
manoeuvre … km
Steering apparatus
Type of operation: manual/powered[50]
Rudder angle for each turn of the wheel[51]: … °
Angular velocity of the rudder over the
whole range[52]:
… °/s
Angular velocity of the rudder over the
range 35° Port to 35° Starboard[53]:
… °/s
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 2
Requirements concerning prescribed
(forward) speed, stopping capacity and capacity for going astern
(Articles 5.06, 5.07 and 5.08 in
conjunction with Articles 5.02(1), 5.03(1), 5.04 and 16.06 of Annex II)
1. Maximum prescribed (forward) speed in accordance with Article
5.06
The speed in relation to the water is
satisfactory in accordance with Article 5.06(1) when it reaches at least 13
km/h. During tests, the following conditions shall be met in the same way as
for the stopping test:
              (a) the keel clearance set out
in point 2.1 shall be complied with;
              (b) the measuring, recording,
registration and evaluation of test data shall be carried out.
2. Stopping capacity and capacity for going astern prescribed in
accordance with Articles 5.07 and 5.08
2.1. Vessels and convoys are deemed able to
stop facing downstream in good time in accordance with Article 5.07(1) when
this is proved during a test of stopping in relation to the ground facing
downstream at an initial speed in relation to the water of 13 km/h, with a keel
clearance equal to at least 20 % of the draught but not less than 0,50 m.
              (a) In flowing water (current
velocity of 1,5 m/s), stopping in relation to the water shall be demonstrated
over a maximum distance measured in relation to the ground of:
              550 m for vessels and convoys
of:
–              
length L > 110 m or
–              
width B > 11,45 m,
              or
              480 m for vessels and convoys of:
–              
length L ≤ 110 m and
–              
width B ≤ 11,45 m.
              The stopping manoeuvre is
completed on coming to a stop in relation to the ground.
              (b) In standing water (current
velocity of less than 0,2 m/s), stopping in relation to the water shall be
demonstrated over a maximum distance, measured in relation to the ground of:
              350 m for vessels and convoys
of:
–              
length L > 110 m or
–              
width B > 11,45 m,
              or
              305 m for vessels and convoys
of:
–              
length L ≤ 110 m and
–              
width B ≤ 11,45 m.
              In standing water, a test shall
also be performed to demonstrate that a speed of not less than 6,5 km/h can be
reached when going astern.
The measuring, recording and registration
of the test data referred to in (a) or (b) shall be carried out in accordance
with the procedure set out in Appendix 1.
Throughout the entire test, the vessel or
the convoy shall have adequate manoeuvrability.
2.2. In accordance with Article 5.04,
during the test, vessels shall be loaded as far as possible to 70-100 % of
their deadweight. This load condition shall be evaluated in accordance with
Appendix 2. When the vessel or the convoy is loaded to less than 70 % at the
time of the test, the permitted maximum displacement in downstream navigation
shall be set in accordance with the actual load, provided that the limit values
of point 2.1 are complied with.
2.3. If the actual values of the initial
speed and current velocity at the time of the test do not meet the conditions
set out in point 2.1, the results obtained shall be evaluated according to the
procedure described in Appendix 2.
The permitted deviation of the initial
speed of 13 km/h shall be not more than +1 km/h, and the current velocity in
flowing water shall be between 1,3 and 2,2 m/s, otherwise the tests shall be
repeated.
2.4. The permitted maximum displacement or
the respective maximum load or the maximum immersed cross-section for vessels
and convoys in downstream navigation shall be determined on the basis of the
tests and entered in the Union inland navigation certificate.
Appendix 1 
to Administrative instruction No 2
MEASURING, RECORDING AND REGISTRATION OF DATA COLLECTED DURING
STOPPING MANOEUVRE TESTS
1. Stopping manoeuvre
The vessels and convoys referred to in
Chapter 5 shall carry out a test in flowing water or in standing water, in a
test area, to prove that they are capable of stopping facing downstream only
with their propulsion system without the use of anchors. The stopping manoeuvre
shall, in principle, be carried out in accordance with figure 1. It begins when
the vessel is travelling at a constant speed of as near as possible to 13 km/h
in relation to the water by reversing the engines from ‘ahead’ to ‘astern’
(point A of the order ‘stop’) and is completed when the vessel is
stationary in relation to the ground (point E: v = 0 in relation to the
ground or point D: = point E: v = 0 in relation to the water and
in relation to the ground if the stopping manoeuvre is carried out in standing
water).
When stopping manoeuvres are carried out in
flowing water, the position and the moment of stopping in relation to the water
shall also be recorded (the vessel moves at the speed of the current; point D:
v = 0 in relation to the water).
The data measured shall be entered in a
report as shown in the diagram of table 1. Before the stopping manoeuvre is
carried out, the unchanging data shall be entered at the top of the form.
The average current velocity (vSTR)
in the fairway shall be determined, if available, based on the reading of an
established water level gauge, or by measuring the movement of a floating body
and shall be entered in the report.
In principle, the use of current metres is
permitted to determine the speed of the vessel in relation to the water during
the stopping manoeuvre, if it is possible to record the movement and the
required data in accordance with the procedure above.
2. Registration of the data measured and recording them in the
report (table 1)
For the stopping manoeuvre, first of all
the initial speed in relation to the water shall be determined. This can be
done by measuring the time taken to travel between two markers on land. In
flowing water, the average current velocity shall be taken into account.
The stopping manoeuvre is initiated by the
order ‘stop’A, given on passing a marker on land. Passing the land
marker shall be recorded perpendicularly to the axis of the vessel and shall be
entered in the report. Passing all other land markers during the stopping
manoeuvre shall be similarly recorded and each marker (e.g. kilometre post) and
the time of passing shall be noted in the report.
The values measured shall, if possible, be
recorded at intervals of 50 m. In each case, note should be taken of the time
when points B and C — if possible — as well as when points D
and E are reached and the respective position shall be estimated. The
data concerning the engine speed need not be recorded in the report, but should
be noted to permit more accurate control of the initial speed.
3. Description of the stopping manoeuvre
The stopping manoeuvre according to figure
1 shall be presented in the form of a diagram. First of all, the time-traverse
diagram shall be plotted using the measurements entered in the test report and
points A to E shall be indicated. It will then be possible to
determine the average speed between two measurement points and to plot the
speed/time diagram.
This is done as follows (see figure 1):
By determining the quotient of the
difference of position over the difference in time Δs/Δt, the average
speed of the vessel for this period can be calculated.
Example:
During the interval between 0 sec. and 10
sec., the distance from 0 m to 50 m is covered.
Δs/Δt = 50 m/10 s = 5,0 m/s = 18,0 km/h
This value is entered as the average speed at
the 5 sec. abscissa-position. During the second interval, from 10 sec. to 20
sec., a distance of 45 m is covered.
Δs/Δt = 45 m/10 s = 4,5 m/s = 16,2 km/h
At marker D, the vessel has stopped
in relation to the water i.e. current velocity is approximately 5 km/h.
Figure 1
Stopping manoeuvre
Key to symbols in figure 1
 A ||   || ‘stop’ order 
 B ||   || propeller stopped 
 C ||   || propeller in reverse 
 D ||   || v = 0 in relation to the water 
 E ||   || v = 0 in relation to the ground 
 v ||   || speed of vessel 
 vL ||   || v in relation to the ground 
 s ||   || distance covered in relation to the ground 
 t ||   || measured time 
Table 1
Report of the stopping manoeuvre
 Inspection Body: || … || Type of vessel or convoy: || … || Test area: || … 
 L × B [m]: || … || Water level gauge reading || [m]: || … 
 Date: || … || T at test [m]: || … || Water depth || [m]: || … 
 Name: || … || Load at Test [t]: || … || Gradient || [m/km]: || … 
 Test run No: || … || % of maximum deadweight || … || VSTR || [km/h]: || … 
   ||   || Power of propulsion engines PB[kW] || … || [m/s]: || … 
   ||   || Propulsion system according to Annex 2, table 2: || … || Max. displacement || [m3]: || … 
 Position [river-km] || Time [sec.] || Δs [m] || Δt [sec.] || vIL [km/h] || Engine speed n [min–1] || Observations 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Appendix 2
to Administrative instruction No 2
EVALUATION OF THE RESULTS OF THE
STOPPING MANOEUVRE
1.                      
On the basis of the values recorded compliance
with the limit values in accordance with Appendix 1 shall be verified. If the
conditions for the stopping manoeuvre deviate substantially from the standard
conditions, or if there are doubts as to the compliance with the limit values,
the results shall be evaluated. To that end the following procedure may be
applied for calculating stopping manoeuvres.
2.                      
Theoretical stopping distances are determined
under the standard conditions (Sreference) of point 2.1 of Administrative
instruction No 2 and under stopping manoeuvre conditions (Sactual) and are
compared with the stopping distance measured (Smeasured). The corrected
stopping distance of the stopping manoeuvre under standard conditions (Sstandard)
is calculated as follows:
Formula 2.1:
SSTANDARD = SMEASURED·(SREFERENCE/SACTUAL)
≤ Limit value in accordance with point 2.1(a) or (b) of Administrative
instruction No 2
When the stopping manoeuvre has been carried
out with a load of 70-100 % of the maximum deadweight in accordance with point
2.2 of Administrative instruction No 2 in order to calculate Sstandard
the displacement (Dreference= Dactual)
corresponding to the load at the time of the test shall be used for the
determination of Sreference and Sactual.
When in determining Sstandard
according to formula 2.1, the limit value in question is exceeded or not
reached, the value of Sreference shall be reduced or
increased by variation of Dreference so that the limit value
is complied with (Sstandard = limit value in question). The
maximum displacement permitted in downstream navigation shall be set
accordingly.
3.                      
According to the limit values given in point
2.1(a) and (b) of Administrative instruction No 2, only the stopping distances
measured in
–                        
Phase I (‘Full ahead’ reversed to ‘full
astern’): SI
              and
–                        
Phase II (End of reversal until vessel stops in
relation to the water): SII
shall be calculated (see figure 1). The total
stopping distance is then:
Formula 3.1:
Stotal = SI + SII4.
The particular stopping distances shall be calculated as follows:
CALCULATION OF THE STOPPING MANOEUVRE
Figure 2
Diagram
   || Calculation Formulae: || with the following coefficients 
 4.1. || SI = k1 · vL · t1 || tI ≤ 20 s || — k1 according to table 1 
 4.2. || SII = k2 · vII2 · (D · g)/(k3 · FPOR + RTmII – RG) · (k4 + (VSTR/VII)) || — k2, k3, k4 according to table 1 
 4.3. || RTmII = (RT/v2) · (k7 · k6 · (vL – vSTR))2 || — k6, k7 according to table 1 — RT/v2 according to table 3 
 4.4. || RG = i · D · ρ · g · 10–6 ||   
 4.5. || VII = k6 · (VL – VSTR) || — k6 according to table 1 
 4.6. || FPOR = f · PB || — f according to table 2 
 4.7. || tII = (SII/(vII · (k4 + (vSTR/vII)))) || — k4 according to table 1 
In formulae 4.1 to 4.7:
 vL || Speed in relation to the ground at the start of reversal || (m/s) 
 tI || Reversal time || (s) 
 vII || Speed in relation to the water at the end of reversal || (m/s) 
 D || Displacement || (m3) 
 FPOR || Bollard pull in reverse || (kN) 
 PB || Power of propulsion engine || (kW) 
 RTmII || Average resistance during phase II, to be determined using the diagram for determining RT/v2 || (kN) 
 RG || Gradient resistance || (kN) 
 i || Gradient in m/km (if missing to be taken as 0,16) || (m/km) 
 vSTR || Average current velocity || (m/s) 
 g || Acceleration due to gravity (9,81) || (m/s2) 
 ρ || Density of water, ρ fresh water = 1000 || (kg/m3) 
 T || Maximum draught (of vessel or convoy) || (m) 
 h || Water depth || (m) 
 B || Width || (m) 
 L || Length || (m) 
The coefficients for the formulae 4.1, 4.2,
4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7 can be taken from the tables below.
Table 1
k
factors for:
              (a) Motor vessels and single
file convoys
              (b) Two-abreast convoys
              (c) Three-abreast convoys
   || a || b || c || Units 
 k1 || 0,95 || 0,95 || 0,95 || — 
 k2 || 0,115 || 0,120 || 0,125 || (kg · s2)/m4 
 k3 || 1,20 || 1,15 || 1,10 || — 
 k4 || 0,48 || 0,48 || 0,48 || — 
 k6 || 0,90 || 0,85 || 0,80 || — 
 k7 || 0,58 || 0,55 || 0,52 || — 
Table 2
Coefficient f for ratio between
bollard pull in reverse and the power of the propulsion engines
 Propulsion system || f || Units 
 Modern nozzles with rounded rear edge || 0,118 || kN/kW 
 Old nozzles with sharp rear edge || 0,112 || kN/kW 
 Propellers without nozzle || 0,096 || kN/kW 
 Rudder propellers with nozzles (generally sharp rear edge) || 0,157 || kN/kW 
 Rudder propellers without nozzles || 0,113 || kN/kW 
Table 3
Diagram concerning the calculation of
resistance
To determine the value of RT/v2
in relation to D1/3 [B + 2T]:
 Table 3:          Diagram concerning the calculation of resistance             To determine the value of RT/v2 in relation to D1/3 [B + 2T]: 
   || 
   || || 
Annex to Appendix 2 
to Administrative instruction No 2
Examples on the application of
Appendix 2
(Evaluation of the results of the
stopping manoeuvre)
EXAMPLE I
1. Data of vessels and convoy
Formation: ordinary motor vessel with a
(Europa IIa) lighter coupled abreast
   || L [m] || B [m] || T max [m] || Dwt[54]max [t] || D max [m3] || PB [kW] 
 Motor vessel || 110 || 11,4 || 3,5 || 2900 || 3731 || 1500 
 Lighter || 76,5 || 11,4 || 3,7 || 2600 || 2743 || — 
 Convoy || 110 || 22,8 || 3,7 || 5500 || 6474 || 1500 
Propulsion system of the motor vessel: modern
nozzles with rounded rear edge
2. Values measured during the stopping manoeuvre
 Current velocity: || vSTRactual || = || 1,4 m/s || ≈ || 5,1 km/h 
 Speed of vessel (in relation to the water): || VSactual || = || 3,5 m/s || ≈ || 12,5 km/h 
 Speed of vessel (in relation to the ground): || VLactual || = || 4,9 m/s || ≈ || 17,6 km/h 
 Reversal time (measured) (point A to C): || tI || = || 16 s ||   ||   
 Stopping distance in relation to the water (point A to D): || SMEASURED || = || 340 m ||   ||   
 Load condition (possibly estimated): || Dactual || = || 5179m3 || ≈ || 0,8 Dmax 
 Actual draught of convoy: || Tactual || = || 2,96 m || ≈ || 0,8 Tmax 
3. Limit value according to point 2.1(a) or (b) to be compared with Sstandard
Since B > 11,45 m and since the convoy is
in flowing water, the following is applicable for this convoy under 2.1(a):
Sstandard < 550 m
4. Determination of corrected stopping distance compared to standard
conditions
–                        
Measured value
according to Appendix 1 (see point 2)
              smeasured =
340 m
–                        
to be calculated:
              sactual as the
sum of
 sIactual ||   || (according to formula 4.1 of Appendix 2 with vLactual) 
              and
 sIIactual ||   || (according to formulae 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6 of Appendix 2 with actual speeds vIIactual, vSTRactual, Dactual) 
              sreference as
the sum of
 sIreference ||   || (according to formula 4.1 of Appendix 2 with vLreference) 
              and
 sIIreference ||   || (according to formulae 4.2 to 4.6 of Appendix 2 with the reference speeds according to 2.1 of the Administrative instruction and given that the load condition is greater than 70 % of the maximum load (≈ 80 %): Dreference = Dactual and Treference = Tactual) 
–                        
to be checked:
              Sstandard = Smeasured
· (Sreference/Sactual) ≤ 550 m
4.1. Coefficients for the calculation taken
from Appendix 2
Table 1
 for sIactual and sIreference || k1 || = || 0,95 
 for sIIactual and sIIreference || k2 || = || 0,12 
   || k3 || = || 1,15 
   || k4 || = || 0,48 
   || k6 || = || 0,85 
   || k7 || = || 0,55 
Table 2 (for modern nozzles with rounded
rear edge)
f = 0,118
4.2. Calculation of Sactual
              (a)sIactual
with the values measured during the stopping manoeuvre (formula 4.1)
              SIactual
= k1 · vLactual · tIactual
              SIactual =
0,95 · 4,9 · 16 = 74,5 m
              (b) Formula for sIIactual
              SIIactual = k
· v2IIactual · ((Dactual
· g)/(k3 · FPOR + RTmIIactual
– RG)) · (k4 + ((VSTRactual)/(VIIactual)))
              (c) Calculation of RTmIIactual
according to table 3 and formula 4.3 of Appendix 2
              (Dactual)1/3
= 51791/3 + 17,3 [m]
              (Dactual)1/3
· (B + 2 · Tactual) = 17,3 · (22,8 +
5,92) = 496,8 [m2]
              according to table 3 (RT/v2)
= 10,8 [(kN · s2)/(m2)]
              vLactual – vSTRactual
= 4,9 – 1,4 = 3, 5 m/s
              RTmIIactual =
(RT/v2) · (k7 ·
k6 · (vLactual – vSTRactual))2
= 10,8 · (0,55 · 0,85 · 3,5)2 = 28,8[kN]
              (d) Calculation of resistance to
gradient RG according to formula 4.4
              RG = 10-6
· (0,16 · Dactual · ρ · g)
= 10-6 · (0,16 · 5179 · 1000 · 9,81) = 8,13[kN]
              (e) Calculation of vIIactual
according to formula 4.5
              vIIactual = k6(vLactual – vSTRactual)
= 0,85 · 3,5 = 2,97 [m/s]
              vIIactual2 = 8,85 [m/s]2
              (f) Calculation of FPOR
according to formula 4.6 and table 2
              FPOR = 0,118
· 1500 = 177[kN]
              (g) Calculation of sIIactual
using formula (b) and the results of (c), (d), (e) and (f)
              sIIactual =
((0,12 · 8,85 · 9,81 · (0,48 + (1,4/2,97)))/(1,15 · 177 +
28,8 – 8,13)) · 5179
              sIIactual = 228,9
m
              (h) Calculation of total
distance according to formula 3.1
              sactual =
74,51 + 228,9 = 303,4 m
              Note: The term (RtmII
— RG), which is a function of D, with an actual value of
20,67 kN is obviously relatively small compared to k3 · FPOR
with an actual value of 203,55 kN, so for simplification purposes, sII
can be taken as proportional to D, i.e. sII = Constant
· D.
4.3. Calculation of sreference
Initial values
 vSTRreference = 1,5 m/s = 5,4 km/h || Dreference = Dactual = 5179m3 
 vSreference = 3,6 m/s = 13 km/h || Treference = Tactual = 2,96 m 
 vLreference = 5,1 m/s = 18,4 km/h ||   
              (a)SIreference = k1
· vLreference · tI
              SIreference =
0,95 · 5,1 · 16 = 77,50 m
              (b)SIIreference =
k2 · v2IIreference · (Dreference
· g)/(k3 · FPOR + RTmIIreference
– RG) · (k4
+ ((vSTRreference)/vIIreference))
              (c)
calculation of RTmIIreference
              (RT/v2)
= 10,8 [(kN · s2)/(m2)] as in
point 4.2, since B, D and T are unchanged.
              vLreference – vSTRreference
= 3,6 [m/s]
              RTmIIreference
= (RT/v2) · (k7
· k6 · (vLreference – vSTRreference))2
= 10,8 · (0,55 · 0,85 · 3,6)2 = 30,99[kN]
              (d) Resistance due to gradient RG
as in point 4.2
              (e) Calculation of vIIreference
              vIIreference =
k6 · (vLreference – vSTRreference)
= 0,85 · 3,6 = 3,06 [m/s], v2IIreference
= 9,36 [m/s]2
              (f)FPOR as in
point 4.2.
              (g) Calculation of sIIreference
using formula (b) and the result from (c) to (f)
              sIIreference =
(0,12 · 9,36 · 9,81 · (0,48 + (1,5/3,06)))/(1,15 · 177 +
30,99 – 8,13) · 5179
 = || 0,0472 || · 5179 = 244,5 m 
 Constantreference 
              (h) Calculation of total
distance
              sreference = sIreference
+ sIIreference = 77,5 + 244,5 = 322 m
4.4. Verification of compliance with
permissible stopping distance under standard conditions sstandard
according to formula 2.1 of Appendix 2
sstandard = smeasured · (sreference/sactual)
= 340 · (322/303,4) = 360,8 m < 550 m
Conclusion:
The permissible limit value is far from
being reached, i.e.:
–                        
admission to downstream navigation is possible
without problems for the actual load condition (0,8 · Dmax),
–                        
a higher load condition is possible and may be
calculated according to point 5 below.
5. Possible increase of Dactual in downstream navigation
(sstandard)Limit
= smeasured · (((sreference)Limit)/sactual)
= 550 m
(sreference)Limit
= 550 · (sactual/smeasured) = 550
· (303,4/340) = 490,8 m
With sIIreference =
Constantreference · D according to the note under point
4.2
(sreference)Limit
= (sIreference + sIIreference)Limit
= sIreference + 0,0472 · (Dreference)Limit
Hence
(Dreference)Limit
= ((sreference)Limit – sIreference)/0,0472
= (490,8 – 77,5)/0,0472 = (8756m3)
From this follows that:
Since (Dreference)Limit
> Dmax (8756 > 6474) this formation (see point 1) may
be permitted in downstream navigation with full load.
EXAMPLE II
1. Data of vessels and convoy
Formation: large motor vessel propelling
2 lighters side-by-side in front and
1 lighter coupled side-by-side
   || L [m] || B [m] || T max [m] || Dwt[55]max [t] || D max [m3] || PB [kW] 
 Motor vessel || 110 || 11,4 || 3,5 || 2900 || 3731 || 1500 
 Each lighter || 76,5 || 11,4 || 3,7 || 2600 || 2743 || — 
 Convoy || 186,5 || 22,8 || 3,7 || 10700 || 11960 || 1500 
              Propulsion system of the
self-propelled vessel: modern nozzles with rounded rear edge.
2. Values measured during the stopping manoeuvre
 Current velocity: || vSTRactual || = || 1,4 m/s || ≈ || 5,1 km/h 
 Speed of vessel (in relation to the water): || VSactual || = || 3,5 m/s || ≈ || 12,5 km/h 
 Speed of vessel (in relation to the bank): || VLactual || = || 4,9 m/s || ≈ || 17,6 km/h 
 Reversal time (measured) (point A to C): || tI || = || 16 sec ||   ||   
 Stopping distance in relation to the water (point A to D): || smeasured || = || 580 m ||   ||   
 Load condition (possibly estimated): || Dactual || = || 9568 m3 || ≈ || 0,8 Dmax 
 Actual draught of convoy: || Tactual || = || 2,96 m || ≈ || 0,8 Tmax 
3. Limit value according to paragraph 2.1(a) or (b) of the
Administrative instruction to be compared with sstandard
Since B > 11,45 and the convoy is
in flowing water, the following applies for this convoy under point 2.1(a):
sstandard ≤ 550 m
4. Determination of the corrected stopping distance compared with
standard conditions
–                        
Measured value:
              smeasured =
340 m
–                        
calculations to be made:
              sactual as the sum of
 sIactual ||   || (according to formula 4.1 of Appendix 2 with VLactual) 
              and
 sIIactual ||   || (according to formulae 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6 of Appendix 2 with real speeds vLactual (see under 2 above) and Dactual) 
 sreference: sum sIreference + sIIreference ||   || (according to formulae 4.1 to 4.6 of Appendix 2 with reference speeds and in conformity of Appendix 2, because the load condition > 70 % of maximum, where Dreference = Dactual and Treference = Tactual) 
–                        
to be verified:
              sstandard = smeasured
· (sreference/sactual) ≤ 550 m,
otherwise
–                        
calculate:
              s* standard =
550 m by reduction of Dactual to D*
4.1. Coefficients for the calculation
according to Appendix 2
Table 1
 for sIactual and sIreference || k1 || = || 0,95 
 for sIactual and sIreference || k2 || = || 0,12 
   || k3 || = || 1,15 
   || k4 || = || 0,48 
   || k5 || = || 0,85 
   || k7 || = || 0,55 
Table 2 (for modern nozzles with rounded
rear edge)
f = 0,118
4.2. Calculation of sIactual
              (a)sIactual
Using the values measured during the stopping manoeuvres
              sIactual = k1
· vLactual · tIactual
              sIactual =
0,95 · 4,8 · 16 = 73 m
              (b) formula for sIIactual
              sIIactual = k2
· v2IIactual · ((Dactual
· g)/(k3 · FPOR + RTmIIactual
– RG)) · (k4 +(vSTRactual/vIIactual))
              (c) Calculation of RTmIIactual
according to table 3 and formula 4.3 of Appendix 2
              Dactual1/3
= 95681/3 = 21,2 [m]
              Dactual1/3
· (B + 2 · Tactual) = 21,2 · (22,8 –
5,92) = 609 [m2]
              from table 3 (RT/v2)
= 14,0 [(kN · s2)/(m2)]
              vLactual – vSTRactual
= 4,8 – 1,4 = 3,4 m/s
              RTmIIactual =
(RT/v2) · (k7 ·
k6 · (vLactual – vSTRactual))2
= 14,0 · (0,55 · 0,85 · 3,4)2 = 35,4[kN]
              (d) Calculation of resistance
due to gradient RG according to formula 4.4 of Appendix 2.
              RG = 10-6
· (0,16 · Dactual · ρ · g)
= 10-6 · (0,16 · 9568 · 1000 · 9,81) = 15,02[kN]
              (e) Calculation of vIIactual
according to formula 4.5 of Appendix 2
              vIIactual = k6 · (vLactual · vSTRactual) = 2,89[m/s]
              v2IIactual = 8,35[m/s]2
              (f) Calculation of FPOR
acording to formula 4.6 and table 2
              FPOR = 0,118
· 1500 = 177[kN]
              (g) Calculation of sIIactual
using formula (b) and the result of (c), (d), (e) and (f)
              SIIactual =
((0,12 · 8,35 · 9,81 (0,48 + (1,4/2,89)))/(1,15 · 177 + 35,4 –
15,02)) · 9568
              SIIactual = 402
m
              (h) Calculation of the total
distance according to formula 3.1
              sactual = 73 +
402 = 475 m
4.3. Calculation of sreference
Initial values:
 VSTRreference = 1,5 m/s ≈ 5,4 km/h || Dreference = Dactual = 9568m3 
 VSreference = 3,6 m/s ≈ 13 km/h || Treference = Tactual = 2,96 m 
 VLreference = 5,1 m/s ≈ 18,4 km/h ||   
              (a)SIreference = k1
· vLreference · t1
              SIreference =
0,95 · 5,1 · 16 = 77, 50 m
              (b)SIIreference =
k2 · vIIreference2 · ((Dreference
· g)/(k3 · FPOR + RTmIIreference
– RG)) · (k4
+ (vSTRreference/vIIreference))
              (c)
Calculation of RTmIIreference
              (RT/v2
= 14,0[(kN · s2)/m2]) as under
point 4.2 since B, D and T and unchanged
              vLreference – vSTRreference
= 3,6 [m/s]
              RTmIIreference
= 14,0 · (0,55 · 0,85 · 3,6)2 = 39,6[kN]
              (d) Resistance due to gradient RG
as under point 4.2
              (e) Calculation of vIIreference
              vIIreference =
0,85 · 3,6 = 3,06[m/s], vIIreference2
= 9,36 [m/s]2
              (f)FPOR as
under point 4.2
              (g) Calculation of SIIreference
using formula (b) and the result of (c) to (f)
              SIIreference =
((0,12 · 9,36 · 9,81 · (0,48 + (1,5/3,06)))/(1,15 · 177 +
39,6 – 15,02)) · 9568
 SIIreference = || 0,04684 || · 9568 = 448 m 
 Constantreference 
(h) Calculation of the total distance
              Sreference = SIreference
+ SIIreference = 77,5 + 448 = 525,5 m
4.4. Verification of compliance with
permissible stopping distance under standard conditions Sstandard
according to formula 2.1 of Appendix 2
Sstandard = Smeasured · (Sreference/Sactual)
= 580 · (525,5/475) = 641 m > 550 m
Conclusion:
The limit value has clearly been exceeded; admission to downstream navigation
is possible only with a load restriction. This restricted load can be
determined in conformity with No 5 below.
5. D* permissible in downstream navigation according to formula 2.1
of Appendix 2
Sstandard = Smeasured · (Sreference*/Sactual)
= 550 m
Therefore:
Sreference* = 550 · (Sactual/Smeasured)
= SIreference + SIIreference*
SIIreference* = Constantreference
· D* = 0,04684 · D*
D* = ((550 · (475/580) – 77,5)/0,04684) = 7950[m3]
Consequence:
Since in downstream navigation the permissible displacement D*
is only 7950 m3, the permissible deadweight (perm. Dwt.) in this
formation is approximately:
(perm.Dwt./max.Dwt.) =
(D*/Dmax) = (7950/11960) = 0,66
Permissible deadweight (see point 1)
0,66 · 10700 = 7112 t
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 3
Requirements for coupling systems
and coupling devices for craft suitable for propelling or being propelled in a
rigid assembly
(Articles 16.01, 16.02, 16.06,
16.07 of Annex II)
In addition to the requirements of Chapter
16 of Annex II, the relevant provisions of the navigational authority
regulations in force in the Member States shall be observed.
1. General requirements
1.1. Every coupling system shall guarantee
the rigid coupling of all the craft in a convoy, i.e. under foreseen operating
conditions the coupling device shall prevent longitudinal or transversal
movement between the vessels, so that the assembly can be seen as a ‘nautical
unit’
1.2. The coupling system and its components
shall be safe and easy to use, enabling craft to be coupled rapidly without
endangering personnel.
1.3. The forces arising from foreseen
operating conditions shall be properly absorbed and safely transmitted into the
vessel’s structure by the coupling system and its components.
1.4. A sufficient number of coupling points
shall be available.
2. Coupling forces and dimensioning of coupling devices
The coupling devices of convoys and
formations of vessels to be authorised shall be dimensioned so as to guarantee
sufficient safety levels. This condition is deemed to be fulfilled if the
coupling forces determined according to points 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 are assumed to
be the tensile strength for the dimensioning of the longitudinal coupling
components.
2.1. Coupling points between pusher and
pushed lighters or other craft:
FSB = 270 · PB · (LS/Bs)
· 10–3[kN]
2.2. Coupling points between pushing motor
vessel and pushed craft:
FSF = 80 · PB · (LS/hK)
· 10–3[kN]
2.3. Coupling points between pushed craft:
FSL = 80 · PB · (L′S/h′K)
· 10–3[kN]A value of 1200 kN is deemed to be sufficient
for the maximum coupling force for a pushing craft at the coupling point
between the first pushed craft and the craft coupled ahead of it, even if
formula in point 2.3 produces a higher value.
For the coupling points of all other
longitudinal connections between pushed craft, the dimensioning of the coupling
devices shall be based on the coupling force determined according to formula in
point 2.3.
Where:
 FSB, FSF, FSL [kN] ||   || Coupling force of the longitudinal connection; 
 PB [kW] ||   || Installed power of the propulsion engine; 
 LS [m] ||   || Distance from the stern of the pusher or pushing craft to the coupling point; 
 L'S [m] ||   || Distance from the stern of the pushing craft to the coupling point between the first pushed craft and the craft coupled ahead of it; 
 hK, h'K [m] ||   || Respective lever arm of the longitudinal connection; 
 BS [m] ||   || Width of the pushing craft; 
 270 and 80 [kN/kW] ||   || Empirically established values for the conversion of installed power to thrust while ensuring adequate levels of safety. 
2.4.1.     For the longitudinal
coupling of individual craft at least two coupling points shall be used. Each
coupling point shall be dimensioned for the coupling force determined according
to points 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3. If rigid coupling components are used, a single
coupling point may be authorised if that point ensures secure connection of the
craft.
The tensile strength of the cables shall be
selected according to the foreseen number of windings. There shall be no more
than three windings at the coupling point. Cables shall be selected according
to their intended use.
2.4.2.     In the case of pushers with
a single pushed lighter, formula in point 2.2 can be used to determine the
coupling force if such pushers have been authorised to propel several such
lighters.
2.4.3.     Sufficient numbers of
bollards or equivalent devices shall be available and be capable of absorbing
the coupling forces arising.
3. Special requirements for articulated couplings
Articulated couplings shall be designed so
as to also ensure a rigid coupling between craft. Compliance with the
requirements of Chapter 5 shall be checked during navigation tests with a rigid
convoy in accordance with Article 16.06.
The drive unit of the articulated coupling
shall enable a satisfactory return from the articulated position. The requirements
of Articles 6.02 to 6.04 shall be applied mutatis mutandis, hence when a
powered drive unit is used, a second independent drive unit and energy source
shall be available in the event of failure.
It shall be possible to operate and monitor
the articulated coupling (its articulated movement, at least) from the
wheelhouse, the requirements of Articles 7.03 and 7.05 shall be applied mutatis
mutandis.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 4
Application
of Transitional provisions 
(Chapters 15 to 22b, Chapter 24 and Chapter 24a of
Annex II)
1.                      
Application of transitional provisions in
joining together parts of craft 
1.1.                
Principles 
Where parts of different vessels are joined
together, status quo protection shall be granted only for the parts which
belong to the vessel which retains its Union inland navigation certificate.
Transitional provisions may therefore be invoked only for those parts. Other
parts shall be treated as a newly built vessel. 
1.2.                
Application of the transitional provisions in
detail
1.2.1.     Where parts of different
vessels are joined together, transitional provisions may be invoked only for
those parts which belong to the vessel which retains its Union inland
navigation certificate. 
1.2.2      Parts which do not belong to
the vessel which retains its vessel certificate shall be treated as a newly
built craft. 
1.2.3      After a vessel has had part
of another vessel added to it, the former shall receive the European vessel
identification number of the craft, which retains its Union inland navigation
certificate as the converted craft.
1.2.4      Where an existing Union
inland navigation certificate is retained or a new Union inland navigation
certificate is issued for a craft after a conversion, the year of construction
of the oldest part of the craft shall additionally be entered in the Union
inland navigation certificate.
1.2.5      If a new fore section is
attached to a craft, the engine for the bow thruster system installed in the
fore section shall also comply with the current requirements.
1.2.6      If a new stern section is
attached to a vessel, the engines installed in the stern section shall also
comply with the current requirements.
1.3         Examples for illustration
1.3.1      A vessel is put together
from two older vessels (vessel 1 year of construction 1968; vessel 2 year of construction
1972). The whole of vessel 1 apart from the fore section is used; of vessel 2,
the fore section is used. The assembled vessel receives vessel 1's Union inland
navigation certificate. The fore section of the assembled vessel must now be
fitted inter alia with anchor niches.
1.3.2      A vessel is put together
from two older vessels (vessel 1 year of construction 1975; vessel 2 year of
construction 1958, oldest component 1952). The whole of vessel 1 apart from the
fore section is used; of vessel 2, the fore section is used. The assembled
vessel receives vessel 1's Union inland navigation certificate. The fore
section of the assembled vessel must now be fitted inter alia with anchor
niches. The oldest component from the original vessel 2, with year of construction
1952, is additionally entered in the Union inland navigation certificate.
1.3.3      The stern section of a
vessel of year of construction 2001 is attached to a vessel of year of
construction 1988. The engine of the vessel of year of construction 1988 is to
remain in the vessel. In this case, the engine has to be type approved. The
engine would also have to be type approved if it was the engine in the 2001
stern section.
2.           Application of
transitional provisions in the case of a change in the type of craft (intended
use of the craft)
2.1         Principles
2.1.1      In any decision on the
application of transitional provisions in the case of change of the type of
craft (vessel type; intended use of the vessel), as regards to Annex II to this
Directive safety considerations shall be key.
2.1.2      It shall constitute a change
in the type of craft if the safety requirements applying to the new type of
craft are different from those for the old type; this is so if special
provisions of Chapters 15 to 22b of Annex II are applicable to the new type
which were not applicable to the old type.
2.1.3      In the case of a change in
the type of craft, all special provisions and all requirements specific to this
type of craft shall be complied with fully; transitional provisions may not be
invoked for these requirements. This also applies to parts which are taken over
from the existing craft and come under these special requirements.
2.1.4      The conversion of a tanker
into a dry cargo vessel shall not constitute a change in the type of craft as
defined in 2.1.2.
2.1.5      In the case of conversion of
a cabin vessel into a day-trip vessel, all new parts shall comply fully with
the current requirements.
2.2         Application of the
transitional provisions in detail
2.2.1      Article 24.02 (2) (NRC),
resp. Article 24a.02 (2) applies to the parts of the craft that are renewed;
hence new parts of the craft cannot be subject to the transitional provisions.
2.2.2      For the parts of the craft
that are not converted, the transitional provisions shall continue to be
applicable with the exception of parts according to 2.1.3, second sentence.
2.2.3      If the dimensions of the
craft are modified, the transitional provisions no longer apply to those parts
of the craft that are connected with this modification (e.g. distance of
collision bulkhead, freeboard and anchor).
2.2.4      In the case of a change in
the type of craft, the special requirements of Annex II that only apply to the
new type of craft shall be applicable. All parts and items of equipment that
are affected by the conversion of the craft must satisfy the current
requirements Part II and III of Annex II.
2.2.5      The craft shall then be
granted a new or amended Union inland navigation certificate and a note shall
be made in fields 7 and 8 of the certificate both of the original construction
and of the conversion.
2.3         Examples for illustration
2.3.1      A cargo vessel (year of
construction 1996) is converted into a passenger vessel. Chapter 15 of Annex II
then applies to the whole vessel, without invoking transitional provisions. If
the fore section is not modified either according to the conversion plans or in
accordance with Chapter 15, the vessel does not need to present any anchor
niches in accordance with Article 3.03.
2.3.2      A tug (year of construction
1970) is converted into a pusher. The physical conversion consists solely of
changing the deck equipment and installing a pushing device. All transitional
provisions for a 1970 vessel remain applicable, except for the Chapters 5, 7
(in part), Article 10.01 and Article 16.01.
2.3.3      A motor tanker (year of
construction 1970) is converted into a pusher. The physical conversion consists
of separating off the fore section and the cargo section, as well as changing
the deck equipment and installing a pushing device. All transitional provisions
for a 1970 vessel remain applicable, except for the provisions of Chapters 5, 7
(in part), Article 10.01 and Article 16.01.
2.3.4      A motor tanker is converted
into a motor cargo vessel. The motor cargo vessel must comply with current
workplace safety requirements, particularly those referred to in Article 11.04
of Chapter 11 of Annex II.
3.           Application of
transitional provisions in the case of conversion of passenger vessels
3.1         Application of the
transitional provisions
3.1.1      Conversion measures that are
necessary in order to comply with requirements of Chapter 15, no matter when
they are carried out, shall not constitute conversion 'C' within the meaning of
Article 24.02(2), Article 24.03(1) or Article 24.06(5) of Annex II, resp.
Article 24a.02, Article 24a.03.
3.1.2      In the case of conversion of
a cabin vessel into a day-trip vessel, all new parts shall comply fully with
the current requirements.
3.2         Examples for illustration
3.2.1      A passenger vessel (year of
construction 1995) must have a second independent propulsion system installed
by 1 January 2015 at the latest. If no other voluntary conversions are made on
this passenger vessel, it is not necessary to carry out a stability calculation
in accordance with the new requirements, but if there is an objective need for
one, a stability calculation may be carried out in accordance with the original
stability requirements of a Member State.
3.2.2      A passenger vessel (year of
construction 1994, vessel certificate last renewed 2012) will be extended by 10
m in 2016. In addition, this craft must be given a second independent
propulsion system. Also, a new stability calculation will be necessary, which
must be carried out in accordance with Chapter 15 for the one-compartment
status and the two-compartment status.
3.2.3      A passenger vessel (year of
construction 1988) receives a more powerful propulsion system including
propellers. This is such a major conversion that a stability calculation is
required. This must be carried out in accordance with current requirements.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 5
Noise measurements
(Article 3.04(7), Article 7.01(2), Article 7.03(6), Article 7.09(3),
Article 8.10, Article 11.09(3), Article 12.02(5), Article 17.02(3)(b), and
Article 17.03(1) of Annex II)
1. General
In order to check the maximum sound
pressure levels given in Annex II, measured values, measurement procedures and
conditions for the quantitative, reproducible recording of sound pressure
levels in accordance with points 2 and 3 shall be established.
2. Measuring instruments
The measuring instrument shall meet the
requirements of class 1 according to EN 60651:1994.
Before and after each set of measurements,
a class 1 calibrator according to EN 60942:1998 shall be placed on the
microphone in order to calibrate the measurement system. The compliance of the
calibrator with the requirements of EN 60942:1998 shall be checked once per
year. The compliance of the measuring equipment with the requirements of EN
60651:1994 shall be checked every two years.
3. Noise measurements
3.1. On board craft
Measurements shall be carried out in
accordance with ISO 2923:2003 Sections 5 to 8 measuring only A-weighted sound
pressure levels.
3.2. Air noise emitted from craft
Noise emissions from craft on inland
waterways and in ports are determined by means of measurements in accordance
with EN ISO 22922:2000, Sections 7 to 11. Doors and windows of engine rooms
shall be closed during measurements
4. Documentation
Measurements shall be recorded according to
the ‘Noise Measurement Report’ (Annex).
Noise Measurement Report
–                        
on board craft in accordance with ISO 2923:2003
–                        
air noise emitted from craft in accordance with
EN ISO 2922:2000[56]
A. Craft data
1. Craft type and name:
Unique European vessel identification
number:
2. Owner:
3. Main propulsion system:
3.1. Main engines:
 Number || Manufacturer || Type || Year of construction || Power (kW) || Engine speed (min–1) || Two-stroke/four-stroke || Turbo-charged yes/no 
 1 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 2 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
3.2. Transmission
Manufacturer: … Type: … Gear reduction: 1:
…
3.3. Propellers
Number: … Number of blades: … Diameter: …
mm … Nozzle: yes/no[57]
3.4. Steering system
Type:
4. Auxiliaries:
 Number || Propulsion of || Manufacturer || Type || Year of construction || Power (kW) || Engine speed (min–1) 
 1 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 2 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 3 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 4 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 5 ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
5. Noise reduction measures implemented:
6. Observations:
B. Measuring instruments used
1. Sound pressure level meter:
Manufacturer: … Type: … Latest check: …
2. Octave/Third octave band analyser:
Manufacturer: … Type: … Latest check: …
3. Calibrator:
Manufacturer: … Type: … Latest check: …
4. Accessories:
5. Observations:
C. Measurement conditions — craft
1. Formation during the measurements:
2. Load/displacement: … t/m3[58] (approximately … % of
maximum value)
3. Speed of main engine: … min–1
(approximately … % of maximum value)
4. Auxiliaries in service No:
5. Observations:
D. Measurement conditions — surroundings
1. Area of measurement: …
Upstream/downstream[59]
2. Water depth: … m (Relevant water level =
… m)
3. Weather: … Temperature: … °C; Wind
strength: … BF
4. External noise interference: yes/no[60], if yes, specify: …
5. Observations:
E. Recording of measurement
1. Measurement carried out by:
2. Date:
3. Observations:
4. Signature:
F.1. Measurement results
Noise measurements on board craft:
 Number || Measurement point || Doors || Windows || Measured value in dB(A) || Observations 
 open || closed || open || closed 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
F.2. Measurement results
Measurement of air noise emitted from
craft:
 Number || Measurement point || Measured values in dB(A) || Observations 
   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 6
Application
of Chapter 15 requirements 
Local subdivisions
Transitional
requirements for enclosures made with 
awnings or similar mobile installations
(Article 15.02(5), 15.03(4), 15.03(9) of Annex II)

1.                       
Local subdivisions (Article 15.02(5))

Under Article15.02 paragraph 5 it is
conceivable that local watertight subdivisions, such as transversally
subdivided double bottom tanks of a greater length than the            damage
length to be considered, will not be included in the evaluation. In this case
it might not be possible to take the transversal subdivision into account if it
is not extended up to the bulkhead deck. This might lead to inappropriate
subdivisions of bulkheads. 
Interpretation of the requirement:
If a watertight compartment is longer than
required by Article 15.03 paragraph 9 and it contains local subdivisions
which form watertight sub compartments, and between which the minimum damage
length can be contained, these can be taken into account in the damaged
stability calculation.

2.                      
Transitional requirements for enclosures made
with awnings or similar mobileinstallations with regard to stability (Article
15.03 paragraph 5)

Enclosures made with awnings or similar
mobile installations can cause problems with the stability of the vessel since,
if of sufficient size to do so, they influence the heeling moment due to wind
pressure.
Interpretation of the requirement:
In the case of passenger vessels for which
a vessel certificate was issued for the first time before 1 January 2006, or for
which Article 24.06 paragraph 2, second sentence, is invoked, after the
erection of an enclosure made with awnings or similar mobile installations, a
new stability calculation must be made according to this Directive, in so far
as its lateral plane Awz exceeds 5% of the total lateral plane Aw
to be taken into account in each case.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 7
Special
anchors with reduced mass
(Article 10.01(5) of Annex II)
Part 1:
Authorised special anchors
Special
anchors with a reduced mass, authorised by competent authorities according to
Article 10.01 paragraph 5 are listed in the following table. 
 Anchor nr. || Accepted reduction of the anchormass (%) || Competent Authority 
 1.      HA-DU || 30% || Germany 
 2.      D'Hone Spezial || 30% || Germany 
 3.      Pool 1 (hol) || 35% || Germany 
 4.      Pool 2 (massief) || 40% || Germany 
 5.      De Biesbosch-Danforth || 50% || Germany 
 6.      Vicinay-Danforth || 50% || France 
 7.      Vicinay AC 14 || 25% || France 
 8.      Vicinay type 1 || 45% || France 
 9.      Vicinay type 2 || 45% || France 
 10.    Vicinay type 3 || 40% || France 
 11.    Stockes || 35% || France 
 12.    D'Hone-Danforth || 50% || Germany 
 13.    Schmitt HHP-anker || 40% || Netherlands 
 14.    SHI high holding anchor, type ST (standard) || 30 % || Netherlands 
 15.    SHI high holding anchor, type FB (fully balanced) || 30 % || Netherlands 
 16.    Klinsmann anchor || 30 % || Netherlands 
  17. HA-DU-POWER Anchor || 50% || Germany 
PART 2
Authorisation
and test procedure of special anchors with reduced mass
(Reduction
of the anchor mass values determined in accordance with Article 10.01(1) to (4)
of Annex II)
1. Chapter 1 — Authorisation procedure
1.1.        Special anchors with
reduced mass in accordance with Article 10.01(5) of Annex II shall be
authorised by the competent authorities. The competent authority determines the
authorised reduction of anchor mass for special anchors in accordance with the procedure
outlined below.
1.2.        Authorisation as special
anchor is only possible if the reduction of anchor mass established is at least
15 %.
1.3.        Applications for the
authorisation of a special anchor in accordance with point 1.1 shall be
submitted to the competent authority of a Member State. Ten copies of the
following documents shall be forwarded with each application:
(a)          an outline of the dimensions and
mass of the special anchor, giving the main dimensions and type designation for
each available anchor size;
(b)          a braking force diagram for the
reference anchor A (in accordance with point 2.2) and the special anchor B to
be authorised which has been prepared and assessed by an institution designated
by the competent authority.
1.4.        The competent authority
notifies the other competent authorities of any applications to reduce anchor
mass which it considers to authorise after testing. 
2. Chapter 2 — Test Procedure
2.1.        The braking force diagrams
in accordance with point 1.3 shall show the braking forces as a function of
speed for the reference anchor A and the special anchor B to be authorised on
the basis of tests in accordance with points 2.2 to 2.5 below. Annex I shows
one possible braking force test.
2.2.        The reference anchor A used
in the tests shall be a conventional folding stockless anchor corresponding to
the sketch and details given below, with a mass of at least 400 kg.
A tolerance of ±5 % applies to the dimensions
and mass given. However, the surface area of each fluke must be at least 0,15 m2.
2.3.        The mass of the special
anchor B used in the tests shall not deviate by more than 10 % from the mass of
the reference anchor A. If the tolerances are greater, the forces shall be
recalculated proportional to mass.
2.4.        Braking force diagrams
shall give a linear representation of speed (v) in the range 0 to 5 km/h (speed
over ground). To this end, three tests shall be carried out in an upstream
direction for the reference anchor A and the special anchor B on an alternating
basis over each of two stretches of river determined by the competent
authority, one with coarse gravel and one with fine sand. On the River Rhine
the stretch between 401-402 km can serve as a reference stretch for the coarse
gravel tests and the stretch between 480-481 km for the fine sand tests.
2.5.        For each test, the anchor
being tested shall be towed with a steel wire cable whose length between the
points of connection on the anchor and on the towing craft or device is 10
times the height of the connection point on the craft above the anchorage
ground.
2.6.        The percentage of reduction
of anchor mass is calculated by the following formula:
r = 75 · (1 – 0,5(PB/PA)((FA/FB) +
(AA/AB)))[%]Where
 r ||   || the percentage of reduction of anchor mass of special anchor B in relation to reference anchor A; 
 PA ||   || the mass of reference anchor A; 
 PB ||   || the mass of special anchor B; 
 FA ||   || holding force of reference anchor A at v = 0,5 km/h; 
 FB ||   || holding force of special anchor B at v = 0,5 km/h; 
 AA ||   || the surface area on the braking force diagram defined by: –                         the line parallel to the y-axis at v = 0, –                         the line parallel to the y-axis at v = 5 km/h, –                         the line parallel to the x-axis at holding force F = 0, –                         the braking force curve for reference anchor A, Model braking force diagram (Determining the surface areas AA and AB) AB     same definition as for AA except that the braking force curve for special anchor B is used.   
 AB ||   || same definition as for AA except that the braking force curve for special anchor B is used. 
2.7. The acceptable percentage is the
average of six values of r calculated in accordance with point 2.6.
Annex I to the regulations on the
inspection and authorisation of special anchors
Example of an anchor test method with a single-file two-part pushed
convoy
 Pusher || 2nd lighter ||   ||   || 1st lighter ||   
 Anchor || Crane || Hawser || Tow line || Tensile force dynamometer || anchorage 
 500 kg || 750 kg || 12 mm Æ || 24 mm Æ || 20 t || sand / gravel 
 Towing speed: 0 ® 5 km/h       Tow line inclination angle £ 1:10 
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 8
Strength of watertight windows
(Article 15.02(16) of Annex II)
1. General
According to Article 15.02(16) of Annex II,
watertight windows may be situated below the margin line if they are
watertight, cannot be opened, possess sufficient strength and conform to
Article 15.06(14).
2. Construction of watertight windows
The requirements of Article 15.02(16) of
Annex II are deemed to be fulfilled if the construction of watertight windows
complies with the following provisions.
2.1.        Only pre-stressed glass
complying with ISO 614, published 04/94, shall be used.
2.2.        Round windows shall comply
with ISO 1751, published 04/94, Series B: medium heavy-duty windows Type: non-opening
window.
2.3.        Angular windows shall
comply with ISO 3903, published 04/94, Series E: heavy-duty windows Type:
non-opening window
2.4.        ISO standard windows may be
replaced by windows whose construction is at least equivalent to the
requirements of points 2.1 to 2.3.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 9
Requirements for automatic
pressurised water sprinklers
(Article 10.03a(1) of Annex II)
Suitable automatic pressurised water
sprinklers as in Article 10.03a(1) shall meet the following requirements:
1.           The automatic pressurised water
sprinkler shall be ready for service at all times when there are persons on
board. No additional action by crew members shall be required to trigger
operation.
2.           The system shall be permanently
maintained at the necessary pressure. The pipes shall be filled with water up
to the spray nozzles at all times. The system shall have a continuously working
water supply. It shall not be possible for impurities harmful to operation to
enter the system. Appropriate display instruments and test systems (e.g.
pressure gauges, pressure-tank water level indicators, pump test piping) shall
be installed for monitoring and checking the system.
3.           The pump for the water supply to
the spray nozzles shall be activated automatically by a pressure drop in the
system. The pump shall be dimensioned so that it can continuously provide a
sufficient water supply at the necessary pressure if all the spray nozzles
necessary for covering the area of the largest room to be protected are
activated simultaneously. The pump shall supply the automatic pressurised water
sprinkler exclusively. In the event of pump failure, it shall be possible to
provide the spray nozzles with a sufficient water supply from another on-board
pump.
4.           The system shall be divided into
sections, each with no more than 50 spray nozzles.
5.           The number and the layout of
spray nozzles shall ensure effective distribution of water in the rooms to be
protected.
6.           Spray nozzles shall be triggered
at a temperature between 68 °C and 79 °C.
7.           The installation of components of
automatic pressurised water sprinklers within the rooms to be protected shall
be limited to the necessary minimum. No such system components shall be
installed in main engine rooms.
8.           Visual and acoustic indicators
shall be provided in one or more suitable locations, at least one of which must
be permanently manned, displaying activation of automatic pressurised water
sprinklers for each section.
9.           The energy supply of the
installation of automatic pressurised water sprinklers shall be provided by two
independent energy sources that shall not be installed in the same location.
Each energy source shall be capable of supplying the entire system unassisted.
10.         An installation plan of the
automatic pressurised water sprinkler shall be presented to the inspection body
for examination before installation of the system. The plan shall indicate the
types and performance data of the machines and equipment used. An installation
tested and certified by an approved classification society which complies at
least with the above prescriptions can be authorised without further testing.
11.         The presence of an automatic
pressurised water sprinkler shall be entered in the Union inland navigation
certificate under item 43.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 10
(Left void)
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 11
Completion of the Union inland
navigation certificate
1. GENERAL
1.1. Forms
For completion of the Union inland
navigation certificate only forms authorised by the competent authority shall
be used. Forms shall be filled in on one side only.
When issuing a new Union inland navigation
certificate, all pages 1 to 13 shall be included, even if some pages have no
entries.
1.2. Method of entry
Entries on the Union inland navigation
certificate shall be typewritten or computer-printed. Hand written entries may
only be made in exceptional cases. The entries shall be indelible. Font colours
shall be black or blue only. Deletions shall be made in red.
2. ENTRIES
2.1. Deletion of alternatives
Where entries are marked with(*) those
which are not appropriate shall be deleted.
2.2. Items without entry
If, for any of the items 1 to 48, no entry
is either necessary or possible, a line shall be drawn across the entire field.
2.3. Final page of the Union inland navigation certificate
If no additional pages are required after
page 13 (see point 3.2.3), the words ‘continued on page’[61] at the bottom of page 13 shall
be deleted.
2.4. Amendments
2.4.1. First handwritten amendment on
a page
A page can be amended once only, however,
several amendments may be made at that time. A red line shall be drawn through
any details to be amended. A previously deleted alternative (see point 2.1) or
an item previously without entry (see point 2.3) shall be underlined in red.
The new details shall not be entered in the amended field, but on the same page
under the heading ‘Amendments’, the line ‘This page has been replaced’ shall be
deleted.
2.4.2. Further handwritten amendments
on a page
For further amendments the page shall be
replaced and the necessary amendments as well as any earlier amendments shall
be entered directly under the appropriate items. Under the heading ‘Amendments’
the line ‘amendments to item(s)’ shall be deleted.
The old page shall be retained by the
inspection body which originally issued the Union inland navigation certificate.
2.4.3. Amendments by electronic data
processing
In case of amendments by electronic data
processing, the page shall be replaced and the necessary amendments as well as
any earlier amendments shall be entered directly under the appropriate items.
Under the heading ‘Amendments’ the line ‘amendments to item(s)’ shall be
deleted.
The old page shall be retained by the
inspection body which originally issued the Union inland navigation certificate.
2.5. Corrections by pasting over
Pasting over of entries or pasting in
further details added to an item is not allowed.
3. REPLACING AND ADDING PAGES
3.1. Replacing pages
Page 1 of the Union inland navigation
certificate shall never be replaced. For replacing other pages the procedures
outlined in point 2.4.2 or point 2.4.3 shall be applied.
3.2. Adding pages
If there is insufficient space for further
entries on pages 10, 12 or 13 of the Union inland navigation certificate,
additional pages may be attached.
3.2.1. Extension/Confirmation of
validity
If further extension is necessary when the
certificate has already been extended six times, the words ‘Continued on page
10a’ shall be added at the bottom of page 10, and a further page 10 shall be
marked as page 10a and inserted after page 10. The respective entry is then
made under item 49 at the top of page 10a. At the bottom of page 10a the entry
‘Continued on page 11’ shall be made.
3.2.2. Extension of the liquefied gas
installation certificate
A similar procedure to point 3.2.1 shall be
applied, with page 12a inserted after page 12.
3.2.3. Annex to the Union inland
navigation certificate
At the bottom of page 13 the words ‘End of
the Union inland navigation certificate’ shall be deleted in red, the deleted
words ‘Continued on page[62]’
shall be underlined in red and behind that the page number 13a shall be
entered. This amendment shall carry an official stamp. A further page 13 shall
be marked as page 13a and inserted after page 13. The provisions of points 2.2
and 2.3 apply to page 13a mutatis mutandis.
The same procedure shall be applied for any
further annexes (pages 13b, 13c, etc.).
4. EXPLANATIONS OF INDIVIDUAL ITEMS
Self-explanatory items are not mentioned
below.
              2. If applicable, insert terms
as per Article 1.01. Other vessel types shall be entered with their commonly
accepted designation.
10.     In respect of vessels allowed to
navigate on the Rhine, i.e.
a)      those which comply fully with Annex
II including the transitional provisions for Chapter 24, and
b)      those which make no use of the
transitional provisions of Chapter 24a or the reductions provided for in Annex
IV,
the following is to be added to the indent '-
on EU waterways in zone(s)':
a)      Rhine or 
b)      zone R.
              15. This section shall only be
completed for craft for which at least one of the properties 1.1 or 1.2 or 3 in
item 14 is not deleted, otherwise the entire table shall be deleted.
              15.1. In the column ‘formation
figure’ of the table the number(s) of the formations depicted shall be entered.
Lines without entry shall be struck through.
              Further formations may be drawn
under ‘Other formations’ and shall be designated 18, 19, 20, etc.
              If it is not apparent from the
property ‘fit to push’ in the previous ship certificate which formations are
authorised, the entry from the previous ship certificate may be transferred to
item 52. ‘See item 52’ shall be entered in line 1 of the table ‘Authorised
formations’.
              15.2. Couplings
              Only the details of the coupling
between the pushing craft and the pushed section of the convoy shall be
entered.
              17-20. Details according to the
tonnage certificate items 17-19 to two decimal places and item 20 without
decimal places. Length overall and breadth overall give the maximum dimensions
of the craft, including all projecting fixed parts. Length L and Breadth B give
the maximum hull dimensions (see also Article 1.01 Definitions).
              21. Dead weight tonnage for
cargo vessels in t according to the tonnage certificate for the maximum draught
according to item 19.
              Displacement for all other craft
in m3. If no tonnage certificate is available, calculate the
displacement from the product of the block coefficient and length LWL,
breadth BWL and mean draught at maximum immersion.
              23. Number of passenger berths
available (including folding beds and similar).
              24. Only watertight transverse
bulkheads extending from one side of the vessel to the other shall be taken
into consideration.
              26. If applicable, the following
terms shall be used:
–              
manually operated hatch covers,
–              
manually operated rolling hatch covers,
–              
manually operated sliding hatch covers,
–              
mechanically operated sliding hatch covers,
–              
mechanically operated hatch covers.
              Other types of hatch covers
shall be entered with their commonly accepted designation.
              Any holds which do not have a
hatch cover shall be listed, e.g. under item 52.
              28. Figure without decimal
place.
              30, 31 and 33. Every winch
housing shall be counted as one winch, regardless of the number of anchors or
towing cables connected to it.
              34. Under ‘Other installations’
systems which do not use rudder blades (e.g. rudder-propeller,
cycloidal-propeller, bow-thruster systems) shall be entered.
              Enter also any electrical
auxiliary engines for manual actuation.
              With bow-thruster systems,
‘remote-controlled’ refers only to remote controls operated from the steering
position in the wheelhouse.
              35. Only the theoretical values
according to Article 8.08(2) and (3), Article 15.01(1)(c), and Article 15.08(5)
shall be entered, and then only for craft whose keels were laid down after 31
December 1984.
              36. A sketch may be necessary
for clarification.
              37. Only the theoretical values
without reduction according to Article 10.01(1)-(4) shall be entered.
              38. Only the minimum lengths
according to Article 10.01(10) and the minimum tensile strength according to
Article 10.01(11) shall be entered.
              39 and 40. Only the minimum
lengths and minimum tensile strength values recalculated according to Article
10.02(2) shall be entered.
              42. The inspection body may add
items to the list of necessary equipment. These shall be justified as essential
to ship safety for the respective vessel type or its operational area.
Additions shall be entered under item 52.
              Left column, row 3 and 4: for
passenger vessels the first mentioned item shall be crossed out and under the
second mentioned item the length of the gangway as established by the
inspection body shall be entered. For all other vessels the second mentioned
item shall be crossed out completely respectively, if the inspection body has
allowed a shorter length than what is foreseen by Article 10.02(2)(d), only the
first half shall be crossed out and the length of the gangway entered.
              Left column, row 6: here the
number of the prescribed first aid kits according to Article 10.02(2)(f) and
Article 15.08(9) shall be entered.
              Left column, row 10: here the
number of the prescribed fire proof receptacles according to Article
10.02(1)(d) to (f) shall be entered.
              43. Portable fire extinguishers
required by other safety regulations, e.g. European Agreement concerning the
International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland Waterways (ADN), are not
included here.
              44. Row 3: in Union inland
navigation certificates to be extended before 1.1.2010, or 1.1.2025 where
Chapter 24a is applicable, the item ‘according to EN 395:1998 or 396:1998’
shall be crossed if no life vests according to this standard are onboard.
              Row 4: when Union inland
navigation certificates are extended after 1.1.2015, or 1.1.2030 where Chapter
24a is applicable, or if a new dinghy is taken onboard, the item ‘with a set of
oars, one mooring line and a baler’ shall be crossed. The item ‘according to EN
1914:1997’ shall be crossed if no dinghy according to this standard is onboard.
              46. As a general rule,
continuous operation shall not be inserted if there is a lack of berths or if
there are excessive noise levels.
              50. The expert shall sign only
if he has completed page 11 himself.
              52. Here any additional
restrictions, exemptions and explanations, or similar, applying to entries
under individual items can be given.
5. TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS
5.1. Existing Union inland navigation certificates
With the exception of Article 2.09(2), no
further extensions to existing Union inland navigation certificates shall be
granted.
5.2. Replacement after a periodical inspection
After a periodical inspection of a vessel
which does not yet have a Union inland navigation certificate in line with the
model in Annex V Part 1, a Union inland navigation certificate shall be issued.
Article 2.09(4) and Article 2.17 shall apply.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 12
Fuel tanks on floating equipment
(Article 8.05(1) and Article
17.02(1)(d) of Annex II)
According to Article 8.05(1), fuel tanks
shall form an integral part of the hull or shall be firmly attached to it.
Fuel tanks for engines of working gear on
floating equipment do not have to form an integral part of the hull or be
firmly attached to it. Mobile tanks may be used, provided that they comply with
the following conditions:
(2)                   
The capacity of these tanks shall not exceed
1000 litres.
(3)                   
It shall be possible to attach the tanks
sufficiently firmly and to earth them.
(4)                   
The tanks shall be made from steel of a
sufficient wall thickness and shall be installed in a drip tray. The latter
shall be designed to prevent leaking fuel contaminating the waterways. The drip
tray may be dispensed with if double-skin tanks with a leak protection or
leakage warning system are used and which are filled only via an automatic
delivery valve. The provisions of point 3 shall be deemed to be fulfilled if
the construction of a tank has been certified and approved according to the
regulations of a Member State.
An appropriate entry shall be made in the Union
inland navigation certificate.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 13
Minimum hull thickness of barges
(Article 3.02(1) of Annex II)
During periodical inspections in accordance
with Article 2.09 of barges which are exclusively towed, the inspection body
may allow minor deviations from Article 3.02(1)(b) with respect to the minimum
thickness of the shell plating of the hull. The deviation shall not be more
than 10 %, and the minimum hull thickness shall not be less than 3 mm.
The deviations shall be entered in the Union
inland navigation certificate.
Under item 14 of the Union inland
navigation certificate, only property No 6.2 ‘Towed as a craft with no motive
power of its own’ shall apply.
Properties No 1 to 5.3 and 6.1 shall be
deleted.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 14
(Left void)
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 15
Steerageway under vessel’s own
power
(Article 10.03b(2)(a), Article
15.07(1), Article 22a.05(1)(a) of Annex II)
1. Minimum requirements for vessel’s steerageway
Steerageway under a vessel’s own power in
accordance with Articles 10.03b(2)(a), 15.07(1) and 22a.05(1)(a) is deemed to
be sufficient if — when using the bow thruster — the vessel or the formation
propelled by the vessel attains a speed of 6,5 km/h in relation to the water
and a rate-of-turn of 20°/min can be induced and maintained while under way at
a speed of 6,5 km/h in relation to the water.
2. Navigation tests
On verifying the minimum requirements
Articles 5.03 and 5.04 shall be complied with.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 16
(Left void)
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 17
Appropriate fire alarm system
(Article 10.03b(3), Article
15.11(17), Article 22b.11(1) of Annex II)
Fire alarm systems are considered to be
appropriate if they meet the following conditions.
0. COMPONENTS
0.1. Fire alarm systems consist of:
(a) fire detection system,
(b) fire indicator system,
(c) control panel,
as well as the external power supply.
0.2. The fire detection system may be
divided into one or more fire zones.
0.3. The fire indicator system may have one
or more indicator devices.
0.4. The control panel is the central
control unit of the fire alarm system. It also includes parts of the fire
indicator system (i.e. an indicator device).
0.5. A fire detection zone may have one or
more fire detectors.
0.6. Fire detectors may be:
(a)     heat detectors;
(b)     smoke detectors;
(c)     ion detectors;
(d)     flame detectors;
(e)     combination detectors (fire detectors
combining two or more of the detectors listed in (a) to (d)).
Fire detectors which respond to other
factors indicating the onset of a fire may be approved by the inspection body
provided that they are no less sensitive than the detectors referred to under
(a) to (e).
0.7. Fire detectors may be installed:
(a) with or
(b) without
individual identification.
1. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1.1. General
1.1.1. Compulsory fire alarm systems shall
be operational at all times.
1.1.2. Fire detectors required in
accordance with point 2.2 shall be automatic. Additional manually operated fire
detectors may be installed.
1.1.3. The system and its components shall
be able to withstand voltage fluctuations and surges, changes in ambient
temperature, vibrations, humidity, shocks, impacts and corrosion such as
commonly occur on vessels.
1.2. Energy supply
1.2.1. Energy sources and electric circuits
necessary for the operation of the fire alarm system shall be self monitoring.
Any fault occurring shall activate a visual and acoustic alarm signal on the
control panel which can be distinguished from a fire alarm signal.
1.2.2. There shall be at least two power
sources for the electrical part of the fire alarm system, one of which shall be
an emergency power system (i.e. emergency power source and emergency
switchboard). There shall be two separate power-feeds solely for this purpose.
These shall lead to an automatic switch in or near the control panel of the
fire alarm system. On day-trip vessels up to 25 m LWL and on motor
vessels a separate emergency power supply is sufficient.
1.3. Fire detection system
1.3.1. Fire detectors shall be grouped in
fire detection zones
1.3.2. Fire detection systems shall not be
used for any other purpose. By way of derogation the closing of the doors in
accordance with Article 15.11(8) and similar functions may be activated and
indicated on the control panel.
1.3.3. Fire detection systems shall be
designed in such a way that the first indicated fire alarm does not prevent fire
alarms set off by other detectors.
1.4 Fire detection zones
1.4.1. Where the fire detectors cannot be
remotely identified individually, a fire detection zone shall not monitor more
than one deck. This does not apply to a fire detection zone which monitors an
encapsulated stairwell.
In order to avoid delays in detecting the
origin of the fire, the number of enclosed spaces included in each fire
detection zone shall be limited. There shall not be more than fifty enclosed
spaces in one fire detection zone.
Where the fire detection system has remote
identification of individual fire detectors, the fire detection zones may
monitor several decks and any number of enclosed spaces.
1.4.2. On passenger vessels which do not
have a fire detection system with remote identification of individual fire
detectors, a fire detection zone shall not comprise more than the area
constituted in accordance with Article 15.11(10). The activation of a fire
detector in an individual cabin in this fire detection zone shall set off a visual
and acoustic signal in the passageway outside that cabin.
1.4.3. Galleys, engine rooms and boiler
rooms shall constitute separate fire detection zones.
1.5. Fire detectors
1.5.1. Only heat, smoke or ion detectors
shall be used as fire detectors. Other types may only be used as additional
detectors.
1.5.2. Fire detectors shall be
type-approved.
1.5.3. All automatic fire detectors shall
be designed in such a way that they can be tested to ensure that they are
working properly and brought back into service without having to replace any
components.
1.5.4. Smoke detectors shall be set so that
they respond to a reduction in visibility per metre caused by smoke of more
than 2 % to 12,5 %. Smoke detectors fitted in galleys, engine rooms and boiler
rooms shall respond within sensitivity limits meeting the requirements of the
inspection body, whereby under-sensitivity or over-sensitivity of the detectors
shall be avoided.
1.5.5. Heat detectors shall be set so that
with temperature increase rates of less than 1 °C/min they respond at
temperatures of between 54 °C and 78 °C.
With higher rates of temperature increase,
the heat detector shall respond within temperature limits where under- or
over-sensitivity of the heat detector is avoided.
1.5.6. With the agreement of the inspection
body, the permissible operating temperature of heat detectors may be increased
to 30 °C above the maximum temperature in the upper part of engine and boiler
rooms.
1.5.7. The sensitivity of flame detectors
shall be sufficient to detect flames against an illuminated background. Flame
detectors shall also be equipped with a system for identifying false alarms.
1.6. Fire detection system and control panel
1.6.1. Activation of a fire detector shall
set off a visual and acoustic fire alarm signal at the control panel and the
indicator devices.
1.6.2. The control panel and the indicator
devices shall be at a location which is permanently manned by crew or shipboard
personnel. One indicator shall be at the steering position.
1.6.3. The indicator devices shall indicate
at least the fire detection zone in which a fire detector has been activated.
1.6.4. On or near each indicator device
there shall be clear information on the areas monitored and the location of the
fire detection zones.
2. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1. Fire detectors shall be installed in
such a manner as to ensure the best possible operation of the system. Locations
in the vicinity of deck girders and ventilation shafts or other locations where
air currents could adversely affect system operation and locations where
impacts or mechanical damage are likely shall be avoided.
2.2. In general, fire detectors located on
the ceiling shall be at least 0,5 metres away from bulkheads. The maximum
distance between fire detectors and bulkheads shall conform to the following
table:
 Type of fire detector || Maximum floor surface area per fire detector || Maximum distance between fire detectors || Maximum distance of fire detectors from bulkheads 
 Heat || 37 m2 || 9 m || 4,5 m 
 Smoke || 74 m2 || 11 m || 5,5 m 
The inspection body may stipulate or
approve other distances on the basis of tests which prove the characteristics
of the detectors.
2.3. The routing of electric cables for the
fire alarm system through engine rooms and boiler rooms or other high fire risk
areas is not permitted unless this is necessary for fire detection in those
areas or connection to the corresponding power supply.
3.           ACCEPTANCE TEST
3.1         Fire alarm systems must be
checked by an expert: 
(a)     before being put into service for the
first time,
(b)     before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair,
(c)     regularly, at least every two years.
In the case of engine rooms and boiler
rooms these checks shall be made under various machine operation conditions and
under changing ventilation conditions. Inspections as referred to in subsection
(c) above may also be carried out by a competent person from a competent firm
specialising in fire extinguishing systems.
3.2       An inspection certificate shall
be issued, signed by the expert or competent person and showing the date of the
inspection.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 18
Proof of buoyancy, trim and
stability of the separated parts of a vessel
(Article22a.05(2), in conjunction
with Article 22.02 and Article 22.03 of Annex II)
1. When proving the buoyancy, trim and
stability of the parts of a vessel which have been separated in accordance with
Article 22a.05(2)(a), it shall be assumed that both parts were partly or fully
unloaded beforehand or That containers extending beyond the hatch coaming were
suitably protected from slipping.
2. For each of the two parts, the following
requirements shall therefore be met when calculating stability in accordance
with Article 22.03 (Limit conditions and method of calculation for confirmation
of stability for the transport of secured containers):
–                        
metacentric height MG shall be not less than
0,50 m,
–                        
there shall be a residual safety clearance of
100 mm,
–                        
the speed to be taken into account shall be 7
km/h,
–                        
the wind pressure shall be taken to be 0,01 t/m2.
3. The heeling angle (≤ 5°) does not
have to be complied with for the parts of the vessel separated in accordance
with Article 22a.05(2) since this angle — derived from the coefficient of
friction — was specified for non-secured containers.
The heeling lever resulting from the free
surfaces of liquids shall be taken into account in accordance with the formula
given in Article 22.02(1)(e).
4.         The requirements set out in points
2 and 3 shall also be deemed to have been met if, for each of the two parts,
the stability requirements set out in Section 9.1.0.95.2 of the European
Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland
Waterways (ADN) are met.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 19
(Left void)
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 20
Equipment for vessels to be
operated according to standards S1 and S2
(Article 23.09 of Annex II)
1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
According to Article 23.09(1) of Annex II,
vessels which are intended to be operated according to standards S1 and S2
shall comply with the provisions of this Article. According to Article 23.09(1)
the inspection body shall confirm in the Union inland navigation certificate
that the vessel complies with these provisions.
These provisions are supplementary
equipment requirements which apply in addition to the requirements with which a
vessel has to comply for the Union inland navigation certificate to be issued.
Provisions of Article 23.09 which might be interpreted in different ways will
be clarified in this Administrative instruction. Accordingly, the provisions of
Article 23.09(1) of Annex II shall be interpreted as follows:
2. ARTICLE 23.09
2.1. (1.1)(a) — Arrangement of the propulsion system
If a vessel is fitted with a directly
reversible main engine, the compressed air system which is required to reverse
the direction of thrust shall:
(a)     be kept permanently pressurised by an
automatically adjusting compressor; or
(b)     when an alarm is triggered in the
wheelhouse be pressurised by means of an auxiliary engine which can be started
from the steering position. If the auxiliary engine has its own fuel tank,
there shall — in accordance with Article 8.05(13) — be a warning device in the
wheelhouse to indicate if the level of filling is not sufficient to ensure
further safe operation.
2.2. (1.1)(b) — Bilge levels in the main engine room
If a bow steering system is necessary to
comply with the manoeuvring requirements of Chapter 5, the room containing the
bow steering system shall be deemed to be a main engine room.
2.3. (1.1)(c) — Automatic fuel supply
2.3.1. If the propulsion system has a
daily-supply tank,
(a)     its contents shall be sufficient to
ensure an operation period of the propulsion system of 24 hours, assuming a
consumption of 0,25 litres per kW per hour;
(b)     the fuel supply pump for refilling the
daily-supply tank shall be operated continuously; or
(c)     the fuel supply pump shall be fitted
with:
–              
a switch that automatically switches on the fuel
supply pump when the daily-supply tank reaches a certain low level, and
–              
a switch that automatically switches off the
fuel supply pump when the daily-supply tank is full.
2.3.2. The daily-supply tank shall have a
level alarm device which meets the requirements of Article 8.05(13).
2.4. (1.1)(d) — No particular force required for the steering system
Hydraulically operated steering systems
fulfil this requirement. Manually operated steering systems shall not require a
force of more than 160 N in order to be operated.
2.5. (1.1)(e) — Visual and acoustic signals required under way
Visual signs do not include cylinders, balls,
cones or double cones required under navigational authority regulations of the
Member States.
2.6. (1.1)(f) — Direct communication and communication with the
engine room
2.6.1. Direct communication shall be deemed
to be ensured if:
(a)     direct visual contact is possible
between the wheelhouse and the control positions for the winches and bollards
on the fore section or the stern of the vessel and in addition the distance
from the wheelhouse to these control positions is not more than 35 m; and
(b)     the accommodation is directly
accessible from the wheelhouse.
2.6.2. Communication with the engine room
shall be deemed to be ensured if the signal referred to in Article 7.09(3)
second sentence, can be operated independently from the switch referred to in
Article 7.09(2).
2.7. (1.1)(i) — Cranks and similar rotating means of operation
These include:
(a)     manually operated anchor winches (the
maximum force required shall be deemed to be that when the anchors are hanging
freely);
(b)     cranks for lifting hatches;
(c)     cranks on mast and funnel winches.
These do not include:
(a)     warping and coupling winches;
(b)     cranks on cranes, unless intended for
ship’s boats.
2.8. (1.1)(m) — Ergonomic arrangement
The provisions are deemed to be fulfilled
if:
(a)     the wheelhouse is arranged in
accordance with European Standard EN 1864:2008; or
(b)     the wheelhouse is designed for radar
navigation by one person; or
(c)     the wheelhouse meets the following
requirements:
(aa) the control units and monitoring
instruments are in the forward field of vision and within an arc of not more
than 180° (90° to starboard and 90° to port), including the floor and ceiling.
They shall be clearly legible and visible from the normal position of the
helmsman;
(bb) the main control units such as the
steering wheel or steering lever, the engine controls, the radio controls, and
the controls for the acoustic signals and the warning and manoeuvring signals
required under national or international navigational authority regulations, as
appropriate, shall be arranged in such a way that the distance between the
controls on the starboard side and those on the port side is not more than 3 m.
The helmsman shall be able to operate the engines without letting go of the
controls for the steering system and while still being able to operate the
other controls such as the radio system, the controls for the acoustic signals
and the warning and manoeuvring signals required under national or
international navigational authority regulations, as appropriate;
(cc) the warning and manoeuvring signals
required under national or international navigational authority regulations, as
appropriate, are operated electrically, pneumatically, hydraulically or
mechanically. By way of derogation, it may be operated by means of a tension
wire only if safe operation from the steering position is possible in this way.
3. ARTICLE 23.09
3.1. (1.2)(a) — Motor vessel operating separately
Motor vessels which according to the Union
inland navigation certificate are also suitable for pushing but which:
(a)     do not have hydraulically or
electrically operated coupling winches; or
(b)     whose hydraulically or electrically
operated coupling winches do not meet the requirements of point 3.3 of this
Administrative instruction,
shall be given the standard S2 as motor vessel
operating separately.
The entry ‘Standard S2 does not apply to
the motor vessel when pushing’ shall be entered under item 47 of the Union
inland navigation certificate.
3.2. (1.2)(c) — Pushed convoys
Motor vessels which according to their Union
inland navigation certificate are suitable for pushing and are fitted with
hydraulically or electrically operated coupling winches that fulfil the
requirements of point 3.3 of this Administrative instruction but which do not
have their own bow thruster shall be given the standard S2 as motor vessel
pushing a convoy. The entry ‘Standard S2 does not apply to the motor vessel
when operating separately’ shall be entered under item 47 of the Union inland
navigation certificate.
3.3. (1.2)(c), first sentence, and (1.2)(d), first sentence —
Special winches or equivalent devices for tensioning the cables (coupling
devices)
The coupling devices required are the
minimum equipment specified in accordance with Article 16.01(2) which,
according to points 2.1 and 2.2 of Administrative instruction No 3
(longitudinal connections), serve to take up the coupling forces and which meet
the following requirements:
(a)     the device shall provide the
tensioning force required for the coupling only by mechanical means;
(b)     the controls for the device shall be
located on the device itself. By way of derogation, remote control is permitted
provided that:
–              
the person operating the device has an
unobstructed direct view of the device from the control position,
–              
there is a device at the control position to
prevent unintentional operation,
–              
the device has an emergency stop;
              (c) the device shall have a
braking device which acts immediately if the controls are released or the
motive force fails;
              (d) it shall be possible for the
coupling cable to be released manually if the motive force fails.
3.4. (1.2)(c), second sentence, and (1.2)(d), second sentence —
Operating the bow thruster
The control for operating the bow thruster
shall be permanently installed in the wheelhouse. The requirements of Article
7.04(8) shall be complied with. The electric cabling to operate the bow
thruster shall be permanently installed up to the fore section of the pushing
motor vessel or the pusher.
3.5. (1.2)(e) — Equivalent manoeuvrability
Equivalent manoeuvrability is ensured by a
propulsion system consisting of:
(a)     a multi-propeller drive and at least
two independent propulsion systems with similar power output;
(b)     at least one cycloidal propeller;
(c)     at least one rudder propeller; or
(d)     at least one 360° water-jet propulsion
system.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 21
Requirements for low-location
lighting
(Article 15.06(7); Article
22b.10(d) of Annex II)
1. General
1.1. According to the abovementioned
provisions, passenger vessels and high-speed vessels shall have suitable
systems to clearly identify the escape routes and emergency exits when the
normal emergency lighting is less effective due to smoke. Such systems shall
take the form of low-location lighting (LLL). This Administrative instruction
covers the approval, installation and maintenance of such systems.
1.2. In addition to the emergency lighting
required by Article 15.10(3) the escape routes, including stairways, exits and
emergency exits, shall be marked by low-location lighting (LLL) throughout the
whole of the escape route, particularly at corners and intersections.
1.3. The LLL system shall function for at
least 30 minutes after its activation.
1.4. LLL products shall be neither
radioactive nor toxic.
1.5. Instructions on the LLL system shall
be displayed with the safety plan in accordance with Article 15.13(2) and in
every cabin.
2. Definitions
2.1. Low-location lighting (LLL) —
Electrically powered lighting or photoluminescent indicators placed along the
escape routes so as to ensure that all such routes can be easily identified.
2.2. Photoluminescent (PL) system — An LLL
system which uses PL material. Photoluminescent material contains a chemical
(example: zinc sulphide) that has the quality of storing energy when
illuminated by visible light. The PL material emits light which becomes visible
when the ambient light source is less effective. Without the light source to
re-energise it, the PL material gives off the stored energy for a period of
time with diminishing luminance.
2.3. Electrically powered (EP) system — An
LLL system which requires electrical power for its operation, such as systems
using incandescent bulbs, light-emitting diodes, electroluminescent strips or
lamps, electrofluorescent lamps, etc.
3. Passageways and stairways
3.1. In all passageways, the LLL shall be
continuous, except where interrupted by corridors and cabin doors, in order to
provide a visible delineation along the escape route. LLL systems in compliance
with an international standard having a visible delineation without being continuous
shall also be acceptable. The LLL shall be installed at least on one side of
the corridor, either on the wall no more than 0,3 m from the floor, or on the
floor no more than 0,15 m from the wall. In corridors more than two metres
wide, LLL shall be installed on both sides.
3.2. In dead-end corridors, the LLL shall
have arrows placed at intervals of no more than 1 m, or equivalent direction
indicators, pointing in the direction of the escape route.
3.3. In all stairways, LLL shall be
installed on at least one side at no more than 0,3 m above the steps, which
will make the location of each step readily identifiable to any person standing
above and below that step. Low-location lighting shall be installed on both
sides if the width of the stairway is two metres or more. The top and bottom of
each set of stairs shall be identified to show that there are no further steps.
4. Doors
4.1. Low-location lighting shall lead to
the exit door handle. To prevent confusion, no other doors shall be similarly
marked.
4.2. Where sliding doors are fitted in
partitions in accordance with Article 15.11(2) and in bulkheads in accordance
with Article 15.02(5), the direction of opening shall be indicated.
5. Signs and markings
5.1. All escape route signs shall be of
photoluminescent material or marked by electric lighting. The dimensions of
such signs and markings shall be commensurate with the rest of the LLL system.
5.2. Low-location lighting exit signs shall
be provided at all exits. The signs shall be located within the prescribed area
on the side of the exit doors where the handle is located.
5.3. All signs shall contrast in colour to
the background (wall or floor) on which they are installed.
5.4. Standardised symbols (for example
those described in IMO Decision A.760(18)) shall be used for the LLL.
6. Photoluminescent systems
6.1. PL strips shall be no less than 0,075
m wide. Narrower strips may however be used if their luminance is increased
proportionally to compensate for their width.
6.2. Photoluminescent materials shall
provide at least 15 mcd/m2 measured 10 minutes after the removal of
all external illuminating sources. The system shall then continue to provide
luminance values greater than 2 mcd/m2 for 20 minutes.
6.3. Any PL system materials shall be
provided with not less than the minimum level of ambient light necessary to
charge the PL material to meet the above luminance requirements.
7. Electrically powered systems
7.1. Electrically powered systems shall be
connected to the emergency switchboard required by Article 15.10(4) so as to be
powered by the main source of electrical power under normal circumstances and
also by the emergency source of electrical power when the latter is in
operation. For the purpose of dimensioning the capacity of the emergency source
of electrical power the EP systems shall be included in the list of emergency
consumers.
7.2. Electrically powered systems shall
either switch on automatically or be capable of being activated by means of a
single operation at the steering position.
7.3. Where electrically powered systems are
installed, the following standards of luminance shall be applied:
(a)         
the active parts of electrically powered systems
shall have a minimum luminance of 10 cd/m2;
(b)         
the point sources of miniature incandescent
lamps shall provide not less than 150 mcd mean spherical intensity with a
spacing of not more than 0,1 m between lamps;
(c)         
the point sources of light-emitting-diode
systems shall have a minimum peak intensity of 35 mcd. The angle of
half-intensity cone shall be appropriate to the likely track directions of
approach and viewing. Spacing between lamps shall be no more than 0,3 m; and
(d)         
for electroluminescent systems, these shall
function for 30 minutes from the instant when the main power supply to which it
was required to be connected by Section 7.1 fails.
7.4. All EP systems shall be arranged so
that the failure of any single light, lighting strip, or battery will not
result in the marking being ineffective.
7.5. Electrically powered systems shall
meet the requirements of Article 9.20 for vibration and heat testing. By way of
derogation from Article 9.20(2)(c) the heat test may be conducted at a
reference ambient temperature of 40 °C.
7.6. Electrically powered systems shall
meet the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in Article 9.21.
7.7. Electrically powered systems shall
provide a type of minimum protection of IP 55 in accordance with IEC
60529:1992.
8.           Acceptance test
8.1         The luminance of the LLL
must be checked by an expert 
a)      before being put into service for the
first time,
b)      before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair,
c)      regularly, at least every five years, 
Checks as referred to in subsection (c)
above may also be carried out by a competent person trained in safety guidance
systems.
8.2         An inspection certificate
shall be issued, signed by the expert or competent person and showing the date
of the inspection. 
8.3         If, after a single
measurement, the luminance does not meet the requirements set out in this
administrative instruction, measurements are to be taken at least ten
equidistant points. If over 30 % of the measurements do not meet the
requirements set out in this administrative instruction, the safety guidance
systems must be replaced. If 20 to 30 % of the measurements do not meet the
requirements set out in this administrative instruction, the safety guidance
systems are to be checked again within one year.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 22
Specific safety needs of persons
with reduced mobility
(Article 1.01(104), Article 18(1c)
of this Directive, Article 15.06(3) to (5), (9), (10), (13) and (17), Article
15.08(3), Article 15.10(3), Article 15.13(1) to (4) of Annex II)
1. Introduction
Persons with reduced mobility have safety
needs exceeding those of other passengers. These needs are taken into account
in the requirements of Chapter 15, which are explained as follows.
These requirements are intended to ensure
that persons with reduced mobility can stay and move safely on board vessels.
In addition, in an emergency such persons should have the same level of safety
as other passengers.
It is not necessary that all passenger
areas fulfil the specific safety requirements of persons with reduced mobility.
Therefore those requirements apply only to certain areas. However, the persons
in question must be given the opportunity of being informed of the areas
specially adapted for them in view of safety, so that they can organise their
stay on board accordingly. It is the responsibility of the ship-owner to make
the corresponding areas available, make them known and communicate them to
persons with reduced mobility.
The provisions concerning persons with
reduced mobility make reference to:
–                        
Directive 2003/24/EC of the European Parliament
and of the Council of 14 April 2003 amending Council Directive 98/18/EC on
safety rules and standards for passenger ships, and
–                        
the guide for the adaptation of inland waterway
passenger vessels to people with disabilities in accordance with Resolution No
25 of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
The definition of the term ‘persons with
reduced mobility’ used in Annex II is largely identical to that of Directive 2003/24/EC
and most of the technical requirements are based on the guide. In cases of
doubt, therefore, both can be referred to when taking decisions. In general,
the requirements of Directive 2003/24/EC and UN/ECE Resolution No. 25 entitled
“Guidelines for Passenger Vessels also suited for carrying Disabled Persons” go
beyond those of Annex II.
The requirements of Annex II do not concern
berths and similar installations. These are subject to national provisions.
2. Article 1.01(104) — Term ‘Persons with reduced mobility’
‘Persons with reduced mobility’ means
anyone who, as a result of physical impairments, cannot move or distinguish their
surroundings in the same way as other passengers. This definition includes
persons with impaired eyesight or hearing or persons accompanying children in
buggies or being carried. However, for the purposes of these provisions,
persons with reduced mobility do not include anyone with psychic impairments.
3. Article 18(1c) of this Directive — Areas provided for use by
persons with reduced mobility
Areas provided for use by persons with
reduced mobility range from, in the simplest case, the entrance area to the
places from which an evacuation will take place in an emergency. They shall
include:
–                        
a place where life-saving equipment is stowed or
issued in an emergency,
–                        
seats,
–                        
a suitably-adapted toilet (No 10 of these
guidelines), and
–                        
connecting corridors.
The number of seats corresponds at least
approximately to the number of persons with reduced mobility that — over a
lengthy period — are most frequently onboard simultaneously. The number should
be determined by the ship-owner on the basis of experience, as this is beyond
the knowledge of the competent authority.
On cabin vessels consideration shall also
be given to connecting corridors to passenger cabins used by persons with
reduced mobility. The number of such cabins is to be determined by the
ship-owner in the same way as the number of seats. With the exception of the
width of doors, no requirements are imposed for the special arrangement of
cabins. It is the responsibility of the owner to make any further necessary
arrangements.
4. Article 15.06(3)(g) — Exits of rooms
With regard to the requirements concerning
the width of connecting corridors, exits and openings in bulwarks or guard
rails intended for use by persons with reduced mobility or usually used for the
embarkation or disembarkation of persons with reduced mobility, consideration
shall be given to buggies and the fact that people may be dependent on various
types of walking aids or wheelchairs. In the case of exits or openings for
embarkation or disembarkation account shall also be taken of the additional
space needed for any assisting staff.
5. Article 15.06(4)(d) — Doors
The requirements regarding the arrangement
of the area surrounding doors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility
shall ensure that persons dependent for example on walking aids can open such
doors safely.
6. Article 15.06(5)(c) — Connecting corridors
See point 4 of this Administrative
instruction.
7. Article 15.06(9) — Stairways and elevators
The requirements for the arrangement of
stairways shall, in addition to possible reduced mobility, also take into
account eyesight impediments.
8. Article 15.06(10)(a) and (b) — Bulwarks and guard rails
The requirements for bulwarks and guard
rails of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall provide
for a greater height since such persons are more likely to lose their balance
or be unable to hold on by themselves.
See also point 4 of this Administrative
instruction.
9. Article 15.06(13) — Traffic areas
For various reasons, persons with reduced
mobility need to support themselves or hold on more frequently, so walls in
traffic areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall be
equipped with handrails at an appropriate height.
See also point 4 of this Administrative
instruction
10. Article 15.06(17) — Toilets
Persons with reduced mobility shall also be
able to stay and move safely in toilets, so at least one toilet shall be
adapted accordingly.
11. Article 15.08(3)(a and b) — Alarm system
Persons with reduced mobility are more
likely to encounter situations in which they are dependent on the help of
others. In rooms in which, as a general rule, they cannot be seen by crew
members, on-board personnel or passengers, the possibility of triggering an
alarm should therefore be provided for. This applies to toilets intended for
use by persons with reduced mobility.
Persons with reduced mobility include
persons with impaired eyesight or hearing. Consequently, at least in areas
intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, the passenger alarm system
shall provide suitable visual and audible alarms.
12. Article 15.10(3)(d) — Sufficient lighting
Persons with reduced mobility also include
persons with impaired eyesight. Sufficient lighting in areas intended for use
by persons with reduced mobility is therefore essential and shall meet higher
requirements than lighting for other passenger areas.
13. Article 15.13(1) — Safety rota
The special safety measures necessary for
persons with reduced mobility to be taken into consideration in the safety rota
shall take into account both the possibility of reduced mobility and impaired
hearing and eyesight. For such persons measures for normal operation shall be
taken into account in addition to measures in the event of emergencies.
14. Article 15.13(2) — Safety plan
The areas covered by point 3 of this
Administrative instruction shall be designated.
15. Article 15.13(3)(b) — Displaying the safety rota and the safety
plan
At least the copies of the safety rota and
the safety plan displayed in the areas intended for use by persons with reduced
mobility shall be such that they can, where possible, also be read by persons
with impaired eyesight. This can be achieved for example by appropriate use of
contrast and character size.
In addition, the plans shall be displayed
at a height so that wheelchair users can read them as well.
16. Article 15.13(4) — Code of conduct for passengers
Point 15 of this Administrative instruction
applies accordingly
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 23
Engine application covered by the appropriate type approval
(Article 8a.03(1) of Annex II)
1.Introduction
According to Article 8a.03(1),
type-approvals pursuant to Directive 97/68/EC and type-approvals, which
pursuant to Directive 97/68/EC are recognised as equivalent, are recognised,
provided that the engine application is covered by the appropriate
type-approval.
In addition, it is possible that engines on
board of inland waterway vessels have to serve more than one application.
Section 2 of this administrative
instruction explains when engine applications can be considered to be covered
by the appropriate type-approval. In Section 3 clarification is given with
respect to the question how to treat engines which in the course of on-board
operations need to be allocated to more than one engine application.
2.Appropriate type-approval
Engine applications are considered to be
covered by the appropriate type-approval if the engine has been allocated to
the type-approval on the basis of the following table. The engine categories,
limit value stages and test cycles are indicated in accordance with the
type-approval number designations.
 Engine application || Legal basis || Engine category || Limit value stage || Test 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || requirement || cycle ISO 8178 
 Propulsion engines with propeller characteristics || I || Directive 97/68/EC || V || IIIA || C[63] || E3 
 RVIR || — || I, II[64] || — || E3 
 Main propulsion engines with constant speed (including installations with diesel electric propulsion and variable pitch propeller) || II || Directive 97/68/EC || V || IIIA || C[65] || E2 
 RVIR || — || I, II[66] || — || E2 
 Auxiliary engines with || Constant speed || III || Directive 97/68/EC || D, E, F,G || II || B || D2 
 H, I, J, K || IIIA 
 V[67] 
 RVIR || — || I, II[68] || — || D2 
 Variable speed and variable load || IV || Directive 97/68/EC || D,E,F,G || II || A || C 1 
 H, I, J, K || IIIA 
 V[69] 
 L, M, N, P || IIIB 
 Q, R || IV 
 RVIR || — || I, II[70] || — || C1 
3.Special engine applications
3.1. Engines which in the course of
on-board operations need to be allocated to more than one engine application
shall be treated as follows:
(a)     auxiliary engines which drive units or
machinery which, pursuant to the table in Section 2, have to be allocated to
applications III or IV need to have obtained type-approval for each of the
respective applications provided for in this table;
(b)     main propulsion engines which drive
additional units or machinery need only to have obtained the type-approval
necessary for the relevant type of main propulsion pursuant to the table in
Section 2, in so far as the engine’s main application is craft propulsion. If
the time taken up by the sole auxiliary application exceeds 30 %, the engine
will need to have obtained, in addition to type-approval for the main
propulsion application, further type-approval in respect of the auxiliary
application.
3.2. Engines driving bow thrusters, whether
directly or by means of a generator at:
(a)     variable engine speed and load may be
allocated to applications I or IV pursuant to the table in Section 2;
(b)     constant engine speed may be allocated
to applications II or III pursuant to the table in Section 2.
3.3. The engines shall be installed with
the power output as authorised under the type-approval and indicated on the
engine by means of identification of type. If such engines have to drive units
or machinery of lower power consumption, power may be reduced only by measures
external to the engine, in order to achieve the power level needed for the
application.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 24
Suitable gas warning equipment
(Article 15.15(9) of Annex II)
1.           In accordance with
Sections 24.02(2) and 24.06(5) (in each case transitional provision to Section
15.01(2)(e)) liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) systems for household purposes on
board existing passenger vessels may only be operated until the first renewal
of the Union inland navigation certificate after 1 January 2045, on condition
that a gas warning equipment in accordance with Section 15.15(9) is available.
In accordance with Section 15.15(9), LPG systems for household purposes may in
the future also be installed on passenger vessels put into operation for the
first time and of which the length does not exceed 45 m, if such warning
equipment is installed at the same time.
2.           In accordance with
Sections 24.02(2) and 24.06(5) (in each case transitional provision to Section
15.15(9)) this gas warning equipment shall be installed on the first renewal of
the certificate in accordance with Section 14.15.
3.           The gas warning equipment
consists of sensors, equipment and pipes and shall be considered suitable if it
at least meets the following prescribed requirements:
3.1.        Requirements to be met by
the system (sensors, equipment, pipes):
3.1.1.     Gas warning shall be given
at the latest when reaching or exceeding one of the following values:
              (a) 10 % lower explosion limit
(LEL) of a propane-air mixture; and
              (b) 30 ppm CO (carbon monoxide).
3.1.2.     The time until activation of
the alarm for the whole system must not exceed 20 s.
3.1.3.     The limit values mentioned
in numbers 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 must not be adjustable.
3.1.4.     The test gas production
shall be so designed that any interruption or obstruction is detected. Any
falsification due to air admission or loss of test gas as a consequence of
leakage shall be avoided or detected and reported.
3.1.5.     The equipment shall be
designed for temperatures ranging from –10 to 40° C and an air humidity ranging
from 20 to 100 %.
3.1.6.     The gas warning equipment
must be self-monitoring. It shall be impossible to switch off the equipment
unauthorised.
3.1.7.     Gas warning equipment
supplied by the onboard power supply network shall be buffered against power
failure. Battery-powered appliances shall be provided with a warning device
indicating a reduction of the battery voltage.
3.2.        Requirements to be met by
the equipment:
3.2.1.     The equipment shall consist
of an evaluation and display unit.
3.2.2.     The alarm indicating that
the limit values in points 3.1.1(a) and (b) have been reached or exceeded shall
be given optically and acoustically, both in the room monitored and in the
wheelhouse or at any other permanently manned location. It shall be clearly
visible and audible even in operating conditions with the highest noise level.
It shall be clearly distinguishable from any other acoustic and optical signals
in the room to be protected. The acoustic alarm shall also be clearly audible
with closed connecting doors at the entrances and in neighbouring rooms. The
acoustic alarm may be silenced after activation, the optical alarm may only be
cancelled if the limit values fall below those given mentioned in point 3.1.1.
3.2.3.     It shall be possible to
separately detect and clearly assign the reports indicating that the limit
values in points 3.1.1(a) and (b) have been reached or exceeded.
3.2.4.     If the appliance has a
special status (start-up, failure, calibration, parameterisation, maintenance
etc.), this shall be indicated. The failure of the whole system or one of the
components shall be indicated by an alarm in analogy to point 3.2.2. The
acoustic alarm may be silenced after activation, the optical alarm may only be
cancelled if the failure is removed.
3.2.5.     If it is possible to issue
different reports (limit values, special status) it shall also be possible to
discern them separately and to assign them clearly. If necessary, a collective
signal shall be displayed indicating that it is not possible to issue all
reports. In this case, the reports shall be issued by order of priority,
beginning with the report with the highest safety relevance. The display of the
reports which cannot be issued shall be possible by pressing a button. The
order of priority shall be evident from the documentation of the appliance.
3.2.6.     The equipment shall be so
designed that unauthorised interference is not possible.
3.2.7.     In all cases where detection
and alarm equipment are used, the control alarm unit and indicating device
shall be operable from outside the spaces containing the gas storage and
consuming appliances.
3.3.        Requirements to be met by
the sensors/sampling devices:
3.3.1.     In every room with consuming
appliances, sensors of the gas warning equipment shall be provided in the
vicinity of these appliances. The sensors/sampling devices shall be installed
in such a way that gas accumulation is detected before the limit values
mentioned in point 3.1.1 are reached. Arrangement and installation of the
sensors shall be documented. The selection of the locations shall be substantiated
by the manufacturer or the specialised firm installing the equipment. The pipes
of the sampling devices should be as short as possible.
3.3.2. The sensors shall be easily
accessible in order to enable regular calibration, maintenance and safety
checks.
3.4. Requirements to be met by the
installation:
3.4.1. The whole gas warning equipment
shall be installed by a specialised firm.
3.4.2. For the installation, the
following aspects shall be taken into consideration:
              (a) local ventilation systems;
              (b) structural arrangements
(design of walls, partitions etc.) facilitating or complicating the
accumulation of gases; and
              (c) prevention of adverse
effects due to mechanical damage, water or heat damage.
3.4.3.     All pipes of the sampling
devices shall be arranged in such a way that condensate formation is not
possible.
3.4.4.     The installation shall be
effected in such a way that any unauthorised tampering is not possible.
4.           Calibration and inspection
of gas leak detectors, replacement of parts with limited service life
4.1         Gas leak detectors shall be
calibrated and inspected by an expert or a competent person as directed by the
manufacturer:
a)      before being put into service for the
first time,
b)      before being put back into service
after any major modification or repair,
c)      regularly,
A calibration and inspection certificate shall
be issued, signed by the expert or competent person and showing the date of the
inspection. 
4.2         Parts of the gas warning
equipment which have a limited service life must be duly replaced before expiry
of their specified operational life.
5.           Marking
5.1.        All appliances shall at
least show the following information in a clearly legible and indelible form:
              (a) name and address of the
manufacturer;
              (b) legal marking;
              (c) designation of series and
type;
              (d) if possible, serial number;
              (e) if required, any advice
indispensable for safe use; and
              (f) for each sensor the
indication of the calibration gas.
5.2.        Elements of the gas warning
equipment with limited restricted lifespan shall be clearly marked as such.
6.           Manufacturer’s details
relating to the gas warning equipment:
              (a) complete instructions,
drawings and diagrams concerning the safe and proper operation as well as the
installation, starting-up and maintenance of the gas warning equipment;
              (b) operating instructions
containing at least:
         (aa) measures to be taken in the case
of an alarm or error indication;
         (bb) safety measures in the case of
non-availability (e.g. calibration, inspection, interruption); and
         (cc) persons responsible for
installation and maintenance;
              (c) instructions for calibration
before the starting-up, and for routine calibration, including time intervals
to be followed;
              (d) supply voltage;
              (e) type and meaning of the
alarms and displays (e.g. special status);
              (f) information concerning the
detection of operating difficulties and the removal of faults;
              (g) type and scope of the
replacement of components with limited lifespan; and
              (h) type, scope and time
interval of the inspections.
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No 25
Electric cables
(Article 9.15 and 15.10(6) of Annex
II)
General (all vessels) — Article 9.15
1. When applying Article 9.15, Section 5,
reduced ventilation of shielded cables or cables in totally enclosed trunks has
to be taken into account.
2. In Article 9.15, Section 9 the number of
cable joints should be kept to a minimum. They may be used for repair or
replacement purposes as well as, exceptionally, for the simplification of
installation. Cable joints made in accordance with 3.28 and Annex D to IEC
60092-352:2005, or equivalent regulations recognised by one of the Member
States, will be considered acceptable.
Passenger vessels — Article 15.10(6)
1. On passenger vessels, cables and cable
routing are considered to be satisfactory if they meet the conditions in 2 and
3.
2. For cables providing power in an
emergency to equipment listed in Article 15.10, Section 4, compliance with
Article 15.10, Section 6 second paragraph will require that:
              (a) the cables are run in such a
manner as to avoid being rendered unserviceable by heating of the bulkheads and
decks that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent space;
              (b) where the cables supply
equipment located within high fire risk areas, the cable runs within such areas
must avoid routes which pass over or near the top of diesel engines and
oil-fired equipment, or near to hot surfaces e.g. diesel engine exhaust
systems. Where there is no alternative route, cables must be protected from
heat and fire damage. Such fire protection could be in the form of a steel
plate or trunk;
              (c) the cables and associated
equipment supplied from the emergency source of power should, as far as
practicable, be kept within the safe area;
              (d) cable systems are arranged
so that fire in any area bounded by Type A partitions as shown in Article
15.11, Section 2 will not interfere with services essential for safety in any
other such area. This requirement will be met if main and emergency cables do
not pass through the same area. If they pass through the same area, the requirement
will be met if:
         (aa) they are separated as wide as is
practicable; or
         (bb) the emergency cable is of the
fire resistant type.
3. Consideration should be given to the
arrangements of bunched cable runs to ensure that the flame-retardant
characteristics of the cables are not impaired. This requirement is met if the
cables are in accordance with IEC 60332-3:2000. If compliance with IEC
60332-3:2000, or equivalent regulations recognised by one of the Member States,
is not met, fire stops in long runs of bunched cables (over 6 m vertical and 14
m horizontal) should be considered, unless the cables are totally enclosed in
cable trunks. The use of unsuitable paints, trunking and casings may
significantly affect the fire propagation characteristics of cables and shall
be avoided. The use of special types of cables such as radio frequency cables
may be permitted without complying with the foregoing. 
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No. 26 
Experts
and Competent Persons
(Article 1.01 paragraphs 106 and 107 of Annex II)
Experts
Experts are required to carry out
acceptance tests which call for specialist knowledge either on account of the
complexity of the systems or on account of the safety level required. The
following persons or institutions are among those authorised to carry out such
acceptance tests: 
1.                      
Classification societies which have the
necessary in-house expertise or which bear responsibility, on the basis of
their authorisation, for calling in external persons or institutions and have
the necessary quality control systems in place in respect of the selection of
these persons or institutions;
2.                      
Members of the inspection bodies or employees of
the relevant authorities;
3.                      
Officially approved persons or institutions with
recognised expertise for the scope of inspection in the relevant subject area,
whereby the vessel inspection bodies can also issue this approval in their
capacity as public agencies, ideally on the basis of a quality assurance
system. A person or institution is also deemed to be approved if the latter has
passed an official selection procedure which specifically assesses the
possession of the required expertise and experience.
Competent persons
Competent persons are required, for
example, to conduct regular visual checks and operating checks on safety
equipment. The following may be classed as competent persons:
1.                      
Persons who, on the basis of their professional
training and experience, have sufficient expertise to be able to assess
specific situations and circumstances, e.g. ship's masters, safety officers in
shipping companies, crew members with relevant experience;
2.                      
Companies which have acquired sufficient
specialist knowledge on the basis of their regular work, e.g. shipyards or
installation firms;
3.                      
Manufacturers of special-purpose systems (e.g.
fire extinguishing systems, control equipment).
Terminology
 German || English || French || Dutch 
 Sachverständiger || expert || expert || erkend deskundige 
 Sachkundiger || competent person || spécialiste || deskundige 
 Fachfirma || competent firm || société spécialisée || deskundig bedrijf 
Acceptance tests
The table below summarises the schedule of acceptance
tests, including their frequency and the type of inspector required to conduct
them. This table is for information purposes only.
 Rule || Subject matter || Maximum test interval || Inspector 
 Article 6.03 (5) || Hydraulic cylinders, pumps and motors || 8 years || Competent firm 
 Article 6.09 (3) || Motor-driven control equipment || 3 years || Competent person 
 Article 8.01 (2) || Pressure vessels || 5 years || Expert 
 Article 10.03 (5) || Portable fire extinguishers || 2 years || Competent person 
 Article 10.03a (6) (d) || Built-in fire extinguishing systems || 2 years || Competent person or competent firm 
 Article 10.03b (9) (b) (dd) || Built-in fire extinguishing systems || 2 years || Competent person or competent firm 
 Article 10.04 (3) || Inflatable launches || As specified by the manufacturer ||   
 Article 10.05 (3) || Life jackets || As specified by the manufacturer ||   
 Article 11.12 (6) || Cranes || 10 years || Expert 
 Article 11.12 (7) || Cranes || 1 year || Competent person 
 Article 14.13 || Liquefied gas installations || 3 years || Expert 
 Article 15.09 (9) || Life-saving appliances || As specified by the manufacturer ||   
 Article 15.10 (9) || Insulating resistance, earthing || before expiry of validity of the Union inland navigation certificate ||   
 Administrative instruction no. 17 || Fire alarm systems || 2 years || Expert or competent person 
 Administrative instruction no. 21 || Safety guidance systems || 5 years || Expert or competent person 
 Administrative instruction no. 24 || Gaswarning equipment || As specified by the manufacturer || Expert or competent person 
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTION No. 27 
Recreational
craft

(Article 21.02 (2) in conjunction with Article 7.02, Article 8.05
(5), Article 8.08 (2) and Article 8.10 of Annex II)
1.           General
Recreational craft of up to 24 metres
length, that are placed on the market, have to comply with the requirements of
Directive 94/25/EC*, as amended by Directive 2003/44/EC. According to Article 3
in conjunction with Article 2 of this Directive, recreational craft having a
length of 20 metres or more shall carry a EU inland navigation certificate
attesting the craft's compliance with the technical requirements of Annex II.
Since double inspection or certification for certain equipment, arrangements
and installations of newly built recreational craft which can result from
certain provisions in Chapter 21.02 of Annex II should be avoided, this
Administrative Instruction gives information on those requirements listed in
Article 21.02 that are already sufficiently covered under Directive 94/25/EC.
2.           Requirements in Article 21.02 which are already covered
under Directive 94/25/EC
For recreational craft subject to Directive
94/25/EC the inspection body shall as regards to the issuance of the EU inland
navigation certificate (initial inspection) not require further inspection or
certification of the following requirements of Article 21.02 (2), of Annex II
provided that the craft presented for inspection has been placed on the market
no more than 3 years before the date of presentation to the inspection
body and no modifications to the craft have been carried out, and the
Declaration of Conformity refers to the following harmonised standards or their
equivalence:
–                        
Article 7.02    :           EN ISO
11591:2000,   (Unobstructed view)
–                        
Article 8.05 (5):          EN ISO
10088:2001,   (Fuel tanks and pipes)
–                        
Article 8.08 (2):          EN ISO
15083:2003,   (Bilge pumping)
–                        
Article 8.10    :           EN ISO 14509,           (Noise
emission)
(*)        OJ
L 164, 30.6.1994, p. 15.
Appendix III
Model of the Unique European Vessel Identification Number
 A || A || A || x || x || x || x || x 
 [Code of the competent authority that assigns the European vessel identification number] || [Serial Number] 
In the model, “AAA” represents the three
digit code given by the competent authority assigning the European vessel identification number
according to the following number ranges:
 001-019 || France 
 020-039 || Netherlands 
 040-059 || Germany 
 060-069 || Belgium 
 070-079 || Switzerland 
 080-099 || reserved for craft from countries that are not party to the Mannheim Convention and for which a Rhine Vessel Certificate has been issued before 1 April 2007 
 100-119 || Norway 
 120-139 || Denmark 
 140-159 || United Kingdom 
 160-169 || Iceland 
 170-179 || Ireland 
 180-189 || Portugal 
 190-199 || reserved 
 200-219 || Luxembourg 
 220-239 || Finland 
 240-259 || Poland 
 260-269 || Estonia 
 270-279 || Lithuania 
 280-289 || Latvia 
 290-299 || reserved 
 300-309 || Austria 
 310-319 || Liechtenstein 
 320-329 || Czech Republic 
 330-339 || Slovakia 
 340-349 || reserved 
 350-359 || Croatia 
 360-369 || Serbia 
 370-379 || Bosnia and Herzegovina 
 380-399 || Hungary 
 400-419 || Russian Federation 
 420-439 || Ukraine 
 440-449 || Belarus 
 450-459 || Republic of Moldova 
 460-469 || Romania 
 470-479 || Bulgaria 
 480-489 || Georgia 
 490-499 || reserved 
 500-519 || Turkey 
 520-539 || Greece 
 540-549 || Cyprus 
 550-559 || Albania 
 560-569 || former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia 
 570-579 || Slovenia 
 580-589 || Montenegro 
 590-599 || reserved 
 600-619 || Italy 
 620-639 || Spain 
 640-649 || Andorra 
 650-659 || Malta 
 660-669 || Monaco 
 670-679 || San Marino 
 680-699 || reserved 
 700-719 || Sweden 
 720-739 || Canada 
 740-759 || United States of America 
 760-769 || Israel 
 770-799 || reserved 
 800-809 || Azerbaijan 
 810-819 || Kazakhstan 
 820-829 || Kyrgyzstan 
 830-839 || Tajikistan 
 840-849 || Turkmenistan 
 850-859 || Uzbekistan 
 860-869 || Iran 
 870-999 || reserved. 
‘xxxxx’ represents the five-digit serial
number given by the competent authority.
Appendix IV
Data for the Identification of a
Vessel
A. All vessels
1. Unique European Vessel Identification
Number in accordance with Article 2.18 of this Annex (Annex V, Part 1, box 3 of
the model, and Annex VI, fifth column)
2. Name of the craft/vessel (Annex V, Part
1, box 1 of the model, and Annex VI, fourth column)
3. Type of craft as defined in Article
1.01, points 1-28, of this Annex (Annex V, Part 1, box 2 of the model)
4. Length over all as defined in Article
1.01, point 70, of this Annex (Annex V, Part 1, box 17a)
5. Breadth over all as defined in Article
1.01 point 73, of this Annex (Annex V, Part 1, box 18a)
6. Draught as defined in Article 1.01 point
76, of this Annex (Annex V, Part 1, box 19)
7. Source of data (= Union inland
navigation certificate)
8. Deadweight (Annex V, Part 1, box 21 and
Annex VI, 11th column) for cargo vessels
9. Displacement as defined in Article 1.01
point 60, of this Annex (Annex V, Part 1, box 21 and Annex VI, 11th column) for
vessels other than cargo vessels
10. Operator (owner or his representative,
Annex II, Chapter 2)
11. Issuing Authority (Annex V, Part 1, and
Annex VI)
12. Number of Union Inland Navigation
Certificate (Annex V, Part 1, and Annex VI, first column of the model)
13. Expiration date (Annex V, Part 1, box
11 of the model, and Annex VI, 17th column of the model)
14. Creator of dataset
B. Where available
1. National number
2. Type of craft in accordance with the
Technical Specification for Electronic Ship Reporting in inland navigation
3. Single or double hull in accordance with
ADN/ADNR
4. Height as defined in Article 1.01 No 75
5. Gross tonnage (for maritime vessels)
6. IMO number (for maritime vessels)
7. Call sign (for maritime vessels)
8. MMSI number
9. ATIS code
10. Type, number, issuing authority and
expiration date of other certificates
Appendix V
Engine parameter protocol
 0 || General 
 0.1 || Engine information 
 0.1.1 || Make:__________________________________________________________________________ 
 0.1.2 || Manufacturer’s description:_________________________________________________________ 
 0.1.3 || Type-approval number:____________________________________________________________ 
 0.1.4 || Engine identification number:________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
 0.2 || Documentation 
   || The engine parameters should be tested and the test results documented. The documentation should consist of separate sheets, individually numbered, signed by the controller and attached to this protocol. 
 0.3 || Test 
   || The test should be carried out on the basis of the Engine manufacturer's instructions on monitoring the components and engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas context. In duly motivated cases controllers may, at their own discretion, dispense with checks on certain engine parameters. 
 0.4 || This engine parameter protocol, including the accompanying chart readings, comes to a total of … * pages. 
 1. || Engine parameters 
   || This is to certify that the engine under test does not deviate excessively from the prescribed parameters. 
 1.1 || Installation inspection 
   || Name and address of the test facility:__________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Name of the controller:_____________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________________ 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________________ 
   || Test recognised by competent authority:_______________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________ || Seal of the competent 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________ || authority 
-----------------
*              To be filled in by the controller.
 1.2 ||  Intermediate test             Special test 
   || Name and address of the test facility:__________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Name of the controller:_____________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________________ 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________________ 
   || Test recognised by competent authority:_______________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________ || Seal of the competent 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________ || authority 
 1.2 ||  Intermediate test             Special test 
   || Name and address of the test facility:__________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Name of the controller:_____________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________________ 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________________ 
   || Test recognised by competent authority:_______________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________ || Seal of the competent 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________ || authority 
 1.2 ||  Intermediate test             Special test 
   || Name and address of the test facility:__________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Name of the controller:_____________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________________ 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________________ 
   || Test recognised by competent authority:_______________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || ______________________________________________________________________________ 
   || Place and date:___________________________________________________________ || Seal of the competent 
   || Signature:_______________________________________________________________ || authority 
 ANNEX to the ENGINE PARAMETER PROTOCOL || 
   || 
 Craft name: ||   || European Vessel Identification Number: ||   || 
   ||   || 
 || Installation inspection || || Intermediate test || || Special test || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   || 
 Manufacturer : ||   || Engine type: ||   || 
   || (Trade name/trade mark/trade name of the manufacturer) ||   || (Engine family/manufacturer’s description) || 
   || 
 Rated power (kW) ||   || Rated speed [1/min]: ||   || Number of cylinders ||   || 
   || 
 Use for which the engine is intended ||   || 
   || (Craft main propulsion/Generator propulsion/forward beam propulsion/auxiliary engine, etc.) || 
   || 
 Type approval number ||   || Year of engine construction ||   
   || 
 Engine identification number ||   || Place of installation ||   || 
   || (Serial number/unique identification number) ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   || 
 The engine and engine components of relevance in an exhaust gas context have been identified on the basis of the data plate details. The test has been carried out on the basis of the Engine manufacturer's instructions on monitoring the components and engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas context. || 
   || 
 A)  Component test Additional components of relevance in an exhaust gas context and listed in the Engine manufacturer's instructions on monitoring the components and engine parameters of relevance in an exhaust gas context should be included in the table. || 
   || Component || Component number recorded || Conformity || 
   || Camshaft/piston ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || Injection valve ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || Data set/software number ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || Injection pump ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || cylinder head ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || Exhaust-gas turbocharger ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || Charge air cooler ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  N/A || 
   || 
 B)  Visual inspection of the adjustable features and engine parameters || 
   || Parameter || Value recorded || Conformity || 
   || Injection timing, injection period ||   ||  Yes ||  No || 
   || 
 C)  Inspection of the air intake and the exhaust system || 
                 || || Measurements have been taken in order to verify compliance with the authorised values Intake under pressure:                              kPa at rated speed and full load Exhaust gas back pressure:                       Pa at rated speed and full load || 
   || || A visual inspection of the air intake and exhaust gas system has been carried out. No abnormalities were detected that would suggest non-compliance with the authorised values. || 
   || 
 D)  Comments: ||   || 
   || (The following divergent settings, modifications or changes to the installed engine were noted.) || 
   ||   || 
   ||   || 
   ||   || 
   ||   ||   || 
   || Name of the controller: ||   || 
   || Place and date: ||   || 
   || Signature: ||   || 
Appendix
VI
On-board
sewage treatment plants
- Supplementary provisions and certificate models -
Table
of contents 
Part
I
Supplementary
provisions
1.           Marking of on-board sewage
treatment plants
2.           Testing
3.           Evaluation of conformity of
production
Part II
Information document
(model)
Addendum
1 -Main characteristics of the on-board sewage treatment plant type (model)
Part
III
Type
approval certificate (model)
Addendum
1 -Test results for type approval (model)
Part
IV
Type
approvals numbering system
Part V
Summary
of type approvals for on-board sewage treatment plant types
Part
VI
Summary
of on-board sewage treatment plants manufactured (model)
Part VII
Data
sheet for on-board sewage treatment plants with type approval (model)
Part
VIII
On-board sewage treatment plant parameters record for
special test (model)
Addendum
1 -  Appendix to the on-board sewage treatment plant parameters record
Part
IX
Equivalent
type-approvals
Part
I 
Supplementary provisions
1.           Marking of on-board sewage treatment plants 
1.1         The type‑tested on-board sewage treatment plant
must bear the following information (marking):
1.1.1      manufacturer's trademark or trade name;
1.1.2      on-board sewage treatment plant type and serial number of
the plant;
1.1.3      number of the type approval in accordance with Part IV of
this Appendix;
1.1.4      year of construction of the on-board sewage treatment
plant.
1.2         The marking in accordance with point 1.1 must be
durable, clearly legible and indelible throughout the working life of the on‑board
sewage treatment plant. If adhesive labels or plates are used, they must be
affixed so as to stay on throughout the working life of the on-board sewage
treatment plant and in such a way that they cannot be removed without being
destroyed or rendered indecipherable.
1.3         The marking must be affixed to a part of the on-board
sewage treatment plant necessary for normal operation of the on-board sewage
treatment plant and not normally requiring replacement during the working life
of the on-board sewage treatment plant.
1.3.1      The marking must be affixed in such a way that it is
clearly visible after the on‑board sewage treatment plant has been fitted
with all the auxiliary equipment necessary for its operation.
1.3.2      If necessary, the on-board sewage treatment plant must
bear an additional removable plate made of a durable material which must
contain all the information in referred to in point 1.1 and which shall be
affixed in such a way that that information is clearly legible and easily
accessible after the on-board sewage treatment plant has been installed in a
craft.
1.4         All parts of the on-board sewage treatment plant which
may have an effect on the treatment of sewage must be clearly marked and
identified.
1.5         The exact location of the marking referred to in point
1.1 shall be indicated in Section I of the type approval certificate.
            
2.           Testing
The procedure
for testing an on-board sewage treatment plant is laid down in Appendix VII. 
3.           Evaluation of conformity of
production
3.1         With regard to the verification of the existence of
satisfactory arrangements and procedures for ensuring effective control of
production conformity before granting type approval, the competent authority
must accept the manufacturer's registration to harmonised standard EN ISO 9001
: 2008 (whose scope covers the production of the on-board sewage treatment
plants concerned) or an equivalent accreditation standard as satisfying the
requirements. The manufacturer must provide details of the registration and
undertake to inform the competent authority of any revisions to its validity or
scope. Appropriate production inspections shall be carried out in order to
ensure that the requirements of Article 14a.02(2) to (5) are consistently
being fulfilled. 
3.2          The holder of the type approval must:
3.2.1       ensure that procedures are in
place for the effective control of the quality of the product; 
3.2.2       have access to the testing equipment necessary for checking conformity with each type‑approved
type; 
3.2.3       ensure that the results of the
tests are recorded and that these records and the relevant documentation remain
available for a period to be agreed with the competent authority; 
3.2.4       analyse closely the results of
each type of test, in order to verify and ensure the consistency of the
on-board sewage treatment plant's characteristics, making allowance for normal
variations in series production; 
3.2.5       ensure that any samples from
on-board sewage treatment plants or test pieces revealing apparent
non-conformity in the type of test in question give rise to further sampling
and testing, all necessary measures being taken to restore conformity of
production.
3.3          The competent authority which
has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods
applied at each production works.
3.3.1       The test and production
documentation shall be made available to the tester at each test.
3.3.2       If the quality of the tests
appears unsatisfactory, the following procedure shall be applied:
3.3.2.1    one on-board sewage treatment
plant shall be taken from the series and tested by means of random sample
measurements in the normal load condition of the Appendix VII after one day
operation. The treated sewage must according to the test methods in Appendix
VII not exceed the values set out in Article 14a.02(2), Table 2;
3.3.2.2    should any on-board sewage
treatment plant taken from the series fail to satisfy the requirements laid
down in point 3.3.2.1 the manufacturer may ask for random sample measurements
to be carried out on a number of on-board sewage treatment plants of the same
specification taken from the series. This new sample must include the on-board
sewage treatment plant originally taken. The manufacturer shall determine the
scope n of the series in consultation with the competent authority. The on-board
sewage treatment plants shall undergo testing by means of random sample
measurement with the exception of the plant originally taken. The arithmetical
mean () of
the results obtained with the random sample of the on-board sewage treatment
plant must then be determined. The series production shall be regarded as
conforming with requirements if the following condition is fulfilled:
            where:
k          is a
statistical factor which is dependent on n and is given in the following
table:
 n || 2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9 || 10 
 k || 0,973 || 0,613 || 0,489 || 0,421 || 0,376 || 0,342 || 0,317 || 0,296 || 0,279 
 n || 11 || 12 || 13 || 14 || 15 || 16 || 17 || 18 || 19 
 k || 0,265 || 0,253 || 0,242 || 0,233 || 0,224 || 0,216 || 0,210 || 0,203 || 0,198 
St =    , where xi is any individual result obtained from
the random sample n;
L        is the admissible limit value set out in
Article 14a.02(2) Table 2 for each pollutant studied;
3.3.3       if the values as set out in
Article 14a.02(2), Table 2 are not complied with, a new test shall be carried
out according to point 3.3.2.1 and, in case that tests has no positive results,
in accordance with point 3.3.2.2 a full test is carried out, following the test
procedure provided in Appendix VII. The limit values as set out in Article
14a.02(2), Table 1 may not be exceeded for either the composite sample or the
random sample.
3.3.4       The competent authority must
carry out the tests on on-board sewage treatment plants which are partially or
fully functional according to the information supplied by the manufacturer.
3.3.5       The normal frequency of tests
of conformity of production which the competent authority is entitled to
conduct shall be one per year. In case of non-compliance with the requirements
of point 3.3.2 the competent authority shall ensure that all necessary steps
are taken to restore production conformity without delay.
Part II
(Model)
Information
Document No.
relating to type approval of on-board sewage treatment
plants
intended for installation in inland waterway vessels
On-board sewage
treatment plant type: ………………………………………………………………
0.            General
0.1          Make
(manufacturer’s company name): ...………………...……………………………...
0.2          Manufacturer’s
designation for the on-board sewage treatment plant type: …………...
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………….
0.3          Manufacturer’s
type code corresponding to the information given on the on-board sewage
treatment plant: ………………………………………………………………….
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
0.4          Manufacturer’s
name and address: ………………………………………………………...
              Name
and address of manufacturer’s authorised representative, if any: ………………
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
0.5          Position,
coding and method of attachment of the on-board sewage treatment plant's serial
number: …………………………………………………………………………….
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………….
0.6          Position
and method of attachment of the type approval number: ………………………
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
0.7          Address(es)
of production works: .………………………………………………………...
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
Annexes
1.            Main characteristics of the
on-board sewage treatment plant type 
2.            Design and dimensioning
criteria, dimensioning specifications and regulations applied 
3.            Schematic diagram of the
on-board treatment plant with parts list
4.            Schematic diagram of the test
plant with parts list 
5             Electrical wiring diagrams
(P/I diagram) 
6.            Statement that all
specifications regarding the mechanical, electrical and technical safety of
sewage treatment plants and specifications concerning ship safety have been
observed 
7.            Characteristics of any parts
of the vessel that are connected with the on-board sewage treatment plant 
8.            Manufacturer's guide to
checking the components and parameters of the on-board sewage treatment plant
relevant to sewage treatment in accordance with Article 14a.01(10)
9.            Photographs of the on-board
sewage treatment plant
10.          Operating concepts[71]
10.1.       Instructions for manual
operation of the on-board sewage treatment plant 
10.2.       Notes on excess sludge
management (discharge intervals)
10.3.       Notes on maintenance and repair
10.4.       Notes on action necessary in
the case of stand-by operation of the on-board sewage treatment plant
10.5.       Notes on action necessary in
the case of emergency operation of the on-board sewage treatment plant
10.6.       Notes on run‑down,
standstill and restart operation of the on-board sewage treatment plant
10.7.       Notes on requirements for
pre-treatment of galley waste water 
11.          Other appendices (list here)
              
            
Date, signature
of on-board sewage treatment plant manufacturer
            
……………………………………………        ………………………………………….
Addendum
Main characteristics of the on-board sewage treatment plant type
(Model)
            
1.           Description of the on-board
sewage treatment plant
1.1          Manufacturer:
…..………………………………………………………………………..
1.2          Serial
number of the plant: ..………………………………………………………………
1.3          Mode of treatment: biological
or mechanical/chemical [72]
1.4          Upstream waste water storage
tank? Yes, … m³ / No4 
2.           Design and dimensioning
criteria (including any special installation instructions or restrictions on
use) 
2.1          ……………………………………………………………………………………………
2.2          ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              
3.           Dimensioning of the on-board
sewage treatment plant
3.1          Maximum
daily volumetric flow rate of sewage Qd (m³/d): ..……………………………
3.2          Daily
BOD5 pollution load (kg/d): ………….…………………………………………...
Part III
Type approval certificate
(Model)
Seal of the competent authority
            
Type approval No.: ………………………………... Extension
No.: ……….…………………….
              
Notification of
issuance/extension/refusal/withdrawal[73] of type approval for an on‑board sewage
treatment plant type in accordance with this Directive 
Reason for
extension, if applicable: ………………………………………………………………...
              
Section I
              
0.            General
0.1          Make
(manufacturer’s company name): ……………………………………………….....
0.2          Manufacturer’s designation for
the on-board sewage treatment plant type:
………………………………………………………………………….…………………..
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
0.3          Manufacturer’s
type code corresponding to the information affixed to the on-board treatment
plant: .………………………………………………………………………………………..
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
              Position:
……………………………………………………………………………………….
              Method
of attachment: ….………………………………………………………………..
0.4          Manufacturer’s
name and address: …………………………………………………......
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              Name
and address of manufacturer’s authorised representative, if any:
……………………………………………………………..……………………...
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
0.5          Position,
coding and method of attachment of the serial number of the on-board sewage
treatment plant: ……………………………………………………………………………….
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
0.6          Position
and method of attachment of the type approval number: …………………...
              …………………………………………………………………………………………….
0.7          Address(es)
of production works: .………………………………………………………..
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
Section II
              
1.            Any
restrictions on use: ….………………………………………………………………
1.1          Particularities to be observed
when installing the on-board sewage treatment plant in a craft:
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
1.1.1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………
1.1.2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………
2.            Technical
service responsible for carrying out the tests[74] …………………………..…
              …………………………………………………………………………………………….
              …………………………………………………………………………………………….
3.            Date
of test report: ……………………………………………………………….………
4.            Number
of test report: ……………………………………………………………………           
5.            The undersigned hereby
certifies the accuracy of the manufacturer information in the annexed
information document for the above mentioned on-board sewage treatment plant in
accordance with Appendix VII of this Directive and the validity of the annexed
test results in relation to the on‑board sewage treatment plant type. The
sample(s) has (have) been selected by the manufacturer with the agreement of
the competent authority and submitted by the manufacturer as the design type of
the on-board sewage treatment plant:
              The type approval is
issued/extended/refused/withdrawn[75]:
              Place:…………………………………………………………………………………….
              Date: ……………………………………………………………………………………..
              Signature:
……………………………………………………………………………….
              
              
              Appendices:
              Information folder
              Test results (see Annex 1)
Annex
1
Test results for type approval
(Model)
0.            General
0.1          Make
(manufacturer’s company name): ………………………………………………......
0.2          Manufacturer’s designation for
the on-board sewage treatment plant type: …...………...
1.            Information on the
implementation of the test(s)[76]. 
1.1          Inflow values
1.1.1       Daily volumetric flow rate of
sewage Qd (m³/d): ………………………………………..
1.1.2       Daily
BOD5 pollution load (kg/d): .……………………………………………………...
1.2          Purification efficiency
1.2.1       Evaluation of outflow values
Evaluation of
outflow values BOD5 (mg/l)
 Location: || Sample type || Number of tests that meet the limit-values || Min || Max || Mean 
 Value || Phase 
 Inflow || 24h composite samples || --[77] ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow || Random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || Random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Evaluation of
outflow values COD (mg/l)
 Location: || Sample type || Number of tests that meet the limit-values || Min || Max || Mean 
 Value || Phase 
 Inflow || 24h composite samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow || Random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || Random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Evaluation of
outflow values TOC (mg/l)
 Location: || Sample type || Number of tests that meet the limit-values || Min || Max || Mean 
 Value || Phase 
 Inflow || 24h composite samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow || Random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || Random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Evaluation of
outflow values SRF (mg/l)
 Location: || Sample type || Number of tests that meet the limit-values || Min || Max || Mean 
 Value || Phase 
 Inflow || 24h composite samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow || Random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow || Random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
1.2.2       Purification efficiency (elimination
efficiency) (%)
 Parameter || Sample type || Min || Max || Mean 
 BOD5 || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 BOD5 || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
 COD || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 COD || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
 TOC || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 TOC || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
 SRF || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 SRF || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
1.3          Further parameters measured 
1.3.1       Additional inflow and outflow
parameters:
            
 Parameter || Inflow || Outflow 
 pH ||   ||   
 Conductivity ||   ||   
 Temperature of liquid phases ||   ||   
1.3.2     The
following operating parameters are – when available - to be recorded during
sampling:
            
 Concentration of dissolved oxygen in the bioreactor ||   ||   
 Dry matter content in the bioreactor ||   ||   
 Temperature in the bioreactor ||   ||   
 Ambient temperature ||   ||   
1.3.3     Further
operating parameters according to the manufacturer's operating instructions
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….................................................
1.4        Competent
authority or Technical service:
            
Place, date:……………………..………….Signature:
……………………………………………..
Part
IV
            
Type‑approvals
numbering system 
            
1.           System
            
The number shall
consist of four sections separated by the '*' character.
            
Section 1:          The small letter 'e'
followed by the distinguishing number of the State issuing the type‑approval:
            
 1 || for Germany || 18 || for Denmark 
 2 || for France || 19 || for Romania 
 3 || for Italy || 20 || for Poland 
 4 || for the Netherlands || 21 || for Portugal 
 5 || for Sweden || 23 || for Greece 
 6 || for Belgium || 24 || for Ireland 
 7 || for Hungary || 26 || for Slovenia 
 8 || for the Czech Republic || 27 || for Slovakia 
 9 || for Spain || 29 || for Estonia 
 11 || for the United Kingdom || 32 || for Latvia 
 12 || for Austria || 34 || for Bulgaria 
 13 || for Luxembourg || 36 || for Lithuania 
 14 || for Switzerland || 49 || for Cyprus 
 17 || for Finland || 50 || for Malta 
Section 2:         The indication of the requirement level. The
requirements regarding        purification efficiency are likely to be stepped
up in the future. The different  requirement levels are denoted by Roman
numerals, starting at level I.
              
Section 3:         A four-digit sequential number (with leading
zeroes as applicable) to denote       the base type-approval number. The
sequence shall start from 0001.
              
Section 4:         A two-digit sequential number (with leading zero
if applicable) to denote the      extension. The sequence shall start from 01
for each number.
            
2.         Examples
            
(a)          Third type‑approval (with as yet no extension)
issued by the Netherlands corresponding to level I:
e
4*I*0003*00
(b)          Second extension to the fourth type‑approval
issued by Germany corresponding to level II:
e
1*II* 0004*02
Part
V
            Summary of type approvals for on-board sewage treatment plant types
(Model)
Seal of the competent authority
List No.:
……………………………………….
Period from
……………………………………. to ………………………………………………………
 1 || 2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 7 
 Make(1) || Manufacturer’s designation || Type approval number || Date of type approval || Extension/ refusal/ withdrawal(2) || Reason for extension/refusal/withdrawal || Date of extension/ refusal/ withdrawal(2) 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
                1) relevant type-approval certificate
                2) specify as appropriate 
            
Part VI
(Model)
            
Summary of
on-board sewage treatment plants manufactured 
            Seal of the competent authority
List No.:
………………………………………………………………………………………………
For the period from: ………………………..……….to:
………….……………………….……….
The following
information is supplied relating to on-board sewage treatment plant types and
type approval numbers of on-board sewage treatment plants manufactured within
the above period in accordance with the provisions of this Directive:
Make (manufacturer’s
company name):
……………………………………….……..…………
Manufacturer’s designation for the on-board sewage
treatment plant type: ……….……………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Type approval number: ………………………..…………………………………………………..
            
Date of issue: ……………………………………………………………………………………...
            
Date of first issue (in
the case of extensions):
…………………………………………………...
            
Serial number of
the on-board sewage treatment plant:
 ... 001 || ... 001 || ... 001 
 ... 002 || ... 002 || ... 002 
 . || . || . 
 . || . || . 
 . || . || . 
 ..... m || ..... p || ..... q 
Part VII
            Data sheet for on-board sewage treatment plants with
type approval 
(Model)
            
Seal of the competent authority
            
   || On-board sewage treatment plant characteristics || Purification efficiency 
 No. || Date of type approval || Type approval number || Make || On-board sewage treatment plant type || Daily vol. flow rate of sewage Qd (m³/d) || Daily BOD5 pollution load (kg/d) ||   ||   || BOD5 || COD || TOC || 
 24 h composite sample || Random-sample || 24 h composite sample || Random-sample || 24 h composite sample || Random-sample || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
Part VIII
On-board sewage treatment plant parameters record for
special test
(Model)
            
1.           General
          
1.1          Particulars of the on-board
sewage treatment plant 
1.1.1       Make:
……………………………………………………………………………..…..
1.1.2       Manufacturer’s
designation: …………………………………………………………..
              ………………………………………………………………………………………..……
1.1.3       Type approval number: ………………………………………………………….………
1.1.4       Serial number of the on-board sewage treatment plant:
……………………………….
              ………………………………………………………………………………..……………
1.2          Documentation
              The on-board sewage treatment plant shall be tested
and the test results recorded on separate sheets which shall be individually
numbered, signed by the inspector and attached to this record.
1.3          Testing
              Testing shall be carried out on the basis of the
manufacturer’s guide to checking
the components and parameters of
the on-board treatment plant relevant
to sewage treatment in accordance with Article 14a.01(10). In justified individual cases inspectors
may at their own discretion dispense with checking certain plant components or
parameters.
              During the test at least one
random sample shall be taken. The results of the random sample measurement
shall be compared with the control values set out in Article 14a.02(2),
Table 2.
1.4          This test report, together with the attached records,
comprises a total of ...................[78]..pages.
2.           Parameters
              This is to certify that the on-board sewage treatment
plant tested does not diverge to an inadmissible extent from the parameters and
control values for operation specified in Article 14a.02(2), Table 2 are
not exceeded.
              Name and address of inspection body:
………………………………………………...
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              Name
of inspector: ……………………………………….………………………….…
              Place and date:
……………………...……………………………..………………….….
              Signature:
……………………………………………………….……….…………….….
              
              Test
recognised by competent authority: ………………..……………………………
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              Place and date: ………..………………………………………………………………….
              Signature:
..……………………………………………………………………………….
              
Seal of the competent authority
              
              
              Name
and address of inspection body: ………………………..……………………...
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              Name
of inspector: ………………………………………………………………………
              Place
and date: …….……………………………………………………………..…….
              Signature:
……………………………………………………………………………….
              
              Test
recognised by competent authority: …………….………………………………..
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
              Place
and date: …………………………………………………………………………...
              Signature:
………………………………………………………………………………...
            
Seal of the competent authority
            
              Name
and address of inspection body: ………………………………………………..
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              ……………………………………………………………………………………………
              Name
of inspector: …………………………………………………………………….
              Place
and date: ………………………………………………………………………...
              Signature:
……………………………………………………………………………………...
              
              Test
recognised by competent authority: ………………………………………………….
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
              ………………………………………………………………………………………………
              Place
and date: …………………………………………………………………………...
              Signature:
……………………………………………………………………………………...
            
Seal of the competent authority
Addendum I
   Appendix to the on-board sewage treatment plant parameters record (Model)   
 Name of vessel: || …………………… || Unique European Vessel Identification Number: || ……………………. 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Manufacturer: || …………………………………………. || Plant type: || ………………………………… 
   || (Make/trademark/manufacturer's trade name) ||   || (Manufacturer's designation) 
 Type approval No.: || ……………………………………….. || Year of construction of on-board sewage treatment plant: || ………………… 
 Serial number of on-board sewage treatment plant: || ……………………………………….. || Site of installation: || ………………..…………….. 
   ||  (Serial number) 
 The on-board sewage treatment plant and its treatment‑relevant components were identified from the data plate. The test was carried out on the basis of the manufacturer’s guide to checking the plant components and parameters relevant to sewage treatment. 
 (A)           Component testing Additional treatment‑relevant components which are listed in the manufacturer’s guide to checking the plant components and parameters relevant to sewage treatment or Part II Annex 4 are to be entered here. 
   || Component || Identified component number || Conformity[79] 
   ||   ||   || Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
   ||   ||   ||  Yes ||  No ||  n/a 
 (B)          Results
of random sample measurement:
 || Parameter || Value obtained || Conformity(1) || 
 || BOD5 ||   ||  Yes ||  No || 
 || COD ||   ||  Yes ||  No || 
 || TOC ||   ||  Yes ||  No || 
  (C)         Comments: ||   
   || (The following deviating settings, modifications or alterations to the installed on-board sewage treatment plant were found.) 
   ||   
   ||   
   ||   
   ||   
   ||   
   || Name of inspector: ||   
   || Place and date: ||   
   ||   || Signature: ||   
 (1) Place a cross in the appropriate box. ||   
     ||   
Part
IX
Equivalent
type-approvals
Type
approvals in Resolution 2010-II-27 of the Central Commission for the Navigation
on the Rhine of 9 December 2010
Appendix
VII
On-board sewage treatment plant 
- Test procedure -
1            General
1.1         Basics
The test specification shall be used to verify
the suitability of on-board sewage treatment plants on passenger vessels. 
In this procedure, the process and treatment
technology used shall be examined and approved by means of a test plant.
Conformity of the test plant with the treatment plants in service later is
assured by applying identical design and dimensioning criteria.
1.2.        Responsibility and test location
The test plant for a range of on-board sewage
treatment plant types shall be tested by a technical service. The test
conditions at the test site are the responsibility of the technical service and
must correspond to the conditions specified here. 
1.3         Documents to be submitted
The test shall be carried out on the basis of
the information document in accordance with Appendix VI, Part II. 
1.4         Plant dimensioning specifications 
The on-board sewage treatment plants shall be
dimensioned and designed such that the limit values specified in
Article 14a.02(2), Tables 1 and 2 in their outflow are not exceeded in the
course of their operation.
2            Measures preparatory to testing 
2.1         General
Prior to commencement of the test the
manufacturer shall supply the technical service with structural and process
specifications of the test plant, to include a complete set of drawings and
supporting calculations in accordance with Appendix VI, Part II, and shall
provide full information on the on-board sewage treatment plant’s requirements
in terms of installation, operation and maintenance. The manufacturer shall
supply the technical service with information on the mechanical, electrical and
technical safety of the on-board sewage treatment plant to be tested.
2.2         Installation and putting into service
For the purpose of the test, the manufacturer
shall install the test plant in such a way as to correspond to the intended
installation conditions on board passenger vessels. Prior to testing the
manufacturer must assemble the on-board sewage treatment plant and put it into
service. Start-up must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s operating
instructions and shall be checked by the technical service. 
2.3         Run-in phase
The manufacturer shall notify the technical
service of the nominal duration of the run-in phase up to normal operation in
weeks. The manufacturer shall specify the point where the run‑in phase is
deemed to be complete and testing may commence.
2.4         Inflow characteristics
Domestic raw sewage shall be used for testing
the test plant. The inflow characteristics as regards pollutant concentrations
shall be obtained from the on-board sewage treatment plant manufacturer’s
dimensioning documentation in accordance with Appendix VI, Part II by forming
the quotient for the flow rate of organic substances in the form of a BOD5 load
in kg/d and the design flow rate of sewage Qd in m³/d. The inflow
characteristics shall be set accordingly by the inspection body. 
Formula 1 – Calculation of the inflow characteristics
Should application of formula 1 result in a
lower average BOD5 concentration of less than
CBOD5mean = 500 mg/l, at least a mean BOD5 concentration in the
inflow water of CBOD5,min = 500 mg/l shall be set.
The technical service must not break up the
inflowing raw sewage in a comminatory. Removal of sand (e.g. by screening out)
is permissible. 
3.           Test procedure
3.1         Loading phases and hydraulic feeding
The test period shall comprise 30 test days.
The test plant shall be fed on the test field with domestic waste water in
accordance with the loading specified in Table 1. Various loading phases shall
be covered, with the test sequence taking account of normal loading phases and
special loading phases such as overload, underload and stand-by operation. The
duration of each loading phase (number of test days) is set out in
Table 1. The mean daily hydraulic load for each loading phase shall be set
in accordance with Table 1. The mean pollutant concentration, to be set in
accordance with point 2.4, shall be kept constant.
            Table 1:          Load
settings for each loading phase 
 Phase || Number of test days || Daily hydraulic load || Pollutant concentration 
 Normal load || 20 days || Qd || CBOD5 in accordance with 2.4 
 Overload || 3 days || 1,25 Qd || CBOD5 in accordance with 2.4 
 Underload || 3 days || 0.5 Qd || CBOD5 in accordance with 2.4 
 Stand-by || 4 days || Day 1 and day 2: Qd= 0 Day 3 and day 4: Qd || CBOD5 in accordance with 2.4 
The special load phases overload, underload and
stand-by operation shall be carried out consecutively without interruption; the
normal load phase shall be divided into several part phases. The test shall
start and end with a normal load phase, of at least five days' duration in each
case. 
Daily hydraulic feeding hydrographs shall be
set, depending on the specified operation of the on-board sewage treatment
plant. The daily hydraulic feeding hydrograph shall be selected in accordance
with the plant operation concept for the on-board sewage treatment plant. A
distinction shall be made according to whether the on-board treatment plant is
to be operated with or without an upstream sewage storage tank. The feeding
hydrographs (daily hydrographs) are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. 
Throughout the entire test period the hourly
inflow must remain constant. The mean hourly volumetric flow rate of sewage
Qh,mean is equivalent to 1/24 of the daily hydraulic load according to Table 1.
The inflow shall be measured continuously by the technical service. The daily
hydrograph must keep within a ±5% tolerance.
Figure 1: Daily hydrograph for feeding of on-board sewage treatment plant with
upstream sewage storage tank
Figure 2:  Daily hydrograph for feeding of on-board sewage treatment plant
without upstream sewage storage tank
3.2          Interruption
or cancellation of the test
It may be necessary to interrupt the test if
the test plant can no longer be operated properly due to power failure or the
malfunction of a subassembly. The test may be interrupted for the duration of
the repair. In such cases it is not necessary to repeat the whole of the test,
only the loading phase in which the subassembly malfunction took place.
After the test is interrupted for a second
time, the technical service shall decide whether the test may be continued or
must be cancelled. The grounds for the decision must be stated and documented
in the test report. Should the test be cancelled it must be repeated in full.
3.3          Examinations of purification
efficiency and compliance with outflow limit values 
The technical service shall take samples from
the inflow to the test plant and analyse them in order to confirm conformity
with the inflow characteristics. Sewage samples shall be taken from the outflow
of the test plant and analysed to determine the purification efficiency and
compliance with the required outflow limit values. Sampling carried out shall
include both simple random samples and 24h composite samples. In the case of
the 24h composite samples, either time‑proportional or flow‑proportional
sampling may be carried out. The type of 24h composite sample shall be
specified by the inspection body. Sampling in the inflow and outflow shall be
carried out simultaneously and to the same degree. 
In addition to the control parameters BOD5, COD
and TOC the following parameters for inflow and outflow shall be measured in
order to describe and represent the environmental and test conditions:
·              
solids removable by filtration (SRF);
·              
pH;
·              
conductivity;
·              
temperature of liquid phases. 
The number of examinations varies according to
the relevant loading phase and is set out in Table 2. The number of samplings
relates to the inflow or outflow of the test plant. 
Table 2:          Specification of the
number and timing of samplings in the inflow and outflow of the test plant 
 Loading phase || Number of test days || Number of samplings || Specification of timing of samplings 
 Normal load || 20 days || 24h composite samples: 8 Random samples: 8 || Sampling at regular intervals throughout the period 
 Overload || 3 days || 24h composite samples: 2 Random samples: 2 || Sampling at regular intervals throughout the period 
 Underload || 3 days || 24h composite samples: 2 Random samples: 2 || Sampling at regular intervals throughout the period 
 Stand-by || 4 days || 24h composite samples: 2 Random samples: 2 || 24h composite sample: Sampling after inflow switched on and 24h later. Random sample: 1 hour after inflow switched on and 24h later. 
 Total number of 24h composite samples: 14    Total number of random samples: 14 
              Where applicable, the
following operating parameters shall also be measured from the random samples
taken:
·              
concentration of dissolved oxygen in the
bioreactor
·              
dry matter content in the bioreactor;
·              
temperature in the bioreactor;
·              
ambient temperature;
·              
other operating parameters in accordance with
the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
3.4         Evaluation of examinations
In order to document the determined
purification efficiency and to check adherence to process limit values, the
minimum sample value (Min), the maximum sample value (Max) and the arithmetical
mean (Mean) shall be specified as well as the individual measurement results for
control parameters BOD5, COD and TOC. 
The loading phase shall also be given for the
maximum sample value. Evaluations shall be carried out for all loading phases
jointly. The results shall be processed as shown in the following table:
Table 3a:           Specification
for the statistical processing of data gathered – evaluation to document
compliance with outflow limit values 
 Parameter || Sampling type || Number of test that meet the limitvalues || Mean || Min || Max 
 Value || Phase 
 Inflow BOD5 || 24h composite samples || --[80] ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow BOD5 || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow BOD5 || random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow BOD5 || random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow COD || 24h composite samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow COD || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow COD || random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow COD || random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow TOC || 24h composite samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow TOC || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow TOC || random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow TOC || random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow SRF || 24h composite samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow SRF || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Inflow SRF || random samples || -- ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Outflow SRF || random samples ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Table 3b: Specification for the statistical
processing of data gathered – evaluation to document purification efficiency 
 Parameter || Sampling type || Mean || Min || Max 
 Elimination efficiency BOD5 || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency BOD5 || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency COD || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency COD || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency TOC || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency TOC || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency SRF || 24h composite samples ||   ||   ||   
 Elimination efficiency SRF || Random samples ||   ||   ||   
              The remaining parameters in
accordance with 3.3(b) to (d) and the operating parameters in accordance with
3.3 shall be summarised in a table specifying the minimum sample result (Min),
the maximum sample result (Max) and the arithmetical mean (Mean). 
3.5          Compliance with the
requirements of Chapter 14a 
              The limit values in
accordance with Article 14a.02(2) Tables 1 and 2 shall be deemed to be upheld,
when each value for the parameters COD, BOD5 and TOC:
              (a)      the mean values of
the total of 14 outflow samples, and 
              (b)      at least 10 of the
total of 14 outflow samples do not exceed the specified limit values for 24h
composite samples and random samples.
3.6          Operation and maintenance
during testing 
              Throughout the testing the
test plant shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications. Routine checks and maintenance work shall be carried out in
compliance with the manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions. The
excess sludge generated by the biological purification process may only be
removed from the on-board sewage treatment plant if this is specified by the
manufacturer in their operation and maintenance instructions. All maintenance work
carried out shall be recorded by the technical service and documented in the
test report. During the test no unauthorised persons may have access to the
test plant. 
3.7          Sample analysis / analysis
method
              The parameters to be studied
shall be analysed using approved standard procedures. The standard procedure
applied shall be specified.
4             Test report
4.1          The inspection body is
required to compile a report on the type test carried out. The report shall
include at least the following information:
(a)        details on the plant tested, such as its type,
information on the nominal daily pollutant load and the dimensioning principles
applied by the manufacturer;
(b)        information on the conformity of the on-board sewage
treatment plant tested with the documentation provided before the testing;
(c)        information on individual measurement results, as well as
on the evaluation of the plant’s purification efficiency and compliance with
the required outflow limit values;
(d)        details on the removal of excess sludge, such as the size
of the volumes removed and the frequency of removal;
information on
all operation, maintenance and repair work carried out during testing;
(e)        information on any deterioration in the quality of the
on-board sewage treatment plant occurring during testing as well as any
interruptions of testing;
(f)         information
on any problems arising during testing;
(g)        a list of responsible persons involved in the type
testing of the on-board sewage treatment plant, giving their names and job
titles;
(h)        name and address of the laboratory which carried out the
analysis of the waste water samples;
(i)         analysis methods applied.
Examples
of test sequences
            Example 1
Example 2
 DE || EN 
 Normallast || Normal load 
 Überlast || Overload 
 Unterlast || Underload 
 Stand By || Stand-by 
 Hydraulische Belastung Qd || Hydraulic load Qd 
 Tag || Day 
Notes on
determining biochemical oxygen demand after 
five days (BOD5)
in 24h composite samples
            
The International
Standards ISO 5815 and 5815-2: 2003 stipulate that in order to carry out the
analysis to determine biochemical oxygen demand after five days water samples
should be stored immediately after sampling and up to the time of analysis in a
brim-full, tightly sealed bottle at a temperature of 0–4 °C. The process
of determining BOD5 should be initiated as soon as possible or at
least within twenty-four hours of completion of sampling.
In order to
prevent biochemical degradation processes starting in the 24h composite sample,
in practice the water sample is cooled to a maximum of 4 °C while sampling
continues, and is stored at this temperature once the sampling process is
complete.
Suitable
sampling equipment is commercially available.
Appendix VIII
Radar equipment and rate-of-turn
indicators used
 on board inland waterway vessels
Contents

Definitions
Part I
Minimum requirements and
test conditions for radar installations used for navigation on board inland
waterway vessels
Part II
Minimum requirements and test conditions for
rate-of-turn indicators used on board inland waterway vessels
Part III
Requirements for
installation and performance tests for radar equipment and rate-of-turn
indicators used on board inland waterway vessels
Part IV
Installation and performance certificate for radar equipment and rate-of-turn
indicators used on board inland waterway vessels
Part V
Register of competent authorities, technical services, approved
radar navigation equipment and
rate-of-turn indicators and
approved specialised firms
Part VI
Equivalent equipment

Definitions:
1.           'Type test' means the test procedure as referred to in
Part I Article 4 or Part II Article 1.03 which the technical service uses to test for
compliance with the requirements according to this Annex. The type test forms
an integral part of the type approval;
2.           'Type approval' means the administrative procedure
according, by which a Member State confirms that equipment complies with the
requirements of this Annex.
For radar
navigation equipment this procedure includes the provisions according to
Part I, Articles 5 to 7 and 9. For rate-of-turn indicators the procedure
includes the provisions according to Part II, Articles 1.04 to 1.06 and 1.08;
3.           'Test certificate' means the document in which the type
testing results are laid down;
4.           'Applicant' or 'manufacturer' means any legal or
natural person under whose name, trademark or any other form of identification
the equipment submitted for testing is manufactured or marketed and who is
responsible for all matters as regards the type testing and type approval
procedure in respect of the technical service and the approval authority;
5.           'Technical service' means the institution, authority or
organisation that does the type testing;
6.           'Manufacturer's declaration' means the declaration by
which a manufacturer gives the assurance that the equipment meets the
prevailing minimum requirements and that is identical in every respect to the
type submitted for testing;
7.           'Declaration of conformity according to Directive
1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual
recognition of their conformity* means the declaration according to Directive
1999/5/EC Annex II Paragraph 1, by which the manufacturer confirms that the
products in question meet the applicable requirements of the Directive;
8.           'Competent authority' means the official authority that
issues the type approval.
(*)     OJ L 91,
7.4.1999. p. 10
Part I
Minimum requirements and test conditions 
for radar installations
used for navigation
on board inland waterway vessels
Table of contents
Article 1 - Scope
Article 2 - Purpose of the radar
navigation equipment
Article
3 - Minimum requirements
Article
4 - Type tests
Article 5 - Application for a type test
Article 6 - Type-approval
Article 7 - Marking of the equipment and
type approval number
Article 8 - Manufacturer's declaration
Article 9 - Modifications to
type-approved equipment
Article 1
Scope
These provisions set out the minimum
requirements for radar equipment used for navigation on board inland waterway
vessels as well as the conditions for testing conformity with these minimum
requirements. 
Article 2
Purpose of the radar navigation equipment
The radar navigation equipment shall
facilitate the navigation of the vessel by providing an intelligible radar
picture of its position in relation to buoys shorelines and navigational
structures, as well as permitting the reliable and timely recognition of other
vessels and obstructions protruding above the water surface.
Article 3
Minimum requirements
1.           With the exception of requirements on electromagnetic
compatibility (Article 3.1.b of Directive 1999/5/EC) and of requirements on the
effective use of the spectrum so as to avoid harmful interference arising from
Article 3.2 of Directive 1999/5/EC, radar navigation equipment used in inland
waterway vessels shall fulfil the requirements of European standard
EN 302194-1: 2006:
2.           Paragraph 1 applies to inland ECDIS equipment which can
be operated in navigation mode. This equipment shall additionally fulfil the
requirements of the Inland ECDIS standards in the version valid on the date of
issue of the type approval.
Article 4
Type tests
·                        
Compliance with the minimum requirements as
specified in Article 3(1) shall be established by means of a type test
·                        
If the equipment passes the type test the
testing establishment shall issue a test certificate. If the equipment fails to
meet the minimum requirements, the applicant shall be notified in writing of
the reasons for its rejection
Article 5
Application for a type test
Applications for
a type test of a radar navigation installation shall be submitted to a
technical service.
The technical services
shall be notified to the competent authorities of the Member States.
·                        
Each application shall be accompanied by the
following documents
·              
detailed technical descriptions
·              
complete set of installation and service
documents
·              
detailed operator’s manuals; 
·              
short operator’s manual; and
·              
where applicable, evidence of previously
completed tests
·                        
In case it is not intended by the applicant to
have the Declaration of Conformity pursuant to Directive 1999/5/EC established
concurrently with the type-approval, a Declaration of Conformity shall be
submitted together with the application for a type test
Article 6
Type-approval
1.                      
Type-approval shall be granted by the competent
authority pursuant to the test certificate. 
2.                      
Each competent authority or the technical
service designated by the competent authority shall be entitled to select
equipment from the production series at any time for inspection
If this
inspection reveals defects in the equipment, type-approval may be withdrawn.
The
type-approval shall be withdrawn by the authority that issued it.
Article 7
Marking of the equipment and type approval number
1.                      
Each component of the equipment shall be marked
indelibly with 
(a)     the name of the manufacturer, 
(b)     the trade designation of the
equipment, 
(c)     the type of equipment and 
(d)     the serial number
2.                      
The type-approval number assigned by the
competent authority shall be affixed indelibly to the display unit in such a
way that it remains clearly visible after the equipment has been installed
Composition of a
type-approval number: e-NN-NNN
e        =          European
Union
NN    =          number
for the country of type-approval, where
 01 || = || Germany || 18 || = || Denmark 
 02 || = || France || 19 || = || Romania 
 03 || = || Italy || 20 || = || Poland 
 04 || = || Netherlands || 21 || = || Portugal 
 05 || = || Sweden || 23 || = || Greece 
 06 || = || Belgium || 24 || = || Ireland 
 07 || = || Hungary || 26 || = || Slovenia 
 08 || = || Czech Republic || 27 || = || Slovakia 
 09 || = || Spain || 29 || = || Estonia 
 11 || = || United Kingdom || 32 || = || Latvia 
 12 || = || Austria || 34 || = || Bulgaria 
 13 || = || Luxembourg || 36 || = || Lithuania 
 14 || = || Switzerland || 49 || = || Cyprus 
 17 || = || Finland || 50 || = || Malta 
NNN =          three-digit
number, to be determined by the competent authority.
3.                      
The type-approval number shall be used only in
conjunction with the associated type-approval
It shall be the
responsibility of the applicant to produce and affix the type-approval number.
Article 8
Manufacturer's declaration
Each unit of equipment shall be accompanied
by a manufacturer's declaration.
Article 9
Modifications to type-approved equipment
1.                      
Any modification made to equipment already
approved shall cause the type-approval to be withdrawn. Whenever modifications
are planned, details shall be sent in writing to the competent technical
service.
2.                      
The competent authority shall decide following
consultation with the technical service whether the type-approval still applies
or whether an inspection or new type test is necessary
If a new type
test is granted, a new type-approval number shall be assigned.
Part II
Minimum requirements and test conditions 
for rate-of-turn indicators
used on board inland waterway vessels
Table
of contents
Chapter
1
General
Article 1.01 - Scope
Article 1.02 - Purpose of the rate-of-turn
indicator
Article 1.03 - Type test
Article 1.04 - Application for a type
test
Article 1.05 - Type-approval
Article 1.06 - Marking of the equipment
and type approval number
Article 1.07 - Manufacturer's
declaration
Article 1.08 - Modifications to type-approved
equipment
Chapter
2
General minimum requirements for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 2.01 - Construction, design
Article 2.02 - Spurious emissions and
electromagnetic compatibility
Article 2.03 - Operation
Article 2.04 - Operating instructions
Article 2.05 - Installation of the
sensor
Chapter
3
Minimum operational requirements for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 3.01 - Operational readiness of
the rate-of-turn indicator
Article 3.02 - Indication of the rate of
turn
Article 3.03 - Measuring ranges
Article 3.04 - Accuracy of the indicated
rate of turn
Article 3.05 - Sensitivity
Article 3.06 - Monitoring of operation
Article 3.07 - Insensitivity to other
normal movements of the vessel
Article 3.08 - Insensitivity to magnetic
fields
Article 3.09 - Slave indicators
Chapter
4
Minimum technical requirements for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 4.01 - Operation
Article 4.02 - Damping devices
Article 4.03 - Connection of additional
equipment
Chapter
5
Test conditions and procedures for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 5.01 - Safety, load capacity and
electromagnetic compatibility
Article 5.02 - Spurious emissions
Article 5.03
- Test procedure
Appendix:       Maximum
tolerances for indication errors of rate-of-turn indicators
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
Article 1.01
Scope
These provisions set out the minimum
requirements for rate-of-turn indicators used on board inland waterway vessels,
as well as the conditions for testing conformity with these minimum
requirements.
Article 1.02
Purpose of the rate-of-turn indicator
The rate-of-turn indicator is intended to
facilitate radar navigation, and to measure and indicate the rate of turn of
the vessel to port or starboard.
Article 1.03
Type test
1            Compliance with the minimum requirements for
rate-of-turn indicators pursuant to Chapters 2 to 4 shall be established by
means of a type test.
2.           If the equipment passes the type test the technical
service shall issue a test certificate. If the equipment fails to meet the
minimum requirements, the applicant shall be notified in writing of the reasons
for its rejection.
Article 1.04
Application for a type test
1.           Applications for a type test of a rate-of-turn
indicator shall be submitted to a technical service.
The technical
services shall be notified to the competent authorities of the Member States.
2.           Each application shall be accompanied by the following
documents:
(a)         
detailed technical descriptions;
(b)         
complete set of installation and service
documents
(c)         
operating instructions
3.           By means of tests, the applicant shall establish or
have it established that the equipment meets the minimum requirements of these
provisions.
The results of
the test and the measurement reports shall be attached to the application.
These documents
and the information obtained during testing shall be kept by the competent
authority.
Article 1.05
Type approval
1.           Type approval shall be granted by the competent
authority pursuant to the test certificate.
2.           Each competent authority or the technical service
designated by the competent authority shall be entitled to select equipment
from the production series at any time for inspection.
If this
inspection reveals defects in the equipment, type approval may be withdrawn.
The
type-approval shall be withdrawn by the authority that issued it.
Article 1.06
Marking of the equipment and type approval number
1.           Each component of the equipment shall be marked
indelibly with
(a)         
the name of the manufacturer, 
(b)         
the trade designation of the equipment, 
(c)         
the type of equipment and 
(d)         
the serial number
2.           The type-approval number assigned by the competent
authority shall be affixed indelibly to the control unit in such a way that it
remains clearly visible after the equipment has been installed.
Composition of a
type-approval number: e -NN-NNN
e        =          European
Union
NN    =          code
for the country of type-approval,
 01 || = || Germany || 18 || = || Denmark 
 02 || = || France || 19 || = || Romania 
 03 || = || Italy || 20 || = || Poland 
 04 || = || Netherlands || 21 || = || Portugal 
 05 || = || Sweden || 23 || = || Greece 
 06 || = || Belgium || 24 || = || Ireland 
 07 || = || Hungary || 26 || = || Slovenia 
 08 || = || Czech Republic || 27 || = || Slovakia 
 09 || = || Spain || 29 || = || Estonia 
 11 || = || United Kingdom || 32 || = || Latvia 
 12 || = || Austria || 34 || = || Bulgaria 
 13 || = || Luxembourg || 36 || = || Lithuania 
 14 || = || Switzerland || 49 || = || Cyprus 
 17 || = || Finland || 50 || = || Malta 
NNN    =         three-digit
number, to be determined by the competent authority.
3.           The type-approval number shall be used only in
conjunction with the associated type-approval.
It shall be the
responsibility of the applicant to produce and affix the type-approval number.
Article 1.07
Manufacturer's declaration
Each unit of equipment shall be accompanied
by a manufacturer's declaration.
Article 1.08
Modifications to type-approved equipment
1.           Any modification made to equipment already approved
shall cause the type-approval to be withdrawn.
Whenever
modifications are planned, details shall be sent in writing to the competent
technical service.
2.           The competent authority shall decide following
consultation with the technical service whether the type-approval still applies
or whether an inspection or new type test is necessary.
If a new type
test is granted, a new type approval number shall be assigned.
CHAPTER 2
GENERAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS 
FOR RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS
Article 2.01
Construction, design
1.           Rate-of-turn indicators shall be suitable for operation
on board inland waterway vessels.
2.           The construction and design of the equipment shall be
in accordance with current good engineering practice, both mechanically and
electrically.
3.           In the absence of any specific provision in Annex II or
in this Annex, the requirements and test methods contained in European Standard
EN 60945:2002 shall apply to power supply, safety, mutual interference of
ship borne equipment, compass safe distance, resistance to climatic influences,
mechanical strength, environmental influences, audible noise emission and
equipment markings. 
Additionally,
the equipment shall satisfy all requirements of this Annex at ambient
temperatures between 0 and 40 °C.
Article 2.02
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility
1.           General requirements
Rate-of-turn
indicators shall meet the requirements of Directive 2004/108/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council of 15 December 2004 on the approximation of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and
repealing Directive 89/336/EEC.
2.           Spurious emissions
In the frequency
ranges of 156 to 165 MHz, 450 to 470 MHz and 1.53 to 1.544 GHz
the field strength shall not exceed a value of 15 μV/m. These field
strengths shall apply at a test distance of 3 metres from the equipment
under test.
Article 2.03
Operation
1.           The equipment shall not have more controls than are
necessary for its correct operation.
The design,
markings and manipulation of the controls shall be such as to permit their
simple, unambiguous and fast operation. Their arrangement shall be such as to
prevent operational mistakes as far as possible.
Controls that
are not necessary for normal operation shall not be immediately accessible.
2.           All controls and indicators shall be provided with symbols
or markings in English. Symbols shall meet the requirements of European
Standard EN 60417:1998. 
All numerals and
letters shall be at least 4 mm high. If it can be demonstrated that, for
technical reasons, numerals and letters 4 mm high are not possible and if
for the purposes of operation smaller numerals and letters are acceptable, a
reduction to 3 mm shall be allowed.
3.           The equipment shall be designed in such a way that
operating mistakes cannot cause its failure.
4.           Any functions over and above the minimum requirements,
such as facilities for connection to other equipment, shall be provided in such
a way that the equipment meets the minimum requirements under all conditions.
Article 2.04
Operating instructions
A detailed operator's manual shall be
supplied with each unit. It shall be available in Dutch, English, French and
German and shall contain at least the following information:
activation and
operation;
·              
maintenance and servicing
·              
general safety instructions
Article 2.05
Installation of the sensor
The direction of installation in relation
to the keel line shall be indicated on the rate-of-turn indicator's sensor
unit. Installation instructions shall be provided to ensure maximum
insensitivity to other normal movements of the vessel.
CHAPTER 3
MINIMUM OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS
Article 3.01
Operational readiness of the rate-of-turn indicator
1.           From a cold start, the rate-of-turn indicator shall be
fully operational within 4 minutes and shall operate to within the required
accuracy tolerances.
2.           A warning signal shall indicate that the indicator is
switched on. It shall be possible to observe and operate the rate-of-turn
indicator simultaneously.
3.           Cordless remote controls shall not be permitted.
Article 3.02
Indication of the rate of turn
1.           The rate of turn shall be indicated on a linear
graduated scale having the zero point situated in the middle. It shall be
possible to read the direction and extent of the rate of turn with the
necessary accuracy. Indicators other than needle indicators and bar-graphs
shall not be permitted.
2.           The indicator scale shall be at least 20 cm long
and may be circular or rectilinear.
              Rectilinear scales may be arranged horizontally only.
3.           Solely digital indicators shall not be permitted.
Article 3.03
Measuring ranges
Rate-of-turn indicators may be provided
with one or more measuring ranges. The following measuring ranges are
recommended:
          30        °/min
          60        °/min
          90        °/min
          180      °/min
          300      °/min.
Article 3.04
Accuracy of the indicated rate of turn
The indicated rate of turn shall not differ
by more than 2 % from the measurable maximum value or by more than
10 % from the actual value; whichever is the greater (see Appendix).
Article 3.05
Sensitivity
The operating threshold shall be less than
or equal to a change in angular speed equivalent to l % of the indicated
value.
Article 3.06
Monitoring of operation
1.           If the rate-of-turn indicator does not operate within
the required accuracy range, this shall be indicated.
2.           If a gyroscope is used, any critical fall in the rate
of rotation of the gyroscope shall be signalled by an indicator. A critical
fall in the rate of rotation of the gyroscope is one which lowers accuracy by
10 %.
Article 3.07
Insensitivity to normal movements of the vessel
1.           Rolling of the vessel of up to 10° at a rate of turn of
up to 4°/s shall not give rise to measurement errors in excess of the
stipulated tolerances.
2.           Impacts such as those that may occur during berthing
shall not give rise to measurement errors in excess of the stipulated
tolerances.
Article 3.08
Insensitivity to magnetic fields
The rate-of-turn indicator shall be
insensitive to magnetic fields which typically occur on board the vessel.
Article 3.09
Slave indicators
Slave indicators shall comply with all
requirements applicable to rate-of-turn indicators.
CHAPTER 4
MINIMUM
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 
FOR RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS
Article 4.01
Operation
1.           All controls shall be so arranged that during their
operation no information is concealed from view and radar navigation remains
unimpaired.
2.           All controls and indicators shall be provided with a
dazzle-free source of lighting appropriate for all ambient lighting conditions
and adjustable down to zero by means of an independent control.
3.           Adjustment of controls shall be such that movements to
the right or upwards have a positive effect on the variable and movements to
the left or downwards a negative effect.
4.           If push-buttons are used, it shall be possible to
locate and operate them by touch. They shall also have clearly perceptible
contact release. If pushbuttons have multiple functions, it must be apparent
which hierarchical level is active.
Article 4.02
Damping devices
1.           The sensor system shall be damped for critical values.
The damping constant (63 % of the limit value) shall not exceed 0.4 s.
2.           The indicator shall be damped for critical values.
Controls for
increasing damping shall be permitted.
Under no
circumstances may the damping constant exceed 5 s.
Article 4.03
Connection of additional equipment
1.           If the rate-of-turn indicator can be connected to slave
indicators or similar equipment, the rate-of-turn indication shall remain
usable as an analogue electric signal. In addition, the rate-of-turn indicator
may possess a digital interface in accordance with (2).
The rate of turn
shall continue to be indicated with galvanic earth insulation and the
equivalent to an analogue voltage of 20 mV/°/min± 5 % and a maximum
internal resistance of 100 Ω.
Polarity shall
be positive when the vessel is turning to starboard and negative when it is
turning to port.
The operating
threshold shall not exceed 0.3°/min.
Zero error shall
not exceed 1°/min at temperatures from 0 to 40 °C.
With the
indicator switched on and the sensor not exposed to the effects of movement,
the spurious voltage at the output signal measured with a 10 Hz pass-band
low-pass filter shall not exceed 10 mV.
The rate-of-turn
signal shall be received without additional damping beyond the limits referred
to in Article 4.02 (1).
2.           A digital interface shall be designed pursuant to
European standards EN 61162-1: 2008, EN 61162-2: 1998 and EN 61162-3: 2008.
3.           An external alarm switch shall be provided. The switch
shall be installed as a galvanic insulation break-switch for the indicator.
The external
alarm shall be triggered by contact closure:
·              
if the rate-of-turn indicator is disconnected;
or
·              
if the rate-of-turn indicator is not in
operation; or
·              
if the operating control has reacted following
an excessive error (Article 3.06
CHAPTER 5
test conditions and procedures for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 5.01
Safety, load capacity and electromagnetic compatibility
Power supply, safety, mutual interference
of ship borne equipment, compass safe distance, resistance to climatic
influences, mechanical strength, environmental impact, audible noise emission
and electromagnetic compatibility shall be tested in accordance with European
Standard EN 60945:2002. 
Article 5.02
Spurious emissions
Spurious emissions shall be measured in
accordance with European Standard EN 60945:2002 in the frequency range of
30 to 2000 MHz. 
The requirements of Article 2.02 (2) shall
be met.
Article 5.03
Test procedure
1.           Rate-of-turn indicators shall be tested under nominal
and boundary conditions. In this regard, the influence of the operating voltage
and of the ambient temperature shall be tested as far as the prescribed limit
value.
In addition,
radio transmitters shall be used to set up the maximum magnetic fields in the
vicinity of the indicators.
2.           Under the conditions described in paragraph 1, indicator
errors shall remain within the tolerances indicated in the Annex. 
3.           All minimum requirements of Chapters 2 to 4 shall be
met.
Appendix
Figure 1: Maximum tolerances for
indication errors of rate-of-turn indicators
Part III
Requirements
For Installation And Performance Tests
For Radar Equipment And Rate-Of-Turn Indicators
Used On Board Inland Waterway Vessels
Table
of contents
Article 1 -
General
Article 2 -
Approved specialised firms
Article 3 -
Requirements for on-board power supply
Article 4 -
Installation of the radar antenna
Article 5 -
Installation of the display unit and the control unit
Article 6 -
Installation of the rate-of-turn indicator
Article 7 -
Installation of the position sensor
Article 8 -
Installation and performance test
Article 9 -
Installation and performance certificate
Article 1
General
1.           Installation and performance tests of radar navigation
equipment and rate-of-turn indicator systems must take place according to the
following provisions.
2.           Only equipment approved with 
a type approval
according to 
(aa) Part I
Article 6 or
(bb) Part II
Article 1.05 
or 
·              
approved with a type approval recognised as
equivalent according to Part VI
and
·              
bearing a corresponding type approval number
shall be
authorised for installation.
Article 2
Approved specialised firms
1.           The installation, replacement, repair or maintenance of
radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators shall be carried out
only by specialised firms approved by the competent authority. 
2.           Approval may be withdrawn by the competent authority.
3.           The competent authority shall immediately notify the other
competent authorities of the specialised firms which it has approved.
Article 3
Requirements for on-board power supply
All power supply leads for radar navigation
equipment and rate-of-turn indicators shall have their own separate safety
devices and if possible be fail-safe.
Article 4
Installation of the radar antenna
1.           The radar antenna shall be installed as close as
possible to the fore-and-aft-line. There shall be no obstruction in the
vicinity of the antenna causing false echoes or unwanted shadows; if necessary,
the antenna shall be mounted on the forecastle. The mounting and attachment of
the radar antenna in its operational position shall be sufficiently stable to
enable the radar navigation equipment to perform within the required accuracy
limits.
2.           After the angular error in the mounting has been
corrected and the equipment has been switched on, the difference between lubber
line and fore-and-aft-line shall not be greater than 1 °.
Article 5
Installation of the display unit and the control unit
1.           The display unit and control unit shall be installed in
the wheelhouse in such a way that the evaluation of the radar image and the
operation of the radar navigation equipment present no difficulty. The
azimuthal orientation of the radar image shall be in accordance with the normal
situation of the surroundings. Holders and adjustable
consoles shall be constructed in a way that they can be fixed in each position
free of vibration.
2.           During radar navigation, artificial lighting shall not
be reflected in the direction of the radar operator.
3.           When the control unit is not part of the display unit,
it shall be located in housing within 1 metre of the display unit. Cordless
remote controls shall not be permitted.
4.           If slave indicators are installed, they shall satisfy
the requirements which apply to navigational radar equipment.
Article 6
Installation of the rate-of-turn indicator
1.           The rate-of-turn indicator shall be located ahead of
the helmsman and within their field of vision.
2.           The sensor system shall be installed as far as possible
amidships, horizontal and aligned with the ship's fore-and aft-line. The
installation site shall as far as possible be free of vibration and be liable
only to modest temperature variations. The indicator unit shall if possible be
installed directly above the radar display.
3.           If slave indicators are installed, they shall satisfy
the requirements which apply to rate-of-turn indicators.
Article 7
Installation of the position sensor
For inland ECDIS equipment which is
operated in navigation mode, the position sensor (e.g. DGPS antenna) must
be installed in such a way as to ensure that it operates with the greatest
possible degree of accuracy and is not adversely affected by superstructures
and transmitting equipment on board ship.
Article 8
Installation and performance test
Before the equipment is switched on for the
first time after installation, or after renewals or extensions of the EU certificate
(except according to Article 2.09 (2) of Annex II), as well as after each
modification of the vessel likely to affect the operating conditions of the
equipment, an installation and performance test shall be carried out by the
competent authority or the technical service designated by the competent
authority or by a firm authorised in accordance with Article 2. For this
purpose, the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
the power supply
shall have a separate safety device;
·              
the operating voltage shall be within the
tolerance
·              
the cabling and its installation shall satisfy
the provisions of Annex II and, if applicable ADN; 
·              
the rate of antenna revolutions shall reach at
least 24 rpm
·              
there shall be no obstruction in the vicinity of
the antenna which impairs navigation
·              
the safety switch of the antenna, if provided,
shall be in good working order
·              
the arrangement of display units, rate-of-turn
indicators and control units shall be ergonomic and user-friendly
·              
the lubber line of the radar navigation equipment
shall not deviate from the ship's fore-and-aft-line by more than 1 
·              
the accuracy of the range and azimuthal displays
shall satisfy the requirements (measurements using known targets
·              
linearity in short ranges shall be correct
(pushing and pulling
·              
the displayed minimum range shall be
15 metres or less
·              
the centre of the picture shall be visible and
its diameter shall not exceed 1 mm
·              
false echoes caused by reflections and unwanted
shadows on the lubber line shall not occur or shall not impair the safety of navigation
·              
sea-clutter and rain-clutter suppressors (STC
and FTC preset) and the associated controls shall perform correctly
·              
the gain adjustment shall be in proper working
order
·              
focus and picture definition shall be correct
·              
the ship's turning direction shall be as
indicated on the rate-of-turn indicator and the zero position at dead ahead
shall be correct
·              
the radar navigation equipment shall not be
sensitive to transmissions by the ship's radio equipment or to interference
from other on-board sources
·              
the radar navigation equipment or rate-of-turn
indicator shall not interfere with other on-board equipment
Furthermore, in the case of inland ECDIS
equipment:
·              
the statistical positional error affecting the
chart shall not exceed 2 m
·              
the statistical phase angle error affecting the
chart shall not exceed 1 
Article 9
Installation and performance certificate
After successful completion of a test in
accordance with Article 8, the competent authority, the technical service
or the approved firm shall issue a certificate based on the model according to
Part IV. This certificate shall be kept permanently on board.
If the test conditions have not been met, a
list of defects shall be drawn up. Any existing certificate shall be withdrawn
or sent to the competent authority by the technical service or the approved
firm.
Part IV
(model)
Installation And Performance Certificate
For Radar Navigation Installations And Rate-Of-Turn Indicators Used On Board
Inland Waterway Vessels
Vessel name/type:         ………………………………………………………………………
European Vessel Identification Number: ……………………………………………………..
Vessel owner: ………………………………………………………………
Name:  ………………………………………………………………………………
Address:           ………………………………………………………………………………
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Radar navigation equipment                                             Number: ………………..
 Item No || Type || Manufacturer || Type-approval number || Serial number 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Rate-of-turn indicators                                                        Number:
………………..
 Item No || Type || Manufacturer || Type-approval number || Serial number 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
It is hereby certified that the radar
navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators of this vessel meet the
requirements of this Directive Annex IX Part III concerning installation and
performance tests of radar navigation systems and rate-of-turn indicators used
on board inland waterway vessels.
Approved specialised firm/ technical service/ Competent authority
(*)
Name:  ………………………………………………………………………………………
Address:           ………………………………………………………………………………………
                Stamp/Seal                                                                     Place ………………..    Date …………………….
                Signature
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
(*) Cross out what is not applicable
Part V
(model)

1.                      
Register of competent authorities for type approval
of radar
 navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators 
  
 Country || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
 Belgium ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Bulgaria ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Croatia ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Denmark ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Germany ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Estonia ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Finland ||   ||   ||   ||   
 France ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Greece ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Italy ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Ireland ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Latvia ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Lithuania ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Luxembourg ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Malta ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Netherlands ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Austria ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Poland ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Portugal ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Romania ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Sweden ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Switzerland ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Spain ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Slovakia ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Slovenia ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Czech Republic ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Hungary ||   ||   ||   ||   
 United Kingdom ||   ||   ||   ||   
 Cyprus ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no authority is given no competent authority was
specified by the relevant country.
·              
Register of approved radar navigation equipment
and rate-of-turn indicators 
 Item No || Type || Manufacturer || Holder of type-approval || Date of type-approval || Competent authority || Type-approval No 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
·              
Register of radar navigation equipment and
rate-of-turn indicators approved on the basis of equivalent type-approvals 
 Item No || Type || Manufacturer || Holder of type­approval || Date of type-approval || Competent authority || Type-approval No 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
·              
Register of specialised firms approved for the
installation or replacement of radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn
indicators 
Belgium
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Bulgaria 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Croatia
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Denmark 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Germany 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Estonia 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Finland 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
France 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Greece
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Italy 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Ireland 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Latvia 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Lithuania 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Luxembourg 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Malta 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Netherlands 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Austria 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Poland 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Portugal 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Romania
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Sweden 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Switzerland 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Spain 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Slovakia 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Slovenia
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Czech Republic 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Hungary 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
United Kingdom 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
Cyprus 
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   
If no approved firm is specified, no approval is
granted for firms in this country.
·              
Register of testing establishments specified for
the type testingof radar navigation equipment and rate-of-turn indicators
 Item No || Name || Address || Telephone number || E-mail address || State 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
Part VI
Equivalent equipment
Radar navigation equipment: Type approvals
based on Resolution 1989-II-33 of the Central Commission for the Navigation on
the Rhine of 19 May 1989 last amended by Resolution 2008-II-11 of 27. November
2008*
·              
Rate of turn indicators: Type approvals based on
Resolution 1989-II-34 of the Central Commission for the Navigation on the Rhine
of 19 May 1989 last amended by Resolution 2008-II-11 of 27 November 2008*
·              
Radar navigation equipment and Rate of turn
indicators installed and functioning conform Resolution 1989-II-35 of the
Central Commission for the Navigation on the Rhine of 19 May 1989 last amended
by Resolution 2008-II-11of 27 November 2008*
(*)        Requirements for the
installation and functioning of radar navigation equipment and rate of turn
indicators for the navigation on the Rhine.
[1]               In the case of vessels whose
home port is elsewhere, account is to be taken of Article 32 of the Ems-Dollart
Treaty of 8 April 1960 (BGBl. 1963 II, p. 602).
[2]               OJ L 59, 27.2.1998, p. 1.
[3]               Alternative type-approvals
recognised pursuant to Directive 97/68/EC are listed in Annex XII, §.2 of
Directive 97/68/EC.
[4]               Where appliances or panels do
not have this type of protection their location shall meet the conditions
applying to that type of protection.
[5]               Where appliances release
large amounts of heat: IP 12.
[6]               Where appliances or panels do
not have this type of protection their location shall meet the conditions
applying to that type of protection.
[7]               Electrical equipment of the certified safety type as
in accordance with
                (a) European
standards EN 50014: 1997; 50015: 1998; 50016: 2002; 50017: 1998; 50018: 2000;
50019: 2000 and 50020: 2002;
                or
                (b) IEC publication
60079 as of 1 October 2003. 
[8]               Where that voltage comes from
higher-voltage networks galvanic separation shall be used (safety transformer).
[9]               Where that voltage comes from
higher-voltage networks galvanic separation shall be used (safety transformer).
[10]             All of the poles of the
secondary circuit shall be insulated from the earth.
[11]             Where that voltage comes from
higher-voltage networks galvanic separation shall be used (safety transformer).
[12]             Where that voltage comes from
higher-voltage networks galvanic separation shall be used (safety transformer).
[13]             Distance from the cross-tree to
the deck.
[14]             Total length of the topmast,
without the masthead.
[15]             Diameter of the topmast at the
level of the masthead fitting.
[16]             Total length of the bowsprit.
[17]             Total length of the jib-boom.
[18]             Total length of the main boom.
[19]             Total length of the gaff.
[20]             Distance from the top or
cross-tree to the deck.
[21]             Distance from the top or
cross-tree to the deck.
[22]             OJ L 207, 23.7.1998, p. 1.
Directive as amended by Directive 98/79/EC (OJ L 331, 7.12.1998, p. 1).
[23]             OJ L 164, 30.6.1994, p. 15.
Directive as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 1882/2003.
[24]             The hold sections providing
free surfaces that are exposed to water arise from the longitudinal and/or
tranverse water-tight compartmentalisation that forms independent sections.
[25]             The hold sections providing
free surfaces that are exposed to water arise from the longitudinal and/or
tranverse water-tight compartmentalisation that forms independent sections.
[26]             1. Permanent CO2
fire-fighting systems installed before 1 October 1980 may remain in use until
the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they
comply with the requirements of Article 7.03(5) of the Rhine Vessel Inspection
Regulation in force on 1 April 1976.
                2. Permanent CO2
fire-fighting systems installed between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 may
remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1
January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03(5) of the
Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994.
                3. Recommendations of
the CCNR issued between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 with regard to
Article 7.03(5) of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31
December 1994 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community
certificate after 1 January 2035.
                4. Article
10.03b(2)(a) is only applicable until the issue or renewal of the Community
certificate after 1 January 2035 if those installations have been installed in
vessels laid down after 1 October 1992. 
[27]             1. Permanent CO2
fire-fighting systems installed between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2003 remain
authorised until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1
January 2035 if they comply with Article 10.03(5), of the Rhine Vessel
Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002.
                2. Recommendations of
the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine issued between 1 January
1995 and 31 March 2002 regarding Article 10.03(5), of the Rhine Vessel
Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002 remain valid until the
issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035.
                3. Article
10.05(2)(a), is applicable until the issue or renewal of the Community
certificate after 1 January 2035 only if those systems have been installed in
vessels laid down after 1 October 1992. 
[28]             In accordance with Annex I,
section 1A(ii) of Directive 2004/26/EC, amending Directive 97/68/EC, the limits
for these auxiliary constant-speed engines only apply from this date.
[29]             The provision applies to vessels laid down 2 years
after the date of entry into force of this Directive and to vessels in service
with the following proviso:
The requirements of Article 11.04
must be complied with where the entire hold area is renewed.
Where a conversion modifying the
clear width of the side deck covers the entire length of the side decks,
                (a) Article 11.04
must be complied with if the clear width of the side deck before the conversion
to a height of 0,90 m, or the clear width above that height is to be reduced,
                (b) the clear width
of the side deck before the conversion, to a height of 0,90 m, or the clear
width above that height must not be lower than the measurements indicated in
Article 11.04. 
[30]             In accordance with the decision
of the nautical expert.
[31]             In accordance with the decision
of the nautical expert.
[32]             In accordance with the decision
of the nautical expert.
[33]             Delete as appropriate.
[34]             Delete as appropriate.
[35]             Delete as appropriate.
[36]             Delete as appropriate.
[37]             Delete as appropriate.
[38]             Delete as appropriate.
[39]             Delete as appropriate.
[40]             Delete as appropriate.
[41]             Delete as appropriate.
[42]             Delete as appropriate.
[43]             Delete as appropriate.
[44]             Delete as appropriate.
[45]             Delete as appropriate.
[46]             Delete as appropriate.
[47]             Delete as appropriate.
[48]             Delete as appropriate.
[49]             Delete as appropriate.
[50]             Delete as appropriate.
[51]             Delete as appropriate.
[52]             Delete as appropriate.
[53]             Delete as appropriate.
[54]             Dwt = deadweight.
[55]             Dwt = deadweight.
[56]             Delete as appropriate.
[57]             Delete as appropriate.
[58]             Delete as appropriate.
[59]             Delete as appropriate.
[60]             Delete as appropriate.
[61]             Delete as appropriate.
[62]             Delete as appropriate.
[63]             The application ‘craft
propulsion with propeller characteristics’ or ‘craft propulsion at constant
speed’ should be specified in the type-approval document.
[64]             The stage II limit values laid
down in the RVIR apply with effect from 1 July 2007.
[65]             The application ‘craft
propulsion with propeller characteristics’ or ‘craft propulsion at constant
speed’ should be specified in the type-approval document.
[66]             The stage II limit values laid
down in the RVIR apply with effect from 1 July 2007.
[67]             Applies only for engines with
rated power output more than 560 kW.
[68]             The stage II limit values laid
down in the RVIR apply with effect from 1 July 2007.
[69]             Applies only for engines with
rated power output more than 560 kW.
[70]             The stage II limit values laid
down in the RVIR apply with effect from 1 July 2007.
[71]             Operating phases
The following operating phases shall
be defined for testing:
(a)           Stand-by operation is
when the on-board sewage treatment plant is running but has not been fed with
sewage for more than a day. An on-board sewage treatment plant may be in
stand-by operation when, for example, the passenger vessel is not in service
for an extended period and sits idle at its mooring. 
(b)           Emergency operation is
when individual subassemblies of an on-board sewage treatment plant have malfunctioned,
so that the sewage cannot be treated as intended.
(c)           Run‑down,
standstill and restart operation is when an on-board sewage treatment plant is
taken out of service for an extended period (winter mooring) and the power
supply is switched off, or when the on‑board sewage treatment plant is
started up again at the beginning of the season.
[72]             specify as appropriate.
[73]             specify as appropriate
[74]             In case tests are made by the competent authority mark
"not relevant"
[75]             specify as appropriate
[76]             In case of more test cycles indicate for each cycle
[77]             No limit values exist for the inflow
[78]             To include by tester
[79]             specify as appropriate.
[80]             No limit values exist for the inflow
ANNEX
to the proposal for a
DIRECTIVE OF THE EUROPEAN
PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
laying down technical requirements
for inland waterway vessels and repealing Directive 2006/87/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council 
LIST OF ANNEXES
Annex III Subjects for possible additional
technical requirements applicable to craft on inland waterways of Zones 1 and 2
Annex IV Subjects for possible reductions
of the technical requirements applicable to craft on inland waterways of Zones
3 and 4
Annex V Model Union inland navigation
certificates
Annex VI Model register of Union inland
navigation certificates
Annex VII Classification societies
ANNEX III
SUBJECTS FOR POSSIBLE ADDITIONAL
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT ON INLAND WATERWAYS OF ZONES 1 AND 2
Any additional technical requirements
adopted by a Member State under Article 5(1) of this Directive for craft operating
on Zones 1 and/or 2 of that Member State's territory are limited to the
following subjects:
              1. Definitions
–              
Necessary for understanding the additional
requirements
              2. Stability
–              
Structure reinforcement
–              
Certificate/attestation by an approved
Classification Society
              3. Safety clearance and
freeboard
–              
Freeboard
–              
Safety clearance
              4. Watertightness of hull
openings and superstructures
–              
Superstructures
–              
Doors
–              
Windows and skylights
–              
Hold hatches
–              
Other openings (ventilation pipes, exhaust
pipes, etc.)
              5. Equipment
–              
Anchors and anchor chains
–              
Navigation lights
–              
Sound signals
–              
Compass
–              
Radar
–              
Transmitting and receiving installations
–              
Life-saving equipment
–              
Availability of nautical charts
              6. Additional provisions for
passenger vessels
–              
Stability (wind strength, criteria)
–              
Life-saving equipment
–              
Freeboard
–              
Safety clearance
–              
Wheelhouse visibility
              7. Convoys and container
transport
–              
Pusher connection craft-lighter
–              
Stability of craft or lighters carrying
containers
ANNEX IV
SUBJECTS FOR POSSIBLE REDUCTIONS OF
THE TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT ON INLAND WATERWAYS OF ZONES 3
AND 4
Any reduced technical requirements allowed
by a Member State under Article 5(7) of this Directive for vessels operating
exclusively on Zone 3 or Zone 4 waterways on the territory of that Member State
are restricted to the following subjects:
Zone 3
–                        
Anchor equipment, including length of anchor
chains
–                        
(Forward) speed
–                        
Collective life-saving appliances
–                        
Two-compartment status
–                        
Wheelhouse visibility
Zone 4
–                        
Anchor equipment, including length of anchor
chains
–                        
(Forward) speed
–                        
Life-saving appliances
–                        
Two-compartment status
–                        
Wheelhouse visibility
–                        
Second independent propulsion system
ANNEX V
MODEL
Union INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATES
Part
I
MODEL
Union INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE

UNION INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE
(Reserved for State emblem)
NAME OF STATE 
CERTIFICATE No .................................................................................................................. 
Place, date ................................................................................. Inspection
Body
                                                                                                                                                     
                                                                                                                                                   
                                                                                                        (Signature)
Remarks:
The craft may be used for
navigation by virtue of this certificate only while in the condition herein
described.
In the event of major
alterations or repairs, the craft must undergo a special inspection before any
new voyage.
 The owner of a craft, or
his representative, shall bring to the notice of the competent authority any
change in the name or ownership of a craft, any re-measurement, and any change
in the registration or home port, and shall send the Union inland navigation
certificate to that authority for amendment.
Certificate No ..............  of the.................................................................... Inspection
Body
 1. || Name of craft || 2. Type of craft || 3. ’Unique European Vessel Identification Number’ 
 4. || Name and address of owner 
 5. || Place of registration and registration number || 6. Home port 
 7. || Year of construction || 8. Name and location of shipyard 
 9. || This certificate replaces Certificate No ................................................  issued on ................................  by the ...........................................Inspection Body 
  10. || The abovementioned craft, subsequent to the inspection carried out on *)  ............................................................................................................... on presentation of the certificate issued on *) ......................... by the approved classification society .......................................................................... 
   || is acknowledged as fit to operate - on EU waterways in Zone(s) (*) ..........................................................................................................................................................................................  on the waterways in Zone(s) (*)  .........................................................................................................................................................................................  in .....(Names of States(*)) ........................................... ..................................................................................................  except for:..................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................... -on the following waterways in:...(Name of the State (*)).............................................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 
   || at the maximum authorised draught and with the equipment and crew specified below. 
  11. || The validity of this certificate expires on................................... 
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No......................... 
of the .......................................................Inspection Body       
 12. || The certificate number (1), unique European vessel identification number (2), registration number (3) and measurement number (4) are affixed with the corresponding signs at the following locations on the craft 1    .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2    .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3    .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4    .................................................................................................................................................................................... 
  13. || The maximum authorised draught is indicated on each side of the craft -     by two - ......................................... - draught marks*). -     by the upper measurement plates*). Two draught scales have been applied*). The rear measurement scales serve as draught scales: they have been supplemented for that purpose by figures indicating the draughts*). 
  14. || Without prejudice to the restrictions*) mentioned in items 15 and 52, the craft is fit to 1.     push*)                                                                                  4.   be propelled in a side-by-side formation*)  1.1   in rigid formation*)                                                              5.   tow*)  1.2   with controlled articulation*)                                              5.1 craft having no motive power of their own*)  2.     be pushed*)                                                                         5.2 motorised craft*)  2.1   in rigid formation*)                                                              5.3 upstream only*)  2.2   at the head of a rigid formation*)                                         6.   be towed*)  2.3   with controlled articulation*)                                              6.1 as a motorised craft*)  3.     propel a side-by-side formation*)                                       6.2 as a craft with no motive power of its own*)  
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  .                                                                                                           (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No......................... 
of the ...............................................Inspection Body
  15. || Authorised formations 1.   The craft is authorised to propel the following formations: 
   || For-mation figure || Restrictions resulting from chapters 5 and 16 
   ||   || Max. dimensions || Navigation direction and load status || Maximum wetted ||   ||   
   ||   || m || UPSTREAM || DOWNSTREAM || section in m² || Remarks ||   
   || No || length || breadth || loaded t || empty || Loaded t || empty || upstream || downstream ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   ||    2. Couplings: Type of coupling: ……………………………….. Number of coupling cables: …………………….. Tensile strength per longitudinal coupling: ……… kN Number of cable windings: ||   Number of couplings per side: ……………………….. Length of each coupling cable: ………………………. m Tensile strength per cable: ……………………………. kN   
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No
...............................................   of the
....................................... Inspection Body 
  16. || Measurement certificate No ...........  of the .................................Measurement Office dated...................................... 
 17a. 17b. || Length overall               m Length L                       m || 18a.  Breadth overall        m 18b.  Breadth B                m || 19.Draught overall      m 19b Draught T m || 20. Freeboard               cm 
 21. || Dead weight/Displacement*)                                                  t/m3*) || 22. Number of passengers: || 23. Number of passenger berths: 
  24. || Number of watertight compartments                                                 || 25. Number of holds || 26. Type of hatch cover 
  27. || Number of main propulsion engines || 28. Total power rating of main means of propulsion                                                 kW || 29. Number of main propellers 
  30. || Number of bow windlasses || 31. Number of stern windlasses 
   || of which .............. powered || of which .............powered 
  32. || Number of towing hooks || 33. Number of towing winches of which............................... powered 
  34. || Steering gear ||   || ||   
   || Number of rudder blades on main rudder || Main rudder drive || -     manual *) -     electric *) || -     electric/hydraulic*)   -     hydraulic*) 
   || Other installations: yes/no*)   Type :   
   || Flanking rudder: yes/no*)  || Flanking rudder drive: || -     manual *) -     electric *) || -     electric/hydraulic*)   -     hydraulic*) 
   || Bow rudder installation yes/no*) || -     bow rudder*)  -     bow thruster*)  -     other installation*) || -     Remote control         yes/no*)  || Remote activation yes/no*) 
 35 || Bilge and drainage system Number of bilge pumps ………., Minimum pumping capacity ||   of which power driven ………... first bilge pump ………………. l/min second bilge pump ……………. l/min 
   || Bilge and drainage system Number of bilge pumps ………., Minimum pumping capacity ||   of which power driven ………... first bilge pump ………………. l/min second bilge pump ……………. l/min 
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      ......                                                                                                           (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No......................... 
of the ...................................................... Inspection Body       
 36. || Number and position of closures referred to in Article 8.08, sections 10 and 11 
  37. || Anchors ||   ||   ||   
   || Number of bow anchors || Total mass of bow anchors || Number of stern anchors || Total mass of stern anchors 
   || ................................... || ......................................  kg || ...................................... || ......................................  kg 
  38. || Anchor chains ||   ||   ||   
   || Number of bow anchor chains || Length of each chain   ||  Tensile strength of each chain || 
   || ................................... || ......................................  m || ......................................  kN || 
   || Number of stern anchor chains || Length of each chain   || Tensile strength of each chain || 
   || ................................... || ......................................  m || ......................................  kN || 
  39. || Mooring cables ||   ||   ||   
   || 1st cable ................... m long with a tensile strength of .................................................  kN || 
   || 2nd cable ................... m long with a tensile strength of................................................. kN || 
   || 3rd cable .....................m long with a tensile strength of................................................. kN || 
  40. || Towing cables ||   
   || ..........  with a length of ..........................  m and a tensile strength of ...........................  kN || 
   || ..........  with a length of ..........................  m and a tensile strength of............................ kN || 
  41. || Visual and audible signals The lights, flags, balls, floats and audible warning devices used for signalling and to emit the visual and audible signals prescribed by the navigational authority regulations in force in the Member States are carried on board, as are the stand-alone emergency mooring lights prescribed by the  navigational authority regulations in force in the Member States. 
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No                of
the ...................................................... Inspection Body     
 42. || Other equipment heaving line gangway   in accordance with Article 10(2)(d)                  in accordance with Article 15.06(12)                  Length …………. m gaff hook first-aid kit pair of binoculars notice concerning rescue of persons overboard fire-resistant receptacles     embarkation stairway/ladder*) ||   Voice communication system     Radio- telephone Installation   Cranes ||   - alternative two-way*) - simultaneous two-way/telephone*) - internal radio-telephone link*)   -   vessel-to-vessel service -   nautical information service -   vessel-port authority service   -   in accordance with Article 11.12(9)*) -   other cranes with a useful load not exceeding 2000 kg*) 
 43. || Fire-fighting appliances Number portable fire extinguishers ..………, fire pumps .……..., hydrants ……… Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation etc. No /Number .....*) Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms etc.     No / Number .....*)   The power driven bilge pump replaces a fire pump ……………           Yes/No*) 
 44. || Life saving appliances Number of lifebuoys ...…, of which with light ....., with line.....*) One lifejacket for every person who is regularly on board /in accordance with EN 395 : 1998, EN 396 : 1998, EN ISO 12402-3 : 2006 or EN ISO 12402-4 : 2006*) A ship's boat with a set of oars, one mooring line and a baler / in accordance with EN 1914 : 1997*) Platform or an installation in accordance with Article 15.15(5) or (6)*) Number, type and site(s) of installation of the equipment to enable persons to be transferred safely to shallow water, to the bank or to another craft in accordance with Article 15.09(3)....................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Number of individual life saving appliances for shipboard personnel........... , of which in accordance with Article 10.05(2) …………………………...... *) Number of individual life saving appliances for passengers ……………......*) Collective life saving appliances, with respect to the number, equivalent to…..... individual life saving appliances*) Two breathing apparatus sets, two sets in accordance with Article 15.12(10)(b), number of ……….. smoke hoods*) Safety rota and safety plan displayed at:..................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 
  45. || Special wheelhouse arrangements for radar navigation by one person: The vessel has a wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person*) 
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No.........................  of
the ...................................................... Inspection Body       
  46. || Operating modes meeting the requirements of national or international law concerning the crew **) 
 47. || Vessel equipment in accordance with Article 23.09 The vessel (complies)*)/(does not comply)*) with Article 23.09, section 1.1*)/(Article 23.09, section 1.2*)   
   || Space for entering the minimum crew meeting the requirements of national or international law**) || Space for entering the operating modes according to item 46. ||     
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   ||   
  48. || Space for entering the minimum crew for vessels that are not covered by general minimum crew prescriptions in national or international requirements**)   
   ||   || Space for entering the operating modes**) ||     
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || .......................................................................................... || ........................ || ........................ || ........................ ||   
   || Observations and special conditions: ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................   
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (Signature) _______________________ *)   Delete as appropriate **) Requirements of national or international law which a Member State may choose to apply, or have no requirements 
Certificate No......................... 
of the ...................................................... Inspection Body       
 49. || Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*)     Periodical/special*) inspection The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on ...................................... *). A certificate dated .................................................  from the ..................................approved classification society ........................................................................................................................................................................................... was presented to the Inspection Body*). Reason for the inspection/certificate*): ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................    In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity of the certificate is maintained/extended*)  until ........................................  . ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                              ______________________                                                                                 (Signature) *)                                                                                                                         Delete as appropriate || 
 49. ||  Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*)     Periodical/special*) inspection The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on ...................................... *). A certificate dated .................................................  from the ..................................approved classification society ........................................................................................................................................................................................... was presented to the Inspection Body*). Reason for the inspection/certificate*): ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................    In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity of the certificate is maintained/extended*)  until ........................................  . ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                 ______________________                                                                                    (Signature) *)           Delete as appropriate ||   
  49. || Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*)     Periodical/special*) inspection The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on ...................................... *). A certificate dated .................................................  from the ..................................approved classification society ........................................................................................................................................................................................... was presented to the Inspection Body*). Reason for the inspection/certificate*): ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................    In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity of the certificate is maintained/extended*)  until ........................................  . ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                              ______________________                                                                                    (Signature) *)                                                                                                                         Delete as appropriate || 
Certificate No.........................  of
the ...................................................... Inspection Body       
 49. || Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*)     Periodical/special*) inspection The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on ...................................... *). A certificate dated .................................................  from the ..................................approved classification society ........................................................................................................................................................................................... was presented to the Inspection Body*). Reason for the inspection/certificate*): ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................    In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity of the certificate is maintained/extended*)  until ........................................  . ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                              ______________________                                                                                    (Signature) *)                                                                                                                         Delete as appropriate............................. 
  49. || Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*)     Periodical/special*) inspection The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on ...................................... *). A certificate dated .................................................  from the ..................................approved classification society ........................................................................................................................................................................................... was presented to the Inspection Body*). Reason for the inspection/certificate*): ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................    In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity of the certificate is maintained/extended*)  until ........................................  . ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                              ______________________                                                                                    (Signature) *)                                                                                                                         Delete as appropriate 
  49. || Extension/confirmation*) of certificate validity*)     Periodical/special*) inspection The Inspection Body inspected the vessel on ...................................... *). A certificate dated .................................................  from the ..................................approved classification society ........................................................................................................................................................................................... was presented to the Inspection Body*). Reason for the inspection/certificate*): ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................    In view of the inspection result/certificate*), the period of validity of the certificate is maintained/extended*)  until ........................................  . ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                              ______________________                                                                                    (Signature) *)                                                                                                                         Delete as appropriate 
Certificate
No.........................  of the
...................................................... Inspection Body       
  50. || Attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) The liquefied gas installation(s) on board the craft has/have been inspected by the authorised officer*) ....................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... and according to his acceptance report dated ....................................... *) fulfil(s) the conditions laid down. The plant(s) include(s) the following gas-consuming appliances:   
   || Plant || Serial No || Model || Make || Type || Position ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   || 
   ||   This attestation is valid until ............................................................................................................................................   ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (Date) …………………………………                      ................................................................................................................ Authorised officer*)                                                                                            Inspection Body ..............................................................................................................................................................                                                                                                                  (Signature) 
 *)   *) || Amendment to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
Certificate No......................... 
of the ...................................................... Inspection Body       
 51. || Extension of the attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) The period covered by the attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) dated.......................................................................................... is extended until ........................................................... -  following the periodical inspection by the authorised officer ...................................................................................... -  on presentation of the acceptance report dated ................................   ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (Date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            (Signature)   
  51. || Extension of the attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) The period covered by the attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) dated.......................................................................................... is extended until ........................................................... -  following the periodical inspection by the authorised officer ...................................................................................... -  on presentation of the acceptance report dated ................................   ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (Date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            (Signature)   
  51. || Extension of the attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) The period covered by the attestation relating to liquefied gas installation(s) dated.......................................................................................... is extended until ........................................................... -  following the periodical inspection by the authorised officer ...................................................................................... -  on presentation of the acceptance report dated ................................   ...................................................................................... , ............................................... (Place)                                                                                        (Date)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            (Signature)   
Certificate No......................... 
of the ...................................................... Inspection Body       
  52. || Annex to certificate No .................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 
 *)   *) || Amendment(s) to item(s): .................... New text: .......................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... This page has been replaced. Place, date ................................................................................................................ Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           (Signature) _______________________ *)  Delete as appropriate 
   ||                                                                                                                                    Continued on page*) .....................                                                                                                                                    End of Union inland navigation  certificate*) 
______________________
Part II
MODEL
SUPPLEMENTARY UNION INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE 
 Annex to inspection certificate for the Rhine No ……………………….                                               Page 1 
 SUPPLEMENTARY Union INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE (Reserved for State emblem) NAME OF STATE Name and address of the competent authority issuing the supplementary certificate 1.          Name of vessel ……………...………………………………………………………………………. 2.          Unique European Vessel Identification Number’……………………………………..…………….…… 3.          Place of registration and registration number …………………….…………….….…………….…. 4.          Country of registration and/or home port (1) …………..……………..……………….……….…… 5.          Having regard to the inspection certificate for the Rhine No …………….……….…………………              dated …………….………………….. valid until …………………..…………….………………… 6.          Having regard to the result of the inspection: ………………………………………………….…… ……………………………………………. on ……………….…….………………………………. 7.          the abovementioned vessel is deemed fit to operate on the EU waterways of Zone(s) ……              ……..………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8.          This supplementary certificate expires on ………………..…………………………………………. 9.          Issued in …………………………………………. on ………………………………………………. 10.                                                                                                                                     …………………………………….                                                                                                              (Competent authority)                                                                                                                                     …………………………………….                                                                                                                     (Signature)   _________________ (1) Delete where inapplicable. 
 Page 2                              Annex to inspection certificate for the Rhine No ………………………………… 
 11. ||   || Zone and / or waterways (1) 
 4 || 3 || 2 || 1 ||   
 Freeboard (cm) || with hold closed ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 with hold open ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
 12.    Derogations from inspection certificate for the Rhine No ………………………………………………          ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………          ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………          ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………          ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………          ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………          …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13.    The entries concerning the number of crew members in the inspection certificate for the Rhine do not apply. 14.    Having regard to inspection certificate for the Rhine No ……………………………….………………          dated ………….……………………….. valid until ……………………………………………………          Having regard to the result of the inspection ……………………………………………………………          …………………………………………………. on ……………………………………………………          This supplementary certificate is extended/renewed (1) until ……………………………….……..……          ………………………………………………..       …………………………………………………                      (Place)                                                   (Date)                                                                                                                                       …………………………………….                                                                                                              (Competent authority)                                                                                                                                     …………………………………….                                                                                                                     (Signature) _________________ (1) Delete where inapplicable. 
                                                
Part III
MODEL PROVISIONAL
UNION
INLAND NAVIGATION
CERTIFICATE
Provisional Union inland navigation certificate*) / Provisional certificate
of approval*)
No
.................
   || 1. ||  Name of craft || 2. Type of craft || 3. Unique European Vessel Identification Number’ 
   || 4. ||  Name and domicile of owner 
   || 5. ||  Length L/ LWL*).................................     Number of passengers......................  Number of berths*) ............................ 
   || 6. ||  Space for information about the crew .......................................................................................................................   
   ||  6.1. || Operating modes meeting the requirements of national or international law**. 
 ||  6.2. || Vessel equipment in accordance with Article 23.09 The vessel (complies)*)/(does not comply)*) with Article 23.09, section 1.1*)/(Article 23.09, section 1.2*)   
   ||   || Space for entering the minimum crew meeting the requirements of national or international law**) || Space for entering the operating modes according to 6.1 || 
   ||   ||   ||                 ||   ||   ||   
   ||   || ...................................................................................... || ....................... || ....................... || ....................... ||   
   ||   || ...................................................................................... || ....................... || ....................... || ....................... ||   
   ||   ||   ||   
   || 6.3. || Space for entering the minimum crew for vessels that are not covered by general minimum crew prescriptions in national or international requirements **)...................................................................................................................................... 
   ||  7. || Liquefied gas installation(s) Attestation valid until .............................................................. 
   ||  8. || Special conditions 
   ||  9. || Carriage of dangerous goods, see separate box*) 
   ||  10. || Validity Provisional certificate*)/provisional certificate of approval*) valid until ........................................................... for navigation*)/for a single voyage*).                                                                        (Date)    The abovementioned craft is acknowledged as fit to operate  - on EU waterways in Zone(s)*).................................... .....................................................................   on the waterways in Zone(s)*) .................................................................................................................................   in (Names of States*)) .........................................................................................................................................   except for:.................................................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................................................................................................................................  - on the following waterways in (Name of State*))................................................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 
   ||  11. || ................................................ , ...................................                   Place                            Date   ......................................................................................  Competent authority for provisional certificate of approval                                                                                                                                                    Signature   || ................................................ , ...................................                   Place                            Date   ......................................................................................              Inspection Body                                                                                                                                                            Signature 
   ||   ||   _______________________ *)    Delete as appropriate **)  Requirements of national or international law which a Member State may choose to apply,         or have no requirements   
      9.    Carriage of dangerous goods   (Indicate whether the vessel meets the requirements of national and international law, if any.)                                     
                                    
10   
ANNEX VI
MODEL REGISTER OF UNION INLAND
NAVIGATION CERTIFICATES
Competent
authority/Inspection body                                       
Register
of Union inland navigation certificates
Year
                    
(Left-hand page)
 Union inland navigation certificate || Name of vessel || Unique European Vessel Identification Number’ || Owner || Vessel register || Type of vessel 
 No || Day || Month ||   ||   || Name || Address || Place || No ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
(Right-hand page)
 Deadweight according to tonnage certificate or displacement*) || Zones or stretch of inland waterway, where appropriate || Endorsements concerning supplementary or special inspections, withdrawal and annulment of the certificate || Union inland navigation certificate valid until || Other comments 
 Date of tonnage certificate || Tonnage mark || t/m3 || from || to ||   ||   
   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   ||   
*)   If no tonnage certificate is available, estimate the
deadweight or displacement.
                                    
ANNEX VII
CLASSIFICATION SOCIETIES
Criteria for the approval of classification societies
Classification societies seeking approval
pursuant toArticle 10 of this Directive shall meet all the following criteria:
              1. the classification society
shall be able to document extensive experience in assessing the design and
construction of inland waterway vessels. The classification society shall have
comprehensive rules and regulations for the design, construction and periodic
inspection of inland waterway vessels, in particular for calculating stability
in accordance with Part 9 of the Regulations annexed to the European Agreement
concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland Waterways
(ADN) as referred to in Article 22a.04 and Article 22a.05 of Annex II and which
will be published at least in Dutch, English, French or German and shall be
continuously updated and improved through research and development programmes.
The rules and regulations must not conflict with the provisions of EU law or
with international agreements in force;
              2. the classification society
shall publish its register of vessels annually;
              3. the classification society
shall not be controlled by shipowners or shipbuilders or by others engaged
commercially in the design, manufacture, fitting-out, repair, operation or
insurance of ships. The classification society shall not be dependent on a single
commercial enterprise for its revenue;
              4. the headquarters of the
classification society or a branch authorised to give a ruling and to act in
all areas incumbent on it under the regulations governing inland waterway
transport shall be located in one of the Member States;
              5. the classification society
and its experts shall have a good reputation in inland waterway transport; the
experts shall be able to provide proof of their professional abilities. They
shall act on the responsibility of the classification society;
              6. the classification society
shall have a significant technical, managerial, support, inspection and
research staff, in proportion to the tasks and the vessels classified and
catering also for developing capability and updating the regulations. It shall
have inspectors in at least one Member State;
              7. the classification society
shall be governed by a code of ethics;
              8. the classification society
shall be managed and administered in such a way as to ensure the
confidentiality of information required by a Member State;
              9. the classification society
shall be prepared to provide relevant information to a Member State;
              10. the classification society's
management shall have defined and documented its policy and objectives for, and
commitment to, quality and ensured that this policy is understood, implemented
and maintained at all levels in the classification society;
              11. the classification society
shall have prepared and implemented and shall maintain an effective internal
quality system based on the relevant parts of internationally recognised
quality standards and complying with the EN ISO/IEC 17020 : 2004, as
interpreted by the IACS Quality System Certification Scheme Requirements. The
quality system must be certified by an independent body of auditors recognised
by the administration of the State in which the classification society has its
headquarters or branch, as provided for in subparagraph 4, and which, inter
alia, ensures that:
         (a) the classification society's
rules and regulations are established and maintained in a systematic manner;
         (b) the classification society's
rules and regulations are complied with;
         (c) the requirements of the statutory
work for which the classification society is authorised are satisfied;
         (d) the responsibilities, powers and
interrelation of personnel whose work affects the quality of the classification
society's services are defined and documented;
         (e) all work is carried out under
controlled conditions;
         (f) a supervisory system is in place
which monitors the actions and work carried out by surveyors and technical and
administrative staff employed directly by the classification society;
         (g) the requirements of major
statutory work for which the classification society is authorised are only
carried out or directly supervised by its exclusive surveyors or by exclusive
surveyors of other approved classification societies;
         (h) a system for qualification of
surveyors and continuous updating of their knowledge is implemented;
         (i) records are maintained, demonstrating
achievement of the required standards in the items covered by the services
performed, as well as the effective operation of the quality system; and
         (j) a comprehensive system of planned
and documented internal audits of quality-related activities exists in all
locations.
              12. the quality system must be
certified by an independent body of auditors recognised by the administration
of the State in which the classification society has its headquarters or
branch, as provided for in paragraph 4;
              13. the classification society
shall undertake to bring its requirements into line with the appropriate
European Union directives and to provide the Commission with all relevant
information in good time;
              14. the classification society
shall undertake periodically to consult with the classification societies
already approved in order to guarantee the equivalence of their technical
standards and of implementation thereof, and should allow participation in the
development of its rules and regulations by representatives of a Member State
and other parties concerned.